Calypso C M M Guide

CALYPSO
Metrology Software
User’s Guide
This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized
and disseminated, without our express written permission. Persons
misusing this manual are subject to prosecution.
All rights reserved, especially in cases of granting a patent or
registering a design.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Carl Zeiss makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual,
including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose.
Carl Zeiss shall not be liable for errors contained herein or direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages in connection
with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies or organizations.
Carl Zeiss CALYPSO User’s Guide

Industrial Metrology Division Revision: 3.5
D-73446 Oberkochen Date: 04/02
Germany Order number: 61212-2010102
Preface
The Calypso User’s Guide is designed for users who want to learn to
use Calypso or have a task to complete and want to find out how to
accomplish it in Calypso. This Guide contains examples and step-by-
step instructions. Consequently, it enables new and experienced users
to find the information they need.
The reference information on windows and dialog boxes is in the
Calypso dialog reference in Online Help.
Overview of Topics
Included in this User’s Guide:
– ➤ Chapter 1 „Introduction“ on page 1-1
Hints for working with Windows NT, and provides background
information illustrating Calypso’s basic procedures and general
concepts.
– ➤ Chapter 2 „The Dynalog Control Panel“ on page 2-1
Describes how to operate Calypso using the Dynalog control
panel.
– ➤ Chapter 3 „Working with the CAD Window“ on page 3-1
Describes the possibilities of the CAD window and how to use
them. You also get information on how to work with CAD data.
– ➤ Chapter 4 „Preparing the Measurement Plan“ on page 4-1
Describes how to open a measurement plan and the prerequisites
necessary before you can run a measurement plan automatically.
– ➤ Chapter 5 „Defining Features“ on page 5-1
Describes the definition of the measurement features (e.g. a plane
or cylinder), explains how to create a measurement strategy and
how to work with scanning.
– ➤ Chapter 6 „Defining Characteristics“ on page 6-1
Describes the principles of the fitting methods that Calypso uses
and shows how to define characteristics.
– ➤ Chapter 7 „Editing the Measurement Plan“ on page 7-1
Explains how to manage a test measurement plan, work with the
toolbox options, customize presentation protocols and work with
the routes of the CMM. Additionally, this chapter describes the use
of the probe changer and audiovisual user information.
– ➤ Chapter 8 „Running a Measurement Plan“ on page 8-1
Describes how to start CNC runs and how to work with the
measurement results.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Preface

– ➤ Chapter 9 „Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement
Results“ on page 9-1
Describes which types of protocols are available and how to work
with them. It also describes how to save the measurement results
as files of different formats.
– ➤ Chapter 10 „The Duplex Mode“ on page 10-1
Contains the instructions for preparing, performing and evaluating
measurements with dual horizontal-arm CMMs.
– ➤ Chapter 11 „Managing Calypso“ on page 11-1
Shows how to install Calypso, how to view and modify all of
Calypso’s system settings.
– ➤ Chapter 12 „The Auto-Run Interface“ on page 12-1
Explains how the system administrator sets up an Auto-Run
interface and how users work with Auto-Run.
– ➤ Chapter 13 „DMIS Import (Option)“ on page 13-1
Explains the basics and the procedure for importing DMIS-
programmed measurements into Calypso.
– ➤ Chapter 14 „Parameter-coded Measurements (Option)“ on page
14-1
Explains the basics of the PCM programming language. It also
provides directions for and examples of using PCM with Calypso,
with formulas, input and output parameters, conditions and loops.
– ➤ Chapter 15 „Curve Measurement (Option)“ on page 15-1
Contains the basics of curve measuring, how to set up curve
features and characteristics, and how to operate on the results.
– ➤ Chapter 16 „Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option)“ on page
16-1
Describes how to calibrate an RDS on a system with the RDS-CAA
option (Computer Aided Accuracy). A small number of physical
probings is all that is needed to calibrate all 20 736 possible
angular positions of an RDS.
Recommended Reading
Simply Measure – And what you should know to do it right,
A metrology primer
Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division, Germany
Order No.: 612302-9102
Preface 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Zeiss Training Block
You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology
Division, D-73446 Oberkochen, Germany.
Order No.: 600331-8052-000
Notational Conventions
This User's Guide uses the following conventions:
Example Description
Features Textual element of graphical user interface.
Comment The Comment button on the screen.
C:\windows\w.ini The file w.ini in the directory windows on
drive C:\.
Guide your actions... A passage containing important information.
➤„Welcome to Cross-reference. If the book is displayed
Calypso“ on page 1-2 online, you can click on the cross-reference to
follow the link.
CNC → Run → CNC The CNC Run item in the Run submenu of
Run the CNC menu.
Ctrl-a Press and hold down the Ctrl key and press
lowercase letter a.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Preface

Symbols
This User's Guide uses three types of symbols for providing important
information. These symbols appear on the left-hand side of the page;
the appropriate text is directly next to the symbol.
Warning
hss
! Special care is necessary. This symbol calls attention to a procedure,
practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in personal injury or loss of life.
Do not proceed beyond a Warning symbol until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
Caution
hss
! This symbol calls attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which,
if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or
destruction of some or all equipment, invalid measurement results, or
loss of data.
NOTE The NOTE symbol calls attention to important and useful additional
hss information.
Preface 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Welcome to Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
How to Start Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
The Calypso User Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso . . . 1-9
Chapter 2 The Dynalog Control Panel

The Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Operating Calypso via Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

How to Use the Touchpad of the Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . 2-5
Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
The Function Keys of the Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Example: The Sequence of Operation with the
Dynalog Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Chapter 3 Working with the CAD Window

Basics about the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
The Buttons in the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chapter 4 Preparing the Measurement Plan

Measurement Plan Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
How to Create a New Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to Open an Existing Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
The List of Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Contents 1

Homing the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
How to Establish the Connection to the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
How to Move the CMM to the Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Installing and Qualifying Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

How to Install a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Preparing Probes and Styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Qualifying Styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Determining the Reference Sphere Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
How to Print the Probe Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Setting the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Part Alignment Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
How to Load an Existing Base Alignment/Start Alignment . . . . . . 4-33
How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
How to Update a Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Example: How to adapt a base alignment
in an iterative process with abortion condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
How to Edit an Existing Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Moving or Rotating the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Rotate Reference Axis by Secondary Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
How to Delete a Base Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
How to set a base alignment to zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Alternative Alignment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Prerequisites for the Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Determining the RT Axis and RT Prealignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
RT Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
How to Control the Rotary Table Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Measuring Features with Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table coupling . . . . . . 4-70
Defining the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

How to Define the Clearance Planes with the CMM . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
How to Define the Clearance Planes Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
How to Define the Clearance Planes by Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
How to Generate the Clearance Planes Automatically . . . . . . . . . 4-75
How to Test the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Contents 2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Close Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

How to Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

How to Activate Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
How to Determine the Temperatures by Manual Probing . . . . . . 4-84
How to Automatically Configure the
Temperature Probing (CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
How to Enter Temperatures Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Chapter 5 Defining Features

Defining Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
The Definition Template for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Define a Feature Using Definition Templates . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition . . . 5-5
Importing Features from CAD Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
How to Import Features from the CAD Model to the
Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Copying Properties of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Color-Coding of Features Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Tips and Tricks for Defining Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Details on Specific Part Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

The Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
The Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
The Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
The 2-D Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
The 3-D Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
The Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
The Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
The Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
The Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
The 3D Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
The Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

The Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
The Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
The Offset Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
The Symmetry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
The Radius Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
The Sphere Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
The Angle Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
The General Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
The General Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Linking Features in Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

How to Define Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Defining Features by Recalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
The Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
The Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
The Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
The Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Average-Feature Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
The Edge Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Cone Addition Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
The Maximum Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
The Minimum Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
The Maximum Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
The Minimum Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
The Plane with Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Defining a Measurement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

How to Use the Shortcut Menu of the Strategy List . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
The Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Alternative Probing Methods (Self-Centering Probing) . . . . . . . . 5-65
Path Generation – Automatically Measuring Features . . 5-68

How to Add a Path Generation Method to the Strategy List . . . . 5-69
General Settings for the Path Generation Method . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Features you can Measure with Path Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Chapter 6 Defining Characteristics
Basics about Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Calculation of Geometric Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

The Fit Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defining Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

How to Insert Characteristics into the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . 6-7
The Characteristic Definition Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
The Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Connecting a Characteristic to a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
How to Assign Characteristics to Certain Features . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
How to Define Nominals and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Defining Custom Tolerance Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Filtration and Outliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
How to Set and Activate a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
How to Eliminate Outliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Copying Properties of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
About the Color-Coding of Characteristics Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Details on Specific Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Basics About GDT Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
How to Check Wall Thickness and Wall Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Basics about Best Fit of Bore Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Chapter 7 Editing the Measurement Plan

Managing Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
How to Save a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
How to Rename a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
How to Copy a Measurement Plan to a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
How to Delete a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Combining Several Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
The Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Creating and Using Custom Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
How to Work with a Custom Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Deleting a Custom Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Sizing and Moving Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Editing a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Example: Checking and Changing the
Operating Mode in the Settings Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Editing the Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

About Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Clearance Planes/Clearance Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Checking the Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Editing Routes between Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Editing Routes within a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Using the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Renishaw MCR20 Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
SCR200 Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Probe Changer for RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Defining the RDS Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Setting up the Initial Probe Changer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Defining the Master Probe Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Adding Holders to the Probe Changer Configuration . . . . . . . . . 7-40
The Approach Parameters for the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
How to Define the Position of a Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
How to Define the Holder Positions of an MCR20 . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
How to Define the Holder Positions of an SCR200 . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
How to Assign a Probe to a Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
How to Perform an Automatic Probe Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
How to Perform a Semiautomatic Probe Change . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
How to Change the Probe Assigned to a Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Multimedia User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

How to Add User Information to a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . 7-51
How to View User Information for a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . 7-52

Chapter 8 Running a Measurement Plan
Defining the Scope of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Entering Printout Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Starting a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

How to Start a CNC Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
How to Start a Manual Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Reaction Following a Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 9 Viewing, Presenting and Editing

Measurement Results
Result Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
How to View the Default Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
How to View the Compact Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
How to View the Custom Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
How to Print the Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Set up Custom Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

The Structure of a Custom Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
How to Define the Output of the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Designing Custom Printouts with the Header Editor . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
How to Display Variations Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

How to Activate a Form Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
About the Form Plot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Saving Measurement Results to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

How to Save the Measurement Results as Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Copying the Measurement Results File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT . . . . . . . . 9-32

How to save Calypso Measurement Results in QDAS Format . . . 9-34
Controlling the Conversion with QDASCONV.CON . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Chapter 10 The Duplex Mode
Duplex Operation with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Preparing the Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Files for Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Establishing the Connection and
Coupling the Measuring Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Using Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Measuring with a Dual Arm CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Chapter 11 Managing Calypso

Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

How to Decompress the Service Pack Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
How to Install the Program Files Contained in the Service Pack . . 11-7
If a Software Error Occurs – the Error Report . . . . . . . . . 11-8

How to Use the Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Settings You Can View or Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Chapter 12 The Auto-Run Interface

Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Important Auto-Run Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
The Layout of the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Basics about Measurement Plan Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Basics about Desks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Basics about Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Basics about Pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Auto-Run for System Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Configuring Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Mapping the Measuring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
How to Create Branches between Desks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

Mapping a Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Defining Measuring Runs for a Pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Preparing for Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Administrating Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Auto-Run for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23

Your User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Preparing a Measurement Start for Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Monitoring Measuring Runs in Auto-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Chapter 13 DMIS Import (Option)

Basics about DMIS Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Which DMIS Commands are Supported? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Special Features of Measurement Plans Imported from DMIS . . . 13-3
Configuring DMIS Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Importing Measurement Plan from DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

How to Import and Start a DMIS Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Evaluating Reports about the DMIS Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Chapter 14 Parameter-coded Measurements (Option)

Introduction to PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Using PCM in Calypso – First Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Variable Measurement Plans in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Parameter Files for Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Conditions and Parameters for the Run Structure of Calypso . . . 14-7
Variables, Parameters and Formulas in Calypso . . . . . . . 14-9

Formulas and Functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Programming with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Entering Parameters and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

How to Enter Parameters for a Measurement Plan Directly . . . . 14-16
How to Enter Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Setting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Inserting Loops in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22

Basics about Input and Output Parameters in PCM . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Basics about the Point Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
How to Test a PCM Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Examples for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33

Example for PCM: Using Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
Example for PCM: Condition with Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Example for PCM: Principle of Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
Example for PCM: Loading Parameter Values into a Curve . . . . 14-37
Example for PCM: Defining Curve Using Cosine Function . . . . . 14-38
Example for PCM: Rechecking Characteristic after
Tolerance Excursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Example for PCM: Parameterizing a Coordinate System . . . . . . 14-40
Example for PCM: Loading PCM File Using Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
Example for PCM: Defining Loop with Linear Offset . . . . . . . . . 14-41
Example for PCM: Nested Loop for Field (Array) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
Example for PCM: Parts Family and Variant Control . . . . . . . . . 14-44
Example for PCM: ASCII Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
PCM Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47

PCM Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Variables in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49
Mathematical functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49
Character Chain Functions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-51
PCM Functions: Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-52
PCM Functions: File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-54
PCM Functions: Measurement-specific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 14-55
PCM Functions: CMM Movement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
PCM Functions: Custom Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-59
Overview: Conditions in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60
Overview: Loops in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-61
Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63

Enhancing the Speed of Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63
How to Test PCM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63
Two-button vs. Three-button Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-64

Chapter 15 Curve Measurement (Option)
Basics about Curve Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Performing Curve Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Defining the Curve Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

2D Curves, 3D Curves and Lift Curves – The Differences . . . . . . . 15-6
Defining Nominal Data for a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
How to Import the Files for Nominal Definition of a Curve . . . . . 15-8
How to Generate a Curve with the Points Generator . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Creating Nominal Values of a Curve by Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
How to Enter Nominal Data of the Curve Point by Point . . . . . . 15-19
How to Adopt Nominal Data of the Curve
from the CAD Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
How to Change the Nominal Vectors of the Curve . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Working with Curve Nominal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Checking the Clearance Planes of a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Defining Tolerances for a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

How to Define Tolerance for the Whole Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
How to Define Tolerances for Individual Segments . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
How to Define Jump Tolerance for the Whole Curve . . . . . . . . 15-29
Using Curves in the CAD Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31

The Commands in the Shortcut Menu for Curves . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
The Measuring Strategy for the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33

Options for Displaying Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
How to Work with the Point List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Scanning a Known Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38

Scanning Methods for Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
How to Divide a Curve into Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Defining Curve Form Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43

About the Curve Form Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43
How to Define Tolerance for Segments Separately . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
Working with the Results of Curve Measurement . . . . 15-46

Basics about Curve Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
How to Calculate the Deviations of a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47

How to Optimize the Coordinate System
with Best-Fit Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48
How to Calculate the Curve's Center of Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
How to Obtain a Best Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
How to Define a Reference Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
How to Limit Search Distances during Curve Evaluation . . . . . . 15-53
Smoothing a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54
Sorting the Points in a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-56
Limiting the Evaluation of the Curve Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
How to Eliminate Outliers from a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
How to Format the Printout for the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-59
Graphical Evaluation of Form Deviations for Curves . . . . . . . . . 15-60
Chapter 16 Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option)

Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

Establishing the Preconditions for Qualification
of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
How to Perform Fitting Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Qualifying Probes with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

General Information about Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Defining Probes and Styli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Qualifying Probes and Styli with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10

Chapter
1
1 Introduction
.................................................................................................................................
It is well worth recalling what you learnt in the “Calypso Basics”
course before you start work.
The most important points are starting Calypso, an overview of the
Calypso User Desk and a short explanation of important terms you
need for measuring with Calypso.
Included in this chapter:
Welcome to Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

How to Start Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
The Calypso User Desk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 1- 1

Introduction
Welcome to Calypso
From now on, Calypso will be the tool you use for fast, accurate and
convenient measuring.
Calypso was developed to make the job of measuring easier for you.
To this end it utilizes the entire know-how pool of Carl Zeiss, the
technology leader in the world of metrology.
Straightforward Calypso automatically recognizes the geometric elements you probe
programming and responds by generating probing paths and strategies, retract
movements and routes between the elements.
In contrast to conventional software, the probes are calibrated with
the aid of CNC programs. As a consequence you need only perform
the first probing of the reference sphere manually, Calypso will
perform all of the remaining steps for you.
In Calypso you enter the measurement parameters in accordance with
a predefined structure, which means that nothing can be
inadvertently omitted. You will find, for example, that the parameters
in the input menus offer you default values. There are only a few
items that call for manual input, and they are highlighted to draw
your attention to them right away. Logical sequences, indicators,
prompts for confirmation, and plausibility checks matching the
individual characteristics are all in place to make sure that you omit
nothing and to make measuring as straightforward as possible.
You see what you're Calypso offers you a clear view of the workpiece at all times. The CAD
measuring model is right in front of you on the screen and you can follow every
detail as measurement proceeds. Of course, you also have the option
of directly importing CAD data so that you can quickly generate error-
free measuring programs of your own.
Versatile measurement You can be sure that you'll have the results of measurement without
logs delay, and afterwards you can still depend on Calypso to help. You
can customize measurement logs to suit your needs and preferences,
for example you can assign colors to tolerance overshoots or select
full-graphics display modes for the results.
If you want to import the results into other mainstream Windows
applications, Calypso can export the result files, so you can present
the data as graphics or in table form, or in presentation programs –
whatever your customer wants.
1-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Start Calypso
How to Start Calypso

Follow these steps to start and log into Calypso:
1 Turn on your computer.
2 Log in to Windows.
You do this by pressing Ctrl, Alt and Del in response to the system
prompt.
3 Wait for the Windows desktop to appear and double-click on the
Calypso icon.
If the icon does not appear on the desktop, select Start →
Programs → Zeiss → Calypso.
Calypso begins loading. Before Calypso’s first screen is displayed,
the programs Visual Works and ACIS 3D Toolkit are loaded and you
will see their respective windows displayed briefly. These programs
are necessary for Calypso to run.
NOTE Never close Visual Works and ACIS 3D Toolkit when Calypso is
hss running.
The Log In dialog box appears on the screen.
NOTE If you click on Memos, the Memo Editor window will open in which
hss
you may find information left for you by the operator on the previous
shift.
4 Select your user name from the User Name list.

5 Type in your password and click on OK.
When you log in for the first time, Calypso prompts you to confirm
your password:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 1-3

Introduction
6 Type in your password again and click on OK.

Once you have logged in, the Calypso User Desk appears on the
screen.
NOTE Consult your system administrator if you encounter problems when

hss logging in.
1-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Calypso User Desk
The Calypso User Desk

The Calypso User Desk appears on your screen once you have logged
in. This graphic the Calypso User Desk with an open measurement
plan. The CAD window contains the model of the workpiece.
Main Menu
Task bar
Features List
Measurement
CAD Window
CAD Icons
The User Desk and its principal fields are described briefly below:
– Main menu options
The main menu options contain pull down sub-menus with the
basic commands for working with Calypso.
– Icons list
These icons also let you choose the basic commands for working
with Calypso. The use of icons often combines several menu
options. This saves you from having to use menus and pull-down
sub-menus.
– Measurement plan area
Three main windows can be displayed alternately by using the
measurement plan icons:
• Prerequisites
This is where you find the dialogs for preparing the
measurement plan.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 1-5

Introduction
• Features
This is where you create lists of the features and work on their
templates.
• Characteristics
This is where you define the characteristics in the order in which
they are carried on in the CNC run out and where you work on
their templates.
– CAD window
The CAD window contains a three-dimensional image of the
workpiece and each feature. The representation is constantly
updated when you define new features or edit existing ones.
– CAD symbols
The symbols start functions and commands with which you can
edit the features in the CAD window.
1-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Important terms in Calypso
Important terms in Calypso

Features
There are two types of feature:
– A physical element of a part, such as a plane, slot or hole.
– A constructed feature that does not physically exist. Features of
this nature are needed for lines of intersection and cylinder axes,
for example.
Automatic feature Calypso automatically recognizes most geometric features as you
recognition move the CMM stylus to probe them. The software’s measurement
algorithm is “smart” and takes into account the location of
measurement points as well as the probing direction. For example, if
you take measurements at three points on a part, Calypso will
determine whether the feature is a line, plane or circle depending on
the probing direction and where the measurement points are located.
Characteristics
An engineering drawing requirement. A characteristic includes
nominal and tolerance values for a specified evaluation along with
any applicable datum reference frame. Characteristics evaluate the
size, form or location of features. Examples of engineering drawing
requirements or characteristics are the diameter of a hole, the
perpendicularity of a bore to a plane and the distance between two
planes.
Measurement plans
A measurement plan is Calypso’s version of what you might be
familiar with as a “part program” or “control data”. A measurement
plan contains the information the system needs to perform a
measurement, for example:
– the names of the stylus configurations
– the part alignment
– the clearance planes around the workpiece
– the sequence of the characteristics and their tolerances
– the features
– user-defined video clips, if applicable.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 1-7

Introduction
There are two ways of generating measurement plans:

– You can begin by using the CMM to define the part’s features that
you want to measure and the characteristics to evaluate for those
features.
– Or you can create the characteristics first and then measure all the
requisite features.
Once you’ve created a measurement plan, you can run it to
automatically evaluate the characteristics on a specified part. A list
containing the icons for the individual characteristics, along with their
names, appears on the Calypso User Desk. You can also edit the
measurement plan to change what characteristics to evaluate and in
what order.
A typical measurement plan might include information necessary to
measure and evaluate the diameter of a hole at the part’s upper left
corner and the flatness of the part’s top surface.
The measurement plan is shown as a series of icons that represent the
characteristics to be evaluated.
Part alignment
The part alignment is the user-defined coordinate reference for your
measurement plan. The part alignment locates the part on the table
for the CMM and Calypso. Calypso’s CAD geometry has an origin to
which all locations (along the X, Y and Z axes) are relative. The part
alignment links this origin with the coordinate system of the machine,
thus forming a reference for CMM movements during measurements.
The CMM then knows where to move when Calypso sends it a
location based on its CAD geometry.
Clearance cuboid
Six planes form a clearance that defines a safe area around a part and
any associated fixture where the stylus can move without risk of
collision. Outside the cuboid formed by these planes the probe can be
moved without risk of collision.
Calypso includes a simple way to quickly generate the clearance
planes. Using only two positions, Calypso determines the part’s
clearance planes for the positive boundaries in X, Y and Z and the
negative boundaries in X, Y and Z.
1-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso
Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with

Calypso
Calypso is used for quality assurance and is a powerful tool for
measuring workpieces quickly and reliably. When you measure with
Calypso you begin by creating a measurement plan containing all the
requisite tolerances and nominals in the form of characteristics and all
the requisite geometric data in the form of features.
Your measurement determines how you define the characteristics and
features. You can adopt the values Calypso suggests as standard for
the respective nominals and tolerances when probing the workpiece.
Alternatively, you can import data directly into the measurement plan
from a CAD file or enter the values manually.
Calypso supports you through these steps with automatic feature
recognition and an extensive library of tolerance tables. These
functions make it easy to generate a measurement plan away from
the machine.
Common to all these procedures is the fact that the characteristics
and features, once defined, are grouped in the measurement plan.
This means that random samples taken from series production can be
measured automatically without any need for manual probing.
The measuring results are output in standardized printouts. The
results can also be exported from Calypso and edited in other
applications (e. g. statistics programs).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 1-9

Introduction
This User's Guide takes you through the process step-by-step, all the
way up to the measured results. The diagram below illustrates the
path we are going to follow.
Drawing CAD data workpiece
Defining Features ➤ page 5-2

Defining Characteristics ➤ page 6-7
Preparation
Preparing the Measurement Plan ➤ page 4-1

Editing the Measurement Plan ➤ page 7-1
Running a Measurement Plan ➤ page 8-1
Quality
control
Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement Results ➤ page 9-1
1-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
2
2 The Dynalog Control Panel
.................................................................................................................................
Your measuring tasks are generally done with two separate units: a
control panel and a PC. With the control panel you directly control the
CMM. With the PC, you work on the design of your measurement
plan via Calypso.
The Dynalog control panel connects these two units into one. You
have full functionality and maximum user friendliness in one place.
You will find a description of Dynalog in the manual that was supplied
with your Dynalog control panel. This documentation only describes
how to configure Calypso using the Dynalog control panel.
The instructions in this User's Guide are based on a standard control
panel and a PC.
The Dynalog Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Operating Calypso via Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 2- 1

The Dynalog Control Panel

The controls on the Dynalog control panel are explained below.
Vertical function
keys
Display
Horizontal function keys

F1-F12
Touchpad
Keyboard
The functions of the individual elements are as follows:

– Display: Functions as a PC monitor. Here you can see Calypso.
– Keyboard: Functions as a PC keyboard.
– Function keys: The function keys of the Dynalog control panel are
divided into 2 groups.
• The horizontal function keys are F1 to F12. Each key has a
defined, unalterable function (see ➤“The Function Keys of the
Dynalog Control Panel” on page 2-7).
• The vertical function keys. These keys will be assigned after you
have defined a toolbox. Each function key will be assigned an
element from the toolbox (see ➤“Using the Toolboxes with
Dynalog” on page 2-6).
– Touchpad: The touchpad replaces the mouse that you would
normally have connected to your PC (see ➤“How to Use the
Touchpad of the Dynalog Control Panel” on page 2-5).
2-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog
How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog

In the System Set Up, you have to perform a one-time initialization of
Calypso for using Dynalog. Calypso will only assign the relevant
functions to the function keys of Dynalog after this initialization. After
this one-time installation, you can operate Calypso fully via Dynalog.
To install Dynalog:
1 Start Calypso and log in.
After that you will now be in the User Desk of Calypso.
2 Select Extras → Workroom → CMM.
This opens the window for the CMM-specific settings.
3 Click on the Panel bookmark.
You will see the window for the choice of the Control panel.
4 Choose Dynalog from the Panel group.

5 Click on the Control tab.
6 Click on Connect.
7 Click on OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.
You are returned to the Calypso User Desk.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 2-3

8 Select Extras → Workroom → Environment.

This opens the window for the Environment settings.
9 Click on the Dynalog tab and check the Dynalog keys check
box.
10 Click on Apply and OK.
You are returned to the Calypso User Desk.
At this point the installation of the Dynalog control panel is complete.
You can now operate Calypso via Dynalog.
2-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Operating Calypso via Dynalog

Use of Calypso with the Dynalog control panel follows the same basic
principles covered in this User's Guide. You will therefore be able to
follow all the instructions with ease as soon you have familiarized
yourself with the touchpad.
Dynalog offers you a simplification: Commands F1 to F12 are
assigned to the function keys as shortcuts for working with windows
and navigating from window to window. These keys will also perform
important Calypso operations.
How to Use the Touchpad of the Dynalog

Control Panel
The touchpad fully replaces the mouse. You move the pointer on the
screen by moving a finger of your hand instead of moving the mouse.
To work with the touchpad:
1 Place the tip of your finger on the touchpad and watch the pointer
on the monitor.
2 Move your finger over the control area of the touchpad.
The pointer on the monitor follows the movement of your finger.
3 You single-click by tapping on the control area once with the tip of
your finger.
4 You double-click by tapping on the control area twice in quick
succession with the tip of your finger.
If you are working with a customized toolbox, Dynalog offers you an
enhanced method of integrating the toolbox features in your test
measurement plan. See ➤“Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog” on
page 2-6.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 2-5

Using the Toolboxes with Dynalog

Toolboxes are much easier to use with a Dynalog control panel. Once
you have defined a toolbox, you can use the vertical function keys of
the Dynalog control panel to pull the features from the toolbox into
the measurement plan list.
To make things even more straightforward, Calypso automatically
assigns features from the toolbox to the vertical function keys.
Press F12 on the Dynalog control panel to view the list of features
assigned to the vertically arranged function keys:
You will find more information on defining toolboxes in ➤“The

Toolboxes” on page 7-15, and details on how Dynalog function keys
are assigned in ➤“The Function Keys of the Dynalog Control Panel”
on page 2-7.
2-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Function Keys of the Dynalog Control

Panel
On the Dynalog control panel function keys F1 to F12 are assigned
special functions that make it much easier to work with Calypso when
it is running on the Dynalog.
The table below describes the actions you can perform with the
function keys.
NOTE It is a good idea to print this table. You can then use the printout as a
hss ready-reference guide to function-key assignments.
Func-
tion
Key Function Action Performed
F1 Help Starts the Online Help system
F2 Open the menu of the Opens the relevant input window if you have marked an
marked element element (e.g. a characteristic). Using this key is the same as a
double click.
F3 OK Saves the settings and closes the active window.
F4 Cancel Closes the active window without saving the settings.
F5 Save measurement plan Saves the current measurement plan.
F6 Run measurement plan Runs the measurement plan. You must be in the User Desk of
Calypso to do this.
F7 Open workroom/ User If you are in User Desk, this is how to call up the workroom.
Desk If you are in the workroom, this is how you call up the User
Desk.
F8 Open measurement plan Opens the input window for the measurement plan settings.
settings
F9 Show/hide default Shows the default printout.
printout Puts the default printout in the background.
F10 Delete measuring point Deletes the last measured point while you are measuring.
F11 Show toolbox Lists all toolboxes defined to date. The names of the toolboxes
are shown in a separate window. The last toolbox shown is
active.
F12 Flag insertion Inserts the flags for the vertical function keys if you have
defined a toolbox of your own (see ➤“Using the Toolboxes with
Dynalog” on page 2-6).
Removes the flags for the vertical function keys.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 2-7

Example: The Sequence of Operation with

the Dynalog Control Panel
The following example illustrates the sequence of operation using the
Dynalog. The following illustrations show how to insert the “True
Position” characteristic into your measurement plan using a
customized toolbox, and how to make further definitions using the
definition template.
The assumption is that your customized toolbox includes the “True
Position” characteristic.
1 Press function key F12 to view the flags with the characteristics
from your toolbox.
2 Press the vertical function key with the characteristic True Position,
for example L2.
The True Position characteristic is inserted into your measurement
plan.
1. Function key F12 2. Function key L2 Result: The characteristic is

added to the measurement
2-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Press function key F2 to open the definition template.

The definition template is opened.
3. Function key F2 Result: The definition

template is opened.
4 Repeatedly press the Tab key until the Feature key is activated, so
that you can define a feature.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 2-9

5 Press function key F2, to open the Selection window.

The Selection window opens.
4. Tab key 5. Function key F2 Result: The Selection

dialog box opens.
6 Highlight a feature using the tab key and press function key F3 to
select it.
The Selection window is closed.
7 Press function key F3 again to close the definition template.
The characteristic has been defined and your settings saved. The
measurement plan reappears on the screen.
2-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
3
3 Working with the CAD
Window
.................................................................................................................................
The CAD window shows a graphic of the workpiece and its features
while you work on a measurement plan. This graphical illustration is
known as the “CAD model”. You see each feature in the CAD
window. This means you have complete control over your
measurement plan because you can see it right away if you make a
mistake in defining a feature.
You will soon come to appreciate the CAD window as a very
important and useful tool for your day-to-day work with the system.
Basics about the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

The Buttons in the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 3- 1

Working with the CAD Window
Basics about the CAD Window

The CAD window is where you view a CAD file containing the
workpiece you want to measure.
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. Among
other things, you can rotate, enlarge or move this model in the CAD
window – depending on the view you require for the respective work
step.
The CAD window is only for viewing a CAD file. You cannot edit the
CAD model displayed in the window; all you can do is add or remove
features and probing points.
Bear in mind, however, that you have the option of saving the CAD
model and editing it in a CAD program.
The figure shows the CAD window and buttons.
CAD Window
CAD buttons
3-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Basics about the CAD Window
The CAD window buttons allow you to manipulate the model of the
part in the CAD window. Most of the functions, moreover, can be
selected from the CAD menu on the User Desk.
Show Selected Features Zoom Out Rotate -> by increments
Show All Calypso Features Use Mouse to

Use Mouse to
Zoom
Show Solid Model
Rotate <- by
increments
Zoom In
Switch to Feature Menu Use Mouse to Select

View Render Fit to
Pan CAD Image Rotation
CAD
Working away from the Once you have loaded a CAD file of a workpiece, you can work your
machine way through the preparations without having to use the CMM. You
use the mouse to define features and their probing points.
You can also generate an entire measurement plan on the basis of the
CAD model.
Defining probing points The CAD window enables you to define probing points with the
in the CAD window mouse. You just click with the mouse on the requested CAD window.
You can
– add additional probing points to existing features. In this case the
definition template of the corresponding feature has to be open.
The probing points will be added to the existing point list.
– You can define new features in a plane of the part alignment with
probing points. To do this the list of features has to be open. The
mouse takes over the function of the probe; therefore, you have
the full functionally of automatic feature recognition at your
disposal. (See ➤“How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature
Recognition” on page 5-5.)
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 3-3

The Buttons in the CAD Window

The table below lists the buttons available in the CAD window and
outlines their functions.
You can access additional information by opening this section in
Online Help.
Element Function
Show Selected Shows only selected features by bringing them to the foreground
Feature(s) Only and hides the rest of the model. You must first select a feature
from the list of features in the measurement plan area, or by
clicking directly on the feature in the CAD model.
Show All Calypso Shows all features. This button is useful if the CAD window
Features shows only selected features or shows the solid or rendered
model.
Show Solid Creates a solid model by extending the features to the
Model boundaries of the clearance planes. This solid model can then be
rendered into a three-dimensional model with illuminated sides
by using the Render button.
To return to a view of the features of the model, click on the
Show All Calypso Features button.
The picklist of this button offers you the following options:
Select Already Extracted Features
Define Points
Define a Space Point
Define Circle on a Cylinder
Define Line on a Plane
Distance Measurement
Extract Features
View Changes the view of the model. You can load a view or choose
one of the following views: isometric (or 3D), +X or -X (left or
right sides), +Y or -Y (front or back), +Z or -Z (top or bottom).
The default view is isometric. Choosing the isometric view also
resets the model if it has been rotated.
Zoom Out Zooms out to see more of the model. Each time you click on this
button, the view zooms out a little further. You can click on the
Zoom Out button to shrink the view of the model and then click
on the Use Mouse to Pan CAD Image button to reposition the
model in the CAD window.
Use Mouse to Allows you to select an area of the model to zoom in on.
Zoom The Zoom button remains active until you click on the Use
Mouse to Pan CAD Image or Use mouse to Rotate CAD Image
button.
3-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Buttons in the CAD Window
Element Function
Zoom In Zooms in for a closer view of the model. Each time you click on
this button, the view zooms in a little further.
Use Mouse to Pan Allows you to move (or pan) the CAD model around the CAD
CAD Image window.
The Pan button remains active until you click on the Zoom or
Use Mouse to Rotate CAD Image button.
Select Rotation Sets the rotational axis of the CAD model to X, Y, Z or free axis
Mode (which rotates the model around the center of the CAD
window).
To actually rotate the model, click on the Use Mouse to Rotate
CAD Image button.
Rotate -> by Rotates the CAD model 10 degrees clockwise about the selected
increments axis.
Use Mouse to Allows you to rotate the CAD model about the axis selected with
Rotate CAD the Select Rotation Mode button (X, Y, Z or free axis).
Image
Rotate -> by Rotates the CAD model 10 degrees counterclockwise about the
increments / selected axis.
Mouse Click
Render Toggles the view of the CAD model as a three-dimensional solid
with illuminated surfaces.
If you want to create a solid model before rendering it, first click
on the Show Solid Model button (which extends the features
to the boundaries of the clearance planes), then click on the
Render button.
Fit to CAD Fits the CAD model into the CAD window This is useful if the
Window image is enlarged beyond the window or shifted out of the
window.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 3-5

3-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
4
4 Preparing the Measurement
Plan
.................................................................................................................................
You have to prepare the measurement plan before you can move on
to defining the features and characteristics in Calypso. Calypso shows
you what to do by presenting the “List of Prerequisites” in the
measurement plan area as soon as you open a new measurement
plan. Work through the prerequisites in the order in which they
appear in the list to be sure that you do not omit any of the settings
you need in order to measure the part.
Measurement Plan Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

The List of Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Homing the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Installing and Qualifying Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Setting the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Prerequisites for the Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Defining the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4- 1

Preparing the Measurement Plan
Measurement Plan Basics

You always define the measuring tasks in a measurement plan. A
measurement plan consists of any sequence of the characteristics that
you want to test on a workpiece. This includes all information from
the measuring features that CMM requires to all information that is
important for measuring. This information comprises probe
configuration, the part alignment, the clearance planes and, if
applicable, user-defined video clips. The measurement plan for
Calypso is what you might call a workpiece program.
There are five basic steps in creating a new measurement plan in
Calypso. The table lists those steps and shows you where to refer to in
this guide for detailed information.
Basic Steps for Creating a

Measurement Plan Refer to This Section for Details
Step 1: Open the new measurement plan and name ➤“How to Create a New Measurement
it. Plan” on page 4-3
Step 2: Satisfy the prerequisites for measurement. ➤“The List of Prerequisites” on page 4-5
Step 3: Define the part’s features that you want to ➤“Defining Features” on page 5-2
measure.
Step 4: Define the characteristics that you want to ➤“Defining Characteristics” on page 6-1
evaluate on those features.
Step 5: Run your measurement plan. ➤“Defining the Scope of Measurement” on
page 8-2
In order to define the features and characteristics for a measurement

plan, secure the workpiece to measuring table of the CMM and probe
its features. Calypso recognizes the features automatically, but you
also have the convenient option of changing the default nominals
and tolerance values proposed by Calypso in accordance with the
specifications.
Note that although it may be the most common way to first define
features (step 3) and then define characteristics (step 4), Calypso does
not restrict you to this order. You can also lay out the sequence of
characteristics first and then begin defining features and associating
them to characteristics.
Once you have created a measurement plan, you can run it to
evaluate automatically the defined characteristics on a specified part.
You can also edit the measurement plan to change or add
characteristics and features or to change the order in which
characteristics are evaluated.
4-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Measurement Plan Basics
Another way to create measurement plans is to use the DMIS Import

NOTE
option. If you have purchased this option, you can import runs
hss programmed in DMIS into Calypso and thereby convert them to a
regular Calypso measurement plan (see ➤ Chapter 13 “DMIS Import
(Option)” on page 13-1).
Evaluations Calypso creates evaluations for each measurement plan. You can also
combine two or more measurement plans and create combined
assessments (➤“Combining Several Measurement Plans” on
page 7-4). The measurement plans you combine in this way need not
necessarily be on the CMM - they can be created and run on CMMs
at different points in the network.
Measurement plans in Each measurement plan is saved in a directory of its own in the
the file system Calypso file system; the name of the directory always contains the
name of the measurement plan. The measurement plans themselves
all have the same name, inspection. The path to the measurement
plan called “cylinder block 1”, therefore, is ...\cylinder
block 1\inspection.
How to Create a New Measurement Plan

The procedure for creating a measurement plan is as follows:
1 Start Calypso (see ➤“How to Start Calypso” on page 1-3).
2 Click on the New File button.
The Open New Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the
screen.
3 Enter a name.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-3

Caution
hss
! Do not use control characters, umlauts or the letter “ß”, even if they
are supported by Windows NT. Characters such as umlauts can cause
problems when the measured results are saved for qs-STAT, for
example.
NOTE Calypso uses only lowercase letters when it saves files to the hard
hss disk. Bear this in mind, because it means that Calypso does not
distinguish between names of measurement plans that differ only in
the use of uppercase and lowercase letters.
4 Click on OK to confirm.
The Calypso User Desk appears on the screen. The title bar
contains the name of the new measurement plan.
How to Open an Existing Measurement Plan

Once it has been saved, a measurement plan can be opened at any
time and you can edit or run it.
1 Start Calypso (see ➤“How to Start Calypso” on page 1-3).
2 Click on the Open File button.
3 Go to the directory containing the measurement plan you want to

open (the name of the directory is the same as that of the
measurement plan).
4 Click on inspection and then click on OK to confirm.
The Calypso User Desk appears on the screen. The title bar
contains the name of the measurement plan.
4-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The List of Prerequisites

The list of prerequisites appears when you open a new measurement
plan or click on the Prerequisites button.
This window contains all the settings you should configure before you
create a measurement plan or run a workpiece measurement.
The prerequisites are described in the following sections:

– CMM Home Position, Status: This button indicates the status of
the CMM and the connection between CMM and Calypso. If the
CMM has not been initialized and referenced, the button is red
(see ➤“Homing the CMM” on page 4-8).
– Probe: Click on this button to qualify the probe that is currently
installed (see ➤“Installing and Qualifying Probes” on page 4-10).
– Base / Start Alignment: Click on this button to define the part
alignment for the measurement plan (see ➤“Setting the Base /
Start Alignment” on page 4-30).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-5

– Rotary Table: Click on this button to activate a rotary table for the
current measurement plan and to define the settings for rotary
table operation (see ➤“Prerequisites for the Rotary Table” on
page 4-58).
– Clearance Planes: Click this button to define a clearance zone
around the workpiece for CMM movements. This is required only
for CMMs with CNC capability (see ➤“Defining the Clearance
Planes” on page 4-72).
– Measurement Plan Settings: Click on this button to check and
edit the settings for the result logs (see ➤“Edit Measurement Plan
Settings” on page 4-78).
– Measurement Plan Editor Features: Click on this button to
open the measurement plan editor for features (see ➤“Editing the
Measurement Plan” on page 4-80).
– Temperature Compensation: Click on this button to have
Calypso include the temperature of the workpiece and the X, Y
and Z scales of the CMM in the calculations (see ➤“Temperature
Compensation” on page 4-81).
The buttons in the list of prerequisites are color-coded to indicate their
status:
– Red: The preparations must be completed before you can continue
with creating the measurement plan. Manual measurements,
however, can be performed.
– Yellow: This prerequisite has not been completed as yet. However,
you can proceed with creating the measurement plan (the system
will use default settings).
– Green: The prerequisite is satisfied.
The Prerequisites button itself is also color-coded to reflect the
combined status of the individual prerequisites buttons:
– Red: One or more buttons are red. You must complete the
prerequisites in question before you can run the measurement
plan. Manual measurements, however, can be performed.
– Yellow: One or more buttons are yellow. You can still work,
however.
– Green:All prerequisites are satisfied.
4-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

If you are performing measurements manually (for example, doing a

quick measurement of the diameter of a cylinder), you can often
proceed with first having satisfied all the prerequisites. The CMM
needs to be homed and the currently installed probe must be properly
qualified, but you will not need to define the base alignment or set up
clearance planes (so if their prerequisite buttons are red, you can
ignore them). You do not have to define clearance planes unless you
want to run measurement plans automatically with Calypso. Whether
or not you include the measurement plan settings and temperature
compensation depends on the intended application.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-7

Homing the CMM

When you first power up the CMM, a machine zero position or home
position must be established. This home position is usually the upper,
rear left corner of the measuring range when viewed from the
operator’s normal position. Typically, the CMM automatically homes
itself to this position upon startup.
The CMM Home Position or Status button on the list of prerequisites
indicates whether the CMM has been homed and whether the
connection between CMM and Calypso has been established:
– Green: The CMM has already been homed and initialized and
there is a proper connection between Calypso and the CMM. This
prerequisite has been completed.
– Red: You must initialize or restart the connection between the
CMM and Calypso or home the CMM.
After homing the CMM

Reference sphere Whenever the CMM is homed, you should also redefine the position
position of the reference sphere.
Even if the reference sphere did not move, homing might have
resulted in a shift of a few micrometers in the machine coordinate
system. This shift could result in an error of similar magnitude in
measurements with different stylus configurations.
You can dispense with redefining the position of the reference sphere
only when you merely install a new stylus and you are certain that this
stylus will not be used in conjunction with styli qualified beforehand.
(See ➤“Determining the Reference Sphere Position” on page 4-24.)
Rotary table axis If you use a rotary table: You must redefine the rotary table axis after
the CMM has been homed. (See ➤“Prerequisites for the Rotary Table”
on page 4-58).
How to Establish the Connection to the CMM

You have to set up a connection to the controller before you can work
with the CMM.
The procedure for connecting to the CMM is as follows:
2 Click on the Connect button.
3 Click on OK.
This closes the CMM notebook.
4-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Homing the CMM
How to Move the CMM to the Home Position

This home position is usually the upper, rear left corner of the
measuring range when viewed from the operator’s normal position.
Follow these steps to home the CMM:
1 Click on the CMM Home Position or Status button.
If a valid home position exists, the CMM does not move to it again.
If the CMM has not been homed since switch-on, the system
prompts you to move the probe to a clear position.
2 If necessary, use the joysticks to move the CMM stylus to a position
higher than the highest obstruction on the table to avoid collisions.
3 Click on OK.
The CMM moves to the home position. The CMM Home Position or
Status button should now be green.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-9

Installing and Qualifying Probes

When setting up a measurement plan, you must make certain that
the appropriate probe is installed and qualified. In qualifying a probe,
you indicate which probe you are using and then initiate a routine in
which the probe measures the reference sphere.
If the Probes button is green, the probe beside the button has already
been qualified.
Here is important information about qualifying probes:
– You must install and qualify probes within a measurement plan,
but the probe information is global to all of Calypso. If you define
a probe and its stylus is calibrated while creating one measurement
plan, that probe will then be available in all other measurement
plans.
– The probe that you use to set up a measurement plan must be the
same one that you use each time you run the measurement plan.
Calypso saves the probe configuration that you used and detects a
mismatch if you try to run the plan with a different probe
configuration.
NOTE If the original probe can no longer be used but you have a probe with
hss exactly the same configuration, select Prerequisites → Select Probe
for this Measurement Plan to select the appropriate probe.
– The probe name listed next to the Probes button of the

prerequisites is the most recently installed probe. If you have
loaded an existing measurement plan, the probe currently installed
is not necessarily the one required for the measurement plan. To
see which probe is required, choose Prerequisites → Select
Probe for this Measurement Plan. The probe configuration
required is listed in the window.
4-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Install a Probe

You have to open a measurement plan and define the position of the
reference sphere before a probe can be used.
Follow these steps to install a probe into a Zeiss probe head:
NOTE These instructions do not apply to Renishaw systems.

hss
1 Select Prerequisites → Manual Probe Change.
The Manual Probe Change “Stop Light Name” dialog box
appears on the screen.
2 Click on the red arrow of the Probe Down area.

The “Probe will be released in 5 seconds (OK)” message appears
on the screen:
3 Click on OK and carefully grip the probe that is about to be

released.
After a five-second countdown, the CMM will release the probe.
If it is a triggering probe, you must disengage it carefully to remove
it from the holder.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-11

Caution
hss
! Measuring probe heads are released fully automatically, i.e you must
have the probe in your hand at this point.
4 Click on the red “Up” arrow on the right-hand side.

The “Insert probe!” prompt appears on the screen.
Do not click OK at this time.
5 Insert the new probe. Make sure the notch in the adapter plate is
aligned with the pin on the underside of the probe head.
6 Click on OK.
You should hear the electromagnet of the probe head seat the
probe. If you do not, gently grasp the probe to assure a proper
seat.
A pop-up menu appears listing available, already defined probe
names.
7 Click on New or select the appropriate name, if the probe has
already been defined and qualified. If you have just installed a
reference probe, select MasterProbe (not for HAMs = Horizontal
Arm Machines; where the first probe position is taken as the
reference).
8 If you have selected New, you must name the probe in the Create
new Stylus dialog box.
9 Click on OK to close the Manual Probe Change window.
The Calypso User Desk will be displayed again.
If you install a probe that has already been qualified, the probe’s name
appears in the list of prerequisites alongside the Probe button. If the
name does not appear, you must qualify the probe.
Using the Probe Changer with the TP20 or TP200

Automatic probe The TP20 from Renishaw is designed for automatic probe changes
change with the MCR20 probe-changer module, and the same is true of the
TP200 with the SCR200 module (see ➤“Renishaw MCR20 Probe
Changer” on page 7-33 and ➤“SCR200 Probe Changer” on
page 7-34).
On a VISTA, the TP200 can be secured with a PH6 or a PH1 in the
quill. On an Eclipse, the TP200 can be secured in the quill with a
PH10.
Manual probe change Bear in mind that you can also change probes manually on the TP20
and the TP200 (see the User data on the TP20 / TP200 and RDS).
4-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Caution
hss
! Risk of damage to the RDS plate. When you change probes manually
without the measuring system, the retaining solenoid is deenergized
immediately. In order to avoid damage, you must be holding the
probe in your hand at this time.
If there is no measuring system in the TP20 and you are preparing to

change the probe at RDS plate manually, remember that the retaining
solenoid for the RDS plate will be deenergized immediately, because
the switch contact is open. There is a consequent risk of the RDS plate
dropping out and suffering damage.
Preparing Probes and Styli

In Calypso, each probe and stylus is given its own unique name. Styli
are also assigned numbers. Calypso uses these names and numbers to
identify the probes and styli and saves their data. This means that
each probe and each stylus has to be defined in Calypso before it can
be qualified (see ➤“How to Define new Probes” on page 4-14).
You must first define the stylus before you can proceed to qualify it.
You can qualify these styli manually just as you would for normal styli
(see ➤“How to Qualify a Stylus” on page 4-22).
Styli of an RDS When you use a RDS, the CMM can probe the workpiece from a large
number of directions by adjusting the angles A and B. Every RDS
setting that you want to use for probing is considered a stylus and
must be qualified separately (exception: you have the RDS-CAA
option installed, see ➤ Chapter 16 “Qualifying the RDS with CAA
(Option)” on page 16-1).
Another possibility is to create a list with the angle settings for the
probe head, which defines the styli. During qualification, the CMM
“recognizes” the styli in question, and you do not have to qualify
these manually. You can learn how to create this list under ➤“How to
Create a Stylus List for RDS” on page 4-16
Afterwards, you begin the qualification of the probe with the
Automatic Qualification symbol.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-13

How to Define new Probes

Before you can qualify a new probe, you have to tell Calypso the
name of the probe in question and its styli.
To define a new probe:
1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Probe button.
The Probe Qualification Window dialog box appears on the
screen.
2 Click on the Define New Probe button.

The Create New Probe dialog box appears on the screen.
4-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Enter the names for the new probe and the first stylus.
Internally, Calypso does not distinguish between upper and lower
case characters.
4 Click OK to close the dialog box.
The name of the probe and the stylus are displayed in the Probe
name and Stylus name / Number picklists.
If the probe has other styli, you now have to add them in Calypso (see
➤“How to Add Styli to a Probe” on page 4-15).
How to Add Styli to a Probe

If a probe has more than one stylus, Calypso must be informed of the
other styli. After defining a new probe or modifying an existing probe,
therefore, you must add the additional styli, if any, and qualify them.
To add a stylus:
screen.
2 Click on the Create New Stylus button.
The Create New Stylus dialog box appears on the screen.
If you are adding a stylus to a probe that was defined beforehand,

the Stylus Number box automatically shows the next sequential
number in the series.
3 Enter a name for the new stylus in the Stylus field.
case characters.
4 In the Stylus Number field select the number of the stylus.
The name of the stylus will now appear in the selection list Stylus
name / Number.
6 If you wish to add another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 5.
You now have to qualify each new stylus (see ➤“How to Qualify a
Stylus” on page 4-22).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-15

How to rename a Stylus

You can change the name of a stylus whenever you want, but you
cannot change the number. You might find it necessary to change a
name when you add new styli to a probe, for example.
To rename a stylus:
screen.
2 Select the stylus whose name you want to change from the Stylus
name / Number picklist.
3 Click on the Rename Stylus button.
The New Name Input dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter the new name for the stylus.

case characters.
If you see Stylus name / Number in the list, the stylus has now been
renamed. It is not necessary to requalify a stylus after renaming it.
How to Create a Stylus List for RDS

To automatically generate and qualify the styli that correspond to the
various angle settings of a RDS, you can create a list that contains the
desired angle settings. Each list is saved as a file and corresponds to a
probe.
You must provide Calypso with the dimensions and the orientation of
the reference probe in order for this to work:
4-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

1 Select Extras → Workroom → CMM → Reference Probe.

This takes you to the Reference probe tab.
2 Enter the allocation of the sensor system to the machine system:
Machine Orientation, arm 1 Orientation, arm 2

COLUMNS XS = XM XS = -XM
YS = -ZM YS = -ZM
ZS = YM XS = -YM
BRIDGES XS = X M
YS = -YM
ZS = -ZM
3 Enter the dimensions (length) of the reference probe.

4 Open the Control tab and click on Connect.
This activates your settings.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-17

To create a stylus list for a RDS:

screen.
2 In the upper menu bar, click on the Probe Administration

button.
The Probe Administration dialog will open.
4-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Click on the Catalog tab to bring the tabbed page with the
catalog to the front, and select in the menu Edit (lower right) the
menu point Create List.
The Create List dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter the data for your probe, for the reference probe and for the
reference sphere.
For more information, see Create List in the Calypso Online Help.
Calypso takes the data for the reference sphere (radius, shaft
direction, shaft radius) from the Reference sphere notebook
(Reference Sphere Administration button in the qualification
window).
5 Enter a name for the probe.
Caution
hss
! Never use the name of the currently active probe.
6 In the Stylus List, enter the stylus name and the corresponding
positions of the RDS (angles A and B in degrees):
You can insert rows and delete individual rows or the whole table
from the popup menu. We recommend using stylus names that
contain the angle positions – that helps you choose the correct
stylus later.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-19

Caution
hss
! Avoid RDS angle positions in which probe shaft directions are close to
the shaft direction of the reference sphere, as there is a relatively large
risk of shaft probing in this case.
7 Click on the Save button.

The data you entered is saved in an ASCII file and a new probe is
created in the probe catalog. Each row of the probe list creates a
separate stylus.
The path and file name are assigned by default and can be
changed.
8 Close the Probe Administration dialog.
You can now click on the Probe Qualification WindowAutomatic
Qualification symbol and begin the qualification of the RDS
positions.
How to Edit a Stylus List for RDS

You can load a stylus list whenever you want and make changes to it.
The procedure for editing a stylus list is as follows:
The Probe Qualification Window appears on the screen.
button.
The Probe Administration dialog will open.
3 Click on the Catalog tab to bring the tabbed page with the
catalog to the front, and select in the menu Edit (lower right) the
menu point Create List.
The Create List appears on the screen.
4 Click on the Load button and select the file where the probe is
saved.
5 Edit the data that must be changed.
After you have confirmed your choice, the edited file will be saved;
the previous data will be overwritten.
NOTE The modified data will first be available after the probe is selected
hss
once more.
4-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Qualifying Styli
The probe must be calibrated:
– If you have installed a new probe that has not been qualified.
– If you want to requalify a probe that is already installed, for
example after a collision or due to thermal changes.
On an RDS you can qualify all the angular positions of the RDS
automatically and in a single process, if you have installed the RDS-
CAA (Computer Aided Accuracy) option (see ➤“Qualifying the RDS
with CAA (Option)” on page 16-1).
Before you qualify styli, make sure that you have opened a
measurement plan and that Calypso knows the position of the
reference sphere (see ➤“Determining the Reference Sphere Position”
on page 4-24).
You qualify probes in the Probe Qualification dialog box:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-21

How to Qualify a Stylus

To qualify a stylus, instruct Calypso to use this stylus to probe the
reference sphere, mounted on the measurement table, in a special
manner.
To qualify a stylus:
2 Select the name of the probe from the Probe Name picklist if it is
not already shown.
3 Select the name of the stylus you want to qualify from the Stylus
4 Under Geometry, select the form or function of the stylus point
(standard is sphere).
Select Temperature Probe to qualify a temperature probe and
Cylinder to qualify a cylinder probe.
5 From the Mode list, select the Qualification Mode:
• Select Tensor if you wish to use the stylus for scanning or for
trigger-only measurements with high requirements for precision
(available only on systems such as HSS and VAST).
• Select Six points if you want to wish to qualify the stylus by the
automatic default method.
• Select Manual if you wish to or must perform the qualification
manually.
For example, you would select this mode to qualify a
temperature probe or for the first qualification of a cylinder
probe (a cylinder probe can also be subsequently requalified,
even during the CNC run).
NOTE If the styli you use are very short, reduce the value for Sphere
hss
Coverage accordingly. The smaller the coverage, the smaller is the
section of the surface of the sphere which is probed for qualification.
6 Click on the Probe Definition button.

7 If you want to perform stylus definition in the Tensor mode, enter
the measuring force that you want to use subsequently with the
stylus.
8 If you perform the stylus qualification in the Tensor or Six Points
mode: When prompted, position the stylus over the north pole of
the reference sphere and probe it in the direction of the shank (If
your stylus is vertical, therefore, position it over the north pole of
the sphere and probe once vertically downwards).
4-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

9 If you perform the stylus qualification in Manual mode: Manually

create the probing points and return points in the desired order
(these points are assigned to the respective stylus).
NOTE When a cylinder probe is qualified, the first three points must lie on
hss
a circle on the probe cylinder and the following three points must lie
on a circle that is shifted with respect to the first circle. Afterward, you
can perform any additional probings.
4 6
3
1 2
In the Stylus Qualification dialog, you will see the total number
of probing and return points. With Delete, you can remove the
points “backwards” one after the other.
If you do not set a return point after the last probing point, a
return will be set automatically during the CNC run later.
If the sum of the projection angles is greater than 15 degrees, a
dialog box automatically appears during the run. You can change
the angles and confirm the change with OK in this dialog box. This
allows you to adjust the values, so that the shaft direction of the
probe is as close to perpendicular as possible with respect to the
calculated equatorial plane of the reference sphere and shaft
probings are avoided.
Calypso qualifies the probe according to the selected mode. The
results are shown in the R, S, X, Y, and Z fields (see ➤“About the
Results of Stylus Qualification” on page 4-24).
10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 if you want to qualify another stylus.
11 Click on OK to return to the User Desk.
The styli are now qualified and the color of the Probes button is
green. The calibrated probe can now be used by all Calypso users.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-23

About the Results of Stylus Qualification

There is no one correct answer for how good the standard deviation
of a probe qualification should be. Acceptable deviation depends on
many factors: the resolution and accuracy of the CMM, the length
and rigidity of the stylus, the quality of the probe, the quality of the
stylus tip, and the cleanliness of the environment, among other
things. The standard deviation should normally lie in the range of a
few micrometers, however.
In order to decide whether the qualification result is acceptable,
further factors have to be taken into account (among other things,
the size of the tolerances to be determined with the stylus). You can,
however, use the standard deviation as a basis for your decision. If the
standard deviation is insignificant relative to the part tolerances and
the radius looks to be correct, then it is probably okay to proceed
even though you may have got a 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) standard
deviation.
If in doubt, check the probe cluster for stability and correct assembly
in accord with the probe documentation. You can also clean the stylus
and the reference sphere and repeat qualification, aiming at better
results.
If the results are stable, it probably means that you have reached the
limit based on all of the factors mentioned above. In this case, you
can regroup the probes and thereby possibly increase the rigidity. You
can determine any systematic errors of the CMM by qualification with
a short, rigid stylus (the MasterProbe, for example).
Determining the Reference Sphere Position

The reference sphere of the CMM is a sphere of known diameter on a
metal extension, known as the stem, mounted on the measuring
table. Calypso must know the exact position of this reference sphere
for orientation and in order to analyze the qualification measurements
correctly.
You must use a reference stylus for this purpose: This reference stylus
is generally identified by a red dot on the head. The reference stylus
for measuring and trigger probe heads is a vertical 8 mm stylus of
known length and having a ruby of known diameter. It is important to
use a defined angular setting for Renishaw probe/stylus systems and
RDS.
Caution
hss
! Never use the reference stylus for a normal measurement during
operation.
4-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Preconditions The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the
reference sphere are as follows:
– You have opened a measurement plan.
– The reference probe is installed. The procedure for installing the
reference probe is described in the section entitled ➤“How to
Install a Probe” on page 4-11.
How to Determine the Position of the Reference

Sphere
You must always probe the reference sphere with the reference stylus
if the reference sphere is moved, if thermal conditions have changed
since the position was last determined, or if the CMM was moved to
the home position.
To determine the position of the reference sphere:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-25

2 Make sure that the radius of the reference sphere and the serial
number displayed on the screen match the radius and the serial
number on the qualification certificate of the reference sphere.
These values were entered by the Zeiss Customer Services
engineer. If they do not match the data on the certificate, proceed
as described in ➤“How to Change the Data of the Reference
Sphere” on page 4-27
3 Check that the reference probe is displayed in the Probes picklist.
4 Click on the Ref. Sphere Position button.
Calypso asks whether the reference probe has been inserted.
5 Click on Yes.
If you click on No, Calypso will use the data of the last probe that
was qualified.
In either case, you will be prompted to enter the direction of the
reference sphere post:
6 Define the Angle of Reference Sphere Post by clicking on the

appropriate button to copy the values automatically into the input
fields.
When you look at the reference sphere from above (Z+ direction),
so that the X axis leads to the right and the Y axis points “up”, the
shaft of the sphere will point into one of the four quadrants of the
X-Y coordinate system.
7 Probe the reference sphere once in the stylus direction. You do this
by positioning the stylus over the north pole of the reference
sphere probing downward.
Calypso automatically measures the reference sphere for CNC-
compatible CMMs. The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y and Z
fields (see ➤“About the Results of Stylus Qualification” on
page 4-24).
8 Click on OK to close the Qualification window.
The position of the reference sphere is now known to the system.
4-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Change the Data of the Reference Sphere

If the values entered by the Zeiss Customer Service engineer do not
match the data on the certificate, the settings have to be changed.
The procedure for changing the data of the reference sphere is as
follows:
1 In the Probe Qualification dialog box, click on the Reference
Sphere Administration button.
The data of the reference sphere are displayed.
2 To edit the radius:
• Highlight the field for the radius.
• Click on the number in the gray input field at the bottom edge
of the dialog box.
• Enter the number from the qualification certificate.
3 To change the serial number:
• Highlight the field for the serial number.
• Click on the number in the gray input field at the bottom edge
of the dialog box.
• Correct the serial number.
4 If necessary, change the clearance planes to suit the type of
clamping device you are using (clearance planes for mount) and
the position of the stem.
The clearance distances define the clearance planes for qualifying
the stylus and the probe.
NOTE Minimum clearance planes are defined even when the clearances are
hss
set to zero; the reference point is an imaginary point slightly outside
the reference sphere (depending on the axial direction), not the center
of the sphere.
5 Click on OK to confirm your entries.

The Probe Qualification Window reappears on the screen.
NOTE The same procedure is also used to add a subsequent reference

hss
sphere.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-27

How to Print the Probe Data List

You can print your current probe data in the form of an overview. By
entering information in an initialization file, you can specify what is to
appear in the probe data log.
To print the probe data list:
screen.
button.
The Probe Administration dialog box will open. The Data page is
on top.
You can print all or part of the probe data shown here.
3 In the menu Edit (lower right), select menu point Print.
The Probe printout dialog box is opened.
4 In the list, click on the data you wish to print for your probes.
5 Start printing with OK.
The desired probe data are printed.
4-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Structure of the Ini File for Probe Printout

The initialization file “probeProtocol.ini” is located in the directory
...\Calypso\home\om\config\equip. It is a text file that can be edited
with a conventional editor.
This file is automatically created and assigned values the first time a
probe data list is printed.
The example below shows the structure of this file:
Version: 1.0
% typ name available
stylusdata: X 1
stylusdata: Y 1
stylusdata: Z 1
stylusdata: R 1
stylusdata: S 1
stylusdata: ForceX 1
stylusdata: ForceY 1
stylusdata: ForceZ 1
stylusdata: shaftX 1
stylusdata: shaftY 1
stylusdata: shaftZ 1
stylusdata: Temp 1
stylusdata: Date 1
stylusdata: geometry 0
stylusdata: Mode 0
stylusdata: Paranamest3 0
stylusdata: aAxis 1
stylusdata: bAxis 1
stylusdata: cncCalib 0
% typ name value
setting: column 5
setting: width 12
In the first block, the name of the probe datum appears under
“name” and the key for inclusion in the report appears under
“available”:
1 means “in the report“, 0 means “not in the report”
In the second block, the setting appears under “name” and the
corresponding value appears under “value” (column: number of
columns in the table, width: column width).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-29

Setting the Base / Start Alignment

The calculated alignment of a workpiece is completed in Calypso by
defining a base alignment (coordinate system). If this base alignment
can only be determined through time-consuming measurements or
scanning, you can manually define a start alignment, which will then
be used to measure the base alignment.
You need to be familiar with the procedures for automatic feature
recognition in order to work with base and/or start alignments (see
➤“How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition” on
page 5-5).
The tasks that can be involved in defining the base/start alignments
are as follows:
– ➤“How to Load an Existing Base Alignment/Start Alignment” on
page 4-33
If there is an existing base/start alignment that meets your
requirements, you can use it for your current measurement plan.
– ➤“How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment” on page 4-34
A measurement plan must be open before you can create a new
base/start alignment. There are several ways of creating a
base/start alignment, and you will have to choose one (see
➤“Alternative Alignment Methods” on page 4-53).
– ➤“How to Update a Base / Start Alignment” on page 4-37
If the position of the workpiece has changed but the part
alignment is still defined, you can recalculate alignment without
having to redefine the base/start alignment from scratch.
– ➤“How to Edit an Existing Base / Start Alignment” on page 4-41
You can change the parameters (e.g. a primary reference) of an
open (active) base or start alignment at any time.
– ➤“Moving or Rotating the Base / Start Alignment” on page 4-42
You can offset or rotate a base or start alignment in order to
customize it to suit the positions of features on a workpiece.
– ➤“How to Delete a Base Alignment” on page 4-52
– ➤“How to set a base alignment to zero” on page 4-53
For each of these tasks, you start from the part alignment template.
The part alignment template is described in full detail in Load Create
Or Change Base Alignment in the Calypso Online Help.
4-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Part Alignment Basics

The part alignment is the user-defined coordinate system for your
measurement plan. The base alignment (see also ➤“The Base
Alignment” on page 4-31) essentially locates the part on the table for
the CMM. Why is that necessary?
In its clamped position on the table, a workpiece can be tilted or out
of line. The CMM still has to perform accurately, so before you start
measuring you have to define (compute) the position of the
workpiece relative to the axes of the CMM. This is precisely what
happens when the part alignment is computed: the part alignment is
virtually tilted and turned until certain geometric features of the
workpiece are parallel to the CMM's axes.
The part alignment needs to locate the part within the six degrees of
freedom (three rotational and three translational).
The part alignment is based on five references:
– The primary reference (rotation in space), which constrains two of
the three rotational degrees of freedom; for example, the rotation
about the X and Y axes.
– The secondary reference (rotation in plain), which constrains the
third rotational degree of freedom; for example, the rotation about
the X axis.
– Three tertiary constraints for the three translational degrees of
freedom. These are the origins of X, Y and Z. With these, the part
alignment is defined.
You can save several part alignments within one measurement plan.
You can define a new part alignment using Prerequisites → Utilities
→ Alignment or with the Tool Box.
The Base Alignment

The base alignment is a part alignment that defines the position of
the workpiece on the CMM. There is only one base alignment in every
measurement plan. In order to view, define or change the base
alignment, please read ➤“How to Create a New Base / Start
Alignment” on page 4-34
The base alignment parameters correspond to the machine
coordinate system. The part alignments inside a measurement plan,
on the other hand, correspond either to the base alignment or to
other part alignments. They are used for the correct evaluation of the
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-31

When you set the base alignment, you have to decide which features
you want to use for defining the workpiece position. If these features
have already been measured, the current workpiece position will be
calculated and saved.
Otherwise, with machine-remote programming, the workpiece
position can be calculated later. This can be accomplished by loading
a saved base alignment (see ➤“How to Load an Existing Base
Alignment/Start Alignment” on page 4-33) or by manually adapting a
defined base alignment (see ➤“How to Update a Base / Start
Alignment” on page 4-37).
It is important to differentiate between 2 processes:
– The assignments of the elements to the base alignment's 5
references are saved in the measurement plan.
– The results of the calculation of the base alignment are saved in a
file.
The Start Alignment

A part alignment is defined as a start alignment, when it can be used
as a preliminary base alignment. It must be possible to create by
manual probing.
Like the base alignment, the start alignment defines the positioning of
the workpiece on the CMM. It is only permitted once in a
measurement plan. You will use a start alignment certain cases only.
What is the purpose of Why do you need a start alignment?
a start alignment?
– A start alignment can be used, when the base alignment needed
or intended for the CNC run is based on a large number of
features, for example on many intersections or other constructions
which require that you probe several features.
In this case, you can define a simple part alignment, for example a
3-2-1-alignment, and use it as a start alignment. The start
alignment can then be used to generate the base alignment so
that the probing and calculations can be performed for a
measurement plan. As soon as Calypso recognizes the base
alignment, you can switch from the start alignment to the base
alignment.
– If the base alignment features that are required or planned for the
CNC run are to be acquired by scanning, you must use a start
alignment. These features cannot be probed manually, since only
the CNC run is sufficiently precise to achieve the required constant
probing force.
4-32 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Define start alignment The start alignment is defined and edited in the same manner and
with the same functions as a base alignment. For this purpose, use
the Start Alignment property page in the Load Create Or Change
Base Alignment dialog box.
It is only the CNC run that cannot be set in the start alignment.
Activate start To activate the start alignment for the current measurement plan, you
alignment must select the corresponding check box on the Start Alignment
property page.
For information on how to view, define or change the start alignment,
please read ➤“How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment” on
page 4-34.
What to Bear in Mind when Defining Constraints

The features you choose to define a part alignment depend to a very
large extent on the geometry of the workpiece and the measurement
task you want to accomplish. Here are the basic rules:
– Choose at least three different physical features. They can all be
planes, but they must not be the same plane.
– The features you choose have to compose a sensible base
alignment. For example, you would not choose two surfaces that
are parallel to each other, such as the top flat surface of a part and
the top of a cylinder that rises above it. In this case, the second
surface tells Calypso little more about the orientation of the part
than the first surface did.
– For each feature, spread out the points as far as possible.
– The primary constraint must be a three-dimensional object (a
plane, cylinder or cone, or a sphere, if another sphere defines all 3
tertiary origins).
– The secondary constraint can be two-dimensional (such as a line),
but can also be three-dimensional. (Or a circle or ellipse, if another
circle or ellipse defines both tertiary origins which belong to the
plane of the primary axis.)
– The tertiary constraints are typically one-dimensional (a point), but
can also be two- or three-dimensional.
How to Load an Existing Base

Alignment/Start Alignment
If you have or another user has already defined a part alignment, you
can use it as a base or start alignment for your current measurement
plan if it satisfies your requirements.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-33

Follow these steps:

1 In the list of prerequisites, click on the Base / Start Alignment
button.
The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment appears on the
screen. The Base Alignment property card is in front.
2 To load a start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment property

card.
3 Select the option Load a Saved Base Alignment or Load
Existing Start Alignment.
4 Select the name of the part alignment that you wish to load from
the list.
5 Click on OK to return to the prerequisites.
NOTE At the very least, you must match the part alignment to the position
hss
of the workpiece. (See ➤“How to Update a Base / Start Alignment”
on page 4-37.)
The Base / Start Alignment button will now be green.

When loading the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position is
changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is
why the representation in the CAD window does not change.
How to Create a New Base / Start Alignment

If you prefer not to use the standard method to define a part
alignment, you have a choice of three other methods: 3D Best Fit and
RPS or P6 Method (see ➤“Alternative Alignment Methods” on
page 4-53).
To create a new base / start alignment:
4-34 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)


button.
The Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box
appears on the screen. The Base Alignment property card is in
front.
2 To create a new start alignment: Click on the Start Alignment

property card.
3 Select either Create New Base Alignment or Create New Start
Alignment.
4 From the list, select the method you want to use for alignment (see
➤“Alternative Alignment Methods” on page 4-53).
5 Click on OK.
The Alignment dialog box appears on the screen.
This dialog box has five buttons and fields for defining the five
constraints. Calypso automatically enters the information in the
fields when you probe the workpiece to define the requisite
features.
You do not need to probe the workpiece if you have already
measured the features required for the part alignment.
6 Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control
panel.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-35

7 Define a feature for the primary constraint. There are a number of

possibilities:
The feature already exists: – Click on the appropriate button of the constraint.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
– Select the feature of your choice from the picklist.
– Click on OK.
Calypso transfers the feature to the appropriate field.
The feature does not exist in If you are working on the CMM:
the measurement plan as – You do not have to exit the Alignment dialog box.
yet:
– Probe point by point.
Calypso’s automatic feature recognition engine automatically
registers the geometry of the feature.
– Click on OK when you have fully defined the feature as a
constraint.
Calypso will automatically transfer the feature to the
measurement plan.
If you are working away from the machine:
– Click on the appropriate button of the constraint in the
Alignment dialog box.
– Select the New option.
– Click on the appropriate button of the feature you want to
define.
– Click on OK.
– In the CAD window, either probe the necessary number of
points on the feature with the mouse.
- or -
– click on one of the buttons Define a Space Point, Define
Circle on a Cylinder Define 2-D Line or Extract Features to
import the entire feature right away.
Calypso updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of
the dialog box.
– Click on OK to close the definition template for the feature.
8 Define the features for the other constraints. This is a matter of

repeating steps 4 and 5.
9 Click on OK when you have finished defining all the constraints.
The part alignment is saved and the dialog box is closed. The Base /
Start Alignment button will now be green.
4-36 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Once all of the constraints have been defined, Calypso will enter the
corresponding features in the appropriate fields (see the example in
the illustration below).
The default name for the measuring plan is derived from the name of
the newly calculated base alignment. You can, however, highlight the
name and overwrite it with a name of your choice. Click on the
Comment button if you want to type in and save a comment
containing additional information.
How to Update a Base / Start Alignment

If the workpiece was shifted, turned or tilted out of position slightly,
you will have to repeat the computed alignment. Calypso will assist
you.
To adjust the base / start alignment to suit a new workpiece position:
button.
front.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-37

2 To adjust a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property

card.
3 Select either Change Active Base Alignment or Change
Current Start Alignment.
4 Click on OK.
The Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. You can see
which features were used to define the part alignment.
5 Click on the Execute Manual Run Now button.
Calypso guides you through the procedure for computing
alignment. The Manual CNC dialog box appears on the screen for
this purpose.
The instructions in this dialog box tell you exactly which feature
has to be probed and how often to ensure successful
alignment.This dialog box is fully described in Manual CNC in the
Calypso Online Help.
6 Using the joysticks, take the indicated number of probings on the
indicated feature of the part. The information in the dialog box is
updated after each probing. In this manner, you know how often
you have to probe.
When you take the final probing for a constraint, the window
displays the feature needed for the next constraint (such as 2-D
Line1).
After the probing, Calypso takes a moment to update the part
alignment and display the new image in the CAD window. Then
you are returned to the Alignment window.
4-38 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

7 Click on OK to save this part alignment and return to the

prerequisites.
The Base / Start Alignment button will now be green.
When adjusting the base / start alignment, only the workpiece
position will be changed, not, however, the definition of the features
used. That is why the representation in the CAD window does not
change.
Example: How to adapt a base alignment in

an iterative process with abortion condition
You can enhance precision by computing alignment of the part
alignment iteratively. You do this by defining a loop in the Load
Create or Change Base Alignment window. If you use a abortion
condition instead of defining the end of the loop by specifying a
certain number of repetitions, you can predefine the target precision
for the new part alignment.
NOTE The Automatic Run check box has to be marked in the measurement
hss plan in the definition template of the base alignment.
1 In the Load Create or Change Base Alignment dialog box,

activate the radio button for the Change Active Base Alignment
option.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-39

2 Click on Loop.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click on Add.
4 Enter “5”, for example, as the number of cycles in the End field.
5 Point to the Abortion Condition field, right-click to open the
shortcut menu and select Formula....
6 In the Formula... window, enter the following expression:
baseSystem().valueA<0.05
This Boolean expression is checked at the end of each loop and
when it is satisfied (value of the expression = true), the loop is
stopped. The value of the valueA variable is recalculated each
time the loop is run. It stands for the approximation between the
measured alignment and the alignment stored in memory. In the
standard protocol valueA is designated “Delta”.
7 Close the Formula, Loop and Load Create or Change Base
Alignment dialog boxes.
8 Start the measurement plan.
Alignment terminates immediately if the workpiece was not moved in
the interim since the alignment was last computed.
If a marginal change was made to the position of the workpiece,
alignment is computed iteratively – until the difference (delta)
between two consecutive alignments is less than the value you
specified (0.05).
4-40 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

See the default printout for information on the alignment procedure

and the results, including the value for delta.
How to Edit an Existing Base / Start

Alignment
When a base / start alignment is changed, the nominal values of all of
the features in current measurement plan will be changed. The
position of the base alignment relative to the workpiece is changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if
only measured features are used.
To change a base / start alignment:
button.
front.
2 To change a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment

property card.
3 Select either Change Active Base Alignment or Change
Current Start Alignment.
4 Click on OK.
The Alignment dialog box appears on the screen. It shows which
features were used to define the part alignment.
5 If you want to replace a feature for a particular constraint with
another feature which has already been defined:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-41

• Click on the button for the constraint in question, to open the

Selection (Features) dialog box.
• In the list, click on the feature you want to use.
• Click on OK to confirm and close the Selection dialog box.
The feature has now been replaced.
• Click on OK to return to the list of prerequisites.
6 If you want to assign a particular constraint a feature that has yet
to be defined:
• Click on the button for the constraint in question.
The Selection (Features) dialog box is opened.
• Select New and choose the type of feature you want to define
(e.g. plane or 2D straight).
• Confirm by clicking OK and use the CMM to probe the
necessary points of the feature.
• Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control
panel.
As soon as you start probing, Calypso updates the feature
definition at the left-hand side of the window.
• After probing, click on OK to close the feature’s template.
• Click on OK to return to the list of prerequisites.
After every change in the part alignment, the Base / Start
Alignment button must be green. When a base / start alignment is
changed, the nominal values of all of the features in current
measurement plan will be changed. The position of the base / start
alignment relative to the workpiece will be changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if
only measured features are used.
Moving or Rotating the Base / Start

Alignment
Sometimes, the coordinate values of a workpiece’s features needed to
define the base / start alignment are not 0, or the features are not
parallel to a part alignment axis but rotated. In these situations, the
base / start alignment can be moved (offset) or rotated to the desired
position.
In such cases, the base / start alignment is always moved first, and
then rotated.
4-42 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Moving the base / start An offset also enables you to move the origin of the part alignment to
alignment a point that cannot be probed. You can define an offset in any and all
of the three coordinate directions.
Rotating the base / Using the rotation function, it is possible to rotate a part alignment
start alignment around a coordinate axis. There are two methods for entering the
angle of rotation:
– Rotate by an angle:
The desired angle of rotation is entered directly in degrees.
– Rotate by distances:
The angle of rotation is entered via vector coordinates.
The rotation of the reference axis by secondary reference is
described separately (see➤“Rotate Distance” on page 4-49).
How to Offset a Base / Start Alignment

Shifting a part alignment is part of the Offset special function.
To offset a part alignment:
button.
front.
2 To offset a start alignment: click on the Start Alignment property
card.
3 Select Change Active Base Alignment or Change Current Start
Alignment and click on OK.
4 Click on Special in the Base Alignment or Start Alignment
dialog box.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-43

5 Click on the Offset button.

The Offset entry and input fields for the coordinates are added to
the Special Functions dialog box.
6 Enter the amount by which you want to offset the origin:

• To do so, click on the X, Y or Z field or fields, as appropriate.
• Enter the corresponding value or values.
7 Once you have entered the coordinates for the origin, click on OK.
The offset is saved and the window is closed. The new position of the
part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
How to Rotate a Part Alignment by an Angle

Rotating a part alignment about a selected axis is part of the Add
Rotation special function. After computing alignment, you can rotate
the part alignment through the desired angle.
To rotate a part alignment by entering an angle:
button.
front.
2 To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a start alignment:
click on the Start Alignment property card.
4 Click on the Specialbutton.
4-44 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

5 Click on the Rotate by an angle button.

The Around entry and input fields for the spatial axis and the
angle of rotation will appear in the Special Functions dialog box.
6 Enter the spatial axis around which you want the alignment to be
rotated, and the angle:
• Click in the Around list and select the spatial axis of your
choice.
The list entry is not updated until after you have closed the
window.
• Click in the Angle field and enter the angle of rotation (in
degrees).
7 Repeat steps 6 and 5 if you want to define rotations about other
spatial axes as well.
8 After you have entered all of the desired rotations, click on OK.
The rotations are saved and the window is closed. The new position
of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
How to Rotate a Part Alignment by Distances

When a part alignment is rotated by distance (Cartesian) the angle of
rotation is given using vector coordinates.
To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a part alignment:
button.
front.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-45

2 To perform a Cartesian rotation (by distance) of a start alignment:

click on the Start Alignment property card.
4 Click on the Special button.
5 Click on the Rotate by distances button.
The Around entry, a selection field for the spatial axis and input
fields the respective complementary coordinates are added to the
Special Functions window, along with a field for displaying the
resulting angle of rotation.
6 Enter the spatial axis around which you want the system rotated,
and the vector for rotation:
• In the Around list, select the corresponding spatial axis.
The coordinate input fields immediately change accordingly.
The list entry, however, is not updated until you have closed the
window.
• Specify the vector with its two coordinates in the coordinate
system of the plane of rotation (the plane of rotation depends
on the selected axis of rotation).
The associated angle will appear immediately in the display
field, calculated as the arc tangent of the quotient of coordinate
2 divided by coordinate 1.
7 Repeat steps 6 and 5 if you want to define rotations about other
spatial axes as well.
8 Once you have entered the rotations, click on OK.
4-46 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The rotations are saved and the window is closed. The new position
of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
Rotate Reference Axis by Secondary

Reference
In addition to the offset (movement) and rotation of a base / start
alignment, there are other, special options for changing a base / start
alignment.
To access these, click on Special in the Special Functions dialog in
the definition template for the workpiece coordinate system. Here
you will find three options for using a secondary reference to set the
reference axis.
Option Function
Rotate Distance Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a specific
(to a given axis) coordinate of a specified feature reaches a given size.
Rotate to Origin Line Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a line
passing through the origin and the nominal coordinate intersects the
tertiary reference (measured point) in the plane.
After this rotation, the X-value and Y-value of the nominal point and
the tertiary point have same ratio.
Rotate to equal deviation Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis until a line
between a point in the plane (the nominal coordinate) and the
tertiary reference has a slope of 45°.
After this rotation, the delta-X and delta-Y of the nominal point and
the tertiary point are equal (delta-X (delta-Y) is the difference
between the two X-values (Y-values)).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-47

Rotate to Origin line
Actual point (measured)
Y act Nominal coordinates
X act
Y nom
X nom
Rotate to equal deviation
Actual point (measured)
Nominal coordinates
∆Y
∆X
The options only appear in the Special Functions dialog box, when
they would be reasonable to use and the base / start alignment
satisfies certain preconditions.
Preconditions To be able to use the Rotate reference axis by secondary
reference, the following preconditions must be met:
– The secondary constraint of the base / start alignment was defined
by either a circle, a slot, a rectangle, an ellipse or a point.
– For both coordinates of the plane in which the base alignment is
rotated, the tertiary constraint must be
• defined with the same feature, or
• with 2 planes, or
• with two 2D lines, or
• remain unchanged in both coordinates.
4-48 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Rotate Distance
Use the Rotate Distance function to define a value (distance)
separating a defined coordinate of a given feature from the part
alignment. In this case, Calypso rotates the part alignment until it is
set to this distance.
Example The example below illustrates the Rotate Distance function:
The zero point of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The
center of the bore on the right is 50 mm away in the X direction. The
“Rotate Distance” function will be used to reduce this distance to the
nominal 40 mm.
50
Calypso rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore
until the distance you specified is achieved.
40
Rotate to Origin Line

The function Rotate to Origin Line can only be performed when
certain conditions are met (see ➤“Rotate Reference Axis by
Secondary Reference” on page 4-47).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-49

This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a line going
through the coordinate origin will go through the point that was used
as the third reference when the base alignment was defined.
When using the “Rotate to Origin Line” function, Calypso rotates the
part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.
In the new coordinate system, the relationships between the X-values
and the Y-values for both points (the one defined by the line and the
point for the tertiary reference) are exactly equal. The Rotate to Origin
Line is in a sense a Rotate to Equal Relationships.
Example The following example illustrates the “Rotate to Origin Line”
function:
center of the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both
the X and Y-axis.
With (20,30), a line is defined in the X-Y plane, which passes through
the origin and the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the “Rotate to Origin Line“ function has been performed, the
line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right.
until the line touches the center of the bore on the right.
Rotate to equal deviation

The function Rotate to Equal Deviation can only be performed
when certain conditions are met (see ➤“Rotate Reference Axis by
Secondary Reference” on page 4-47).
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a specified line
with the slope 1 (equals 45°) will go through the point that was used
as the third reference when the base alignment was defined.
When using the “Rotate to Equal Deviation” function, Calypso
rotates the part alignment until the specified line touches the defined
point.
In the new coordinate system, the difference between the X-values
(between the just defined point and the point of the tertiary
reference) equals the difference between the Y-values – which is why
it is called “Rotate to Equal Deviation”.
Example The following example illustrates the “Rotate to Equal Deviation”
function:
center of the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both
the X and Y-axis.
4-50 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

A line is defined with (20,30) in the X-Y plane of the coordinate

system; it will pass with the slope 1 through the point at X = 20 mm,
Y = 30 mm.
After the “Rotate to Equal Deviation” function has been performed,
the line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right.
until the line touches the center of the bore on the right.
How to rotate the reference axis

To rotate the reference axis:
1 Make certain that the necessary Prerequisites for rotating the
reference axis have been met.
button.
front.
3 To rotate the reference axis in a start alignment: click on the Start
Alignment property card.
5 Click on the Special button.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once
the prerequisites are met, additional options and input fields will
appear in the upper part for Setting Reference Axis with a
Secondary Reference.
Enter
distance
6 Select the desired option:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-51

• Rotate to distance
• Rotate to Origin Line
• Rotate to Equal Deviation
7 Rotate to Distance: In the Rotate Distance input field, enter the
distance to be achieved by rotating (Caution: Pay attention to
sign).
8 In Rotate to Origin Line or Equal Deviation: In the input fields,
enter the coordinates of the point through which the line should
pass.
9 Click on OK to save the setting and close the dialog box.
10 Click on OK to close the Alignment Base / Start Alignment
window.
You can observe the rotation of the base alignment directly in the
CAD window.
How to Delete a Base Alignment

In Calypso, you can delete a part alignment when you no longer need
it.
Caution
hss
! If you delete a base alignment, you must define new part alignments.
(See ➤“How to Update a Base / Start Alignment” on page 4-37.)
To delete a part alignment:

1 Choose Delete base alignment from the File menu.
The Delete Base Alignment dialog box appears on the screen,
with a list of all the base alignments defined in Calypso.
2 Mark the name of the base alignment that you want to delete.
3 Click on OK.
The base alignment is deleted from Calypso.
Only the base alignment as such is deleted, not the constraints and
features on which it is based.
4-52 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to set a base alignment to zero

If you want to undo the settings made in defining a base alignment to
set it up again, you can set it to zero.
To reset a base alignment to zero:
1 Select Prerequisites→ Utilities→ Set Base Alignment to Zero.
The base alignment will be reset and can be set up again.
Alternative Alignment Methods

Apart from the standard method (see ➤“How to Create a New Base /
Start Alignment” on page 4-34), you have a choice of three other
alignment methods:
3D Best Fit. The 3D Best Fit can be used to calculate the alignment for
workpieces for which no clear reference features have been defined.
This is a situation frequently encountered in freeform measurements.
The 3D Best Fit is a method that delivers the best possible fit between
any number of points or geometrical features and their specified
geometry.
Number of
points Description
at least 1, The errors between specified and actual points
no upper limit are squared and added up. The base alignment
is changed until this value is minimized.
RPS Method The RPS Method is primarily used for measuring body panels for
motor vehicles.
Number of
points Description
minimum 3, – A coordinate (for example Z) is fixed 3 times.
maximum 6 – A coordinate (for example Y) is fixed 2 times.
– A coordinate (for example X) is fixed 1 time.
RPS alignment is usually an iterative process
performed with the aid of a loop.
RPS is short for Reference Point System. RPS alignment is based on the
3-2-1 rule. Unlike other methods, RPS alignment is based on the
points that are specified in the drawing of the workpiece.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-53

Alignment is therefore subject to rules and is not wholly user-

definable. One of the advantages is therefore that different results
obtained with a given workpiece are comparable because they are all
based on the same system of coordinates.
P6 Method The P6 Method is particularly suitable for the alignment of pipes.
Number of
points Description
exactly 3 The first point defines the origin in X, Y, and Z.
The first and second points together define the
primary axis. The third point defines rotation
about this primary axis.
4-54 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Use an Alternative Alignment Method

To make an alignment in accord with the RPS, P6 or 3D Best Fit
method:
1 Open Prerequisites → Utilities and select the method of your
choice.
If you want to generate a new part alignment, click on Base /
Start Alignment in the list of the prerequisites and then select the
desired procedure.
The definition templates for all these methods are very similar in
appearance. The illustration below shows the template for RPS
alignment by way of example.
The dialog box for RPS alignment has X, Y and Z check boxes that
you must use to define which feature constrains which degrees of
freedom.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-55

2 Click on Select Features to define the features you want to use

for alignment.
This opens the Selection (Features) dialog box.
Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed.
3 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on the features you
need for alignment.
The features you select in this way are listed in the definition
template for alignment.
4 If you have to define constraint features in addition to those
already listed:
• Click in the first column to the left of the name of the feature
for which you want to define a constraint.
An arrow appears, indicating the active line.
• Click on the Select References button.
The Selection dialog box opens. Here all of the features that
have been defined will be displayed.
• Click on the feature you want to define as a constraint.
• Click on OK to transfer the constraint to the definition
template.
• Repeat this step as often as necessary until all the constraints
you need have been defined.
5 If you want to fit actual values to nominal positions as part of
alignment:
• Click in the field you want to change.
4-56 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

• Define the position in the columns headed Nominal X,

Nominal Y and Nominal Z.
• Repeat this step as often as necessary to define specified
positions for other features.
6 The next step in RPS alignment is to define the fixation direction
for each feature you selected:
• Click on the X, Y or Z check box, as appropriate, to select the
fixation direction.
• Repeat this step for each feature in the list until all fixation
directions have been defined.
7 Select the alignment method to be used in the CNC run (for more
information see Alignment in the Calypso Online Help).
8 If you are ready to execute the alignment you just defined, click on
the Execute Manual Run Now button.
Calypso will step you through the alignment procedure and
prompt you to take probings (see ➤“Basics about Manual Control”
on page 8-10).
9 Click on OK.
The dialog box is closed and the coordinate system is saved.
See also ➤“Use of Loops in Alignment according to RPS” on
page 14-26.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-57

Prerequisites for the Rotary Table

With Calypso, you can also measure workpieces on a rotary table. The
rotary table can be used only referred to the overall measurement
plan, i.e. all features in the measurement plan are measured with the
aid of the rotary table.
For this purpose, the rotary table is fastened on the operating plate of
the CMM and connected to the control if it is not already integrated
in the CMM.
System setting In the system configuration, you must have activated the rotary table
on the Rotary Table tab of the CMM Configuration notebook
under Extras → Workroom → CMM.
An additional element will then appear in the prerequisites: the rotary

table icon.
The rotary table must be activated and its axis (the RT axis) must be
defined in the prerequisites for the measurement plan in which you
wish to use the rotary table.
Icon color The Rotary Table button remains red if the RT axis is not defined or is
invalid. If the icon has a yellow background, the rotary table is
irrelevant for the measurement plan. The button background changes
to green as soon as the rotary table is activated for the measurement
plan and the RT axis is valid.
4-58 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Preconditions The following preconditions must be satisfied before you can define
the rotary table:
– The presence of a rotary table must be entered in the system
configuration under Extras → Workroom → CMM (on the
Rotary Table tab).
General procedure Proceed as follows if you wish to use the rotary table in a
measurement plan:
– Activate the rotary table in the prerequisites.
– Load the rotary-table axis (RT axis), if the RT axis was performed
with a different measurement plan, or define the tasks for
determining the rotary-table axis.
– If necessary, pre-align the rotary table at the start of the run.
– Define the necessary features and check the associated clearance
planes and clearance moves.
For rotational parts, use RT clearance planes.
– In the features, bear in mind the particularities involved in
measurement with the rotary table.
Additional options are available to you when using the rotary table:
– You can control the rotary table directly.
– Particularities must be kept in mind in dividing a feature with rotary
table coupling.
Determining the RT Axis and RT

Prealignment
Even with the most precise positioning, the rotary-table axis deviates
slightly from the ideal axis. These deviations falsify the measurement
results, however, and thus have to be compensated.
For this reason, the exact rotary-table axis must be determined for
each measurement plan in which the rotary table is to be used.
Deviations of the Deviations of the rotary-table axis can refer to the position and to the
RT axis orientation. These deviations can be used to calculate the angle with
respect to the main axis, the eccentricity and the wobble angle and
thus the corresponding compensation values.
The deviations will be saved together with the associated
measurement plan. These values can be used for further
measurements with the rotary table once they have been determined,
provided that nothing is changed on the rotary table. Depending on
the number of measurements, the rotary-table precision and the
ambient conditions, it may be advisable to repeat the determination
of the rotary-table axis.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-59

For this purpose, call the Rotary Table dialog box from the
Prerequisites. You have several options here for defining the
compensation values for the RT axis used in the measurement plan:
– The existing values for the RT axis are reused.
– The RT axis is requalified at the start of the CNC run.
– The RT axis is manually defined immediately, and the values
determined are saved in the measurement plan (for later use).
RT pre-alignment
The rotary table must be in an exactly defined position for certain
measurements. You also have several options to perform this RT pre-
alignment:
– Pre-alignment is defined in the Prerequisites and is thus performed
at the start of the measurement plan (see ➤“How to Activate the
Rotary Table and Define the RT Axis” on page 4-61).
– Pre-alignment is performed manually (see ➤“How to Perform RT
Prealignment Manually” on page 4-64).
4-60 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Activate the Rotary Table and Define the RT

Axis
To activate the rotary table for the current measurement plan:
1 Select Prepare → Prepare rotary table or click on the Rotary
Table button in the list of Prerequisites.
The Rotary Table dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Select the check box RT activated for this Measurement Plan.

3 Select Load existing RT axis if the RT axis has already been
defined for this measurement plan and does not have to be
redefined.
4 Select Measure RT Axis if you wish to define the RT axis with the
measurement plan.
In the last case, you must inform Calypso which feature to use
when defining RT axis.
New buttons appear under the Options. The square button Switch
to Feature Menu is used to specify the feature from the current
measurement plan to be used when defining the RT axis.
5 Click on the Import Measurement Plan button and select a
suitable measurement plan if you wish to use one of its features
for defining the RT axis.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-61

Caution
hss
! This measurement plan must have the same position as the base
alignment.
The features of the imported measurement plan are added to the

end of the list of features in the background.
6 Click on the Switch to Feature Menu button.
The Selection dialog box will open.
7 Choose the feature with which the RT axis is to be defined. The
3-D line, cylinder and cone are suitable.
8 Under RT prealignment at start of run, specify whether the
rotary table is to move to home position at the start of the CNC
run and whether the workpiece is to be mechanically aligned at
the beginning.
This is advisable for narrow bores, for example, if the risk of a
collision during a CNC adjustment would be too great.
9 If the workpiece possesses special characteristics, specify whether
the workpiece is rotationally symmetrical (shorter clearance paths
possible) and which retraction direction is to be preferred under RT
clearance paths.
The Rotary Table button is now green.
4-62 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Define the RT Axis Manually

To define the rotary table axis manually:
1 Select Prerequisites → Prepare rotary table or click on the
Rotary Table button in the list of Prerequisites.
2 Select the check box RT activated for the Measurement Plan.

3 Select Measure RT axis.
New buttons appear under the Options. The square button Switch
to Feature Menu is used to specify the feature from the current
measurement plan to be used when defining the RT axis.
4 Click on the Import Measurement Plan button and select a
suitable measurement plan if you wish to use one of its features
for defining the RT axis.
Caution
hss
! This measurement plan must have the same position as the base
alignment.
The features of the imported measurement plan are added to the

end of the list of features in the background.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-63

5 Click on the Switch to Feature Menu button.

The Selection dialog box will open.
6 Specify which feature to use when defining the RT axis and
confirm with OK.
The 3-D line, cylinder and cone are suitable.
7 Click on the Measure now button and follow the instructions.
Calypso will guide you through the manual definition of the RT
axis.
The determined RT axis is saved for the current measurement plan
and can be reactivated for the next use with the option Load
existing RT axis.
How to Perform RT Prealignment Manually

If there are tight bores and the risk of collision would be too high
during CNC adjustment, the RT prealignment should be performed
manually.
To perform RT prealignment of the rotary table manually:
1 Select Prerequisites → Prepare rotary table or click on the
Rotary Table button in the list of Prerequisites.
4-64 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

2 Select the check box RT activated for this Measurement Plan.

3 Specify whether the rotary table is to move to home position under
RT prealignment at start of run.
4 Select the check box Align workpiece mechanically and set RT
position to and enter the required rotary-table position.
A new button will appear under the input field.
5 Click on Execute now and follow the further instructions.
Calypso will guide you through manual prealignment of the rotary
table.
RT Clearance Planes
A few particularities are involved for the clearance paths and
clearance planes when a rotary table is used in a measurement plan.
Clearance paths If the rotary-table position changes during the CNC run from one
feature to the next, the probe must be moved clear according to a
defined strategy before the table turns. Calypso uses information
about the workpiece from the nominal data for this purpose.
If the workpiece in question is rotationally symmetrical, Calypso can
shorten the retract paths because there can be no “bulges” formed
by the diagonals.
In this case, you should activate the option Rotationally
symmetrical part with RT axis center in the Rotary Table dialog
box. Depending on the shape of the workpiece, you can also activate
only one or both of the retraction options here.
Clearance planes As soon as the rotary table is active, additional new clearance planes
and groups are available for the features. The designations of these
clearance planes are composed of RTSE or RTG and an axial direction.
If you use the rotary table with rotationally symmetrical objects such
that the workpiece is always measured from the same direction
(direction of the CMM) as the rotary table is turned, it is
recommended to use these RT clearance planes (RTSE...) or RT
clearance groups (RTG...).
If you use the usual clearance plane (SE), bear in mind that this
clearance plane is linked to the base alignment. In other words, it
rotates about the rotary table axis together with the workpiece (see
illustration).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-65

The RT clearance planes or groups do not rotate with the base

alignment (and thus the workpiece) but are instead fixed. The position
of the RT clearance planes is referred to the unrotated base alignment
at a RT position of 0 degrees (see illustration).
RT position 45 degree
RT position 0 degree
Y
Probing direction Probing direction
0°
SE +X
X
SE +X RTSE +X RTSE +X
How to Control the Rotary Table Directly

If a rotary table is active, you can control it directly with Calypso.
To control the rotary table directly:
1 Click on the RT travel commands icon in the menu bar.
The RT travel commands dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on Read to read in the current rotary-table position, if

necessary.
This can be advisable after a manual movement, for example.
The recognized position is indicated below the icon. It is indicated
in relation to the rotary table (absolute position) and in relation to
the machine coordinate system.
4-66 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 If you wish to use the multiple of a certain incremental angle as the

position: Under the line 360 /, enter the divisor or the incremental
angle suitable for the current configuration (e.g. of the
workpiece).
The other field is filled automatically in each case.
After specifying the incremental angle, you can conveniently adopt
a multiple of the incremental angle in the input field Degree by
entering the divisor.
4 Then, enter the number of steps or click on the + and – buttons to
set the number of steps.
The calculated angle is shown in the input field Degree.
- or -
Enter the required angular position directly.
5 Click on Rotate to in order to move the rotary table to the desired
position.
The rotary table moves to the specified position.
6 Click on Close.
The dialog box closes.
Measuring Features with Rotary Table

Two additional parameters are important for measurement with the
rotary table: the rotary table position (RT position) and the rotation or
non-rotation of the base alignment.
– RT position
When features are measured with the rotary table, exactly one
rotary table position is assigned to each feature. This position is
saved together with the feature.
The rotary table can thus move to the required position for each
measurement, irrespective of the sequence of features in the
measurement plan.
– Base alignment rotating / not rotating
The values received in the machine coordinate system are
converted to the base alignment of the workpiece after correction.
When measurements are made on the workpiece, the base
alignment must be virtually rotated as well, of course.
If the measurements are to be used to determine the deviations of
the RT axis, however, there would be no difference if the base
alignment were to rotate. In this case the base alignment must
remain fixed. This is the only way to determine deviations of the
reference feature from the expected state of an ideal axis.
You can change these RT parameters for a feature at the individual
feature and in the Measurement Plan editor Features.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-67

Changing RT parameters in the feature

RT position In order to enter, check or change the RT position for the
measurement of a feature, open the definition template of the
feature, click on the Strategy button and double-click to open the
Clearance Data.
The input field RT position is contained in the Clearance Data

dialog box.
Base alignment Open the definition template of the feature to set Base alignment
rotating / not rotating rotating / not rotating.
– To switch off rotation of the base alignment, select the entry BA
not rotating with RT under Nominal Definition.
This setting is suitable for defining the RT axis.
– To switch on rotation of the base alignment, select the entry
Nominal Input under Nominal Definition.
This setting is suitable for measuring the workpiece.
Changing RT parameters in the Measurement Plan

editor Features
You can enter, check and, if necessary, change both additional
parameters In the Measurement Plan editor Features.
4-68 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

For this purpose, choose the entry RT position or Base Alignment

rotating with RT in the menu.
After you have marked the desired feature, enter any angle in the set
to box or select one of the default incremental angles. Select On or
Off for Base alignment rotating.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-69

Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary

table coupling
With the rotational pattern, you measure similar features or
workpieces that are arranged in a rotationally symmetrical
configuration. All features must possess the same orientation with
respect to the center of rotation (see illustration).
Center of symmetry
If you wish to measure one or several workpieces with rotational

pattern, you can use the rotary table for this purpose. If this
procedure is used, the rotary table always moves in several phases to a
position in which the respective feature (or workpiece) is probed from
the same direction.
Rotate rotary table as In order to use the rotary table for the rotational pattern, select the
well option Rotate rotary table as well in the Rotary Pattern dialog
box.
Clearance planes An RT clearance plane must be used, because only one clearance
plane can be allocated to the feature to be measured.
4-70 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Angle on workpiece A particularity arises from the different reference systems for angles
and RT position on the workpiece and the angle specification for the RT position (see
illustration).
270°
90°
Probing direction 180°

180° 0° 0°
270°
Rotary table Workpiece

90°
270°
90°
180° Probing direction

180° 0° 0°
270°
Workpiece
Rotary table
90°
If the rotary table (e.g. with a quadrant pattern) is to measure a part

feature that is at an angle of 90° on the workpiece, the rotary table
must rotate in the opposite direction, i.e. to the RT position 270°.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-71

Defining the Clearance Planes

Clearance planes enable CMMs with CNC capability to move probes
around the workpiece without risk of collision. These clearance planes
form a sort of imaginary “box” around the workpiece and clamping
device, protecting the probe against collision.
Names of the clearance The names of the clearance planes consist of the abbreviation SE,
planes followed by the direction to be protected. For example, SE +X. The
names of clearance planes that are additionally defined when a rotary
table is used consist of the abbreviation RTSE and the direction to be
protected. For example, RTSE +X.
Do not make the clearance planes unnecessarily large, because in
some cases this could lead to unfavorable routing or even collisions.
Caution
hss
! Any time the part alignment is changed such that a new origin or axis
alignment is defined, you must redefine the clearance planes. Failure
to do so may result in collisions with the part.
Preconditions The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the
clearance planes are as follows:
– All styli of the current probe must be qualified. See ➤“How to
Qualify a Stylus” on page 4-22.
– The size of the probe head must be defined in the system setup
under Extras → Workroom → CMM (on the Probe Head tab).
Strategies There are various strategies for defining the clearance planes:
– You can use the CMM to define the corners of the clearance plane
at positions just beyond the outside corners of the part.
– You can type in the X, Y and Z locations of the corners of the
clearance plane.
– If you do not have a CMM Position (or I-POS) button on your
CMM’s control panel (which allows you to record the current
position of the probe), then you can use the CMM to probe the
outside edges of the part itself as its clearance planes.
– If you use a CAD model, you can generate the clearance planes
automatically. All you have to do is tell Calypso how far you want
the clearance planes to be from the workpiece.
Closing edges Closing edges is a way of further restricting probe travel without the
need to change the size of the clearance planes. This can be useful,
for example if you have two or more workpieces positioned on the
table or the design of the clamping device is such that it could cause a
collision at an edge. The new route is calculated automatically. See
➤“How to Close Edges” on page 4-77
4-72 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Define the Clearance Planes with the

CMM
If you want to use the CMM to define the corners of the clearance
planes, your CMM joystick must have a button that can be used to
confirm the current position of the probe head.
To define the corners of the clearance planes:
1 In the list of Prerequisites, click on the Clearance Planes button.
The Clearance Planes dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside
the top, rear right corner of the workpiece (position 1):
(1)
(2)
3 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to

save the current position.
4 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside
the opposing diagonal (bottom front left corner) of the workpiece
(position 2):
5 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to
save the current position.
6 Click on OK to accept these values.
The “Update Clearance Plane Settings for Defined Features?”
message is displayed.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-73

7 Click on YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all
defined features, or on NO if you want to retain the original
clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in
Clearance Planes in the Calypso Online Help.
The Clearance Planes button is now green.
How to Define the Clearance Planes

Manually
If you want to define the corners of the clearance planes manually,
you must enter the x, y and z coordinates for two corners.
2 Type the coordinate values into the X, Y and Z boxes.
clearance planes.
Clearance Planesin the Calypso Online Help.
How to Define the Clearance Planes by

Probing
If you want to define the two corners of the clearance planes by
probing, you have to define the X, Y and Z coordinates by probing.
(1)
z y
(2)
x
4-74 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Caution
hss
! The clearance planes generated by this strategy are very close to the
workpiece.
In order to avoid the risk of damaging a probe, you should set a
clearance distance of at least 10 mm (see ➤“How to Move the
Approach Position Closer to the Feature” on page 7-31).

The Clearance Planes dialog box is opened.
2 Define the first corner (1).
You do this by probing the workpiece in Z, X and Y, consecutively.
Calypso automatically enters the values in each field in turn and
highlights the next field so that you can determine the value by
probing.
NOTE If a corner is inaccessible, you can move to the corresponding position

hss on the clearance plane, select the stylus, highlight the appropriate
input field and use the interim position.
3 Define the second corner (2).

The procedure is the same as in step 2, but you probe in the
opposite direction.
clearance planes.
How to Generate the Clearance Planes

Automatically
If you want to have the clearance planes generated automatically, you
must have the workpiece's CAD file open in the CAD window. All you
have to do is specify the clearance distance (offset) in millimeters.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-75

2 Click on the Clearance Planes from CAD Model button.

The dialog box in which you can enter the offset appears on the
screen.
3 Type in the offset in millimeters (e. g. 10) and click on OK.
The computed values appear in the input fields. The clearance
planes appear around the CAD model.
clearance planes.
How to Test the Clearance Planes

Calypso has a function called “Test Drive To The Selected Clearance
Plane” that you can use to validate the clearance planes.
Caution
hss
! Check that you have defined all the clearance planes (depending on
the geometry of the workpiece, the CMM might not be able to reach
each plane directly).
When you are ready to test drive to a clearance plane:

2 Highlight the clearance plane of your choice (e. g. +Z) by clicking
in the appropriate input field.
3 Click on Test Drive To The Selected Clearance Plane.
The CMM moves to the clearance plane.
Caution
hss
! The probe will always first travel out in the direction of the +Z-axis,
before the CMM drives it in the selected direction (e.g. +X).
4 If necessary redefine the value.

4-76 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

clearance planes.
How to Close Edges

When you close an edge of the clearance planes in this way you
prohibit the CMM from moving along the edge. It is advisable to close
edges if
– You have positioned more than one workpiece on the table, or
– the clamping device could cause a collision at an edge.
Under these circumstances closing edges can prevent collisions
without the need to change the size of the clearance planes.
To close edges:
1 Select CNC → Navigation → Block edges.
The Block Edges dialog box appears on the screen.
check box for

blocking an edge
NOTE The bottom edges (the edges of the face on the table) are always
hss
closed. The -Y or +Y edge is also closed if the measuring machine is of
the gantry type. You cannot revoke these settings.
2 Select the check boxes for the edges you want to close.
3 Click on OK.
The edges you selected are closed with immediate effect.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-77

Edit Measurement Plan Settings

The measurement plan settings define how actual values, target
values and results are presented. The settings are based on the scales
and units of measure of various geometrical features and are always
saved together with the current measurement plan.
These settings are edited in the Measurement Plan Settings dialog
box:
You can view and edit settings for the entire measurement plan or for
individual features.
You will find more information on the Measurement Plan Settings
dialog box in in the Calypso Online Help.
How to Edit Measurement Plan Settings

To check and/or change the settings:
1 To open the settings for the entire measurement plan:
• In the list of prerequisites, click on the Measurement Plan
Settings button, or
• In the list of features, mark No feature and select Prerequisites
→ Measurement Plan Settings.
4-78 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Edit Measurement Plan Settings
2 To open the settings for a single feature:

• Mark the entry in the list of features and select Prerequisites
→ Measurement Plan Settings.
The Measurement Plan Settings dialog box appears on the
screen. It shows the default output settings for the available
features (or for the feature you marked in the list, as applicable).
Be sure to check all settings at the global radio buttons Position,
Angle and Size.
3 If you want to change the setting for a feature, open the picklist of
the feature in question in the Mode column and select Change.
This activates the radio buttons on the right-hand side of the
window.
4 Make all the necessary changes.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have made all your changes.
6 Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the window is closed.
This dialog box is fully described in Measurement Plan Settings in
the Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-79

Editing the Measurement Plan

The Settings Editor provides you with a quick and easy way of
checking and, if necessary, changing important measurement plan
settings. You can choose whether to apply your changes to the entire
measurement plan (global) or to selected features only.
There are two separate editors, one for features and one for
characteristics:
Settings Editor for Use this editor to check and, if necessary, change settings for features.
Features The settings in question are primarily those relating to clearances in a
CNC run.
For more information see Measurement Plan Editor Features in the
Settings Editor for Use this editor to regulate how characteristics are output in the
Characteristics custom printout and define whether characteristics are to be
executed in the CNC run.
For more information see Measurement Plan Editor
Characteristics in the Calypso Online Help.
4-80 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Temperature Compensation
You can configure Calypso to consider the temperature-related
expansion/contraction of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of
the CMM when taking the measurements.
Temperature compensation is of great significance for precision of
the measurements, since the nominal values are generally based on a
workpiece and ambient temperature of 20 °C, and the different
materials expand/contract to different degrees as the temperature
varies.
Therefore, the expansion/contraction must be compensated in
accordance with the respective material, if the workpiece cannot be
brought to the reference temperature.
– Calypso receives the information about the temperature,
depending on your CMM's equipment, from sensors on the scales
or temperature sensors on the workpiece, through probing with a
temperature probe or simply manually entering the temperature
value.
– In any case, you must enter the coefficients of expansion for the
workpiece materials directly.
Most manuals on materials science give the coefficients of
expansion. The table below shows the coefficients of expansion for
some common materials:
Material Coefficient (micrometers/°C)

Aluminum (2024-T3) 22.7
Aluminum (6061-T6) 24.3
Aluminum (7079-T6) 24.7
Cast Iron 11.7
Copper 16.6
Magnesium (HK31A-H24) 25.2
Nickel 13.0
Steel (AISI C1020) 15.1
Steel (AISI 304) 17.8
Steel, Carbon 11.3
Titanium (B 120VCA) 9.4
NOTE Since the coefficient of expansion depends on the alloy, the values
hss may vary slightly from one table to another.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-81

Thermal plate bending Differences in temperature above and below the granite plate of a
CMM can cause a slight curvature of the plate. In high-precision
CMMs, the thermal plate bending effect is also compensated.
The compensation for thermal plate bending of the measuring table is
automatically activated as soon as Calypso calculates the temperature
compensation for the CMM scales. In this case, the plate will be
simulated by a beam model.
How does Calypso learn the coefficients of

expansion?
The coefficients of expansion must always be entered manually – if
the workpiece material doesn't change, just once per measurement
plan (➤“How to Enter Temperatures Manually” on page 4-88).
Same workpiece If you use multiple materials to manufacture the same part, for
from different example a cast-iron version and an aluminum version, you have two
materials options:
– Create two measurement plans that are identical except for the
coefficients of expansion for temperature compensation.
– Use the same measurement plan for both versions, but always
remember to enter the coefficient of expansion for the respective
material before starting a new series.
How does Calypso learn the temperatures?

There are three ways for Calypso learn the actual temperatures:
– The CMM has temperature sensors on the scales in the X, Y and Z
directions or on the workpiece. In this case, you need only start the
temperature compensation (➤“How to Activate Temperature
Compensation” on page 4-82).
– Have the CMM do a temperature probing of the workpiece (only
on CMMs with a VAST probe). To do so, you must configure the
temperature probing (➤“How to Automatically Configure the
Temperature Probing (CNC)” on page 4-85).
– The CMM has neither a temperature sensor nor temperature
probe. In this case, enter the temperature(s) of the workpiece or
scales that you measured or determined yourself (➤“How to Enter
Temperatures Manually” on page 4-88).
How to Activate Temperature Compensation

If the temperature of the workpiece to be measured or the room
temperature is not 20 °C (68 °F), you can only measure accurately
with temperature compensation activated.
4-82 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To activate temperature compensation:

1 Click on the Temperature Compensation button.
The Temperature Compensation dialog box appears on the
screen.
2 To activate temperature compensation, select the Temperature

Compensation check box.
The check box Temperature Probing ON/OFF will now appear in
the dialog box.
3 Under Workpiece click in the entry field Coefficient and enter
the applicable coefficient of expansion for the workpiece.
Once you have activated temperature compensation, the following
are true:
– If your CMM has automatic temperature sensors, the measured
temperatures will be used automatically to correct the
measurements.
– If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors, then,
before you run a measurement plan, Calypso will automatically
display the Temperature Compensation window. You can then
perform or configure a temperature probing or enter the measured
temperatures yourself.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-83

How to Determine the Temperatures by

Manual Probing
If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe head and a probe with
temperature sensor (temperature probe), you can use Calypso to
determine the precise workpiece temperature by probing.
To do so, proceed as follows:
screen.
2 Select Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the
Temperature Probing on/off check box as well (if the
temperature probe has already been selected, both check boxes
are selected automatically).
The prompt “Probe with temperature sensor at one or several
workpiece points!” will appear.
3 If the temperature probe has not yet been selected: select it now.
4 If the temperature probe has not yet been qualified: qualify it now
by probing the reference sphere once in line with the shaft.
For the temperature probing, you only need a coarse, not a highly
precise qualification of the probe (➤“Qualifying Styli” on
page 4-21). To do this, select the Manual mode and, under
Geometry, the option Temperature Probe.
5 Probe the workpiece with the temperature probe.
In a temperature measurement, the probe travels until it detects
contact with the workpiece and then another 3 mm against the
measuring force.
After the first probing, an entry called “Temperature Probing” will
appear in the list of features.
6 Probe other points on the workpiece.
After each probing, the temperature and the location of the point
will be determined and displayed.
The data regarding the location of the points will be stored in the
technology list for the “Temperature Probing” feature. This can be
edited (➤“How to Automatically Configure the Temperature
Probing (CNC)” on page 4-85).
The measured temperatures will be determined and displayed in
the Temperature Compensation window.
4-84 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Calypso calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures
and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation
window. This value will be used (instead of the temperature from
any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature
compensation for the workpiece.
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will
be included in the printed work report.
How to Automatically Configure the

Temperature Probing (CNC)
If your CMM does not have temperature sensors, but is equipped
with the VAST probe head and a probe with a temperature sensor
(temperature probe), you can let the system perform a Temperature
Probing automatically in the CNC run.
Temperature probing at If automatic temperature probing is enabled (➤“How to Activate
the beginning of a run Temperature Compensation” on page 4-82), Calypso will begin
probing the appropriate points on the workpiece with the
temperature probe at the start of the CNC run (in other words before
the CNC alignment) and will thus determine the temperature of the
workpiece to a high degree of precision.
Add Temperature The simplest way to add a “Temperature Probing” feature to the
Probing feature measurement plan is to perform a manual temperature probing
(➤“How to Determine the Temperatures by Manual Probing” on
page 4-84). A “Temperature Probing” entry with the probed points
will be automatically added to the list of features.
The “Temperature Probing” feature added to the measurement plan
can be edited like any other feature, for example, if necessary, you can
change the point probed. You can also copy or delete it. In this
manner, you can add several temperature probed points to a
measurement plan.
NOTE At the beginning of a CNC run, the system will only perform the
hss
“Temperature Probing” feature that is entered in the Temperature
Compensation window under Feature.
How to configure the temperature probing in a measurement plan:

screen.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-85

2 Select Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the

Temperature Probing on /off check box as well (if the
temperature probe has already been selected, both check boxes
are selected automatically).
The prompt “Probe with temperature sensor at one or several
workpiece points!” will appear.
3 Cancel and click on the Switch to Feature Menu button next to
Feature.
The Selection window will open. In contrast to the usual window
for selecting features, this one only lists the “Temperature
Probing” features.
(If the measurement plan does not yet contain any “Temperature
Probing” features, the option New will be preset and the Edit
check box will be selected.)
4 To activate the desired “Temperature Probing” feature, mark it and

confirm with OK.
The selected feature will now be shown in the Temperature
Compensation window under Feature.
4-86 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

5 To edit a specific “Temperature Probing” feature, mark it, select

the Edit check box and confirm with OK.
The definition template for the Temperature Probing feature will
open and you can begin editing.
• To define the probing strategy, click on the Strategy button

and specify the probing method in Strategy window.
Here you can define a list of points, preset probing and
intermediate points, define CMM steps with and without
probing and insert programmed halts.
Furthermore, you can edit the Clearance Data.
With OK, you will be returned to the definition template
6 Click OK to confirm your changes.
The selected and edited “Temperature Probing” feature appears
under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
Temperature probing in In a CNC run, the temperature probing will start automatically at the
a CNC run beginning in accordance with the selected feature. After the
measurement, Calypso calculates the average of all of the measured
temperatures and enters this value in the Temperature
Compensation window. This value will then be used (instead of the
temperature from any possibly present temperature sensor) for the
temperature compensation for the workpiece.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-87

All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be

included in the printed work report.
How to Enter Temperatures Manually

If the temperatures displayed in the Temperature Compensation
dialog box are correct, simply click on OK. If not, before starting the
measurement plan, enter the correct temperatures.
NOTE While the measurement plan is running, you cannot change the
hss temperature values.
To enter the temperatures manually:

screen.
2 If the temperature of the part is not 20 °C (68 °F), click in the

Temperature input field under Workpiece and change it to
reflect the part’s actual temperature.
3 If the workpiece is now made of a different material, click under
Workpiece in the Coefficient input field and enter the correct
coefficient of expansion for the workpiece.
4-88 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

4 If the temperature in the room which contains the CMM is not

exactly 20 °C (68 °F), click on the Scales fields and enter the
temperatures from the X, Y and Z scales. (The coefficients of
expansion for the scales are already known to Calypso.)
The compensation values are calculated automatically and
displayed.
5 Click OK to confirm your changes.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 4-89

4-90 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
5
5 Defining Features
.................................................................................................................................
When it is time to define features, you begin by probing points
manually. Calypso's automatic feature recognition function
determines the geometry that mathematically best fits the measured
probing points. Calypso also rounds off the actual measured values in
an attempt to suggest nominal values. These nominal values can
easily be altered if required.
You can thus adopt the exact values from the engineering drawing, or
you can enter values yourself in order to define the nominal
dimensions of an existing pattern (reverse engineering).
Defining Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Details on Specific Part Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Linking Features in Constructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Defining a Measurement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Path Generation – Automatically Measuring Features . . . . . . . . . 5-68
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5- 1

Defining Features
Defining Features
Features are set by a certain pattern. Details on every feature (e.g.
how many probing points does a cone need?) can be found in
➤“Details on Specific Part Features” on page 5-15
What is a feature? A feature is a regular geometric element or an element that is
defined in a different manner, that is to be measured by the CMM.
Features contain the nominal geometry, which is used for the purpose
of evaluating the size, shape and position. The features are assigned
to the associated characteristics. The features are defined in definition
templates which contain the nominal and actual values as well as
various measuring possibilities.
Defining features Basically, you have several ways to define a feature. The alternative
that is selected will depend on the measuring task you wish to
execute with Calypso.
– ➤“How to Define Features Using Automatic Feature Recognition”
on page 5-5.
Use Calypso's automatic feature recognition and probe the feature
with the CMM directly on the workpiece. Calypso will recognize
the geometry of the probed feature and will fill the appropriate
This procedure is recommended in most cases.
– ➤“How to Define a Feature Using Definition Templates” on
page 5-4.
Insert a feature into the measurement plan first and then continue
work with the definition template.
This enables you to use the possibilities for measuring in the
definition template (e.g. scanning procedure).
This possibility is also quite useful if you have already devised a
measurement plan or if programming is to be effected away from
the machine.
– ➤“Importing Features from CAD Files” on page 5-6.
Import an existing CAD file and extract its features into your
measurement plan.
This possibility is also useful if you want to program away from the
machine.
– In addition to the above-mentioned possibilities for defining the
feature, you also have the option of defining constructions –
constructed “theoretical features” that cannot be probed by the
CMM.
A feature such as this consists of features which have already been
defined, e.g. an intersection of two features (see ➤“Linking
Features in Constructions” on page 5-39).
5-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Features
– Another way to define features is by DMIS import. If you have

purchased this option, you can import runs programmed in DMIS
to Calypso and thereby create a regular Calypso measurement plan
with features (see ➤ Chapter 13 “DMIS Import (Option)” on
page 13-1).
During your work, if you forget which features you assigned to which
characteristic, you can check the usage of each feature with Calypso.
Use the Check use of selected Features command which you can
find in the pop-up menu in the list of features. This opens a list of all
characteristics associated with the feature in question.
The Definition Template for Features

A definition template offers you the following editing possibilities:
– Enter comments.
– Develop a measurement strategy.
– Restrict the degree of freedom for coordinates.
– Change clearance groups.
– Change the mode for nominal value definition.
– Assign a different part alignment.
– Define characteristics for tolerance.
For more information see Definition Template (Features) in the
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-3

Defining Features
The appearance of the definition template in the Features window

will depend on the features that have been selected. This illustration
shows the definition template for the “Plane” feature.
How to Define a Feature Using Definition

Templates
When you define a feature, a definition template will be displayed in
the measurement plan area. This template is always displayed:
– When Calypso recognizes a feature automatically
– When you choose an element from a menu or a toolbox and
double-click it
– When you edit a feature
– When you define a feature for your part alignment.
To copy the feature into the measurement plan and then probe it:
1 Click on the Features button to view features in the measurement
plan area.
5-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Features
2 Select the required feature in the submenu Features or under

Features → Additional Features.
The feature appears in the measurement plan.
3 Double click on the feature to open its definition template.
Calypso is ready to recorrd measured values.
4 Probe the feature.
The values that are determined by Calypso are automatically entered
in the corresponding fields of the definition template.
If you do not wish to probe a feature manually, Calypso can take care
of this for you. (See ➤“Path Generation – Automatically Measuring
Features” on page 5-68.)
How to Define Features Using Automatic

Feature Recognition
In the case of automatic feature recognition, the geometric element is
simply probed on your workpiece. Calypso enters the recognized
feature in the list of features and opens the definition template. The
definition template offers you several options for working with the
feature (see ➤“The Definition Template for Features” on page 5-3).
1 Click on the Features button to view features in the measurement
plan area.
(The features used for the definition of the base alignment should
already be displayed.)
2 Select the stylus you want to use for probing, if the correct stylus is
not already illuminated on the control panel of the CMM.
3 Using the joysticks, move the stylus to the feature and probe the
first point.
Example:
If the feature is a sloping plane on the side of a workpiece, move
with the X/Y joystick over one corner of this plane and then probe
in the Z direction.
Once you have probed the point, Calypso will show the feature
“Point 1” in the template for the feature definition. (For detailed
information on the features template see ➤“How to Define a
Feature Using Definition Templates” on page 5-4.)
4 Probe the next point.
Example:
On a sloping plane, move over another corner of the plane and
probe again in the Z direction.
In the template, Calypso will update the feature to a 2-D line.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-5

Defining Features
5 Probe the number of additional points required to define the

feature in question (at least 3 points for a plane, for example;
5 points for a cylinder, and so on).
Example:
On a sloping plane, move to the remaining two corner points and
probe each in the Z direction. Make sure that the points are not on
the same line. (Because of this you should move the probe a little
in the X and Y directions.) Calypso recognizes the plane this way
and displays it in the evaluation field.
6 If Calypso does not recognize the right feature, you can choose it
manually from the features in the CAD Entities picklist.
Caution
hss
! You cannot change the type of geometry feature subsequently.
7 Click on OK to confirm your choice.

You now have defined a feature to be measured on the workpiece (in
addition to those already defined for the part alignment).
To define additional features for this workpiece, repeat the same
steps. When adopting this – normal – procedure, Calypso will
automatically recognize which feature you wish to measure.
Importing Features from CAD Files

The data for a workpiece is frequently available in the form of a CAD
file. As well as loading and displaying the CAD model, Calypso also
enables you to extract all recognizable features from the file. A large
part of a measurement plan can therefore be created directly from a
CAD file (see also „How to Define a Measurement Plan from a CAD
file“ in the Online Help).
Precondition Calypso can convert CAD files with the following filename extensions:
Extension Creating Program

.sat ACIS (standard)
.exp CATIA (optional)
.prt Pro-E (optional) / Unigraphics (optional)
.igs IGES (optional)
.vda VDAFS (optional)
.dxf CAD systems such as AutoCAD and Caddy, etc.
.stp STEP (optional)
5-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Features
Procedure Perform the following steps:

– load a CAD file,
– define the parameters of the global measurement strategy
(optional), and
– extract the features.
NOTE If you have loaded 2D data (e.g. from IGES, VDA or DXF format), you
hss
will have to define the third coordinate manually – either by entering
an offset in the Modify CAD Model dialog box or subsequently by
changing the nominal geometry.
How to Load a CAD File

Before you can load a CAD file, a measurement plan must be open.
Note that elements are added to the measurement plan when the
CAD file is loaded and the features are extracted - in other words, the
measurement plan is expanded.
Caution
hss
! The model originally shown in the CAD window is deleted when you
load a CAD file.
To load a CAD file:

1 Open a new measurement plan. (See ➤“How to Create a New
Measurement Plan” on page 4-3 or ➤“How to Open an Existing
Measurement Plan” on page 4-4.)
2 Select CAD → CAD File → Load.
The Open CAD File dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Select the CAD file of your choice and click on Open.

The file will be loaded. If you are loading an IGES file, the progress
of the data conversion will be shown in a window.
The model will then be shown in the CAD window.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-7

Defining Features
When converting an IGES file, a logfile with information on the

NOTE
converted features that are contained in the file will be created. Select
hss CAD → Logfile → IGES to display this file.
Once the model has appeared in the CAD window, you will be able to
include the features in the measurement plan. You might want to edit
the CAD file beforehand: see ➤“Working with the CAD Window” on
page 3-1
You will find more information under “Working with CAD Data” in
the online Help.
You can now proceed to specify metrology parameters.
How to Specify Metrology Parameters for the CAD

Features to be Loaded
Before extracting features from an open CAD file, you can specify the
strategy Calypso will subsequently employ to measure the features in
question.
The procedure for specifying the parameters is as follows:
1 Select CAD → Filter → Set Default Measurement Strategy.
The Technology Defaults dialog box appears on the screen.
5-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Features
2 Activate the check box of the feature for which you want to
specify the parameters and then click on the Settings button.
The appropriate strategy dialog box opens:
3 One after the other, double-click on each list entry for which you
wish to make strategy settings. Alternatively, you can select the
entry and click on the magnifier. The appropriate definition dialog
box opens.
4 Close each definition dialog box again by clicking on OK.
5 When you have finished defining the strategy, click OK.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all other types of feature that you want to
assign.
Once you start a run using the imported features, Calypso will
generate the features in accordance with the settings that have just
been defined.
How to Extract Features from the CAD Model

Extraction is the process by which Calypso detects the regular
geometric features in the CAD model, as well as the features defined
in a different manner, and adds them to the list of features. To do this,
it will be necessary to load a CAD file and, if necessary, define the
measurement strategy (see ➤“General Settings for the Path
Generation Method” on page 5-70).
The procedure for defining features with the CAD model is as follows:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-9

Defining Features
1 Select CAD → Filter → All Features (or alternatively, planes,

circles, cylinders, cones or points only, as applicable).
The features are displayed in the measurement plan area in a
separate window (example: test cube):
2 Select Edit → Select All or highlight the individual features you

want to insert into your measurement plan.
Caution
hss
! Calypso assigns the stylus currently activated on the control panel or
via the CAD window to all features.
3 Click on Apply.
The features are extracted and transferred to the measurement
plan. This can take a few seconds to complete.
4 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking on OK.
You have now transferred the features defined in the CAD file to your
measurement plan. You can edit the individual features in the usual
way.
5-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Features
Bear the following in mind:

– You must define the probing points if there are none defined in the
strategy list of the feature. You can do this with the CMM or using
only the CAD window (you will find more information in the
Online Help under „How to Define a Probing Point in the CAD
Window“).
– Calypso assigns all features the same stylus. You will have to assign
a more suitable stylus for some features, in other words, one with
which the CMM can probe the features in question (see).
➤“Editing a Measurement Plan” on page 7-19
How to Import Features from the CAD Model

to the Measurement Plan
You can import complete features from the CAD model displayed on
the screen into the measurement plan. To do so, use the menu
options from the Selection list on the CAD toolbar.
1 To import a plane, cylinder or cone into the measurement plan:
• Select Extract Features from the menu.
• Click on the required feature in the CAD view
The element is highlighted and immediately added to the list of
features.
2 To define a single point:
• Select Define a Space Point from the menu and click on the
point of your choice on the surface of the CAD model.
The point is now defined.
3 To define a line on a plane:
• Select Define Line on a Plane.
• Click on a point on the line you want to define.
• Use the mouse to drag the line.
The line is shown on the screen.
4 To define two mutually opposite space points:
• Select Distance check.
• Click on a point on the model.
The two space points and the connection between them are
shown at the selected position on the screen. With the aid of these
two points, you can check the wall thickness or the material
deviation at the place in question, for example.
5 To define a circle on a cylinder:
• Select Define Circle on a Cylinder.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-11

Defining Features
• Click on a point on the cylinder in question.

The circle is shown at the corresponding level on the screen.
6 To define a probing point:
• Open the feature in question.
• Click on Strategy and select the appropriate stylus.
• Select Define Points.
• Click on the probing point of your choice on the surface of the
CAD model.
The probing point is now defined.
Copying Properties of Features

You can copy certain properties of a feature and assign them to one
or more other features. This means that the information in question
has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can be sure
that the common properties are exactly the same for all the features
concerned.
The following are the properties you can copy to all features:
– Coordinate system
– Clearance plane
– Probe
– Stylus (only if different styli were not used for the points of the
feature)
– Retract distance
– Clearance distance
The following are the properties you can copy only to like features:
– Projection plane (if defined)
– Evaluation settings
– Measurement strategy (measured features only)
Like features are features of the same kind (e. g. circle, cylinder)
having nominals defined in the same way (e. g. by recall).
How to Copy Properties of a Feature to Other

Features
The procedure for copying properties of a feature to other features is
as follows:
1 Click on the feature from which you want to copy properties.
5-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Features
2 Click on the Transfer Format button in the upper menu bar.

The Copy Properties from <Feature_name> dialog box appears
on the screen. All the check boxes are activated by default.
3 Deactivate the check boxes of the properties that you do not want
to copy to other features.
4 Highlight the feature or features to which you want to copy the
properties.
Press and hold down the Shift or Ctrl key if you want to highlight
more than one feature.
5 Click on OK.
Copying is started.
Color-Coding of Features Buttons

When a feature is listed in the measurement plan area, the
background color of its button tells you its status:
– Light gray (same as measurement plan area): The feature has not
been fully defined.
– Dark gray: The feature has been fully defined.
– Green / red: The feature has been defined and measured results
have been gathered.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-13

Defining Features
Tips and Tricks for Defining Features

– You can cancel the definition of a feature at any time, even while
probing is in progress: Click on Reset and then click on OK.
– You can restart the definition of a feature at any time, even while
probing is in progress: Click on Reset and then repeat probing.
– If the CAD image of the part’s features is not fully on the screen or
is not displayed at all, the image may have been zoomed or shifted
in the CAD window. Click on the Fit button to resize the model to
fit into the CAD window.
– If the feature does not seem to be properly defined but you have
clicked OK to save it, you can delete it from the measurement plan
and then define it again. See ➤“How to Delete Features or
Characteristics” on page 7-11.
– If you want to change the order in which features are displayed,
you can easily move a feature to new location. Click on the feature
(either its button or its name) and hold the left mouse button
down, then drag the feature to a new location.
– If the probing point you used is unsuitable, you can delete it by
clicking on the Undo last probing button (or pressing F3 on the
standard control panel).
– If you want to delete a probing point defined some time in the
past, proceed as described in the section entitled ➤“How to Use
the Shortcut Menu of the Strategy List” on page 5-63.
– Probing or position points can be added to a feature at any time.
First, open the definition template of the feature.
• To add a probing point, probe the point with the CMM. The
point is added automatically.
• If you want to add an intermediate position, you must check
that the original stylus is activated.
Move the probe to the appropriate position, then press the
button on the right-hand joystick to accept the position or click
on the Position CMM without probing symbol in the strategy
window.
5-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Details on Specific Part Features

Basics of probing When you define features, two basic rules apply to probing:
– Produce as large a measurement basis as possible. If, for example,
you define the face of a cube as a plane, probe close to the corners
of the workpiece.
– Probe as many points as possible (taking into account the time
within which you want the CNC run to complete). This is
particularly important when you record and evaluate shapes on a
workpiece.
Inside or outside In most instances, Calypso can identify the feature as an inside or
feature? outside feature from the probing direction.
You also have the option of defining a feature as an inside or outside
feature. However, always bear in mind that this affects the
combination of the travel paths and the calculation of the tangential
features.
You define a feature as an inside or outside feature in its definition
template.
The left button shown here is for an inside feature, while the right
button is for an outside feature.
Correcting the probe tip The measured value of a measurement sent to the CMM is always the
radius center coordinates of the probe tip. The coordinates of a measured
value, therefore, always differ from those of the contact point – the
measured value you want – at the time of measurement by the radius
of the probe tip.
probing
direction
measured
value
probing
radius
desired
measured value
Calypso automatically corrects the measured value, so you always

receive the coordinates of the actual contact point. There may be a
residual error despite this correction, but you can usually prevent this.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-15

Defining Features
The Point
Menu: Features → Point
Use the Point feature to determine the coordinates of individual
points on the workpiece, in order to size the workpiece, for example.
Probing strategy You can measure a point anywhere on a surface.
probing direction
measured
value
correction
To obtain the right correction for the stylus radius for normal vector
directions which are non-parallel to the coordinate system, it is
possible to switch to the space point procedure by clicking on
Evaluation in the definition template. In case of an unknown normal
vector direction, the correction will be automatically defined.
Output Click on the Output button to open the Evaluation dialog box in
which you can enter details relating to the conversion and correction
of the measured values. Under Space Point Mode you can now
select the manner in which the point is to be calculated:
Mode Type of correction/conversion

Touch Point Radius correction in the direction of a coordinate system axis
corresponding to the probing direction.
Here, probing is effected in a coordinate axis direction; otherwise the
radius correction will be effected in the direction of the coordinate
axis which is closest to the probing direction.
(default setting)
Plane Point Radius correction in normal vector direction.
5-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Mode Type of correction/conversion

Space Point Radius correction in normal vector direction,
followed by projection on the normal of the nominal point.
The radius (length of the tripod) used to measure the normal can be
set using the menu point Radius for space point normal
measurement in the Measurement Plan Editor - Features.
Net Point Radius correction in normal vector direction,
followed by projection on the coordinate system axis which
corresponds to the reference axis of the nominal plane.
The corrections which are made for the respective point type are
shown in the diagram.
Probing direction
z
Nominal Nominal
normal outline
Vector
Actual Actual
normal 4
outline
Vector 3
1 2 x
Nominal
point 1 Touch Point
2 Plane Point
3 Space Point
4 Net Point
The Circle
Menu: Features → Circle
Using the Circle feature, you can probe bores, plugs and shafts with a
circular cross section or workpiece parts with arcs. You can project the
circle or arc on any measured plane. Calypso uses the probed points
to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing points.
The start angle W and the partial angle TW (for an arc) are specifed in
the definition template.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-17

Defining Features
Probing strategy The minimum number of points is 3. The probing points should be on
a section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure.
It is advisable to probe at least 4 points.
Automatic feature Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
recognition height. If the height differences between the individual points are
excessive, Calypso will compute a cylinder instead of a circle. If this
happens, you can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry
menu.
Feature's local The origin of the feature’s local coordinate system is in the center of
coordinate system the measured circle (not in a projection plane of the coordinate
system).
origin of LA
Greater Accuracy in Circle Measurement (Basics of

Gage Correction Qualification)
Gage correction qualification is a method by which Calypso can
measure circles to a very high degree of precision and at very high
scanning speed.
Calypso must first record the bending parameters of the probe. When
a circle or arc is subsequently measured, you can instruct Calypso to
correct the result by applying the bending parameters.
Preconditions The preconditions for recording and correcting bending parameters
are as follows:
– A new measurement plan for the reference workpiece is open and
you have defined the clearance planes.
– ➤“How to Create a New Measurement Plan” on page 4-3
– ➤“Defining the Clearance Planes” on page 4-72
– You know how to start a CNC run.
– ➤“Defining the Scope of Measurement” on page 8-2
– The circle is measured on the same primary plane of the workpiece
coordinate system as was used in recording the bending
parameters.
5-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Record the Bending Parameters

In order to record the bending parameters, you need a workpiece
with a reference bore or a reference plug. The bore or plug must be of
known diameter.
NOTE The bending parameters have no effect unless you have installed a
hss measuring probe head.
The plug or bore is measured as a full circle in a separate

measurement plan.
To record the bending parameters:
1 Position the base alignment in the center of the reference bore or
plug.
2 Select the Gage Correction Qualification utility by selecting
Prerequisites → Utilities → Gage Correction Qualification.
Calypso adds the icon for gage correection qualification to the list
of features.
3 Double-click to open the definition template.
4 Enter the calibrated diameter of the bore or the plug in field D.
5 Select the scanning method for the circle:
• Click on Strategy.
• Click on the Full Circle button.
• In the list, double-click on Circle Auto Path.
This opens the dialog box where you define the scanning speed.
6 Enter the scanning speed in the Speed field.
7 Click on OK to close all dialog boxes
Click Yes at the prompt shown below.
8 Perform a CNC run of the measurement plan so that Calypso can

measure the bending parameters.
Once Calypso knows the bending parameters of the probe, it will be
possible to correct future measurement results of full circles and arcs
in a corresponding manner (see “How to Apply the Bending
Parameters”)
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-19

Defining Features
How to Apply the Bending Parameters

You can use the definition template of the circle to have all future full
circles and arcs corrected with the bending parameters.
To activate correction by application of the bending parameters:
1 Open the definition template of the circle to which you want to
apply the bending parameters.
2 Click on the Output button.
The Evaluation (Feature) dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Activate the Gage Correction check box.

4 Click on OK to close the Evaluation dialog box.
5 Click on OK to save the settings and close the definition template.
The next time you measure a circle, the measuring results are
corrected by the bending parameters. Optimal accuracy values are
achieved when the diameter, measuring location and scanning speed
are as close as possible to the values of the bending parameter
definition.
The Plane
Menu: Features → Plane
Use the Plane feature to probe plane surfaces of the workpiece the
position or inclination of which you want to determine.
Calypso computes the plane from the points which you probe. In the
definition template the computed length and width of the plane are
displayed along with the coordinates of the probing points.
5-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Probing strategy Probe at least 3 points. Take care to spread the points as evenly as
possible over the plane.
Automatic feature If the points are all in a line (an arc of minimal curvature), Calypso will
recognition compute a line instead of a plane. If this happens you can reconstruct
a plane manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles W1 and
W2.
projection into the Z/X plane

Z
normal
spatial view
Z A1=0
plane X
surface normal projection into the Z/Y plane

Z
example plane
A2
X normal
plane
Feature's local The origin of the feature’s local coordinate system depends on the
coordinate system position of the plane relative to the axes of the coordinate system:
– Bottom left for a viewing position in +X, -Y and +Z.
– Bottom right for a viewing position in -X, +Y and -Z.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-21

Defining Features
The illustration below is an example showing how this applies to

5 planes of a cube.
Z
Y
X
origin of the respective LA
The 2-D Line

Menu: Features → 2-D Line
The 2-D Line feature is primarily for probing lines and straights on any
plane on the surface of the workpiece. Calypso computes a mean-
value line through the points you probe.
Types of representation The 2-D Line can be defined and represented in two different ways:
– with X, Y and Z values for the start and end points of the line,
– with one point (X, Y, Z) of the line, the specified length and the
projected angles W1 and W2.
You can toggle between the two types of representation in the
Feature representation dialog box, which you can open from the
Prerequisites or via Prerequisites → Feature representation.
Probing strategy Probe at least two points (three are recommended, however).
Automatic feature Make sure that all the probing points are roughly in line. Otherwise,
recognition Calypso will compute a plane instead of a line. If this happens, you
can open the CAD Entities menu and regenerate the feature as a
line.
5-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Feature's local The origin of the local coordinate system for the feature is at the first
coordinate system point on the line which defines the line fully when first registered – in
these examples points 1, 4 and point 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6
or
6 5 1 2 3 4
or
3 1 2 4 5
Result output After measurement, the following results are output in the definition
template and in the printout.
Result Meaning
X, Y, Z Coordinates of the origin of the coordinate
system
W1 (Z/X) Projected angle 1. Projection in this case is in the
X/Z plane; the reference axis is X.
– In the printout the projected angles are
referenced to the position of the feature
– In the definition template the projected angles
are referenced to the position of the feature’s
plane normal (the 2D-line corresponds to a
reduced plane).
W2 (Y/X) Projected angle 2. Projection in this case is in the
X/Y plane, the reference axis is X.
– In the printout the projected angles are
referenced to the position of the feature
– In the definition template the projected angles
are referenced to the position of the feature’s
plane normal
Sigma Scatter referenced to the best-fit computed
feature
Min/Max Minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to
the best-fit computed feature
Form Difference between minimum and maximum
deviation, referenced to the best-fit feature.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-23

Defining Features
The illustration below shows the positions of projected angles W1 and

W2 for a straight line on a cube. The reference axis is always the
coordinate axis with which the projected angles are both less than 45°
– in this case the X-axis.
projection into the X/Y plane

Y
spatial view
Z
Y
A1
X
projection into the X/Z plane

example line Z
A2
X
The 3-D Line

Menu: Features → 3-D Line
A 3-D line cannot be measured: it is computed from a recall of at least
two features. You can, for example, employ a 3-D line to represent
the axis of a shaft by using several circles for the purpose of
definition.
Open the Nominal Definition picklist and select Recall. This opens
the Selection dialog box and you can select the features of your
choice.
The resulting 3-D line is placed through the center point of the
selected features.
5-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Cylinder
Menu: Features → Cylinder
You can use the Cylinder feature to probe bores, plugs and shafts. As
opposed to the circle, a cylinder yields information about height and
depth as well.
Probing strategy You must probe at least five points in order to identify a form as a
cylinder:
1 Probe a circle first, i.e. at least the first three points on a section
perpendicular to the cylinder axis.
The axis of this section will be the provisional cylinder axis.
2 Probe at least two more points on another section perpendicular to
the axis of the first section.
Calypso computes the data of the cylinder from the circular sections
at the different levels. The axis of the cylinder is computed
perpendicularly through the centers of the two circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing
strategy.
Automatic feature If geometrical error is excessive for a cylinder, Calypso computes a
recognition cone instead of a cylinder. This also happens if the two circular
sections are too close together. If this happens, you can reconstruct a
cylinder manually in the Geometry menu.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-25

Defining Features
Result output The illustration shows the positions of the projected angles W1 and
W2.

Z
spatial view
Z
X
A1
Y
Z
example cylinder projection into the Z/Y plane
A2
Feature's local The origin of the feature’s local coordinate system is on the plane with
coordinate system the lowest probing point (not on a projection plane of the coordinate
system).
5-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Cone
Menu: Features → Cone
Use the Cone feature to probe the location and position of inside and
outside cones, the direction of the cone axis and the cone’s taper
angle.
Probing strategy You must probe at least 6 points in order to identify a form as a cone.
1 Measure three points on a circular section parallel to the axis of the
cone.
2 Move the CMM to another height.
3 Measure three points at this height.
4 Measure other sections, as in steps 2 and 3.
Calypso computes the data of the cone from the circular sections on
the different planes. The axis of the cylinder is computed
perpendicularly through the centers of the circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing
strategy.
Automatic feature If cone angle Wk is very small, Calypso might compute a cylinder
recognition instead of a cone. The measurement uncertainty for the cone axis will
be too high if the height difference between the circular sections is
very small, and Calypso might compute a circle instead of a cone.
If this happens you can reconstruct a cone manually in the Geometry
menu.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-27

Defining Features
Result output The illustration shows the positions of the projected angles W1 and
W2. In this example, the reference axis is -Z.

Z
spatial view
Z
X
A1
Y
Z
example cone projection into the Z/Y plane
A2
coordinate system the circle of smaller diameter. The direction of the axis is from the
smaller toward the larger circle.
The Sphere
Menu: Features → Sphere
Calypso uses the Sphere feature to compute the diameter and the
center coordinates of a sphere, spherical cap or spherical zone.
5-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Probing strategy Probe at least 4 points distributed as uniformly as possible over the
surface of the sphere. If the probe configuration and sphere position
allow this, it is best to probe from different directions. The first two
points should be probed near the sphere's pole and the remaining
points along the equator of the sphere.
Automatic feature If you fail to probe the points in the recommended manner, Calypso
recognition will not automatically recognize a sphere. If this happens you can
reconstruct a sphere manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output There are no projected angles for a sphere. D represents the diameter
of the sphere.
The Curve
Menu: Features → Curve
You can use the Curve feature to measure planar sections of bodies
and lift curves (planar curves on the face of a cylinder). This feature is
extremely versatile and consequently, it is described in a separate
section (see ➤“Curve Measurement (Option)” on page 15-1).
Bear in mind that this feature is not included in the normal Calypso
scope of supply and must be obtained as an option.
The 3D Curve
Menu: Features → 3d Curve
You can use the 3d Curve feature to measure freeform surfaces. This
feature is extremely versatile and consequently, it is described in a
separate section (see ➤“Curve Measurement (Option)” on
page 15-1).
Bear in mind that this feature is not included in the normal Calypso
scope of supply and must be obtained as an option.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-29

Defining Features
The Ellipse
Menu: Features → Additional Features → Ellipse
You can use the Ellipse feature to probe bores, plugs and shafts
having axes not parallel with an axis of the base alignment, as well as
true ellipses. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not
available for ellipses.
The ellipse can be defined in two different ways:
– by specifying the center (with X, Y and Z) and the two diameters D
(major diameter) and D2 (minor diameter),
– by specifying the two focal points (with X1, Y1, Z1 and X2, Y2, Z2)
and one of the two diameters (diameter D and note indicating
whether this is the larger diameter).
You can toggle between the two types of representation in the
Feature representation dialog box, which you can open from the
Prerequisites or via Prerequisites → Feature representation.
In the definition template, the angles W1 and W2 indicate the
position of the ellipse in relation to the respective plane (X in XY
plane, Y in YZ plane and Z in ZX plane).
If the defining specifications (second type of representation) do not
produce an actual ellipse, the second diameter is set to “0” and the
ellipse is no longer shown.
Probing strategy Probe at least 5 points in a planar section. Distribute the points as
uniformly as possible around the circumference of the section.
5-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Result output The following illustrations show the definition of the minor diameter
D2 and the major diameter D, as well as the location of the focal
points.
D2 M (X, Y, Z)
Dgroß
Dklein
(X1, Y1, Z1) (X2, Y2, Z2)
Automatic feature An ellipse is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by adding

recognition the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings.
coordinate system the ellipse. It is not projected on a plane of the coordinate system.
The Slot
Menu: Features → Additional Features → Slot
You can use the Slot feature to probe the length, width, depth and
position of slots. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is
not available for slots.
Probing strategy Probe at least 5 points. Make sure that all points are spaced as
uniformly as possible over the sides of the slot.
1 Begin by probing 2 points on one side of the slot.
2 Probe a point at the apex of a curve.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-31

Defining Features
3 Probe a point on the other side of the slot.

4 Probe a point at the apex of the second curve.
2 1
3 5
You can distribute other probing points as you wish.

Automatic feature A slot is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by adding the
recognition feature to the measurement plan and then take probings.
Feature's local The origin of the feature’s local coordinate system is in the slot’s
coordinate system center of gravity.
The Rectangle
Menu: Features → Additional Features → Rectangle
You can use the Rectangle feature to probe the length, width, depth
and position of all elements of hollow rectangular geometry.
Probing strategy Probe at least 6 points. Make sure that all points are spaced as
uniformly as possible over the sides of the rectangle. Probe at least
two points for each side of the rectangle. You must enter the value
for the depth of the rectangular hollow manually in the Length field.
Automatic feature A rectangle is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by
recognition adding the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings.
The Offset Plane

Menu: Features → Additional Features → Offset Plane
You can use the Offset Plane feature to define from three datum
points a plane which does not actually exist on your workpiece. You
can offset the reference points at will along the probing direction.
Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for
offset planes.
5-32 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Probing strategy You must probe no more and no less than three points and then enter
the offsets:
1 Probe the 3 points.
2 Click on the Output button.
3 In the Point Modification group, click on the Edit button.
The Point Offset dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter an offset for each point you want to modify. The points are
offset along the probing direction.
5 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
Automatic feature An offset plane is not recognized automatically by Calypso. Begin by
recognition adding the feature to the measurement plan and then take probings.
The Symmetry Point

Menu: Features → Additional Features → Symmetry Point
You can use the Symmetry Point feature to have Calypso compute a
point which is symmetrical with two probing points. Calypso
computes the coordinates of the symmetry point and displays the
distance between the two points.
Probing strategy You must probe no more and no less than two points in order to
compute a symmetry point.
1 Open the definition template.
2 Probe the first point.
3 Probe the second point from the opposite direction.
4 Close the definition template.
Automatic feature Calypso automatically recognizes a symmetry point.
recognition
Result output Calypso computes the coordinates and the normal vector of the
symmetry point and the distance between the original two probing
points.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-33

Defining Features
The Radius Point

Menu: Features → Additional Features → Radius Point
Using the features Radius, Sphere and Angle Points, you can select
the applicable radius correction in different situations with single-
point measurements in order to define the point of contact correctly.
The Radius Point feature is intended for probing cylindrical elements.
The measured value is corrected in the measuring plane towards the
connecting line between the center of the probe tip and the specified
center point.
Measuring
plane
Cylinder axis
Perform the following steps to measure a radius point:

2 Specify a point on the cylinder axis and the vector of the cylinder
axis.
3 Probe a point.
The actual radius and the coordinates of the probing point are read
out in the definition template.
Automatic feature A radius point is not detected automatically by Calypso. First, insert
recognition the feature in the measurement plan, define a center point and then
perform probing.
The Sphere Point

Menu: Features → Additional Features → Sphere Point
the applicable radius correction in different situations with single-
5-34 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

With the Sphere Point, the measured value is corrected towards the
connecting line between the center of the probe tip and the specified
center. The sphere point is intended for probing sphere surfaces. Use
the radius point for cylindrical features.
Perform the following steps to measure a sphere point:
2 Enter the coordinates for the sphere center point and the desired
radius in the Center Point column.
3 Probe a point.
The actual radius of the sphere, the vector from the sphere center
point to the probing point and the coordinates of the probing point
are read out in the definition template.
Example of application Using the Sphere Point feature, you can define the radius of a sphere
with a single probing and specification of the sphere center point.
pre-defined
center of circle R
Automatic feature Calypso cannot automatically detect a sphere point. First, insert the
recognition feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and
then perform probing.
The Angle Point

Menu: Features → Additional Features → Angle Point
the appropriate radius correction in different situations with single-
With the angle point, the measured value is corrected towards the
normal for the probed plane.
Probing strategy To measure an angle point, you must specify a reference plane
through the plane origin, a space axis and an angle and then probe
exactly one point.
The actual angle of the probed plane and the coordinates of the
probing point are read out in the definition template.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-35

Defining Features
Perform the following steps to measure an angle point:

2 Enter the values for the for the location of the plane origin in the
left column.
3 Select how you want the reference plane to lie by specifying a
space axis and an angle.
4 Probe a point on the plane that has to be measured.
Example of application Using the Angle Point feature, you can compute the angle between
two planes, for example, by a probing. Specify one plane first.
Calypso computes the second plane from a probing and the origin of
the specified plane. Remember that automatic feature recognition is
not available for the angle point.
A
origin of
planes
Automatic feature Calypso cannot automatically recognize an angle point. First, insert
recognition the feature in the measurement plan, define the plane origin and then
perform the probing.
The General Surface

Menu: Features → Additional Features → General Surface
The General Surface feature was integrated in Calypso to allow runs
programmed in DMIS to be imported to Calypso.
The General Surface corresponds to the DMIS feature FEAT/GSURF.
For the evaluation of a General Surface, a mathematically defined
freeform surface is not computed in order to obtain the result of a
nominal-actual comparison between two surfaces. The General
Surface feature is merely a “container” for a set of points belonging
to a surface.
Particularities Each point of a General Surface is therefore probed, measured and
processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and
resources.
5-36 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the
Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and technology
information can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or
technology is selected, clicking on the probing point icon will produce
a new point here.
NOTE The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the
hss
definition template nor in the point list; they appear only in the
printouts and protocols (default printout, compact protocol and
custom printout).
Nominal definition Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options
for the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers
to all associated points of the General Surface.
Point from You can add a nominal point to the General Surface by clicking on the
CAD model desired position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition
template must be open when you do this).
Point by probing You can add a point to the General Surface by probing with the
CMM.
Automatic feature Calypso cannot automatically recognize a General Surface. Enter the
recognition feature in the measurement plan before probing.
The General Curve

Menu: Features → Additional Features → General Curve
The General Curve feature was integrated in Calypso to allow runs
programmed in DMIS to be imported to Calypso.
Particularities The General Curve feature corresponds to the DMIS feature
FEAT/GCURVE. No mathematically defined curve shape is computed
from splines in the evaluation of a General Curve to obtain the result
of the nominal-actual comparison of two curved lines. The General
Curve feature is merely a “container” for a set of points belonging to
a curve.
Strategy Each point of a General Curve is therefore probed, measured and
processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and
resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the
Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and technology
information can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or
technology is selected, clicking on the probing point icon will produce
a new point here.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-37

Defining Features
The points may be in any spatial location. The actual values result
after projection of the data onto a plane specified in the definition
template of the General Curve (with X, Y, Z, NX, NY, NZ).
NOTE The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the
hss
definition template nor in the point list; they appear only in the
printouts and protocols (default printout, compact protocol and
custom printout).
Nominal definition Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options
for the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers
to all associated points of the General Curve.
Point from You can add a nominal point to the General Curve by clicking on the
CAD model desired position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition
template must be open when you do this).
Point by probing You can add a point to the General Curve by probing .
Automatic feature Calypso cannot automatically recognize a General Curve. Enter the
recognition feature in the measurement plan before probing.
5-38 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Linking Features in Constructions

Constructions are constructed features which cannot be probed
directly on a workpiece, e.g. the center of a bore or the intersection of
two features.
Calypso can, however, mathematically construct regular geometric
features and, in this way, define the feature you require. As
constructions cannot be probed, automatic feature recognition is not
available here.
In the measurement plan, a construction is indicated by the blue
border around the icon. Calypso supports a total of 12 different
constructions:
– ➤“The Intersection” on page 5-42
– ➤“The Perpendicular” on page 5-53
– ➤“The Symmetry” on page 5-54
– ➤“The Projection” on page 5-55
– ➤“Average-Feature Construction” on page 5-56
– ➤“The Edge Point” on page 5-56
– ➤“Cone Addition Construction” on page 5-57
– ➤“The Maximum Coordinate” on page 5-59
– ➤“The Minimum Coordinate” on page 5-59
– ➤“The Maximum Result” on page 5-59
– ➤“The Minimum Result” on page 5-60
– ➤“The Plane with Offset” on page 5-60
How to Define Constructions

The procedure for defining a construction is very similar to that for
defining a feature:
1 Add the construction of your choice to the measurement plan by
selecting it in the Construct menu.
2 Double-click on the icon of the construction or select it and click
on the Magnifier icon.
This opens the definition template of the construction.
3 Use the Feature buttons to select the features for which the
construction is required.
4 Click on OK to confirm your choice.
The features you selected are now interlinked in a construction.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-39

Defining Features
Defining Features by Recalling

The recall is a special type of construction. You can use a recall to
derive a new feature from one or more features in a common
coordinate system.
Example of application Let us suppose you have measured four circles. You would now like to
learn the circle in which the center points of the measured circles are
located. To this end, define a new circle from the “recalled” center
points of the four measured circles.
circle 2
resulting
pitch circle
circle1 circle3
circle4
How to Define a Point or a Feature by Recall

You can recall the reference point (the origin of the feature‘s local
coordinate system) of an element or the element as a whole.
Perform the following steps to define a point or a complete element
by a recall:
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you
require to be created by a recall.
2 Select one of the recall types from the Nominal Definition list:
• Recall – with this type you define a new feature from previously
defined features, with each recalled feature providing its
reference point (the origin of its feature‘s local coordinate
system). Thus two circles define a straight line that goes
through both their center points.
• Recall One Feature – in this way you recall the whole selected
element (possibly transformed into a different coordinate
system) and derive from it a new feature of identical geometry.
You then see the select window with the features.
5-40 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Select the feature or features you require – press the Ctrl or shift
key if necessary – and click on OK.
The reference point or points and the feature are accepted.
How to Recall Points with Area Specification

Points recall supports the recall of any previously defined points of
other features to evaluate them in a different manner. You can recall
individual points, single paths, specific areas (specified in coordinates
or angles) or the complete feature.
Perform the following steps to define a point or a complete element
by a point recall:
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you
require to be created by a recall.
2 From the Nominal Definition list, select the Recall Points recall
type.
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points
window:
The list contains all the potential features for the points recall.
When the Recall Points dialog box opens, two more buttons
appear at the upper right of the toolbar.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-41

Defining Features
There are now two options:

3 To recall all points from one or several features into the new
feature: Select the feature or features you require – press the Ctrl
or shift key if necessary – and confirm with OK.
4 To recall certain points from a single feature into the new feature:
• In the list, select the feature with the points from which (or with
some of the points from which) the new feature is to be
produced.
• Click on this icon to display the measured points of the feature
in the CAD window with crosses.
• Click on this icon and, using the mouse, drag a rectangle
around the points of your choice.
• Click on OK.
The points are included in the new feature.
The Intersection
Menu: Construction → Intersection
With the Intersection construction, you can intersect straight lines,
planes, circles, cylinders, spheres and cones with each other and have
tangents computed.
To do this, you enter the two characteristics and obtain one or more
results. Depending on which characteristic you entered first, not all
options are available to you for the second one.
Intersection with wall If you select an axial element, such as a cylinder or cone, for the
or axis? intersection, Calypso assumes that you want to intersect the axis of
the element with a different element. If, however, you want to
intersect the section surface of the element instead of the axis of the
axial element, you must select the Wall check box in the definition
template of the intersection.
Depending on the intersection, one to four results are showed in the
Result Selection group of the definition template, and you select the
intersection result you want to proceed with.
Automatic correction With this construction, Calypso supplies results even when the objects
do not intersect geometrically but a meaningful, different
interpretation (for example, tangent) is possible.
When a cylinder or cone intersects a plane, Calypso performs
automatic corrections – under certain circumstances the plane is
interpreted as vertical or parallel (refer to ➤“Intersection of a plane
with a cylinder” on page 5-49 and ➤“Intersection of a plane with a
cone” on page 5-50).
5-42 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

When rotationally symmetrical three dimensional surfaces intersect,

Calypso performs automatic corrections under certain circumstances –
the surfaces are interpreted as concentric or coaxial.
Interpretation of results The following sections describe the different intersections and their
results.
Intersection of a straight line with a straight line

The straight lines can be located in any part plane. However, they
must not be parallel or antiparallel.
Line 1
Inters ection
Line 2
Calypso delivers four points as results.

– If you select the Spatial option in the definition template, you
obtain as the intersection the center of the perpendicular between
the two straight lines - the point closest to the two straight lines.
If both straight lines are in one plane, this point coincides with the
actual intersection of the two straight lines.
– If you select one of the other results in the definition template, you
obtain in each case the intersection of the projections of the two
straight lines to one of the three part coordinate system planes.
Intersection of a plane with a plane

The normals of the two planes must not be parallel or antiparallel.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-43

Defining Features
The result computed by Calypso is the spatially defined intersection

line. The point of the computed intersection lines that is closest to the
origin is used as the origin of the feature‘s local coordinate system
(reference point) of the intersection lines.
Intersection of a circle with a circle

Both circles must lie in one plane. A distinction must be made here
between two possibilities:
– Two intersections are present.
intersection 1
intersection 2
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify

the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection
1 and Result 2 for intersection 2.
If just one intersection is present because the circles are touching,
two identical points are read out.
– There is no intersection between the circles.
center
Calypso cannot compute a result in this case.
5-44 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Intersection of a straight line with a circle

The straight line and the normal of the circle must not be parallel or
antiparallel. This means that the projection of the straight line into the
plane of the circle is again a straight line.
L ine
Circle P2
P1
P rojection line
Calypso calculates as a result the intersections of the projected

straight lines with the circle. If the straight line only touches the circle
and does not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
Differentiation has to be made between the following two
possibilities:
– Two intersections are present.
intersection 1
intersection 2
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify

the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection
1 and Result 2 for intersection 2.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-45

Defining Features
– There is no intersection between the (projected) straight line and

the circle.
Perpendicular
Lotfußpunkt
Calypso cannot compute a result in this case.
Intersection of a straight line with a sphere

Calypso computes as a result the intersections of the straight line with
the sphere. If the projected straight line only touches the sphere and
does not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
If computation is not possible, an error message is issued.
Intersection of a straight line with a plane

The straight line and the normal of the plane must not be
perpendicular to each other.
penetration
point
5-46 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Calypso computes as a result the piercing point of the straight line

through the plane.
Intersection of a straight line with cylinder

The straight line and the cylinder axis must not be parallel or
antiparallel.
If the check box

– Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the piercing points
of the line through the cylinder wall
– otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the
cylinder.
Intersection of a straight line with a cone

If the check box
– Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the piercing points
of the line through the wall of the cone
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-47

Defining Features
– otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the
cone.
Intersection of a plane with a circle

The normals of the plane and of the circle must not be parallel or
antiparallel.
Calypso computes as a result the intersections of the circular line with

the plane.
5-48 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Intersection of a plane with a sphere

Calypso computes as a result the intersectíon circle of the sphere with
the plane.
Intersection of a plane with a cylinder

If the check box
– Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: a circle
– otherwise: an intersection point.
z, k
In the case of a wall intersection, Calypso will not create the “exact
mathematical” ellipse as the intersected entity but will automatically
adjust this to form a circle if the plane does not deviate too greatly
from the perpendicular position, i.e. if the angle between the normals
of the plane and the axis of the cylinder is less than 45°.
In this case, the circle - the center point of which represents the
intersection point of the cylinder axis with the section plane - which
intersects the cylinder vertically will be calculated.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-49

Defining Features
Intersection of a plane with a cone

If the check box
– Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: a circle
– otherwise: an intersection point.
E
E’
Here, Calypso will not create the “exact mathematical” ellipse as the
intersected entity but will automatically adjust this to form a circle if
the plane does not deviate too greatly from the regular position, i.e. if
the angle between the normals of the plane and the axis of the cone
is less than 45°.
In this case, the circle - the center point of which represents the
intersection point of the cone axis with the section plane - which
intersects the cone vertically will be calculated.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
Intersection of a sphere with a cylinder

The intersection of the sphere and the cylinder is the intersection of a
sphere of identical size whose center point is the projection of the
sphere center point to the cylinder axis.
5-50 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The distance between the center point of the sphere and the cylinder
axis must be less than half the cylinder radius.
Intersection of a sphere with a cone

The intersection of the sphere and the cone is the intersection of a
sphere of identical size whose center point is the projection of the
sphere center point to the cone axis.
The distance between the sphere center point and the cone axis must
be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle. No
intersection is determined in all other cases.
Intersection of a sphere with a sphere
Calypso computes the exact intersection circle of the two spheres.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-51

Defining Features
Intersection of a cone with a cylinder

If the check box
– Wall has been activated, Calypso will calculate: the intersection of
the cylinder with the “projected” cone – this is a cone of the same
tapen angle, the point of which is the projection of the cone point
on the cylinder axis and the axis of which runs parallel to the
cylinder axis.
The angle between the (actual) cone axis and the cylinder axis
must not be greater than 45°. The distance between the
intersection of the cone axis and the theoretical resulting circle
must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle.
No intersection is determined in all other cases.
– otherwise: the intersection point of the two axes.
The same conditions apply here as for the intersection of two lines.
Intersection of a cone with a cone

The intersection of a cone with another cone is generated in the
following manner: The cone with the blunter opening angle is set
coaxially to the other cone, the tip of the new cone results as the
projection of the old tip to the cone axis of the cone having the more
pointed opening angle. The circle resulting from this is generated as
the intersection of the two cones.
A condition for this is that the angle between the two cone axes is
smaller than 45°. The distance between the axis of the blunter cone
and the plane of the theoretical resultant circle and the center point
of the circle must be less than half the radius of the circle.
S spitz
S‘ stumpf
ϕ
hϕ
R K
5-52 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The two cones can lie parallel or antiparallel to each other. Calypso
computes the intersection circle in both cases.
R K
The Perpendicular
Menu: Construction → Perpendicular
Using the Perpendicular construction, you can have Calypso
compute the shortest distance between two features.
Feature 1 With Feature 1 in the definition template, define the point from
which the perpendicular will be struck. You can select any feature to
be feature 1. The following table shows which coordinates are used
by potential characteristics:
Feature 1 Using Coordinates

Point (probing) Coordinates of probing point
Circle Coordinates of center point
Straight line Coordinates of the origin of the local
coordinate system
Plane Coordinates of the origin of the local
coordinate system
Feature 2 With Feature 2 in the definition template, set the direction of the
template. The perpendicular is vertical on Feature 2. Therefore,
Feature 2 must be a spatially defined element.
Interpretation of results The following is read out as the result of the computation:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-53

Defining Features
– The straight line on which the perpendicular is located by the

specification of two projection angles. You can modify the
reference to the projection angles at Spatial axis.
– The length (distance) of the perpendicular. The calculated distance
of the perpendicular is the distance of the point in Feature 1 to
Feature 2.
The Symmetry
Menu: Construction → Symmetry
You can use the Symmetry construction to determine a symmetry
feature between your selected Feature 1 and Feature 2. You can
then use the symmetry feature obtained in this way freely in other
constructions.
Feature 1 You can select any feature as Feature 1.
Feature 2 You can select any feature as Feature 2.
Interpretation of results The computed symmetry feature is output in the form of coordinates
common to the two features.
The examples below will facilitate interpretation of the results:
– Symmetry point of two circles
symmetry point
Calypso computes the coordinates of the symmetry point.
5-54 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

– Symmetry plane of two planes
As the result, Calypso computes the position, length and width of

the symmetry plane on which the symmetry point from the two
start points of the two planes is located.
– Symmetry axis of two lines
line1 line2
symmetry axis
As the result, Calypso computes the coordinates of the symmetry

axis on which the symmetry point from the two start points of the
two lines is located.
The Projection
Menu: Construction → Projection
You can use the Projection construction to determine the position of a
feature projected onto another feature (e.g. the position of a point
projected onto a plane).
Feature 1 Define the feature you want to project as Feature 1.
Feature 2 Specify as Feature 2 the feature onto which you want Feature 1
projected.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-55

Defining Features
Interpretation of results Result output depends on the feature which results from the
projection.
The examples below will facilitate interpretation of the results:
– Projection of a circle onto a plane
The projection of a circle onto a plane transposes the circle
perpendicularly to the plane until it is on the plane.
Calypso computes the coordinates of the center of the circle on
the plane.
– Projection of a cylinder onto a plane
Projection of a cylinder onto a plane produces a straight line
formed by the two end points of the cylinder’s axis on the plane.
Calypso computes the two projected angles and the coordinates of
the origin of the local coordinate system.
A special case is a cylinder normal to the projection plane: in this
case projection produces a point on the plane.
Calypso computes the coordinates of the point on the plane.
Average-Feature Construction
Menu: Construction → Average-Feature
Using the Average-Feature construction, you can have Calypso
calculate the average value of several measurement results. The
features from which the results originate must all be of the same kind
(e.g. only cylinders).
Feature selection Click on the Feature Selection button to select the features for whose
measured values you want to compute the average.
Picklist In the picklist, define the characteristic (radius, angle, ...) for which
you want the average computed. The list contains all the main
characteristics.
The Edge Point

Menu: Construction → Edge Point
Use the Edge Point construction to have Calypso compute a corner
between two features. This corner is the intersection of two imaginary
extensions of the two features.
Feature 1 Point (generally a space point) is the only feature you can use as the
first feature. The spatial axis of this first point defines the first plane
on which the edge point will be situated. This plane must intersect
with the plane of feature 2.
5-56 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Feature 2 Point (generally a space point) is the only feature you can select as
the second feature. The spatial axis of this second point defines the
second plane on which the edge point will be situated. This plane
must intersect with the plane of feature 1.
Feature 3 You can specify a plane or a point as feature 3. If you specify a point,
this point also defines a plane via the normal. The edge point is
computed as the intersection of this plane with the intersection of
plane 1 and plane 2.
Interpretation of results Calypso computes the coordinates of the edge point.
The example below illustrates how an edge point is computed for two
planes in order to yield the coordinates of the imaginary corner. The
third plane here is the drawing plane.
element 1 contour point
element 2
If the third plane is not defined, the edge point is defined centered
between element 1 and element 2 (element 1 and element 2 usually
differ at least slightly in height).
Cone Addition Construction

Menu: Construction → Cone Addition
Calypso uses the Cone Addition construction to compute the
following data for the Cone feature:
– Diameter Definition: The diameter of the cone at the defined
height.
– Position Definition: The cone height at a defined diameter.
Feature The only feature you can select is a cone, because cone additions are
computed exclusively for cones.
Diameter definition If you have selected the option Diameter Definition, you can either
enter the height directly or determine this indirectly using another
feature. Calypso will require that you make the following entries:
– At L: Enter height L, the height at which the diameter should be
calculated, and enter the reference point of the height entered
under Referenced To:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-57

Defining Features
• Height L can be referenced to the Cone Origin.
cone axis
cone origin
reference plane
Height L will be measured from the cone origin (the intersection

point of the cone axis with the surface area closest to the cone
center).
• Height L can be referenced to the Part alignment.
cone axis
L cone origin
workpiece system
Here, the coordinate axis which lies closest to the cone axis will
be computed first. The diameter will be output on the point of
the cone axis for which the coordinates on this axis are equal to
L.
– Or At: If you do not wish to enter the height directly, you can use
this button to determine a feature that (if necessary, using the
intersection point with the cone axis) defines the height of the
required diameter. Only the Point, 2-D Line and Plane features are
suitable here.
Position definition If you have selected the option Position Definition, you can either
enter the appropriate diameter or determine the required height
indirectly using another feature. Calypso will require that you make
the following entries:
– At D: Directly enter the diameter for which the appropriate height
should be calculated.
– Or At: If you do not enter a diameter, you can use this button to
determine a feature to indirectly determine the height at which the
position will be defined. Only the Circle, Circle on Cone, Cylinder,
Cone and Ellipse features are suitable here.
5-58 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Interpretation of results Calypso will either calculate a specific diameter or a specific height on
the cone depending on what you have selected.
The Maximum Coordinate

Menu: Construction → Maximum Coordinate
You can use the Maximum Coordinates construction to have Calypso
compute the coordinates of the point at which positive deviation in
feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation
to the feature’s actual geometry or its nominal geometry.
Feature 1 Click on the Feature 1 button to open the Selection dialog box,
where you can select a regular geometrical feature of your choice.
Interpretation of results Calypso computes the coordinates of the point where positive
deviation is at maximum.
The Minimum Coordinate

Menu: Construction → Minimum Coordinate
You can use the Minimum Coordinates construction to have Calypso
compute the coordinates of the point at which negative deviation in
feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation
to the feature’s actual geometry or its nominal geometry.
Feature 1 Click on the Feature 1 button to open the Selection dialog box,
where you can select a regular geometrical feature of your choice.
Interpretation of results As a result, Calypso calculates the coordinates of the point having the
largest negative deviation.
The Maximum Result

Menu: Construction → Maximum Result
You can use the Maximum Result construction to have Calypso
determine which is the largest in a group of similar features.
Feature selection Click on the Feature Selection button to open the Selection dialog
box, where you can select the features you want to have compared.
Picklist From the picklist, select the characteristic (radius, angle...) of the
selected features for which you want the maximum computed. The
list contains all the main characteristics.
Interpretation of results Calypso computes the maximum for the characteristic you selected
and displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-59

Defining Features
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has
the largest diameter.
The Minimum Result

Menu: Construction → Minimum Result
You can use the Minimum Result construction to have Calypso
determine which is the smallest in a group of similar features.
Feature selection Click on the Feature Selection button to open the Selection dialog
box, where you can select the features you want to have compared.
Picklist From the picklist, select the characteristic (radius, angle...) of the
selected features for which you want the minimum computed. The list
contains all the main characteristics.
Interpretation of results Calypso computes the minimum for the characteristic you selected
and displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has
the smallest diameter.
The Plane with Offset

Menu: Construction → Plane with Offset
You can use the Plane with Offset construction to define a plane
offset a certain amount above a reference plane.
Feature 1 Planes are the only feature you can select. The plane you select here is
the origin or reference plane for computing the plane with offset.
Offset In the input field Offset enter the value by which the offset plane
should be offset compared to the plane selected in Feature 1.
Interpretation of results Calypso computes the coordinates of the plane with offset. Please
note that the offset plane is usually a plane which does not really exist
and, consequently, no probing points can be taken.
Additional Features Holos and Gear

You can add the Holos or Gear feature to the measurement plan
with Features → Additional Features → Holos or Features →
Additional Features → Gear or via the Toolbox of the Utilities page.
In this manner, you can integrate any HOLOS or GEAR macro into a
measurement plan and have it executed during the CNC run. The
programmed macro is started by the CMM-OS during the CNC run.
5-60 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

You can add the Holos or GEAR utility to both the list of
characteristics and the list of features. In this manner, the selected
macros can be executed after either a characteristic or feature is run.
Caution
hss
! Before starting a measurement, either HOLOS or GEAR must have
been started, otherwise the CNC run will be canceled.
Entries for HOLOS or Enter the following in the definition template:

GEAR
– the macro to be executed
You can either enter the macro directly or by selecting it from a
catalog.
– the coordinate system for the macro
You can select a coordinate system in Calypso, which will be
passed to HOLOS or GEAR. The manner in which the coordinate
system will be used must be specified in HOLOS.
– a coordinate system from the macro
You can receive a coordinate system from the macro and use it
further in Calypso. To do so, enter the name under which the
coordinate system should be used in Calypso.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-61

Defining Features
Defining a Measurement Strategy

The nature of the feature and the location of the measurement must
be known before Calypso can perform a measurement with the
CMM. In most instances that is enough, because when the
measurement plan starts Calypso automatically performs the
measurements required for the characteristics.
The term Not infrequently, however, other decisions have to be made because
“measurement of special considerations relating to measurement or the material, for
strategy” example, or on account of other, specific requirements. The term
measurement strategy describes all the additional definitions you
make so that Calypso and the CMM can return an optimum
measuring result.
The measurement strategy derives from the measuring task as such: A
measurement strategy refers only to the corresponding feature, not to
an entire measurement plan.
Tasks The tasks that defining a measurement strategy can involve are as
follows:
– Select Utilities and insert in the strategy list (Stop, Position CMM
without Probing, Change Prober, Clearance Data, etc.)
– Using Technology macros (single point mode)
– Selecting a Path generation method
(See ➤“Path Generation – Automatically Measuring Features” on
page 5-68.)
– Editing the Point list
(See ➤“The Points List” on page 5-64.)
– Editing the Probe routes
(See ➤“Editing the Probe Routes” on page 7-22.)
– Checking and editing Clearance data
(See ➤“Checking the Routes” on page 7-25.)
You can take care of all these tasks in the Strategy dialog box that
you open from within the definition template of the feature in
question.
5-62 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The diagram shows an example of the Strategy window with a Circle

feature.
Generate Path
Point list Resources

Single points/ Edit
scanning technology
(paths)
Technology
macro Strategy list
This dialog box is fully described in Strategy in the Calypso Online

Help.
How to Use the Shortcut Menu of the

Strategy List
The strategy list contains certain entries (e.g. probing points, used
tools and scanning methods) for all the points and tasks that the
Calypso should execute when measuring a feature (in the sense of the
probe routes).
To edit a list entry through the shortcut menu:
1 With the mouse, mark the list entry that you want to work on.
2 With the right mouse button, click on the list entry.
The shortcut menu opens with the following options:
• Execute Now!: The CMM runs the list entry immediately.
Make sure that the CMM can move freely.
• Copy: Copies the marked list entry.
• Cut: Removes the marked list entry from the list.
• Paste: Inserts a previously copied or cut element.
• Edit: Opens the window with the parameters for the list entry.
This can also be done with a double click on the list entry.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-63

Defining Features
3 Click on the command of your choice.

The command is executed.
The Points List

The points list contains the coordinates for all the points together
with the normal vectors that have been collected for the feature. You
can edit these coordinates and for example define optimal probe
points.
The illustration below shows an example of the Point List window
with a plane measured at 4 points.
How to Change the Point List

In the point list you can change the stylus used for measuring and
change the coordinates or the normal vectors of the probing points.
Caution
hss
! Be careful when changing the list, because the CMM goes to each
point in the list as soon as you run the measurement plan.
To display or change a point list of a feature:

1 Double-click on the feature to open its definition template, and
click on the Strategy button.
The window will open.
2 Click on the button with the icon for the point list.
5-64 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 To change a coordinate, click in the entry field shown and

overwrite the old value.
4 Click on OK.
The settings are accepted.
Alternative Probing Methods (Self-Centering

Probing)
The probe head is usually unlocked only in the probing direction. This
means that the probe head can move in one direction only, namely
the direction corresponding to the movement of the joystick on the
control panel.
probing direction
Z
Y locking
mechanism
In this example, self-centering probing of the Vee-way necessitates

cancellation of the lock in the X direction in order to avoid faulty
probing.
probing direction
Z
Y locking
mechanism
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-65

Defining Features
How to Activate Self-Centering Probing

NOTE Self-centering probing is an option only for measuring probe heads.
hss
To activate probe self centering:
1 If you want to activate this function for a particular feature:
• Highlight the feature in the measurement plan.
• Select Prerequisites → Probe Self Centering.
The Self-Centering Probing dialog box is opened. Skip to step 4.
2 If you want to activate only this function for individual probing
points of the feature:
• Open the definition template of the feature.
• Click on the Strategy button.
• Highlight the probing point in the strategy list.
• Open the probing point by clicking on the magnifier or by
double-clicking.
• Click on the Probe Self Centering button.
The Self-Centering Probing dialog box is opened. Skip to step 4.
3 If you want to activate for all features of a measurement plan:
• Check that no features are highlighted in the measuring plan.
• Select Prerequisites → Probe Self Centering.
The Self-Centering Probing dialog box is opened.
5-66 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

4 To activate probe self centering:

• Deactivate the left of the two check boxes Self-centering
probing.
• Activate the right of the two check boxes Self-centering
probing.
5 Set the parameters for self-centering probing.
6 Click OK to save the settings.
The next time it probes, Calypso will use the settings you just
activated.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-67

Defining Features
Path Generation – Automatically Measuring

Features
Unlike the probing of individual points, path generation procedures
feature rapid multi-point measurement in a single operation. Path
generation will help you arrive at optimum and highly accurate
measuring results.
NOTE You must have qualified your probe with the Tensor setting in order
hss to use path generation for scanning (see ➤“Installing and Qualifying
Probes” on page 4-10).
The measurement strategy depends on a number of parameters, on

the group of the characteristic (shape, position, size) through
tolerance up to the stylus used. Calypso calculates from these
parameters the starting parameters of the CMM, which lead to best
possible compliance with the tolerance you demand. You only have to
enter the minimum data.
With path generation you can
– continuously record measuring points and generate paths from
single points, if you have a CMM with measuring probe head.
– Or you can just generate a path from single points, if you have a
CMM with switching probe head (pseudo scanning).
Path generation is a macro which automatically measures a feature
with set parameters, for example a certain number of surface lines or
screws on a cylinder or cone. With this you can reach a high point
density and thus adequate information about the workpiece surface.
High point densities are the standard proof required and very accurate
calculation of your features.
To use a path generation method, follow these steps:
– Set the global settings for the evaluation of the characteristics
groups in the System Set Up (you will find more information in the
Online Help under „How to Change the Measurement Parameters
of the CMM“).
– Enter the feature in the measurement plan and probe its geometry.
Alternatively, you can load a feature from a CAD file. See
➤“Defining Features” on page 5-2.
– Assign a path generation method.
– Check and/or change the settings of a path generation method.
Assigning the path generation method is split into three steps:
– Adding the path generation method to the strategy list.
5-68 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Path Generation – Automatically Measuring Features
– Check/Change general settings.

These settings are common to all path generation methods.
– Check/Set values for the path generation method.
These settings are described separately because they depend on
the chosen path generation method.
How to Add a Path Generation Method to

the Strategy List
First, the path generation method has to be added to the strategy list
of the feature, so it can be used when generating travel paths.
To adopt a path generation method for a feature:
1 Make sure that the feature is part of the measurement plan and
that the definition template is open.
In the definition template you see the Strategy button.
2 Click on the Strategy button.
The Strategy dialog box is opened.
Path Generation
Methods
Strategy list
3 Choose the path mode.

To change the setting click on the displayed button. (You have
chosen path generation if the points are displayed connected.)
4 Click on the button for the path generation method you want.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-69

Defining Features
The path generation method is entered in the strategy list. At the

same time, Calypso immediately generates the path from the single
points if you choose it in Step 3.
General Settings for the Path Generation

Method
You can now change general settings for the method separately from
which path generation method is set for a feature.
Calypso supplies default values for the fields in the dialog box for the
chosen path generation method. The data comes from:
– the geometry data of the feature,
– the default values and
– the tolerances from
• the characteristics and
• the feature.
If you have not defined any tolerances yet, you can do it in this
section.
Calypso calculates the parameters by the closest tolerance which you
entered for testing the feature and the point density for the
characteristics group (see ➤“Basics about Characteristics” on
page 6-2).
A description for these parameters for each path generation method
can be found in:
– ➤“Path Generation Methods for Circle, Cylinder and Cone” on
page 5-71
– ➤“Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Polyline” on
page 5-73
– ➤“Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Grid” on page 5-75
– ➤“Path Generation of Lines” on page 5-76
5-70 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Path Generation Methods for Circle, Cylinder and

Cone
The offered pages for entering the parameters for the path
generation methods (for the features circle, cylinder, cone) do not
differ from each other. In the following picture you see the input
window for a circle segment.
Generating the path You can extract the data for path generation straight from the CAD
from the CAD model model. When you use this method the system returns a series of
either start and end angles or start and end points.
Open cylinders and cones are taken into account. Each new path is
checked directly against the CAD model in order to identify material
flaws, if any, and eliminate them from the path. The path can thus be
generated with restrictions, or you may be able to generated different
paths. (At this time the function is implemented only for the circle and
arc.)
If you make subsequent, manual changes to the data, Calypso does
not recheck the information. This means that you have a great deal of
latitude in defining paths.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-71

Defining Features
Entering formulas for The entries for path generation can be parameterized. Click on the
path parameters corresponding fields with the right mouse button and then select
Formula in the popup menu. In the Formula dialog box, you can use
the variables that are defined in the measurement plan to make
formulas and enter PCM commands.
The following entries can be parameterized.
– Scanning Speed
– Step Distance
– Start Angle (Input in decimal degrees)
– Angle Range (Input in decimal degrees!)
– Probe
– Stylus
Parameterizing single Single probing points and intermediate positions can also be
points and parameterized. Here, it will be necessary to define the basis system for
intermediate positions the purpose of clarity. To do so, click on the PCM-Reference button
in the List Of Points dialog box.
In the dialog box Reference system for PCM variable you can
define which of the three relevant coordinate systems should be used
a basis for the conversion of parameters to numerical values.
This coordinate system will apply to all parameters of the feature that
is currently open. All technological parameters of this feature will
always be calculated on the basis of this coordinate system
irrespective of the view that has been selected.
5-72 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Measuring range The meanings of the terms measuring height and the resulting
measurement range are explained by the illustration below:
Origin of local
Element
Coordinate System
X
min. measuring
height
Measuring range
max. measuring
height
Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Polyline

The automatic measurement of a polyline is a valuable tool which
helps you measure a track of lines, circle segments and full circles on
planes. This helps you measure planes very easily that are strongly
segmented or ruptured.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-73

Defining Features
You see the input window for the generation of polylines in the
following picture.
Coordinates list
Mark frame
Make sure that you have entered a value for edge deviation in the
system set up. Check this value by pressing on the Basic Settings
button and then on the SCAN Limits tab.
How to Create a Polyline

To create a polyline:
1 Probe the points on the plane that you want to create the polyline
from. You can do this with the CAD window (you will find more
information in the Online Help under „How to Define a Probing
Point in the CAD Window“) or the CMM.
Each measuring point which you entered is displayed in the
coordinate list (from bottom to top) in its X, Y and Z coordinates.
Calypso connects these points with lines by default.
5-74 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

2 You always need three points if you want to create a circle

segment or full circle from the collected points (start point,
direction point and end point). The corresponding three points
have to be displayed in the coordinates list. Use the Arrow buttons
next to the Number field to do so.
3 Click on the circle segment icon or full circle icon, depending how
you want to connect the points.
The green border consists now encloses the three points from
which the circle segment or full circle is calculated. You see the
new connection in the CAD window.
4 Continue in this way with all following points.
The order does not matter for this: You can probe new points at
any time and/or choose/edit connection types between any points.
Path Generation Methods for Planes: the Grid

With the grid measurement, you can create a plane right down to
very small sections.
The input window for the path generation of planes with a grid can
be seen in the figure below.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-75

Defining Features
Path Generation of Lines

With the path generation method for straight lines, a straight line is
started whose points are already defined in the feature. Calypso does
not need any more details for this, and you can merely see the
parameters of the CMM and the tolerance in the input window of the
path generation method.
The input window for the generation of straight lines can be seen in
the figure below.
How to Set Parameters for a Path Generation

Method
To enter tolerances now and set general settings:
1 Double click on the corresponding entry in the strategy list to open
the window for the path generation method.
2 Click on the Basic Settings button if you want to enter required
point densities.
You switch to the corresponding page in the system set up (you
will find more information in the Online Help under „How to
Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM“).
5-76 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 If you have not defined any tolerances yet, enter them in the
Expected Tolerance field for the feature.
4 Click on the Calculate button.
Calypso runs the calculation with the parameters from the
Settings group. The default scanning speed proposed by the
system depends on the required accuracy.
5 Enter the number of the stylus in the Stylus field, which you want
to use for the CMM path generation method.
6 Enter the values for the path generation method. See ➤“Path
Generation – Automatically Measuring Features” on page 5-68.
7 Click on OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
You are returned to the Strategy window.
8 If you do not want to set any more path generation methods for
this feature, click OK. Otherwise repeat the steps from ➤“Features
you can Measure with Path Generation” on page 5-77.
The path generation method has now been fully defined and will be
executed once a CNC run is initiated.
Features you can Measure with Path

Generation
The available path generation methods are automatically offered with
every relevant feature. The choice of a path generation method
emerges from the required measuring tasks. The following path
generation methods are available:
Feature Icon Path Generation Method

Line Line measurement
Plane Polyline measurement
Grid measurement.
The plane is acquired in a grid of user-definable pitch.
Circle, Cylinder, Four-Point Circle Macro.

Cone This measurement is semiautomatic. To execute this
measurement, move the probe to the center of the circle
(cylinder, cone) that is to be measured. Calypso takes 4 probings
and calculates from these the values for the circle.
Circle Circle Auto Path Definition (Circle Auto Path Measurement).
The start angle and angle range can be adjusted.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 5-77

Defining Features
Feature Icon Path Generation Method

Helical Path (Helix Measurement).
Suitable for special applications (threads). Gradient, number of
turns, start angle and rotation direction can be adjusted.
Cylinder 2 Circle Auto Paths.
Two circles are measured – the first at the top of the cylinder and
the second at the bottom of the cylinder. The measuring heights
can be set individually.
1 Circle Auto Path.
This intersection is measured at the center of the cylinder. The
measuring height can be adjusted.
Form lines.
The number of surface lines is editable.
Helical Path (Helix Measurement).

Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction can
be adjusted.
Sphere Define Sphere Position.
Calypso probes the sphere and in so doing defines the position
of the sphere. The probing locations can not be influenced. In
CNC runs, you will be requested to take manual probings.
Sphere Macro.
You can enter the sphere coverage for the area in which these
probings are to be taken.
Cone Circle part measuring:
Two circles will be measured – the first at the top of the cone and
the second at the bottom of the cone. The measuring heights
can be set individually.
Layer measuring:
One or more intersections will be measured between the surface
area and coverage area of the cone. The number of intersections
and their measuring heights can be adjusted.
Curve Curve segment measuring:
Only for the Curve option (see ➤“Curve Measurement (Option)”
on page 15-1). The segment to be measured is defined by three
or more points:
– If you define three points, they represent start point, end
point and direction of curvature (direction around
circumference) of the curve segment, in that order.
– If you define more than three points, they represent a full
circle; the first point defines the start point and the direction
around of curvature is clockwise (from the “top” or
“outside”).
5-78 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
6
6 Defining Characteristics
.................................................................................................................................
The characteristics enable you to check the tolerance limits that your
workpiece and its features should meet. You integrate the required
characteristics in the measurement plan and link them with to the
measured features. If those features are already defined, will be
defined or maybe are to be imported from a CAD file later on, it
makes no difference. Calypso supports any given order in which you
define the features or characteristics of your measurement plan.
You should be familiar with the basic concepts of Calypso before you
proceed with this chapter. If you are not, you should read ➤“The
Calypso User Desk” on page 1-5 and ➤“Measurement plan-oriented
Measuring with Calypso” on page 1-9.
Basics about Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Calculation of Geometric Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defining Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Details on Specific Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6- 1

Defining Characteristics
Basics about Characteristics

Once you have defined the features, you can set the characteristics
for measuring the size (dimensions), form, position, and so on, of
these features. In this way you can ascertain whether the features are
within the limits you specified.
You can also add a characteristic to the list of characteristics without
immediately defining the associated feature. You can select the
associated feature later when entering the settings for the
characteristic.
The characteristics are split into three groups (see table below). To
evaluate these features, different point densities are required for each
group, depending on which best fit method is used (see ➤“The Fit
Methods” on page 6-3 and in Online Help to check the settings
under “How to Change the Measurement Parameters of the CMM”).
Group Point Density Comment

Size elements Small Normally these characteristics are rated by a small number of
measuring points. It is recommended to use more points than
required to also get a statement about the standard deviation
(Sigma). For a function-oriented evaluation (peer measure
evaluation) a higher number of points is required.
Location Medium These characteristics require a higher point density, because
elements the position deviation overlaps the shape deviation of the
measuring features.
Form elements High The evaluation of the characteristics needs a high point
density on their measurement plane. Low-pass filtering of the
measurement points is also recommended to minimize the
influence of the surface roughness.
You can add other special features to the list of characteristics. In this
case, they are not actually characteristics, but they will be processed
during the CNC run. For more information, please see ➤“The
Utilities” on page 6-9.
6-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Calculation of Geometric Features

To understand and correctly interpret measuring results, you need to
know how Calypso calculates the corresponding standard geometric
feature from CMM's measured points.
Using the entered measuring points Calypso calculates a computed
feature. Mathematically, the computed feature is the feature which
best fits the resulting measured values in terms of the standard
geometery. The computed feature is the basis for the evaluation of
the measuring results. Depending on the fit method used, the
features determined in this manner can differ slightly from each other.
Thus, there are also different deviations of the measured feature from
the specified nominal feature.
Therefore, the computed feature and the associated best fit method
are fundamental for the accuracy of the Nom-Act Comparison, which
is performed over the characteristics.
NOTE The optimal best fit methods are the default settings for the
hss respective characteristic groups.
This section shows and explains the advantages and disadvantages of

the mathematical best fit methods. This means that for each
measuring requirement that arises within the framework of a
measuring strategy you can now select the Best Fit Method which is
best suited to your individual requirements.
The Fit Methods

Calypso uses the following best fit methods:
– Gauss
– Tschebyscheff (minimum criterion)
– Calculation as circumscribed or inscribed feature
– Calculation as tangential element (outside/inside).
Specifying the fit In Calypso, you can specify which best fit method to use for which
method feature at two places:
– in the Evaluation dialog box, which you can access from the
definition template for the respective feature using the Settings
button.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-3

– in the Evaluation dialog box, which you can access from the
feature selection for the characteristic using the Settings button.
The selected method will be used to calculate the characteristic
when the data are evaluated. If you select Default, the fit method
defined in the feature will be used.
Not all fit methods are available, only those suitable for the selected
feature (see ➤“Using the Fit Methods” on page 6-6).
You can view and change the parameters for the best-fit method in
the system setup by selecting Extras → Workroom →
Measurement. The current settings are on the Point Density tab.
Example The following diagram shows the actual-shape of a scanned circle
with the ideal geometric shapes. Those shapes result from the
different best fit methods.
outlier
Gauss fitting-in
Minimum fitting-in (Tschebyscheff)
Hull Element
Fitting-in element
X
Actual outline
As you can see in the diagram, depending on the used rectification

method, there are different results for measuring sizes (e.g. example
diameter), form deviation and position (e.g. center).
6-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Best fit According to Gauss

The Gauss best fit method calculates the average best fit element.
From the calculated ideal outline and the actual probed outline, a sum
of square distances is calculated. The minimum this sum results in the
best fit element.
That means a best fit according to Gauss is insensitive against outliers
and forms a clear result by using limited calculating. If there is just a
small amount of points, the Gauss method is always the standard
evaluation method for measure, form and location testing.
Best Fit According to Tschebyscheff

The best fit according to Tschebyscheff calculates the geometric
feature in a way that there is the smallest maximum deviation
between calculated ideal outline and actual probed outline results.
Therefore, the extreme values of the probing have an impact on the
result of calculation. This makes this best fit method very susceptible
for outliers. A high number of measured values can improve matters.
It may, however, be advisable to eliminate outliers, depending on the
measuring requirements (see ➤“How to Eliminate Outliers” on
page 6-31). Used for ISO 1101 shape testing.
Calculation as Circumscribed/Inscribed Feature

When calculating as circumscribed feature, the feature is as small as
possible and positioned in such a way that no probing point is outside
the feature. When calculating as inscribed feature, the feature is as
large as possible and positioned in such a way that no probing point is
inside the feature.
This method is useful for pairing dimension evaluation and for
evaluating the relating element on position tolerances.
Requirement: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination, because the circumscribed or
inscribed feature can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme
points.
Calculation as Tangential Feature

The tangential feature is the largest possible feature outside which no
probing points of the feature are situated, or the smallest possible
element inside which no probing points of the feature are situated.
Requirement: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination, because the tangential feature
can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme points.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-5

Using the Fit Methods

For each feature, the table below shows the fit methods you can
select for the feature.
Element Gauss Minimum Circum- Tangential
scribed/ element
inscribed
2-D line × × ×
3-D line × ×
Plane × × ×
Circle × × × ×
Sphere × × × ×
Cylinder × × × ×
Cone × ×
Ellipse ×
Rectangle ×
Slot ×
Point ×
6-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To go from merely obtaining measurements to their evaluation, it is
necessary to define the characteristics.
This is performed as following:
– You integrate the characteristics into the measurement plan, a
procedure for which you have three options:
• You can choose characteristics from the menu list of the User
desk.
• You can choose characteristics from a toolbox of Calypso.
• You can define characteristics implicitly in the definition
template of a feature. See the section entitled ➤“The Definition
Template for Features” on page 5-3 for a description of the
check boxes of the Tolerance for: group.
– You assign the features to the characteristics, please see
➤“Connecting a Characteristic to a Feature” on page 6-14.
You can find more detailed information regarding the different
characteristics in ➤“Details on Specific Characteristics” on page 6-35.
How to Insert Characteristics into the

Measurement Plan
To insert characteristics into a measurement plan:
1 Click on the Characteristics button to view the list of
characteristics in the measurement plan area.
2 Choose the characteristic you want:
• To select the characteristic from the menu bar of the User Desk,
click either on Size or Form and location and select the
characteristic from the submenus. You can add other special
features to the measurement plan using Prerequisites →
Utilities.
• To select the characteristic from a toolbox, open the toolbox.
(➤“How to Work with a Custom Toolbox” on page 7-17.) Click
on the characteristic and drag it into the measurement plan
area.
The selected characteristic is added to the list of characteristics.
You can repeat these steps to add more characteristics or immediately
link a feature to the inserted characteristic.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-7

The Characteristic Definition Templates

When you select a characteristic from the Size or Form and
Location menu or from the toolbox, it will be listed in the
measurement plan area. If you wish to assign features and select their
tolerances, the corresponding definition template must be open.
NOTE The content of the characteristic definition template varies with the
hss selected characteristic.
There are three ways of opening a definition template:

– Mark the characteristic and click on the Open selected object
button.
– Right-click on the characteristic to open the popup menu and then
select Open.
– Double click on the icon of the characteristic.
The template of this characteristic will open. Here, the fields for
tolerance and actual value are shown. The buttons for the required
links of this characteristic will still be shown as empty.
Example:After you select and double click on the True Position
characteristic, the following dialog box will appear on the screen:
6-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Utilities
In the Utilities group in the toolbox and in the menu under Prepare
→ Utilities, you can find some special elements that, strictly
speaking, are not characteristics but are required for the
measurement plan run in certain circumstances:
– Alignment
– 3D Best Fit
– RPS Method
– P6 Method
– Stylus Qualification
– Gauge Correction Qualification (see ➤“Greater Accuracy in Circle
Measurement (Basics of Gage Correction Qualification)” on
page 5-18)
– Erosion module (option)
– Textelement
– Save Alignment
– Load Alignment
– Delete Alignment
– Zero Base Alignment (see ➤“How to set a base alignment to zero”
on page 4-53)
The utilities are described with the runs, characteristics and features
for which they are needed. Only the following utilities are described
here.
– Stylus Qualification
– Erosion Module
– Textelement
– Save Alignment
– Load Alignment
– Delete Alignment
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-9

The Stylus Qualification Utility

Use Prerequisites → Utilities → Stylus Qualification to add the
Stylus Qualification utility to the measurement plan.
The definition template for this utility corresponds to that of the Probe
Qualification dialog box (this dialog box is fully described in Probe
Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help):
You can use this utility to qualify any defined stylus or probe
configuration defined beforehand.
Calypso automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of
the measurement plan. If you use a probe changer, Calypso
automatically uses the correct probe. Otherwise, you will be
prompted to insert the probe.
6-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Erosion Module Utility

NOTE The Erosion Module is an option you can purchase and have enabled.
hss
You can add the Erosion Module utility to the measurement plan by
selecting Prerequisites → Utilities → Erosion Module or via the
Tool Box on the Utilities page.
The Erosion Module provides a file with translation and rotation

modules for two related coordinate systems which is suitable for
erosion machines.
These coordinate systems refer on the one hand to the clamping
device and to the erosion electrode on the other. Here, the coordinate
system of the workpiece or tool (erosion electrode) (Xe, Ye, Ze) will be
determined on the basis of the coordinate system of the clamping
device (X, Y, Z).
It will be necessary to enter the type of erosion machine that is being
used along with the name of the file that will be created.
During the CNC run, i.e. when measuring the feature, the coordinate
systems will be formed - if this has not already been executed - and
the parameter file of the Erosion Module will be saved on the hard
disk or an a diskette.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-11

Once the Erosion Module has been executed, an ASCII file will be
available in a format that can be used with the eroding machine. You
can now determine the name and path of the file.
NOTE The directory path must be available. It is not created automatically.

hss
The Textelement Utility

With Prerequisites → Utilities → Textelement or by using the Tool
Box on the Utilities page you can enter the utility Textelement on the
current page in the measurement plan.
The Textelement utility appears with its symbol in the list of
Characteristics. Double click to open a window which will allow you
to enter a text.
In the case of a CNC run of the measurement plan, the text will be
output in the printouts and protocols (the default printout, the
compact protocol, and the custom printout). Here, only the text itself
will be output. The name of the characteristic will not appear as a
header (as is usual the case of characteristics.
The text will only be written in the printouts and during CNC run and
not when opening or closing the definition template (as is usual in the
case of characteristics).
6-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Save Alignment
Calypso can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC
run.
In the definition template for the Save Alignment utility, enter the
file name and select the alignment to be saved.
When the utility is executed in the CNC run, the actual alignment
(calculated from the actual values) is saved on the hard disk in the
directory ...\Calypso\home\om\workaera\basesystems. A subdirectory is
created with the name that was entered in the definition template. If
you entered backslashes (“\”) here, further subdirectories will be
created under this directory.
If there is no actual alignment of the set alignment, this will be
calculated during the CNC run and, if necessary, measured.
If the alignment cannot be measured and calculated, the symbol for
the utility will turn red in the measurement plan.
Load Alignment
run.
In the definition template for the Load Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be loaded.
When the Load Alignment utility is executed in the CNC run (because
a feature refers to this alignment, for example), the alignment is
loaded from the hard disk. The directory for alignments is
...\Calypso\home\om\workarea\basesystems.
If the file name contains backslashes (“\”), the program will branch to
the appropriate subdirectories.
If a Load Alignment utility is contained in the measurement plan, it is
treated as a normal alignment. Its name (not identical to the file
name) appears in the geometry reference system lists and the lists for
linked alignments, for example.
No distinction is made between nominal values and actual values
when loading. Nominal values and actual values are equal in this case.
In the case of a DMIS run, the loaded alignment is used as the current
alignment.
Particularities The name of the alignment to be loaded need not necessarily be the
file name.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-13

An error message will be issued if an alignment cannot be loaded

(because the file is not present). In addition, a message stating this
will appear in the status window, and the CNC run will be interrupted
if necessary.
The base alignment is returned for critical calls, such as the nominal
alignment for the nominal geometry.
Delete Alignment
run.
In the definition template for the Delete Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be deleted.
All alignments are listed in directory
...\Calypso\home\om\workarea\basesystems.
If the file name contains backslashes (“\”), the program will branch to
the appropriate subdirectories.
The file you specified in the definition template is deleted during the
CNC run.
If the file is not present, the run will continue without a message. The
symbol for the utility in the measurement plan will turn red. If the file
is write-protected, an error message will appear stating that the file
cannot be deleted. The CNC run is resumed.
Connecting a Characteristic to a Feature

A characteristic must receive information relating to the feature in the
measurement plan which will be used as a basis for the check. You
have several different ways of connecting the characteristic to the
feature of your choice:
– Use the CAD window if the feature is already defined. Click on the
feature of your choice in the CAD window. Don't forget to make
sure, however, that Select Already Extracted Features is set in
the CAD window (you will find more information in the Online
Help under „How to Select Features on the CAD Model“).
The first feature you click on will be adopted as the Feature, the
second as Primary Datum, the third as Secondary Datum etc.
corresponding to the sequence of the buttons.
6-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

– Use the displayed button in the template window. In this way you
can connect new features or features that have already been
defined to the characteristic.
You establish the connection to the characteristic in the Selection
dialog box.
Input field
List of
existing
features
Overview If the measurement plan is large, you might find it useful to have an
overview of how a feature is used in the various characteristics. You
can obtain an overview of this nature by opening the list of features,
highlighting a feature and selecting the Check use of selected
features command in the shortcut menu. This opens a list of all
characteristics in which the feature you selected is used.
How to Assign an Existing Feature

To assign a feature to a characteristic using the definition template,
follow these steps:
1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic
of your choice.
2 Click on the Feature (or Feature element1) button.
The Selection (Features) dialog box is opened. All Features is
generally activated by default.
3 In the list, click on the feature that you want to assign.
NOTE You can view a filtered, short-form list by clicking on the

hss corresponding icon, for example.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-15

4 If you want to filter the measured values: activate the Filter check
box and if necessary, click on the Settings button to define the
filter.
You will find more information on filters and filtering in the section
entitled ➤“How to Set and Activate a Filter” on page 6-29.
5 If you want to eliminate outliers: activate the No Outliers check
box and if necessary, click on the Settings button to define
parameters for eliminating outliers.
You will find more information on outliers in the section entitled
➤“How to Eliminate Outliers” on page 6-31.
6 If you want to use a method other than the default, click on the
Parameters button and select the method you want in the dialog
box.
Note that all methods are not necessarily available for all features.
7 Click OK to assign the values in accordance with your settings.
This takes you back to the definition template. If the characteristic
requires more than one feature, you can define the remainder by
repeating the steps described above.
You will find more information on the Selection dialog box under
Selection (Features) in the Calypso Online Help.
How to Assign a Feature Not Yet Defined

As you entered the characteristic in the measurement plan, maybe
you did not define the feature. Or maybe you noticed that you need
more features. It does not take much effort to create a new feature
within the definition template of the characteristic and directly assign
it.
of your choice.
2 Click on the Feature (or Feature1) button.
3 Select the New option.
A list of all the types of feature possible for the characteristic in
question is displayed.
4 Select the feature type and click OK to confirm your choice.
This opens the definition template of the feature.
5 Define the feature.
The procedure is exactly as described in ➤“How to Define a
Feature Using Definition Templates” on page 5-4.
6 When you have probed all the points, click OK.
6-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

This closes both the definition template and the Selection window,
so you return to the definition template of the characteristic.
If the characteristic requires more than one feature, you can define
the remainder by repeating the steps described above.
How to Assign and Edit a Defined Feature

If you are about to assign a feature to a characteristic and notice that
something in the definition of the feature has to be changed
(measuring strategy, additional probings, etc.), you can do so in the
course of defining the characteristic.
To assign and edit a defined feature:
of your choice.
2 Click on the Feature (or Feature1) button.
3 Activate the Select existing Features radio button, if it is not
already activated.
4 Click on the feature you want in the list.
NOTE You can view a filtered, short-form list by clicking on the

hss corresponding icon, for example.
5 Activate the Edit check box.

6 Click on OK.
This opens the definition template of the assigned feature.
7 Make the necessary alterations to the feature (see ➤“The
Definition Template for Features” on page 5-3).
8 Click on OK.
The changes you made to the feature are saved and the definition
template for the characteristic reappears on the screen.
If the characteristic requires more than one feature, you can define
the remainder by repeating the steps described above.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-17

How to Assign Characteristics to Certain

Features
You can assign one or more characteristics to certain features in a
single step.
This means that the information in question has to be defined only
once, while at the same time you can be sure that the common
properties are exactly the same for all the features concerned.
To assign characteristics to certain features:
1 Open the list of characteristics.
2 Click on the characteristics you want to assign.
more than one characteristic.
3 Click on the Transfer format icon in the upper menu bar.
The Characteristics assign to Features dialog box appears on
the screen.
At the same time, the list of features is opened in the background.
NOTE The dialog box contains a second page on which you can copy the
hss
properties of characteristics. To open the second page, click on the
symbol for the characteristics at the bottom left of the dialog box or
on the user desk.
4 Set a radio button in the Naming block to specify whether the

characteristics will be entered with standard names or whether you
will define the names in a dialog.
If you do not want to be prompted to enter names, Calypso will
assign each new characteristic a standard name.
5 Set a radio button in the Existing characteristics block to specify
whether or not existing characteristics will be overwritten.
6-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

6 In the list of features, highlight the feature or features to which

you want the characteristics assigned.
more than one feature.
7 Click on OK to start the assignment.
If you activated the Request all names radio button, the number
of boxes suggesting names will be equal to the number of
characteristics you selected times the number of features. If a
characteristic already exists the default is the current name,
whereas for new characteristics a standard name (see above) is
suggested.
8 Overwrite the names suggested by the system, if applicable.
The new characteristics are added to the list of characteristics. If this
list already contains the same characteristic for a feature the original
characteristic will be overwritten or not, depending on which radio
button you activated in the Existing characteristics block.
How to Define Nominals and Tolerances

You can now match each nominal and tolerance that the
characteristic has to check to the specifications.
NOTE The tolerances define calculation of the scanning speed for the
hss measuring strategy. (See ➤“Path Generation – Automatically
Measuring Features” on page 5-68).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-19

To enter tolerances and nominal values:

1 Open the definition template by double-clicking the characteristic.
The Definition Template (characteristic) 2 will open (taper
angle of a cone is shown here by way of example).
2 Enter the required nominal values (or more than one for locations)
in the field Nominal (or Setting Position).
3 Now enter the tolerance values:
• You can choose the tolerance group from the picklist (below
the name of the characteristic).
Once you have made your selection the corresponding values
appear in the Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance boxes.
• Or you can type the tolerance values directly into the Upper
Tolerance and Lower Tolerance if you need your own
tolerance values.
4 Activate the None check box if you do not want tolerances taken
into account in measurement evaluation.
5 Select Last input form the menu if you again need the most
recently selected tolerance.
6 Click on OK to close the definition template of the characteristic.
You have now defined all the characteristic parameters Calypso needs
for the evaluation of measurement results.
The elements in this dialog box are fully described in Definition
Template (characteristic) 1 in the Calypso Online Help.
6-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Keep in mind that the icon of the characteristic is now displayed with
either a green or red background, depending on if it is inside or
outside of the tolerance. If the feature is not measured yet, the icon
has a dark gray background (indicating that it is completely defined).
Tolerance Specifications for Characteristics

Calypso has a multi-level menu that enables you to select the correct
tolerance specification in the definition template for the characteristic.
Tolerance Type Tolerance

General tolerances fine, medium, coarse, very coarse
DIN 1680 Rough General tolerances GTA 12 to GTA 21
castings group GTA
General tolerances GTB 12 to GTB 21
group GTB
DIN 1683 Rough steel Linear measures DIN 1683 linear measures GHTB 20 to GTB 16.5
castings
Thickness measures DIN 1683 thickness measures GHTB 20 to GTB 16.5
DIN 1684 Rough GTB 17/5 DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. linear measures / not m.
castings of malleable moulding / not linear measures
iron moulding DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
GTB 17 DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. linear measures / not m. linear
moulding / not measures
moulding DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
GTB 16/5 DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. linear measures / not m.
moulding / not linear measures
moulding DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
GTB 16 DIN 1684 GTB 16m. linear measures / not m. linear
moulding / not measures
moulding DIN 1684 GTB 16m. thickness measures / not m.
thickness measures
DIN 1685 Rough Linear measures / DIN 1685 linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
castings of cast iron thickness measures DIN 1685 thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
with sphero
DIN 1686 Rough Linear measures / DIN 1686 linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
castings of cast iron thickness measures DIN 1686 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
with foliated graphite
DIN 1687 Rough Sand rough DIN 1687 GS GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
castings of heavy metal
alloys
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-21

Tolerance Type Tolerance

Gravity die casting DIN 1687 GK GTB 15 to GTB 14 m: / not m.
Pressure die DIN 1687 GD L GTB 14 m. / not m.
Linear measures /
Thickness measures
for high melting
and low melting
alloys
DIN 1688 Rough Sand rough DIN 1688 GS GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
castings of light metal
alloys
Gravity die casting DIN 1688 GK GTB 20 to GTB 16 m. / not m.
Pressure die
DIN 16901 Plastic General tolerances DIN 16901 Gen. 160 A / 160 B
tolerances
DIN16901 Gen. 160 B / 160 B
Tolerances for DIN 16901 with direct entered A. 160 A / 160 B
values with directly
entered deviations
DIN 169091 with directly entered A. Precision Techn.
A/B
Select General tolerances (fine, medium, coarse, very coarse) or

special, material-specific tolerances (cast blanks, plastic parts) with the
appropriate DIN standard (for information on how to add tolerance
tables of your own to this menu, see ➤“Defining Custom Tolerance
Tables” on page 6-24).
Specifying Tolerances with MMC/LMC

You can apply the maximum material principle or the minimum
material principle as necessary when you specify tolerances of form
and position.
The most-material principle is laid down in DIN ISO 2692. It applies to
axes and mid-planes and allows for the interrelationships between
dimensional tolerance and tolerance of form and position. When the
most-material condition (MMC) or the least-material condition (LMC)
is applied, tolerance extensions are permissible for tolerances of
position for which diameter tolerances are not fully exploited.
The procedure for applying MMC or LMC to tolerances of position is
as follows:
6-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

1 Open the definition template for the characteristic.

2 If you have not assigned features, click on the Feature button and
select the feature whose position you want to check.
This illustration shows the template for the DIN Position
characteristic for checking a cylinder.
Picklist
3 From the RFS (= Regardless Feature Size) selection list, select the
entry:
• MMC to apply the most-material condition, or
• LMC to apply the least-material condition.
The Nominals button now appears beside the picklist.
4 If Diameter has not been defined as a characteristic for the
feature, click on the Nominals button.
Calypso adds Diameter as a characteristic for the feature to the
measurement plan and opens the definition template:
• Enter the nominal value for the diameter.
• Click on OK to close the definition template for the diameter.
5 Define reference features, if necessary.
You can apply MMC or LMC to the constraining features as well.
To do this click on the button of the constraint and proceed as
described above, starting at step 3.
6 Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the definition template is closed.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-23

Defining Custom Tolerance Tables

When you have to define tolerances for a characteristic, you have a
choice of entering the tolerance directly or selecting the Tolerance
group from a selection list (with the name of the characteristic) (see
➤“How to Define Nominals and Tolerances” on page 6-19).
Calypso supports you with a multi-level menu in which you will find
General Tolerances and a number of material-specific tolerances
(Cast blanks of various makes, Plastic parts).
You can expand this table as the need arises, in order to avoid the
necessity of having to enter custom tolerances in the Upper
Tolerance and Lower Tolerance .
The tolerances offered in the menu are saved in XML files called
“dinxxxx.xml” in the calypso\opt\om\data\toldat directory.
If you want to add a tolerance table to the menu, you must create an
XML file called “userXXXX.xml” (e. g. “userworkroom1.xml”) of your
own and copy it into this directory.
The manner in which the file should be structured can be seen in the
following example .
6-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

XML File with Custom Tolerances (Example)
<?xml version="1.0" ?>

<!DOCTYPE tolerancesDefinitionFile SYSTEM "tolerancesDefinitionFile.dtd">
<tolerancesDefinitionFile>
<userNorm name = "Feinmessraum" group = "3" description = "Feinmessraum1">
<range stop= "18">
<value name = "UT" value = "+4.5"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-4.5"/>
</range>
<range start = "18" stop="30">
</range>
<value name = "UT" value = "+8"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-8"/>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</userNorm>
</tolerancesDefinitionFile>
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-25

When you copy this file into the calypso\opt\om\data\toldat directory,

the tolerances menu will have another item called Feinmessraum1,
and this item, in turn, will offer you a total of 10 tolerances.
Meanings of the entries The following entries in the file are customizable:
– group=“3”
The standard entry is group=“1”. If there are two or more user-
defined tolerance tables, this number defines the position at which
the submenu will appear when the User-def. Tolerance pulldown
menu is opened.
– description=“Feinmessraum1”
The text displayed in the pulldown menu.
– range stop=“18”
Nominal range from 0 mm to 18 mm, inclusive.
– value name=“UT” value =“+4.5”
Upper tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (+4.5mm).
– value name=“LT” value =“-4.5”
Lower tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (-4.5mm).
– range start=“18” stop=“30”
Nominal range from 18 mm to 30 mm, inclusive.
Filtration and Outliers

Calypso enables you to edit measured values and exclude certain
values from further analysis. A variety of filters are available for this
purpose, along with the functionality for eliminating outliers.
– Filters can segregate the waviness profile of a geometric feature
from the effects of surface roughness. Filters, therefore, are of
assistance in maximizing measuring accuracy. The following filter
types are available: Gauss (ISO 11562), Spline and 2 RC (ISO
4291). The filter methods are low-pass, band-pass and high-pass.
The new statistical data of the geometric feature are obtained
from the filtered measuring data after compensation.
– Individual measuring points of the geometric features 2d straight,
plane, circle, cone, cylinder and sphere can be purged from the
measured values as Outliers.
The number of outliers eliminated is documented in the printout.
6-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Filtering Scanned Features

The use of filters is recommended only for a large number of points,
i.e. only for scanned features.
Low-pass Filtering a profile with lowpass (low frequencies pass the filter, high
frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness and
other long-wave profile components are present, while the effects of
surface roughness are largely eliminated.
The average line is produced by analyzing measuring points within
equal sections (double the wave length): The measuring points are
analyzed with weighting within each section. The profile obtained in
this way is compensated and serves as the basis for calculating
parameters of waviness.
High-pass Filtering with high-pass (high frequencies pass the filter, low
frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness is
suppressed, while the effects of the surface roughness are still
present.
Band-pass A band-pass results from the combined use of a low-pass and a high-
pass. This suppresses both the long-wave (waviness) and short-wave
(surface roughness) profile components that exceed the respectively
specified limit.
Eliminating Outliers
A measured point is tagged as an outlier if it is further than a defined
threshold (threshold = factor * standard delta) from the computed
Gaussian element. Outliers are geometric points that differ
significantly from the geometric form yielded by the other measured
points and as such, they can produce a large error when the
computed feature is calculated. An error of this nature easily
propagates through the actual-value determination of the
corresponding characteristic.
Defining Filters and Outlier Elimination

There are several different points in Calypso at which you can
parameterize and activate filtration and outlier elimination:
– For an individual characteristic
– For an individual feature
– As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and
alignment elements of the coordinate systems.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-27

Which setting is valid? The setting for the characteristic always takes priority. If
filtration/outlier elimination is not activated for the characteristic, the
setting for the feature applies. If filtration/outlier elimination is not
activated for the feature, Calypso refers to the default settings for the
characteristic groups.
Bear in mind that filtration requires a minimum number of points to
be probed. If the number of probings is less than this minimum
number the filter is not activated and a message to this effect is
issued.
A feature obtained by recall from a feature filtered beforehand is
automatically not filtered subsequently, even if filtration is activated.
How to Select General Settings for Filter and

Outliers
You can define general settings for filtration and outlier elimination
per characteristic group. Unless another setting is defined elsewhere
for individual features, Calypso uses these general settings.
The procedure for defining filtration and outlier elimination for
characteristic groups is as follows:
1 Select Prerequisites → Filter/Outlier Elimination.
The Filter/Outlier Elimination Default Settings dialog box
2 Click on the appropriate Settings button.

3 Set the parameters as necessary in the Filter or Outlier Mode
dialog box and activate your settings, if applicable.
The current setting is displayed beneath the corresponding check
box.
4 Click on OK.
6-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The dialog box is closed and the settings are accepted. The filter or
outlier elimination activated in this way applies with its parameters to
all the features required for the characteristic, unless a setting to the
contrary is made in a given feature’s definition template.
How to Set and Activate a Filter

To activate a filter:
1 Open a corresponding characteristic in the measurement plan and
click on the Switch to Feature Menu button.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom
left you can see whether or not a filter is activated. If a filter is
active its parameters are shown.
2 Activate the Filter check box to activate the filter.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-29

3 Click Settings to define the settings for the filter.

The Filter dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Select Filter Method and Filter Type, then enter the limit values
for the selected filter.
You can specify the filter parameters via Undulations Per
Revolution or via Wavelength Lc.
You must enter a value range if you have entered the filter type
Band-pass – everything exceeding this range will be filtered out.
This returns you to the Characteristics window, which is still open. If
you activated a filter, the filter method and the filtration parameters
now appear below the Filter check box (e.g. Gaussian 150).
6-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Eliminate Outliers

To activate outlier elimination:
1 Open a corresponding characteristic in the measurement plan and
click on the Switch to Feature Menu button.
At the bottom right you can see whether or not outlier elimination
is activated. If it is active its parameters are shown.
2 Activate the Outlier Elimination check box to activate
elimination, or deactivate the check box to deactivate elimination.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-31

3 Click Settings to define the parameters for outlier elimination.

The Outlier Mode dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Make your settings by activating or deactivating the check boxes

or changing the parameter settings in the input boxes.
This returns you to the Characteristics window, which is still open. If
you activated outlier elimination, the works Outlier Elimination now
appear below the Outlier Elimination check box.
Copying Properties of Features

You can copy certain properties of a characteristic and assign them to
or more other characteristics. This means that the information in
question has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can
be sure that the common properties are exactly the same for all the
characteristics concerned.
The following are the properties you can copy to all features:
– Nominal
– Tolerance class
– ISO286
– Upper tolerance
– Lower tolerance
6-32 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Copy Properties of Characteristics into other

Characteristics
The procedure for copying properties of a characteristic to other
characteristics is as follows:
1 Click on the characteristic from which you wish to copy the
properties and click on the Transfer format icon in the upper
menu bar.
The Characteristics assign to Features dialog box appears on
the screen.
2 Click on the characteristics icon at the bottom of the dialog box.
The Copy Properties from <prüfmerkmalname> dialog box
3 Activate the check boxes of the properties that you want to copy
to other characteristics.
4 Highlight the characteristic or characteristics to which you want to
copy the properties.
more than one characteristic.
5 Click on OK.
Copying is started.
About the Color-Coding of Characteristics

Buttons
When a characteristic is listed in the measurement plan area, the
background color of its button tells you its status:
– Light gray (same as measurement plan area): The characteristic has
not been defined yet and no nominal data has been recorded.
– Dark gray: The characteristic has been defined and nominal data
has been recorded. The characteristic is ready to run.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-33

– Green: The characteristic has been defined, nominal data has been
recorded, measured results have been gathered, and the results are
within the tolerances.
– Red: The characteristic has been defined, nominal data has been
recorded, measured results have been gathered, and the results are
outside of tolerances.
6-34 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Details on Specific Characteristics

Whenever you define a characteristic, you must always assign it one
or two features in its definition template. Frequently, you will also
have to define primary references, and less frequently secondary or
even tertiary restraints as well.
The most common approach to constraint definitions is as follows. A
primary constraint generally constrains two of the rotational degrees
of freedom and one or two translational degrees of freedom for the
evaluation of a characteristic. In order to satisfy these requirements,
the primary constraint must be set by a three-dimensional feature: a
plane, and 3 D line, a cylinder or a cone.
If required, a secondary constraint usually further constrains the
remaining rotational degree of freedom. A secondary constraint can
be a plane, 2 D line, 3 D line, cylinder or cone. All other features are
insufficient to establish rotation frames of reference. Lastly, a single
additional feature provides the remaining one or two degrees of
translational constraint.
The table below lists the items of information you need to define the
characteristics for size, form and location:
Menu- Location in
Characteristic command toolbox Description
X value Size → Size elements Determines the position of a given feature in
Standards X.
The location of each feature is stated in
coordinates for X, Y and Z. The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The
values are referenced to the part alignment.
Y value Size → Size elements Determines the position of a given feature in
Standards Y.
Z value Size → Size elements Determines the position of a given feature in
Standards Z.
Diameter Size → Size elements Determines the diameter of a round feature
Standards such as a circle, cylinder, cone, or sphere.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-35

Menu- Location in
Radius Size → Size elements Determines the radius of a round feature such
Standards as a circle, cylinder, cone, or sphere.
Radius Size → Size elements Determines the radius of a feature. This value
measurement Standards is determined separately for each probing; in
this way the results for a small arc segment
can be enhanced.
Length of Axis Size → Size elements Determines the length of the axis of a
Standards rotationally symmetrical body.
Polarposition Size → Size elements Determines the position of a given feature

Radius Standards with the polar coordinate Radius.
The location of each feature can be defined in
terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle,
Height). The position of a circle, for example,
is defined by its center. The values are
referenced to the part alignment.
Angle Standards with the polar coordinate Angle.
Height Standards with the polar coordinate Height.
Projection Size → Size elements Determines the first projected angle of a
Angle One Angle certain feature based on the part alignment. In
a spatial system of coordinates the axial
direction can be defined by two projected
angles. A projected angle is an angle on a
workpiece plane viewed from the third axis.
Projected angle No. 1 is based on the
reference axis (the axis common to the two
planes of projection) of the feature.
Feature axis Angle 1

X Y/X
Y Z/Y
Z X/Z
6-36 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Menu- Location in
Projection Size → Size elements Determines the second projected angle of a
Angle Two Angle second projected angle of a certain feature
based on the part alignment. In a spatial
system of coordinates the axial direction can
be defined by two projected angles. A
projected angle is an angle on a workpiece
plane viewed from the third axis. Projected
angle No. 2 is based on the reference axis (the
axis common to the two planes of projection)
of the feature.
Feature axis Angle 2

X Z/X
Y X/Y
Z Y/Z
Cone Angle Size → Size elements Determines the angle of aperture of a cone.
Angle
Half Cone Size → Size elements Determines the half angle of aperture of a
Angle Angle cone (the angle between the axis of the cone
and the cone’s lateral area).
Angle of Tilt Size → Size elements Determines a feature’s angle of tilt from the Z
Angle axis of the part alignment.
Rotation Size → Size elements Determines a feature’s angle of rotation about

Angle Angle the Z axis, referenced to the W axis of the part
alignment.
Feature Angle Size → Size elements Calculates the angle that the axis of rotation
Angle of a feature assumes with the part alignment.
Distance Size → Size elements Determines the distance between the two
Symmetry Distance reference features of a symmetry point.
point
Space Point Size → Size elements Determines the distance of a space point or
Distance Distance net point referenced to its nominal.
Distance Size → Size elements Determines the distance of a “point feature”

Distance from the origin of a coordinate system or the
distances of two “point features” from each
other.
The distances output are those along the
Cartesian axes, along with the point-to-point
distance (radius) and the vector angle.
The reference point for a circle, ellipse, sphere,
rectangle or slot is always the midpoint.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-37

Menu- Location in
Diameter 2 Size → Size elements Determines the second diameter of an ellipse.
More The first diameter of the ellipse is measured
with the Diameter command.
Radius 2 Size → Size elements Determines the second radius of an ellipse
More feature.
The first radius of the ellipse is measured by
the Radius characteristic.
Length Size → Size elements Determines the length of a slot or a rectangle.
More →
Slot Length
Width Size → Size elements Determines the width of a slot or rectangle.
More →
Slot Width
Average Size → Size elements Determines the average of multiple length
More → measurements.
Average
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Form Determines the roundness or circularity of a
Roundness Location elements given circular feature. The circle can be on a
cylinder, a sphere, or a cone. The definition
template includes a button labeled Graphic
for form plots (see ➤“How to Display
Variations Graphically” on page 9-23).
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Form Determines the flatness of a flat feature. The
Flatness Location elements definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see ➤“How to Display
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Form Determines the straightness of a line.
Straightness Location elements The “normal” tolerance direction reflects
straightness in the probing direction; the
“parallel” tolerance direction reflects
straightness parallel to the surface of the
workpiece.
The definition template includes a button
labeled Graphic for form plots (see ➤“How to
Display Variations Graphically” on page 9-23).
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Form Determines the cylinder form of a cylindrical
Cylinder form Location elements feature. The definition template includes a
button labeled Graphic for form plots (see
➤“How to Display Variations Graphically” on
page 9-23).
6-38 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Menu- Location in
Form Form and Form From the extreme values of features,
Location elements determines form deviation as the difference
between the maximum and minimum
measured values normal to the feature (e.g.
cone form or sphere form).
Curve form Form and Form This characteristic is optional. It defines the
Location elements deviation of a defined curve (see ➤“Curve
Measurement (Option)” on page 15-1).
DIN Profile Form and Form Defines the deviation of a plane from its
Location elements nominal geometry. Its value depends on the
selected shape of zone (see ➤“Basics About
GDT Profile” on page 6-40).
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the position of a given feature in
Position Location elements relation to a datum reference frame. You have
the choice of defining the reference features,
the base alignment, or one of the systems of
coordinates. Each defined part alignment can
be used as the datum reference frame.
When you define position tolerance you can
click on the Special button to apply the
“Offset” and “Rotate” functions with
reference to the base alignment (see
➤“Moving or Rotating the Base / Start
Alignment” on page 4-42).
Alternatively, you can use the “Best Fit of Bore
Pattern” function (see ➤“How to Use Best Fit
of Bore Pattern” on page 6-43).
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the concentricity of a given
Concentricity Location elements feature (e.g. a circle) relative to one or two
reference features.
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the coaxiality of a given feature’s
Coaxiality Location elements axis (e.g. the axis of a cylinder) relative to
another feature.
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the squareness of a planar,
Squareness Location elements cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature
relative to one or two reference features.
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the parallelism of a planar,
Parallelism Location elements cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature
relative to one or two reference features.
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the symmetry of a feature relative
Symmetry Location elements to two reference features.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-39

Menu- Location in
DIN Angularity Form and Location Determines the deviation of a feature from a
Location elements reference feature and a defined angle.
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the deviation of a feature normal
Radial Runout Location → elements to the datum axis in the radial direction.
Runout
DIN ISO 1101 Form and Location Determines the deviation of a feature in the
Axial Runout Location → elements direction of the datum axis.
Runout
Polar 2d Form and Location Determines the two-dimensional distance
(Distance) Location → elements between the midpoints of two features.
Distance This characteristic is used to determine the
distance between the projections of two two-
dimensional features on a datum plane.
Polar 3d Form and Location Determines the direct three-dimensional
(Distance) Location → elements distance between the midpoints of two
Distance features.
This characteristic is generally used for two
points defined in all three dimensions (e.g. the
centers of spheres).
Cartesian Form and Location Determines the distance between two
(Distance) Location → elements features in Cartesian coordinates (along the X,
Distance Y and Z axes).
Angle Form and Location Determines the angle between two features.
Between Location elements You have a choice of results: acute angle, this
Features angle’s explement to 180° and the
explementary angles of both to 360°.
Basics About GDT Profile

Characteristics The GDT profile can be determined for the following characteristics:
– Plane
– Cylinder
– Cone
– Sphere
– Point
– General surface
NOTE The GDT profile corresponds to the TOL/PROFS defined in DMIS.

hss
6-40 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

When defining the GDT profile, you can choose from four shapes of
zone:
Shape of Zone The following are observed:
Bilateral The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside and outside
(with the same values)
One-sided (inside) The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside
One-sided (outside) The deviation from the nominal surface to the outside
Bilateral (unequal The deviation from the nominal surface to the inside and outside
distribution) (with unequal values)
For the bilateral tolerance with unequal distribution, a further input

field is activated for the Tolerance (one side), in which you
additionally specify the side to which the tolerance applies with the
Inside / Outside Switch button.
Result of profile The result of the profile depends on the shape of zone.
Shape Of Zone The following are output:
Bilateral The largest deviation (inside and outside) times 2.
One-sided (inside) The largest deviation inside the workpiece.
One-sided (outside) The largest deviation outside the workpiece.
Bilateral (unequal The largest deviation (inside and outside) from a calculated center
distribution) line times 2.
Theoretical center
Nominal contour
Calculation of The General Surface feature contains only a set of points and not a
deviations for the mathematical description of the surface. Therefore, the points can be
General Surface evaluated only individually: Each actual point is compared with its
associated nominal point. The probe touch point is calculated based
on the probe center, probe radius and the normal vector of the
nominal point.
The deviation D of the point is formed from the nominal point and
actual point along the normal vector of the nominal point. The
deviation perpendicular to the normal vector of the nominal point is
ignored. This corresponds to the procedure for the space point.
The greatest absolute deviation of all point comparisons is then used
as a measure for the profile.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-41

Restrictions The following restrictions apply to the GDT profile:

– No restrictions may be set for the best fit.
– Negative tolerances are not permitted.
Particularities for the The following particularities apply to the GDT profile of a General
General Surface Surface:
– No filters or outlier elimination.
– Only the Gauss evaluation method is possible.
Profile with references As in general, the following applies to profile with references: Either
no reference – or all three references are defined. Otherwise, no result
will be output.
How to Check Wall Thickness and Wall

Deviation
With the aid of the selection menu points in the CAD model, you can
define two space points with a click of the mouse and use these
points to check the wall thickness or the material deviation at this
point.
How to define two space points for the distance

check
1 Turn the CAD model, so that the position with the wall thickness
to be checked can be seen in the foreground.
2 Click on the Selection selection list in the CAD menu bar.
3 Select menu point Distance Check.
4 Click on the position on the model at which you wish to check the
wall thickness.
The two opposite space points and the connection between them
are shown at the selected position on the screen.
Two new features of the type “space point” appear in the list of
features.
With the aid of these two points, you can check the wall thickness or
the material deviation at the place in question.
How to check the wall thickness

You have created two opposite space points using the menu point
Distance Check.
1 Add a symmetry point to the list of features with Measure →
Special Features → Symmetry Point.
2 Select the Recall entry in the selection list Nominal Definition in
the definition template of the symmetry point.
6-42 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Select the available space points for the definition of the symmetry
point.
4 Add the “Distance_Symmetry point” characteristic to the list of
characteristics and assign it to the symmetry point that was just
created.
The wall thickness will be checked at the desired position during the
measurement plan run.
How to check the wall deviation

You have created two opposite space points using the menu point
Distance Check.
1 Add two “Space Point Distance“ characteristics to the list of
characteristics and assign them the space points just created.
During the measurement plan run, it will be checked whether there is
“too much” or “too little” material at the desired position.
Basics about Best Fit of Bore Pattern

The following best fit methods are available for the best fit of bore
pattern:
– Gauss Best Fit. For this method, outliers have only a minimal
influence. Limitations due to references are not taken into
consideration. Optimal setting parameters can be derived from this
for the machine tools.
– Minimum Best Fit (Tschebyscheff). Outliers have a significant effect
on the result when this method is used. Limitations due to
references are not taken into consideration. Optimal setting
parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools.
– Tolerance Best Fit. Iterative attempts are made to bring all values
into tolerance. Possible movement and rotation areas are limited
due to the reference features. This corresponds to a Good/Bad
evaluation of a mechanical gauge with an additional evaluation of
the single deviations.
– L1 Best Fit. Outliers have less effect with this method than is the
case with the Gauss method. Limitations due to references are not
taken into consideration. Optimal setting parameters can be
derived from this for the machine tools.
How to Use Best Fit of Bore Pattern

The True Position characteristic offers options for bore-pattern best
fit. As the result of this operation, Calypso computes the rotation and
offset of the bore pattern.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-43

To proceed with best-fit of bore-pattern:

1 Add the True Position characteristic to your measurement plan.
2 Double-click on the button for the characteristic to open the
3 Activate the Best Fit of Bore Pattern radio button.
4 Enter the tolerance. Use the buttons labeled Primary Datum,
Secondary Datum and Tertiary Datum to specify the datums so
that the bore pattern can be computed later.
If you do not enter a datum, the base alignment is used by default.
5 Click on the Bore Pattern button to define the settings for
evaluating the bore pattern.
This is the dialog box in which you define the settings.
6-44 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

6 Click on the Select Features button to select the features you

need for best-fitting the bore pattern.
You can use the Select Bolt Hole Pattern picklist to incorporate
bore patterns defined beforehand.
All the features you select are listed in the Features List. The
coordinates as shown here are referenced to the datum selected
beforehand. The values are editable and can be shown in Cartesian
or polar form.
7 Select a best-fit method from the Best-Fit Methods group:
• Select the best-fit method of your choice from the picklist.
• Select Translation and/or Rotation for the means of fitting.
8 Start computation by clicking on the Execute button.
When computation is completed, the result is displayed in the
Result of Fit group. To see a graphic representation of the best fit
bore pattern, mark the check box Graphic (see ➤“How to Display
9 Click on OK.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 6-45

6-46 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
7
7 Editing the Measurement Plan
.................................................................................................................................
You must define characteristics and features, but there are also a
number of things you can do which, although not absolutely
essential, will streamline the work of measurement and make your job
easier.
You must already have created a measurement plan and defined
features and/or characteristics in order to understand this chapter.
Managing Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

The Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Editing a Measurement Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Editing the Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Using the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Multimedia User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7- 1

Managing Measurement Plans

The Following topics cover how to work with measurement plan files
(copying, saving etc.) and how to improve your efficiency by using
common Windows functions:
How to Save a Measurement Plan

Do not forget to save your measurement plan after you have edited it.
You can either overwrite the original measurement plan or save the
edited plan in another file.
To save a measurement plan:
1 If you want to overwrite the original measurement plan,
• click on the Save Current Measurement Plan button.
The measurement plan is saved.
2 If you want to retain the original measurement plan,
• Select File → Save As.
• Enter a new name and press Enter to confirm.

The original measurement plan is retained, and the new
measurement plan is also saved to hard disk.
How to Rename a Measurement Plan

Calypso does not have a direct command for renaming a
measurement plan. You can, however, assign the measurement plan a
new name in the Save As dialog box.
Calypso saves each measurement plan as a file called inspection in a
directory that bears the name of the measurement plan.
7-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Follow these steps to rename a measurement plan:

1 Select File → Save As.
2 Overwrite the name in the File name field with the desired new
measurement plan name.
You have now created a new measurement plan under another name;
the original (old) measurement plan still exists. If you want you can
delete the old plan.
How to Copy a Measurement Plan to a

Floppy Disk
You may want to copy a measurement plan to a floppy disk to back it
up or to work with it on another computer. To copy the measurement
plan, you need to use Windows Explorer.
Follow these steps to copy a measurement plan to a disk:
1 Minimize Calypso by clicking on the Minimize button in the upper
right corner.
2 Insert a diskette into the drive.
3 In the Windows Taskbar, click on Start → Programs → Windows
Explorer.
4 View the contents of the folder called
C:\calypso:\home\om\workarea\inspections.
This is the default path for Calypso. A subfolder is created in this
folder for each Calypso measurement plan. To copy a
measurement plan, you must copy its entire folder because it
contains a number of files.
5 Click on the folder that is the name of the measurement plan that
you want to copy.
6 Select Edit → Copy.
7 View the contents of the diskette in the floppy disk drive with
Explorer.
8 Select Edit → Paste.
The measurement plan folder and its contents are copied to the
floppy disk.
9 Close Windows Explorer and return to Calypso.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-3

How to Delete a Measurement Plan

You can delete measurement plans that are no longer needed.
To delete a measurement plan:
1 Select File → Open.
The administration dialog for the measurement plan will open. A
subfolder is created in this folder for each Calypso measurement
plan.
2 Mark the measurement plan that should be deleted, right-click
and, in the popup menu that appears, select Delete.
The selected measurement plan will be deleted.
You can also use the Windows Explorer to delete measurement plans.
Combining Several Measurement Plans

You can combine measurement plans and create combined
evaluations. The measurement plans you combine in this way need
not necessarily be on the CMM - they can be created and run on
CMMs at different points in the network.
The primary use of this function, however, is to generate common
logs for measurements on horizontal-arm systems with two
measuring columns.
NOTE If you want to combine the measurement plans of a horizontal arm

hss CMM with two measuring arms, you should, if possible, use the same
features for alignment (definition of the base alignment).
In order to combine measurement plans you must create a “master

measurement plan” on a CMM designated for the purpose, and
import the measurement plans from other CMMs into this master.
How to Create a Master Measurement Plan

To create a master measurement plan:
1 Create a new measurement plan and assign it a name beginning
with the character “$”.
This “$” tells Calypso that this is a master measurement plan.
7-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

2 Select Prerequisites → Import Measurement Plan.

A dialog box appears in which you can import the measurement
plans run to date on networked CMMs onto your computer.
All nominals, actual values and tolerances are imported into the
master measurement plan.
The names of the individual features and characteristics have to be
unique only within each single measurement plan incorporated
into the master. In the master measurement plan itself, each name
of a feature or characteristic is prefixed with the name of the
original measurement plan, with a period as separator.
3 Edit the measurement plan: Delete superfluous characteristics and
add constructions of features across individual measurement plans.
4 Save the master measurement plan.
NOTE When saved, the “$” will be removed from the name. To make it
hss easier to distinguish the master measurement plans from regular
ones, you should save them separately in a special directory.
How to Obtain the Combined Evaluation

The master measurement plan is not used to measure features: its
purpose is to calculate combinations from multiple measurement
plans.
NOTE The master plan is used for computation, not for measurement.
hss
To perform a computation run:
1 Open the master measurement plan.
2 Select CNC → Run to start the CNC run.
The Start Measurement window is displayed.
3 Under CMM, go to the Navigate-Feature To Feature field and
select Use Position Points Only.
4 If individual measurement plans have been run in the interim and
you want to update the results: Tick the Clear Existing Results
check box.
In this case the current values (actuals, nominals and tolerances) of
the individual measurement plans that make up the master
measurement plan are reimported and the results are updated.
5 Click on OK to start the CNC run.
No further measurements take place in this “CNC run”. Instead, the
process is used for calculations only, and the results are printed out or
generated as result files.
If the Clear Existing Results check box was marked, the latest
results of the individual measurement plans will be imported.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-5

If this option was not selected, the results are recalculated from the
individual measurement plans' results already available on the
computer.

Once you have set up a measurement plan, you can edit it later. You
can add, move or delete features or characteristics, group features or
characteristics and rename features, characteristics or groups. You can
also mirror the entire measurement plan across an axis of your choice.
Remember to save the measurement plan after you make changes to
it (select File → Save).
NOTE All of the following sections assume that you have a measurement
hss
plan open on the Calypso User Desk.
How to Undo an Action in the Measurement Plan

There is currently no way of undoing an action in Calypso. The Undo
command on the Edit menu is just for deleting the last probing point.
However, you can revert to the last saved version of your
measurement plan:
1 Save the measurement plan without saving it beforehand.
Caution
hss
! All changes made since the last time the measurement plan was
saved are lost.
2 Reopen the measurement plan.

The contents of the measurement plan are now as they were when
last saved.
How to Use Additional Options in Shortcut Menus

Calypso, like many Windows software packages, has popup menus
that change depending on where you are in the software.
To open a shortcut menu:
1 Click on the right mouse button.
The shortcut menu appears on the screen.
2 Click on the command of your choice.
7-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Usually, the shortcut menus offer commands that are available at the
main User Desk menu. Sometimes, however, the shortcut menus offer
commands that are available nowhere else. If you are trying to
perform a task and cannot figure out how to do it, try clicking the
right mouse button to view the options in the shortcut menu, and
you may find the function you need.
How to Edit Features or Characteristics

To work with a feature or characteristic, you first have to highlight it:
1 Click with the left mouse button on the icon in the measurement
plan area.
2 To highlight two or more features or characteristics that are not
listed one after the other, press and hold down the Ctrl key and
click on each feature or characteristic in turn.
• You deselect by clicking on a highlighted feature or
characteristic.
• To undo the entire selection, release the Ctrl key and click on
any point outside the highlight.
3 To highlight a block of two or more features or characteristics
listed one after the other:
• Click on the first feature or characteristic you want to highlight.
• Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on the last feature or
characteristic you want to highlight.
When you highlight a feature or characteristic, the button and text
are highlighted by a dark gray background. When you select a
characteristic, its features in the CAD window turn a different
color.
4 Double click with the left mouse button on the icon in the
measurement plan area.
The feature or characteristic definition template, as appropriate,
Adding Features or Characteristics to a

Measurement Plan
You can add a feature to your measurement plan at any time. You
have several options. For more information, see ➤“Defining Features”
on page 5-2
You can add a characteristic to your measurement plan at any time.
You have two options. For more information, see ➤“Defining
Characteristics” on page 6-7.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-7

Positioning Features in the List of Characteristics

The screen will display either the list of features or the list of
characteristics, but not both together. Bear in mind, however, that
you can define features even when the list of characteristics is
displayed.
– Calypso automatically places new features in the list of
characteristics if it is open.
Result: A feature added to the list of characteristics in this way is
measured even if it is not assigned to a characteristic – this could
not happen if the feature was included only in the list of features.
– New characteristics, in contrast, are automatically positioned in the
list of characteristics even if the list is not currently displayed.
The button above the list is a toggle for switching from one list to the
other.
How to Move Features or Characteristics

You can change the order of the features and characteristics in the list
in the measurement plan area. The order is more important for the
features, because the list order determines the order in which the
characteristics are checked by the CMM when the measurement plan
is executed.
To move a feature or characteristic
– Use the Cut and Paste buttons.
How to Copy Features or Characteristics

You can make copies of a feature or characteristic and then paste it
into the corresponding list. This is a quick way to add another feature
or characteristic of the same type. Copying characteristics works well
if you have multiple items that have similar tolerances with only minor
changes to the characteristic definition. The features copied, however,
do not contain the measured data in the original feature — only the
nominal data.
To copy a feature or characteristic
1 Click on the item to highlight it and then click on the Copy button.
2 Click on the new position in the list and then click on the Paste
button.
The feature or characteristic is pasted into the list at the position
you selected.
3 To make additional copies of the same item, click on the Paste
button again.
7-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

4 You can also copy features or characteristics from one

measurement plan to another:
• Open the appropriate measurement plan.
• Paste the feature or characteristic into the measurement plan at
the appropriate position.
Mirroring a Measurement Plan

You can mirror an entire measurement plan across a coordinate axis
of the base alignment. This means that all features with their
strategies (e. g. probing points) are mirrored on the plane formed by
the other two coordinate axes.
About mirroring Bear the following in mind:

– No actual values are mirrored. The actual values are deleted prior
to mirroring.
– After mirroring, the nominals of the characteristics that mirroring
can change (these include distances and X values, for example) are
updated.
– You have to assign probes to the mirrored measurement plan
manually.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-9

– The coordinate systems are not mirrored, because the mirrored

direction of rotation would be counterclockwise. The coordinate
systems are transformed: only the coordinate origin (zero point) is
mirrored, the directions of the axes remain unchanged, relative to
the base alignment.
NOTE The base alignment is unaffected by the transformation.

hss
Caution
hss
! Parameters and patterns are not mirrored. If your measurement plan
contains parameters or patterns, they have to be reentered after the
measurement plan has been mirrored.
How to Mirror a Measurement Plan

To mirror a measurement plan:
1 Open the measurement plan you want to mirror.
2 Select CNC → Measurement Plan Functions → Mirror
Measurement Plan.
The Mirror Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click on Mirror to Plane and select the mirror axis.

4 Go to Change Probe Data and select a different probe, if
applicable.
The data applicable to your selection is listed in the display area.
7-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

5 Click OK to confirm your selection.

The measurement plan is mirrored. The image in the CAD window
is refreshed; the new view shows you the workpiece after
mirroring.
6 Save the mirrored measurement plan by selecting File → Save or
by selecting File → Save As if you want to keep the “old”,
unmirrored measurement plan as well.
How to Delete Features or Characteristics

You can remove measured features and characteristics from the
measurement plan in a variety of ways:
– Cut an element
The element that was last cut can be pasted into the same or
another location using Paste.
– Move an element to the Waste Basket
All of the elements which were dragged with the mouse to the
Waste Basket icon will be gathered in the Waste Basket (spanning
all measurement plans). They can be moved to any location in any
measurement plan.
– Delete an element for good
To cut a feature or characteristic:
1 Click on the feature or characteristic you want to delete.
2 Click on the Cut button.
The feature or characteristic is removed from the measurement
plan and is placed on the clipboard.
To place a feature in the Waste Basket:
1 Use the mouse to drag the feature onto the Waste Basket icon.
Items in the Waste Basket can be reinserted with the mouse.
To delete a feature or characteristic for good:
1 Click on the feature or characteristic you want to delete forever.
2 In the popup menu, select Delete.
The feature or characteristic will be deleted.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-11

How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters with the

Mouse
If you prefer using the mouse to enter text and digit strings, Calypso
can display an input box with a keyboard. You generate entries in the
input boxes by pointing to the individual keys with the mouse pointer
and clicking.
To activate this functionality:
1 Select View → Configuration.
The Datum Features dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Tick the Typewriter check box.

3 Click on Close.
The dialog box closes. From now on, the Typewriter dialog box will
appear on the screen whenever a change is made to an input field.
How to Work with the Waste Basket

All of the elements which were dragged with the mouse to the Waste
Basket icon will be gathered in the Waste Basket (spanning all
measurement plans).
To view the contents of the Waste Basket:
1 Click on the Waste Basket button
To recover an item from the Waste Basket:
1 Click on the Waste Basket button.
The contents are displayed.
2 Mark the corresponding item and drag it into the measurement
plan area.
A copy of the feature will be added in the measurement plan area
while the original copy will remain in the Waste Basket.
7-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To delete an item from the Waste Basket:

1 Click on the Waste Basket button
2 Mark the desired item and select Delete in the popup menu.
The item is deleted from the Waste Basket.
Grouping and Ungrouping Characteristics

Sometimes a measurement plan has so many characteristics that it
gets cumbersome to view and edit. In that case, you can group
certain characteristics, which combines all the individual
characteristics that you select into one single group characteristic.
If you want to evaluate only certain features, you define a feature
group, known as a mini-plan, within the measurement plan. This
allows you to check the mini-plan and run it, but leaves the
characteristics unchanged in the measurement plan area.
You can read about how to create these groups and ungroup them in
➤“Defining the Scope of Measurement” on page 8-2.
How to Rename Features, Characteristics and

Groups
You can name each symbol in the measurement plan area.
NOTE You should name features before you define them (probe them, in
hss other words).
When you subsequently rename a feature, you have to redefine a

characteristic associated with it.
To rename a feature, characteristic or feature group listed in the
measurement plan area:
1 Click on the feature or characteristic button that you want to
rename.
2 Double click on the icon. This opens the definition template of the
feature.
- or -
Right-click and select Rename from the popup menu. The
Name/Comment window is displayed.
3 Overwrite the name of the feature in the Name field.
You can also use the Comment field to enter a comment, which
will appear on any measurement plan report that contains this
characteristic.
The button now has the name you just entered.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-13

How to Search for a Measurement Plan Feature

You can look for a specific feature or characteristic in a measurement
plan.
Please be aware that the search function always checks in the
currently displayed list, either in the list of features or list of
characteristics.
To look for an item in a measurement plan:
1 Click on the Search button.
The Search dialog box will appear.
2 Enter the name of the desired item in the Find What field.
• If you want to differentiate between cases, click on the Match
Case check box.
• If you want to look for complete words only, click on the Match
whole word only check box.
3 Click on the Find Next button.
Calypso looks through the list from top to bottom. When a
matching item is found, it is marked in the list.
4 If the correct item has not been found, click on Find Next until
you find the item.
Calypso always starts the search from the last highlight in the list
going downwards.
5 If you want to start from the beginning, click on the Start at top
button.
The items found in the search are displayed in a picklist.
7-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Toolboxes
The Toolboxes
With toolboxes, you can easily insert features and characteristics into
your measurement plan. Using a toolbox gives you a quick way to
access features, characteristics and utilities.
You can also use the drag&drop functionality to create custom
toolboxes that contain only the items that you most frequently use.
This toolbox contains most of Calypso’s features, characteristics and
utilities and is part of a window called Tool Box Builder. The Toolbox
Builder also allows you to create custom toolboxes.
Here are the details on working with tool boxes:

– The element groups are listed in the column on the left.
– When you select an element group, its contents are listed in the
middle column.
– To move an item from the toolbox to your measurement plan, you
simply click and hold the left mouse button on the item, drag it
over to the measurement plan area on the left of the screen, and
release the mouse button.
– The right column of the Toolbox Builder is where you set up
custom toolboxes.
– Just like any other dialog box in Windows, you can close a toolbox
by clicking on the Close button in the title bar.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-15

Creating and Using Custom Toolboxes

To create a custom toolbox, you first need to open the Toolbox Builder
and the Master Toolbox.
NOTE Once you have saved a custom toolbox and then exited the Toolbox
hss Builder, there is no way to edit or change the custom toolbox (other
than deleting it and starting again from scratch).
To create a custom toolbox, follow these steps:

1 Click on the Open Selected Tool Box(es) button.
The Toolbox Selector dialog box appears on the screen.
If you have not defined any custom toolboxes, only the Master
Toolbox is listed.
2 Highlight Master Tool Box and click on Open.
3 Name your new toolbox:
Delete the “unnamed” label and type a name for the toolbox.
4 This name can be any combination of letters, numbers and spaces.
Click and hold the left mouse button on the desired toolbox
button and drag it over to the right column.
Keep in mind:
• Custom toolboxes do not have separate groups for buttons. All
buttons are placed in the same list.
• You cannot change the order of items in the custom toolbox
(except to delete an item and add it to the bottom of the list).
• To delete an item, click on the item to highlight it and select File
→ Delete from the menu bar of the dialog box.
5 Select Tool Box Builder File → Save.
The toolbox configuration you put together is saved.
7-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Toolboxes
How to Work with a Custom Toolbox

A custom toolbox contains the items you need most frequently in
your day-to-day work.
2 Highlight your toolbox and click on Open.
The Toolbox Builder dialog box appears on the screen.
3 To move the items you need from the toolbox to your
measurement plan, click an item, hold down the left mouse button
and drag the item into the measurement plan area. Release the
mouse button.
4 As soon as you click anywhere else on the User Desk, the toolboxes
are hidden. To display them again, click on the Select Toolboxes
button.
Deleting a Custom Toolbox

To delete a custom toolbox, follow these steps:
2 Highlight Master Tool Box and click on Open.
3 Select File → Delete from the menu bar of the dialog box.
4 At the list of custom toolboxes, click on the appropriate toolbox to
highlight it, then click OK.
The toolbox has now been deleted.
Sizing and Moving Toolboxes

Just as with any window in Windows NT, you can enlarge custom
toolboxes or the Toolbox Builder window, and you can also make
them smaller or move them:
To resize a toolbox, follow these steps:
1 Move the mouse pointer to the corner of the window in question
until it changes to an arrow with two points.
2 Then click on the left mouse button and drag the window in or out
to make it smaller or larger.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-17

To move a toolbox, follow these steps:

1 Click on the left mouse button on the title bar, and hold down the
mouse button.
Move the mouse to drag the box to another position.
2 Release the mouse button when the box is where you want it.
7-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Editing a Measurement Plan

The measurement plan editors (for features and characteristics)
provide you with a quick and easy way of checking and, if necessary,
changing important settings.
You can choose whether to apply your changes to:
– selected features or characteristics, or
– the higher-order measurement plan setting.
Calypso has an editor for features (Prerequisites → Measurement
Plan Editor - Features) and an editor for characteristics
(Prerequisites → Measurement Plan Editor - Characteristics).
For more information about the individual dialog elements in both
dialog boxes, please see in Measurement Plan Editor Features and
Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics in the Calypso Online
Help, and also ➤“Editing the Probe Routes” on page 7-22
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-19

Example: Checking and Changing the

Operating Mode in the Settings Editor
This example demonstrates how to check and change the operating
mode:
1 Select Prerequisites → Measurement Plan Editor - Features to
open the features editor.
List of settings
List of defaults
Feature name
Feature type
Column of
currently valid
settings
2 Go to the list of settings at the top left and select the section for
which you want to view or change the settings.
The currently valid settings appear in the column on the right.
3 To change the current settings, select the feature to which you
want the change to apply:
• For the higher-order measurement plan setting:
Activate the Apply to all defaults of this plan check box.
• For selected features:
Click on the feature of your choice in the column on the left.
7-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

You can mark a block of features (e.g. features 1 to 5) by

holding down Shift and highlighting them with the mouse, or
you can mark individual features (e.g. features 1, 3 and 5) by
holding down Ctrl and highlighting them with the mouse.
4 Select the value for the new setting from the Set To list.
The highlighted features are immediately updated in the list of
currently valid settings.
5 Restart the procedure at step 2 if you want to view or change
settings for other sections as well.
6 Click on OK.
The changed settings are accepted and the Measurement Plan
Editor - Features dialog box is closed.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-21

Editing the Probe Routes

Calypso needs probe routes in order to move the probe around the
workpiece without colliding during automatic runs (CNC). Calypso
generates the routes automatically, if clearance planes were defined
around the workpiece (see ➤“Defining the Clearance Planes” on
page 4-72.
You may be able to optimize the routes, depending on the geometry
of the workpiece and the resulting positions of the features.
You also have the option of changing the coordinates for the route to
a feature. This is useful, for example, if you want to ensure that the
probing points for a cylinder are uniformly spaced.
The tasks involved in checking and optimizing the routes are as
follows:
– ➤“Checking the Routes” on page 7-25
– ➤“Editing Routes between Features” on page 7-26
– ➤“Editing Routes within a Feature” on page 7-31.
About Probe Routes

Probe routes in Calypso can be divided into two groups: the routes
between features and the routes within features. Terms closely related
with this concept include clearance plane, clearance group, retract
plane, clearance distance and retract distance – these terms are
explained briefly below.
Broadly speaking, routes contain all the relevant data for the CMM to
reach and probe the feature without collision. Along with the
coordinates for the probing points, this data set can also include data
for intermediate positions, for table control, for stylus changes, and so
on.
The result is a route comparable with a detailed description of how to
find a particular building on a particular street in a large city.
Routes between Features

The routes between features define how the probe head moves from
one feature to the next. These routes are computed on the fly during
a CNC run and depend on the following parameters:
– Current status (current position referenced to the probe,
associated clearance group, current probe, ...)
– Settings for the clearance group (retract plane defined or not, ...)
7-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

– Clearance planes (sizes, edge blocking)

– Other (probe-specific data, position of a probe-changer
magazine, ...).
Routes within a Feature

The routes within a feature influence the path traced by the probe
head in carrying out the measurement strategy defined for a feature.
These routes comprise:
– Defined probing points, intermediate positions, scanning paths
– Approach and departure positions of the probe head relative to a
feature and possible intermediate positions between the probing
points.
These components of the route are computed on the fly during the
CNC run and depend on the following parameters:
• the clearance distance, i.e. the “height” of the first
intermediate position in axial direction or normal vector
direction,
• the retract distance, i.e. the distance of the generated
intermediate position from the probing point in the probing
direction.
Clearance Planes/Clearance Groups

When it is defined, each feature is automatically assigned a particular
clearance plane. This assignment defines the approach position, i.e.
the side of the clearance planes on which the probe head is located
when approaching the feature. Feature orientation (e.g. direction of
cylinder axis or normal of a plane) is of no consequence in this
respect, and the same applies to the probing direction at the feature.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-23

Calypso distinguishes between clearance planes (SE) and clearance

groups (SG). The clearance planes are assigned when the clearance
planes are defined (see ➤“Defining the Clearance Planes” on
page 4-72). The normals of the clearance planes bear designations
corresponding to the directions of the coordinate axes (positive or
negative), referenced to the base alignment of the workpiece.
Clearance group Clearance plane

SG+Z1 SE+Z
Clearance group
SG+Z2
A clearance group is akin to a local clearance space in which two or

more features can be combined. This is a way of avoiding unnecessary
retractions of the probe head to the clearance plane. A clearance
group, hierarchically speaking, is below a clearance plane (parent
group) from which the features of the clearance group in question are
reached.
7-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Retract Planes
The illustration below shows what a retract plane signifies:
SE+Z
Retract plane
SG+Z2
It is not necessary to define a retract plane if the approach and

departure positions of all features in a clearance group are such that
they can be reached without collision when the head moves from one
to the other. This means that features on different sides of a common
interior space can be assigned to the same clearance plane.
Checking the Routes

When a measurement plan is created, some settings of crucial
importance in terms of navigation are automatically entered in the
feature.
These settings (e.g. clearance group, clearance distance, ...), however,
are merely defaults: prior to the first CNC run you must check and, if
necessary, change these settings.
Caution
hss
! There is no guarantee that the run will be collision-free if you fail to
check the defaults.
The most practical procedure for checking the defaults is described

below:
– When you program the feature, check the clearance plane, the
clearance distance and the retract distance. Change the default
settings if necessary. (for more information see Clearance Data in
the Calypso Online Help)
The criterion for the correct clearance plane is the position of the
probe head relative to the clearance planes (on the approach to
the first intermediate position of the feature in question).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-25

– When you finish programming the measurement plan, select

Prerequisites → Clearance Planes and click on the Test Drive
To The Selected Clearance Plane button to perform a test move
to (see ➤“How to Test the Clearance Planes” on page 4-76).
This is your opportunity to recheck the assignment of features to
clearance planes in the CAD model.
Caution
hss
! Other routes might be generated, depending on the characteristics
selected or if the run takes place without a result reset.
– Perform the first CNC run at reduced speed.

– If routing turns out to be poor, click on the Help button in the
Start Measurement dialog box and proceed in accordance with
the instructions.
Editing Routes between Features

On routes between features, the intermediate position for the probe
head is computed from the current position and the approach
position for the next feature.
NOTE Consider edge blocking: It could be either a hindrance or a help,

hss depending on the circumstances (see ➤“How to Close Edges” on
page 4-77).
The activities which influence the routes between features are as

follows:
– ➤“How to Define Clearance Groups” on page 7-26
– ➤“Assigning Clearance Planes and Clearance Groups” on
page 7-28
– ➤“How to Define the Retract Plane in a Clearance Group” on
page 7-30
How to Define Clearance Groups

When you define clearance groups, remember that all the features in
a group must be reachable from each other and from a higher-order
clearance plane.
7-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To define a clearance group:

1 Select CNC → Navigation → Define Clearance Group.
The Define Sub Clearance dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click on the New button.

Type a name for the new clearance group into the input field. If the
name includes a coordinate (e.g. HoleB -X), the name of the parent
group is entered by default.
3 To assign the clearance group a different clearance plane, click on
the arrow beside the picklist headed Parent Group. Press and
hold down the mouse button and select the clearance plane (SE)
you need by highlighting it and then releasing the mouse button.
4 Click on OK.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-27

How to Delete a Clearance Group

You can delete a clearance group when you no longer need it.
2 In the Clearance Group list, select the group you want to delete.
3 Click on Delete.
4 Click on OK.
The clearance group is deleted.
Assigning Clearance Planes and Clearance Groups

A feature can often have different clearance planes. Automatic
assignment does not always result in optimized routes, so you have
the option of changing the assignment or defining new clearance
groups.
To assign clearance planes or clearance groups:
1 Double-click on the icon of the feature to which the assignment
will apply.
2 Click on Strategy.
The Strategy dialog box is opened.
7-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 In the strategy list, double-click on Clearance Data.

The Clearance Data dialog box appears on the screen.
The elements that make up this dialog box are described in

Clearance Data in the Calypso Online Help.
4 To reassign the clearance plane or clearance group, click on the
arrow beside the Clearance Group picklist.
5 Hold down the mouse button and select the clearance plane (CP)
or clearance group (SCP) of your choice by highlighting it and then
releasing the mouse button.
The new clearance plane or clearance group is now assigned to the
feature and is used in the next automatic CNC run.
Editing two or more Use the Features Settings Editor if you want to assign clearance
features planes or clearance groups to more than one feature at a time (see
➤“How to Edit Measurement Plan Settings” on page 4-78).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-29

How to Define the Retract Plane in a Clearance

Group
All features in a clearance group must be reachable from each other
and from the higher-order clearance plane. To ensure this collision-
free accessibility, you can define a retract plane within a clearance
group.
To define a retract plane within a clearance group:
2 Activate the Retract To Inner Plane check box.

The field labeled Clearance Distance Probe Part Or Enter Data
is now active.
3 Type in the height of the retract plane relative to the datum of the
base alignment (perpendicular to the higher-order clearance
plane).
4 Click on OK.
The retract plane is defined and the dialog box closes.
7-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Editing Routes within a Feature

The routes within a feature define the path followed by the probe
head from one probing point to the next.
Your options for editing the routes within a feature are described in
the following sections:
– ➤“How to Move the Approach Position Closer to the Feature” on
page 7-31.
– ➤“How to Change the Point List” on page 5-64, in order to define
optimum probing points, for example.
How to Move the Approach Position Closer to the

Feature
The distance separating the approach position from the feature is
defined by the Clearance Distance parameter. If the clearance
distance for a feature is excessive, the result can be collisions in
narrow grooves or gaps, because when it attempts to move to the
clearance distance the probe comes into contact with the material
opposite.
To move the approach position closer to the workpiece:
1 Open the definition template of the feature in question by double-
clicking on the feature’s icon.
2 Click on Strategy.
The Strategy dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-31

3 In the strategy list, click on Clearance Data.

The Clearance Data dialog box appears on the screen.
The elements that make up this dialog box are described in

Clearance Data in the Calypso Online Help.
4 Check that the correct clearance group is selected.
5 Click on the Clearance Distance check box to deactivate the
default.
6 Type the new clearance distance into the input field.
The approach position should now be close enough to the feature to
improve the route.
7-32 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Using the Probe Changer

The CMM’s automatic probe changer allows you to change probes
without any manual intervention. Before you execute the automatic
changing of probes, you need to define for Calypso the exact
configuration and location of the probe changer rack.
Calypso saves the probe used to measure a feature along with the
feature. If it is necessary to change probes between features, Calypso
can do this automatically. The following preconditions, however, must
be satisfied:
Preconditions – Calypso must know that there is a probe changer.
– Additionally, the appropriate probe must be in the probe changer.
Procedure To configure the probe changer:
– Specify the probe changer in the system settings
(once-only operation)
– Determine the length of the reference stylus
(once-only operation),
(not applicable to RDS, MCR20 and SCR200)
– RDS only: determine the RDS geometry
– In the Change Probe dialog box, insert an icon for each holder
(MCR20 and SCR200: for one holder only, all others are
automatically created when the magazine is calibrated)
– Set the approach parameters
– Determine the position of each holder
(MCR20 and SCR200: calibrate the magazine)
– Assign probes to holders
The following sections will walk you through these steps. Once these
steps have been performed, they do not have to be repeated as long
as the probe changer is not changed in any way, for example by being
moved.
When the automatic probe changer is properly configured, you can
easily execute an automatic change of probes, as described in the
section.
Renishaw MCR20 Probe Changer

The MCR20 probe-changer magazine consists of a stand and a
horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four
approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-33

Caution
hss
! Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with
the MCR20.
NOTE The Renishaw User Manual states that the MCR20 has to be aligned
hss with a machine coordinate axis. Deviation of up to 0.25 mm from the
machine axis over the width of the magazine (200 mm) is tolerated.
On account of the special design of the MCR20, you must bear the
following in mind:
– After the Store Probe operation, the probe head moves only to
the transfer point, because without a measuring module
movement is restricted to the zone of magnetic force – movement
without a measuring module outside the MCR20’s zone of
magnetic force causes the controller to issue collision messages.
– No machine operations are triggered by a manual probe change
with the MCR20. If the RDS is used with TP20, you cannot change
the RDS plate manually.
– In the pickup process the probe-change solenoids of an index
head, if fitted, are not driven.
Caution
hss
! Never change the probe without calling the manual or automatic
probe-change function (e.g. by selecting another probe in the
qualification dialog and changing the probe by hand).
Strong magnets affect the TP20 probe head. If probing fails switch off
the solenoids if necessary or consult the user guide supplied with the
TP20/Renishaw.
– Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic probe-

change function to change probes with the TP20 and MCR20,
because this is the only way that Calypso can monitor the status of
the probe head (probe in probe head or probe not in probe head).
SCR200 Probe Changer

The SCR200 probe-changer magazine consists of a stand and a
horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four
approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
Caution
hss
! Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with
the SCR200.
On account of the special design of the SCR200, you must bear the
following in mind:
7-34 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

– The SCR200 has a photoelectric barrier that is interrupted when a

probe change takes place. Movements between the individual
holders take place inside the space delimited by the photoelectric
barrier. The probe does not move out of this space until the
change has been completed.
Caution
hss
! If the photoelectric barrier is interrupted during a CNC run, the
controller switches permanently to closed contact with probe head. If
this happens the probe head no longer recognizes probings and
collision is inevitable.
– Movement without a measuring module outside the zone

delimited by the photoelectric barrier is possible, but there is no
protection against collision. Consequently, it is best not to perform
movements with the machine if you change probes manually.
If the machine is equipped with an articulated probe head from
Renishaw (PH10), you must also bear the following in mind:
– If you have qualified probe positions that could cause a collision
with the probe-changer magazine when probes are subsequently
changed, you must use Approach Parameters to change the
parameters for the holders in question.
– The route above or in front of the holder must be parameterized in
such a way that the head can rotate before and after the probe
change without any risk of collision.
Caution
hss
! Never change the probe without calling the manual or automatic
probe-change function (e.g. by selecting another probe in the
qualification dialog and changing the probe by hand).
– Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic probe-

change function to change probes with the TP200 and SCR200,
because this is the only way that Calypso can monitor the status of
the probe head (probe in probe head or probe not in probe head).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-35

Probe Changer for RDS

The illustration shows you what distances you need between the
holders as well as the probe movement when removing a stylus.
Probe movement
when removing a
stylus
The movement strategy to a holder is set up so that the probe

changer is outside of the measurement area.
Please be aware that a minimum distance of 150 mm (6 in.) between
the holders is necessary.
An empty area of 120 mm (4¾ in.) below the holder is necessary.
Without the empty area, it is not possible to mount a lateral stylus in
the RST probe.
Defining the RDS Geometry

Before you can measure the probe changer magazine for the RDS,
you first have to define the geometry of the RDS.
Procedure To define the geometry:
– Compute the slot distance from the virtual axis intersection of the
RDS axes.
– Calibrate the four preset angle settings for the RDS. Calypso uses
this information to compute the intersection of the axes.
7-36 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Define the RDS Slot Distance

The slot distance is necessary only for the startup of the RDS probe
changer and need only be defined once.
The illustration shows an overview of the definition of the slot
distance X. The stylus is shown from above, e.g. from +Z.
RDS probe at top

in position 2
2
X
1
Reference edge
Probe head at top RDS probe at top
in Position 1 in position 1
Calypso helps you when defining the slot distance with a dialog. If
you know the value of the slot distance (offset), you can enter this
directly in the field Slot Distance.
To define the RDS slot distance:
1 Find an appropriate vertical reference edge.
An appropriate reference edge must be parallel to the machine
coordinates.
2 Position the RDS probe so that the outer slot wall is in a plane with
the reference plane.
In the above illustration, this is position 1.
3 Click on Read Position.
Calypso saves the current probe position.
4 Turn the RDS 180° around its A axis.
In the illustration this is position 2.
5 Reposition the RDS probe so that the outer slot wall is in a plane
with the reference plane.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-37

6 Click on Read Position.

Calypso saves the current probe position.
7 Check the results in the field Slot Distance. Typical values are
around 38 mm (1½ in.).
How to Define the Axis The position of a holder is always based on the axis intersection of the
Intersection two rotational axes of the RDS. Calypso must therefore firs calculate
the intersection of these axes. Before Calypso can do this, you must
calibrate the four additional probe positions of the master probe
(refPos1 to refPos4) (styli 2 to 5):
– A/B = 0°/90°
– A/B = 0°/-90°
– A/B = 90°/0°
– A/B = -90°/0°
Setting up the Initial Probe Changer

Configuration
You must inform Calypso that an automatic probe changer is
installed, and define the type. All other settings (e.g. defining holders)
and functions of the probe changer are defined with Prerequisites
→ Automatic Probe Changer.
To configure the automatic probe changer:
The System Set Up dialog will be opened with the CMM
Configuration notebook.
2 Click on Probe Change.
3 Activate the Probe Changer Exists check box if it is not already
activated.
4 Click on the arrow for the Construction list, hold down the
mouse button and select the correct entry for your holder:
• Scanning Head, Old Scanning Head or ProMax (Scanning
Head) for a scanning probe head
• Trigger Head for a trigger probe head (ST / ST3 from Zeiss)
• RDS for an RDS
• MCR20 for an MCR20
• SCR200 for an SCR200
5 Click OK if you are ready to save the settings and close the
window.
7-38 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

6 If you want to make more changes to the CMM configuration,

click Apply.
7 Select the Controller bookmark and click on the Connect button
to initialize the CMM.
The CMM now also has the information it needs about probe
changes.
Defining the Master Probe Length

If you are using a magazine for measuring or trigger probes, you have
to define the length of the master probe.
This is important, because the position of every single holder in the
probe changer is defined relatively to the machine coordinate system
and the adapter plate on the probe head. To locate a holder, use the
master stylus. Calypso knows the length of the master probe from this
procedure.
NOTE Magazines for RDS probes can be measured with any calibrated
hss stylus.
NOTE You cannot use the automatic probe change functionality for RDS
hss with an MCR20, only the TP20 probe modules can be changed.
Follow these steps to define the length of the reference probe:

1 Insert the reference probe (see ➤“How to Install a Probe” on
page 4-11)
2 Select Prerequisites → Automatic Probe Changer.
The Automatic Probe Change dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-39

3 Click on Length of Master Probe..

4 A prompt appears, asking you whether the reference probe has
been inserted. Check the control panel to make sure that stylus 1 is
selected and click on OK.
5 At the prompt to probe on the adapter plate, use the joysticks to
touch the adapter plate to the top surface of any holder.
The area on the plate to touch the top surface of the holder is the
outer perimeter of the plate where it would naturally contact the
holder when placed in it.
6 At the prompt to probe with the stylus, use the joysticks to probe
the same place on the holder, using the stylus tip this time.
The length of the reference stylus is shown in a separate box.
Calypso now knows the length of the master probe. The locations of
the holders can now be defined.
Adding Holders to the Probe Changer

Configuration
The holders in the probe changer that you want to use have to be
added to the configuration of the probe changer on your system.
When you add a holder it appears as an icon in the Automatic Probe
Changer window.
NOTE You can use only one MCR20 or SCR200 with 6 holders in
hss conjunction with the CMM. You do not need to add holders in the
case of the MCR20 or SCR200 – Calypso automatically adds six new
holders in the Automatic Probe Changer dialog box.
To add a holder:
The Automatic Probe Changer window opens.

2 Click on the arrow for the Edit list and select Add Holder.
You are prompted to enter a name for the holder.
7-40 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Click in the input box, enter a new name and click OK to confirm
your entry and proceed.
An icon for this holder, accompanied by the name you assigned,
appears in the Automatic Probe Changer window.
4 Add more holders as necessary, until the configuration of your

probe changer in the system matches that at the CMM.
When you create a new holder, a default is defined for the
intermediate position before and after probe changes: this is a safety
precaution. You can change the default if a lower value is preferable
(see ➤“How to Check or Change Approach Parameters” on
page 7-42).
Before you can set the positions of the new holders in the machine
coordinate system, you first have to determine the approach
parameters.
The Approach Parameters for the Probe

Changer
Configuring the automatic probe changer also involves setting the
approach parameters that are used to define the clearance distances
from the probe holder rack.
These distances are defined from each given position (e. g. before
entry into the rack) to the midpoint of the probe head. The Position
Over Holder distance is from the probe adapter plate (on the bottom
of the probe head) to the top of the rack. The default value is 0 mm.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-41

You can change the settings for each holder. If you need to change
these distances because of part or probe clearance problems, please
be aware of how close the movements are around the probe holders
and the rack.
Datum for approach parameters

The approach parameters for all probe changers are referenced to the
transfer point to the macro in front of the holder, and not the to-
holder point itself. If you enter Position Before Holder = 0, the
probe head moves directly to the transfer position.
The Approach In direction is the direction the CMM must travel in to
access the probe holder. If your probe rack is at the back of the CMM,
the approach direction will be in the positive Y-axis. If it is on the left
side of the CMM, the approach will be in the negative X-axis.
Caution
hss
! An articulating probe head moves the probe to the intermediate
position. The values for Position Before Holder, Position After
Holder and Position Over Holder must be set such as to ensure
collision-free rotation for every probe used.
The Approach for RDS

The illustration shows a probe changer magazine for RDS probes. The
arrow shows how the approach has to be defined.
How to Check or Change Approach Parameters

Follow these steps to view or change the approach parameters:
2 Click on the holder you want to change.
7-42 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 (MCR20 only): In the Edit list, select Edit Orientation of Changer

and enter the approach direction.
This setting applies to all the changer’s probe holders.
4 In the Changer list, select Approach Parameters. The window
with the approach parameters is opened.
If you have an MCR20 or an SCR200, the Approach Direction is

set to a default that you cannot change here. You can enter the
other values.
5 To change a value:
• Click in the input box and highlight the current value.
• Type in the new value.
6 Click on OK.
How to Define the Position of a Holder

Every time a holder is created in a probe changer, the position has to
be defined in the machine’s system of coordinates. In the case of the
MCR20 and the SCR200, all holders are calibrated jointly in a single
operation (see ➤“How to Define the Holder Positions of an MCR20”
on page 7-44).
Caution
hss
! The approach direction has to be set before you define the position of
a holder (see ➤“The Approach Parameters for the Probe Changer” on
page 7-41). Risk of collision if this procedure is not adopted.
To define the position of a holder:

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-43

2 Click on the icon of the holder whose position you want to define.
The icon turns green.
3 In the Changer list, select Define Holder Location.
4 When you see the prompt asking whether you want to overwrite
the existing position, click on OK.
You are prompted to select the name of the probe for this holder.
5 If no probe has been qualified yet and you merely want to define
the position of the holder, click on Cancel.
If you already know which probe you want to assign to the holder,
select the probe’s name and click on OK to confirm.
NOTE Do not click on OK as long as you have not completed the following
hss
step. In addition, ensure that the dust cover is open.
6 Calypso reacts differently, depending on which type of probe head

is installed:
• With a trigger probe head you are asked to bring the stylus into
the center of the circle. Ensure that you measure the holder
location in the area between the hexagon screw head and the
surface.
• With a measuring probe head, a cone on the side of the holder
is located by self-center probing.
• With Renishaw probe heads (TP20 and TP200), you are
prompted to probe points on the MCR20 or SCR200.
• With a RDS probe head, the back and side reference areas are
automatically probed after probing the upper reference area.
When the measurement is finished, you will see a symbol for the
probe head. The name is below the symbol.
7 Repeat these steps for every holder which has not yet been
defined.
How to Define the Holder Positions of an

MCR20
All the holders of an MCR20 are calibrated at once.
Caution
hss
! Before you define the holder positions of the MCR20, the covers must
be opened and the approach direction set (see ➤“The Approach
Parameters for the Probe Changer” on page 7-41). Risk of collision if
this procedure is not adopted.
7-44 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To define the holder positions of the MCR20:

1 Open the covers of the MCR20.
3 Click on a holder icon in the Automatic Probe Changer window.
Caution
hss
! Always use the PSR2 probe without extension /2 mm head, 20 mm
shank) for the qualification procedure.
The deviation between P1 and P2 in the Y coordinate (for

approach direction in Y) must not be more than 0.2 mm (see the
user guide for the MCR20).
You are prompted to enter the name of the probe for this holder.
The information about the probe refer only to the holder active at
the start of the qualification procedure.
6 Click OK when you see the prompt asking you whether you want
to overwrite the existing holders and add undefined holders.
If the MCR20 probe changer is selected, only the MCR20 holders
are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine
configuration are deleted.
Caution
hss
! Always use Reduced Speed (potentiometer) for movement, as
otherwise there is a risk of collision.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-45

7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the MCR20 as prompted.
P5
P4
P3
1
2
3
4
5
6
P6 P7
P1
Z+
Y+
P2
X+
Calypso takes care of everything else automatically. When the

qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the MCR20
are labeled from “1” to “6”.
8 Close the covers when prompted.
The covers have to be closed so that the magnets mounted in
them can function correctly and keep the switching contact closed
during probe changes.
9 Click on OK.
How to Define the Holder Positions of an

SCR200
All the holders of an SCR200 are calibrated at once.
Caution
hss
! Before you define the holder positions of the SCR200, the covers
must be opened and the approach direction set. The cable between
SCR200 and SI200 (controller for TP200) must be disconnected for
the calibration process, in order to interrupt the signal from the
photoelectric barrier (see ➤“The Approach Parameters for the Probe
Changer” on page 7-41). Risk of collision if this procedure is not
adopted.
7-46 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To define the holder positions of the SCR200:

1 Open the covers of the SCR200.
3 Click on a holder icon in the Automatic Probe Changer window.
Caution
hss
! Always use the PSR2 probe without extension /2 mm head, 20 mm
shank) for the qualification procedure.
The deviation between P1 and P2 in the Y coordinate (for

approach direction in Y) must not be more than 0.25 mm (see the
user guide for the SCR200).
You are prompted to enter the name of the probe for this holder.
The information about the probe refer only to the holder active at
the start of the qualification procedure.
6 Click OK when you see the prompt asking you whether you want
to overwrite the existing holders and add undefined holders.
If the SCR200 probe changer is selected, only the SCR200 holders
are displayed. Holders of other types for this machine
configuration are deleted.
Caution
hss
! Always use Reduced Speed (potentiometer) for movement, as
otherwise there is a risk of collision.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-47

7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the SCR200 as prompted.
P5
P4
P3
1
2
3
4
5
6
P6 P7
P1
Z+
Y+
P2
X+
Calypso takes care of everything else automatically. When the

qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the SCR200
are labeled from “1” to “6”.
8 Close the covers when prompted and reconnect the cable
between the SCR200 and the SI200 to reactivate the photoelectric
barrier.
9 Click on OK.
How to Assign a Probe to a Holder

In this step, you define which probe will belong to which holder.
NOTE A probe has to be qualified before you can assign it to a holder.

hss Qualify the probes in accordance with the instructions in ➤“How to
Qualify a Stylus” on page 4-22.
To assign a qualified probe to a holder:

2 Select the holder to which you want to assign the probe by clicking
its icon.
7-48 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 In the Changer list, select Assign Probe to Selected Holder.

A list of all qualified probes is displayed.
4 Select the name of the probe you want to assign to the holder, and
click on OK to confirm your choice.
The probe is assigned, and by way of confirmation the probe name
appears below the icon for the holder.
5 Repeat the above steps for the holders to which no probe has been
assigned as yet.
How to Perform an Automatic Probe Change

Caution
hss
! When storing or getting a probe for the first time, you should be
prepared to cancel the procedure. If the approach parameters are
incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by canceling.
To automatically change between probes that are both stored in the

probe changer rack, follow these steps:
2 Click on the holder icon that contains the probe you would like to
install.
3 Click on the Changer drop-down list and select Load Probe.
The CMM first stores the probe that is currently installed, then picks
up the probe you selected and backs out the approach distance.
How to Perform a Semiautomatic Probe

Change
Caution
hss
! When storing or getting a probe for the first time, you should be
prepared to cancel the procedure. If the approach parameters are
incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by canceling.
To automatically store an installed probe and then manually install a

different probe, follow these steps:
2 Click on the probe holder icon where the currently installed probe
should be stored (the icon for the empty holder on the rack).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-49

3 Click on the Changer drop-down list and select Store Probe.

The CMM places the probe in the selected holder. There is then no
longer a probe installed in the probe head.
4 Click OK to exit the Automatic Probe Changer window.
5 Proceed with the steps for manually changing a probe, as
described in ➤“How to Install a Probe” on page 4-11.
How to Change the Probe Assigned to a

Holder
To change the probe that is assigned to a particular holder, follow
these steps:
1 Make sure the probe is qualified and is currently installed on the
CMM (see ➤“Installing and Qualifying Probes” on page 4-10)..
3 Click on the icon for the new holder to which you want to assign
the probe.
4 In the Changer list, select Assign Probe to Selected Holder.
A list of all qualified probes is displayed.
5 Click on the name of the probe you now want to assign to this
holder.
The probe is assigned, and by way of confirmation the probe name
appears below the icon for the holder.
7-50 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Multimedia User Information

In Calypso, you can include audiovisual information that users can
view before running the measurement plan. For example, you could
include a video showing instructions on how to fixture or orient a
part. Each measurement plan can have its own unique user
information file, or you can use the same information file for several
different measurement plans.
NOTE If you have the appropriate utilities installed on your computer, you
hss can view files of the following formats: *.txt, *.doc, *.bmp, *.avi,
*.flc, *.pdf and *.gra.
You can create video files on any personal computer with a video
capture board and an attached camera. Refer to the documentation
included with these devices and associated software.
You can create video files on any PC with a video grabber board and a
video camera.
You can view this information in the Start Measurement dialog box
by clicking on User Information.
How to Add User Information to a

Measurement Plan
Follow these steps to select a user information file for a measurement
plan:
1 Make sure you have created an audio-video file of the proper
format and have stored it in the folder c:\opt\om\pictures\userinfo.
2 Open the measurement plan with which you want to include the
user information file (for example, by selecting File → Open).
3 Select CNC → Select User Information For Program Start →
Select.
The File Selection dialog box is displayed, listing all files currently in
the c:\opt\om\pictures\userinfo folder.
4 Click on the file that you want to include with this measurement
plan.
5 Click Open.
The file is now available to everyone who uses the measurement plan.
Only one user information file can be selected for each measurement
plan. You can change which file is selected simply by following the
same directions for selecting a file the first time.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-51

How to View User Information for a

Measurement Plan
After you have selected a user information video file to use with a
particular measurement plan, you or other users can view it when
running the measurement plan. Follow these steps:
1 Make sure the measurement plan you want to run is open.
2 Click on the Start Measurement button.
The Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition dialog
box is opened.
An icon is displayed at the top left corner for each measurement

plan, if the folder of the current measurement plan (.../workarea,
inspections) includes a file called icon.bmp which contains the
icon.
7-52 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Click on User Information.

A window pops up that shows the selected user information.
If the file contains a drawing, a picture or a photograph, you can
return to the Start Measurement dialog box by clicking on
Apply.
If it is a video, the Windows Media Player appears. You can change
how the video plays, go forward and back, and perform other
functions. Refer to Windows documentation for instructions on
using Media Player.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 7-53

7-54 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
8
8 Running a Measurement Plan
.................................................................................................................................
The preconditions listed below must be satisfied before you can run a
measurement plan:
– The CMM must be initialized (You will find more information in the
Online Help under „How to Initialize the CMM“).
– The scope of measurement must be defined.
A measurement plan defines what is to be measured, whether or not
a custom printout will be generated, and how the CMM will perform
the measurement.
Calypso automatically measures all the features you defined and
evaluates the characteristics in the order you specified.
Before you run a measurement plan, you should always make sure
that the CMM is clear for automatic movement around the part and
fixture. Use the joysticks to move the probe above the part and
fixture.
If you want to combine two or more measurement plans (and
evaluate them together) you do so by starting a master measurement
plan.
Defining the Scope of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Entering Printout Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Starting a Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 8- 1

Running a Measurement Plan
Defining the Scope of Measurement

If you do not want to measure all the characteristics in the
measurement plan, you have the option of running only selected
parts of the plan. You can do this by combining characteristics in
groups or selecting individual characteristics.
Actual selection If you want to test characteristics only once or twice, you can mark
the characteristics in question and start the measurement plan.
Calypso runs only your selection.
Measurement plan If you want to measure a large number of characteristics repeatedly,
group you can highlight the characteristics in question and combine them in
a measurement plan group.
The group behaves like a single characteristic. It is represented by a
button of its own in the measurement plan and can be assigned a
name.
Feature group If you test certain characteristics frequently, independently of the
overall measurement plan, but you prefer not to combine the
characteristics in a measurement plan group, you can highlight the
characteristics in question, combine them in a feature group, save this
group and run this mini measurement plan.
Masked If you want certain characteristics repeatedly omitted from
measurement, you can mask the characteristics in question. Masked
features are highlighted light gray in the measurement plan list.
You will find more information in Measurement Plan Editor
Characteristics in the Calypso Online Help.
Features If you do not want to run the entire measurement plan, you can
measure without characteristics in order to obtain initial information
on the features.
How to Define a Current Selection of Characteristics

It is advisable to group characteristics whenever you want to test a
small combination of characteristics or a measurement plan group on
a single occasion.
To define a current selection:
– Press and hold down Ctrl key and click on the characteristics you
want to select.
In the Start Measurement dialog box you can activate this selection
by clicking on “Current Selection” under List Of Characteristics (see
➤“Starting a Measurement” on page 8-7).
8-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining the Scope of Measurement
How to Create a Measurement Plan Group

You can combine characteristics to form groups. You can run a group
of this nature separately, without the other characteristics in the
measurement plan.
NOTE The grouped characteristics no longer appear individually in the

hss measurement plan. You have to open the grouping if you want to see
the individual characteristics.
To create a measurement plan group:

1 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on each characteristic
you want to have in the group.
2 Open the Edit menu and select Group.
The characteristics you selected are grouped and the group is
represented by a button in the measurement plan.
3 Click on the group in the measurement plan and then click on the
right mouse button to open the shortcut menu.
4 In the shortcut menu, click on Rename and type in the new name.
It is always a good idea to assign mnemonic names to the groups.
5 Press OK to confirm the new name and proceed.
by clicking on “Current Selection” under List Of Characteristics (see
How to Ungroup a Measurement Plan Group

You have to ungroup the characteristics in the measurement plan
group in order to view them singly in the measurement plan.
To ungroup a measurement plan group:
1 Highlight the group in the measurement plan.
The line is grayed.
2 Open the Edit menu and select Ungroup.
The characteristics are again listed individually in the measurement
plan.
How to View the Contents of a Measurement Plan

Group
You can view the contents of a group in order to check, for example,
that you have not omitted any characteristics.
To view the contents of a measurement plan group:
1 Click on the left mouse button on the group in the list of
characteristics.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 8-3

2 Click on the Magnifier button.

The members of the group are listed after a few moments. The
members of the group are slightly indented in the list to indicate that
they belong to the group.
How to Create a Feature Group

If you prefer not to create a measurement plan group (for example
because you do not want a group named in the work printout), but
you want to iterate certain characteristics, you can create a feature
group.
NOTE A feature group has a name, but this name does not appear in the
hss measurement plan.
To create a feature group:

1 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click on each characteristic
you want to have in the group.
2 Select CNC → Feature Group → Define.
Calypso prompts you to assign a name to the group.
3 Assign the group a name and click on OK.
The feature group is now defined.
by clicking on the feature group under List Of Characteristics (see
How to Select Individual Features

Instead of running an entire measurement plan or individual
characteristics, you can also test individual features. Measuring
without characteristics is a useful way of collecting advance
information about the features.
To measure selected features:
1 Click on the Features button to open the list of features
2 Press and hold down Ctrl key and click on the features you want to
select.
You can then open the Start Measurement dialog box, select the
entry Current Selection under List Of Characteristics and start the
measurement plan (see ➤“Starting a Measurement” on page 8-7).
8-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Entering Printout Header Data
Entering Printout Header Data

If you want to document the measurement in a custom printout, you
must enter the printout header data before you run the measurement
plan.
As regards entering printout header data, a distinction has to be
drawn between:
– Global printout header data
Global printout header data refer to the entire measurement plan
and have to be entered only once for each measurement plan.
The global printout header data include, for example, the name of
the operator and the name of the measurement plan.
– Local printout header data
Local printout header data refer to the current measurement and
have to be entered before measurement starts each time a
measurement plan is run.
The local printout header data includes entries such as “lot ID” and
“order”.
When you enter printout header data, the system prompts only for
the items that are contained in the currently selected format file (see
➤“Preparing Header Data” on page 9-16).
How to Enter Global Printout Header Data

Global header comments belong to the measurement plan and need
only be entered once for each measurement plan.
To enter global printout header data:
1 Select Prerequisites → Printout Header Parameters.
The Input Parameter dialog box will appear.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 8-5

2 Click on the field you want to complete and enter the appropriate
values or plain text.
3 If you want the system to prompt for the local printout header
data at the start of every CNC run, activate the Force Input at
Start check box.
4 Click on OK.
The entries are saved and the window is closed. The data you entered
is included in the custom printout when the measurement is
completed.
How to Enter Local Printout Header Data

Local header comments belong to a measurement and therefore must
be entered before the measurement plan is run.
To enter local printout header data:
box is opened.
2 Make sure that the Include Header check box is activated.
3 Click on the Data Input button.
The Input Parameter dialog box will appear.
4 Click with the mouse on the field you want to complete and enter
the appropriate values or plain text.
5 Click on OK.
The entries are saved and the window is closed. The data you entered
is included in the custom printout when the measurement is
completed.
8-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Starting a Measurement
As regards measurement, a distinction is drawn between two process
modes:
– CNC run
The CMM is under the fully automatic control of Calypso. The
prerequisite is that the CMM must have CNC capability.
– Manual run
In a manual run Calypso administrates only the measurement plan
and tells you which feature you must probe next, and how many
probings to take. As well as probing the features, you also control
the CMM.
Both modes of measurement are started from the Start
Measurement dialog box. This where you set the options for the
measurement plan run, and where you start measurement. It contains
the parameters you use to
– define the scope of measurement,
– set the parameters for the printout, and
– define the settings for the CMM.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 8-7

How to Start a CNC Run

Before you can start a CNC run, you have to define the details of the
run in the Start Measurement dialog box.
To start a CNC run:
The Start Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement.

You will find more information on setting these parameters in
Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the
3 Click on OK to start the measurement plan.
Calypso commences probing.
4 When the measurement is completed, you can click on the Show
Default Printout button.
The results of measurement are displayed.
5 Once you have checked the results, click anywhere in the open
part of the User Desk to hide the listing.
8-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Start a Manual Run

In a manual run Calypso steps you through the measurement process,
but you have to make all the probings manually.
This section explains how to run a measurement plan manually with
Calypso. You have to do this if, for example, you work with a manual
CMM. In a manual run Calypso is in control, and you probe the
workpiece.
The procedure for starting a manual run is as follows:
box is opened.
2 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement.
You will find more information on setting these parameters in
Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the
3 Tick the Custom Printout check box, if you want the system to
generate a custom printout.
4 In the Run Mode list, select Manual.
5 If you want to measure the coordinate system manually as well, go
to the Selection group and select Manual run for the coordinate
system.
6 Click on OK to start the measurement plan.
Calypso steps you through the process: The Manual CNC dialog
box is the direct man-machine interface.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 8-9

7 When measurement is completed, you can click on the Default

Printout button.
The results of measurement are displayed.
8 Once you have checked the results, click anywhere in the open
part of the User Desk to hide the listing.
Basics about Manual Control

You can influence a manual run in a number of ways while it is in
progress.
– You can declare the manual run as an automatic run at any time.
– You can delete the last probing point if it was unsatisfactory.
– You can change the number of nominal probing points if, for
example, some points are not accessible, or more points should be
probed.
– You can cancel the manual run.
You will find more information on these actions in Manual CNC in
the Calypso Online Help.
8-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs

Irrespective of whether the run you start is automatic (CNC) or
manual, Calypso always does some of the work for you, which means
that it is active the entire time that a measurement plan is running.
You can intervene in the process while the measurement plan is
running. For example, you can interrupt the run or cancel it if this is
necessary for some urgent reason.
Calypso's Stoplight dialog box is the communication interface
between you and the system. Just as a stoplight regulates the flow of
traffic on a busy street, this stylized stoplight helps control process
flows and display important status information.
The Stoplight window is always on view after you start measurement.
It controls communication between the CMM and Calypso. It is also
the interface that enables you to intervene in a measurement plan
run.
NOTE Never close the Stoplight window, because if you do Calypso will lose
hss contact with the CMM. You can always minimize the window or put
it behind another window.
In addition to controlling the process, the Stoplight window also

enables you to activate various views that show additional
information while the measurement run is in progress. They are:
– Stoplight,
– Base Alignment,
– Move in Part Alignment,
– Probe Information,
– Alignment and
– Data Transfer On/Off.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 8-11

The illustration below shows the Stoplight window:
How to Switch Views On and Off in the Stoplight

Window
The Stoplight window enables you to activate various views that show
information about the measurement plan run. These views can be
activated at the same time.
To switch a view on or off:
1 In the menu list of the Stoplight window, click on View.
A tick preceding the name indicates which views are active.
2 Click on the view of your choice to toggle its on/off status.
3 If you want to move the views or arrange them neatly, click on the
Arrange button and move the views as you wish.
When you are finished, exit the arrange mode by clicking on an
unoccupied part of the window.
4 To save the arrangement of views, click on the Save button.
The size and position of the Stoplight window are also saved.
8-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Cancel a Run

There are many reasons why a run might have to be canceled. Bear in
mind, however, that certain preconditions have to be satisfied before
you can restart a canceled run.
To cancel a run:
– Click on red in the Stoplight window or press the Esc key on the
control console (not in case of Dynalog P!).
The CMM immediately cancels measurement.
You have to click on green before you can start another measurement
plan.
How to Interrupt a Run

Interrupting means that the CMM comes to an immediate standstill,
but can continue at some subsequent point in time.
To interrupt a run:
1 In the Stoplight window, click on the amber light.
The CMM comes to an immediate stop, the green light flashes.
2 Click on green.
The run is resumed.
Reaction Following a Collision

In the case of a collision between the probe and the workpiece, the
CMM control switches all drives off. This is designed to prevent
damage to the workpiece and the probe. In the Stoplight window,
the stoplight goes red.
Measurement can only be resumed if not all the buttons in the list of
features are red or green.
Special Aspects of Collision with RDS

If your CMM is equipped with an RDS (indexing articulating probe
head, or stepping articulating probe holder), bear the following
aspect in mind if a collision occurs.
If the RDS collides while the CMM is not in motion and if the disk
contacts open, the collision will not be detected when the machine
subsequently moves (because the contacts are open).
A collision can be detected only when the disk contacts are opened by
movement of the CMM.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 8-13

How to Clear the CMM after a Collision

You have to clear the CMM if the probe collides with the workpiece
or the fixture.
To clear the CMM:
1 In the Stoplight window, click on the green light.
This reestablishes the connection between controller and CMM.
2 Using the joysticks, carefully move the probe away from the
workpiece until it reaches a safe position.
You can now resume your work. To ensure accurate results, check the
probe and make sure that the stylus is not deformed.
How to Restart a Run after Cancellation

You can restart an interrupted measurement run if not all the buttons
in the list of features are red or green.
To restart an interrupted run:
1 Set the stoplight to green.
box is opened.
3 Deactivate the Clear Existing Results option.
4 Click on OK to restart the run.
Calypso reruns the measurement plan. This time round, however, it
measures only the features for which no measured values were
recorded. This is the reason why compliance with the precondition
described above is mandatory, as otherwise you would not obtain
new results.
8-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
9
9 Viewing, Presenting and
Editing Measurement Results
.................................................................................................................................
Every time you perform a measurement, the results you obtain are
presented in the default printout and the compact protocol.
Calypso also offers a custom printout that you can use specifically for
presenting the results of measurement.
If you want to save results in files as backups or for processing in
subsequent evaluation runs, you can use Calypso's export
functionality that supports a number of mainstream formats.
Result Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Set up Custom Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
How to Display Variations Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Saving Measurement Results to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-1

Viewing, Presenting and Editing Measurement Results
Result Printouts
The printouts are logs that are generated while the measurement plan
is running. Calypso offers logs of three different kinds, known as the
default printout, the compact protocol, and the custom printout.
Additionally, the measurement results can also be output to Excel.
– The Default Printout is a detailed log of all results obtained in
measurement. You cannot change the way in which this
information is presented.
9-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Result Printouts
– The Compact Protocol is shorter than the Default Printout. It lists

the characteristics together with the measured features for speedy
assessment.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-3

– The Custom printout allows you to decide which elements you

want to include and to arrange the sequence in which they are
presented, along with the mode of presentation.
The default printout is always used by Calypso. After every evaluation

it is generated and continued.
Combined evaluations You can also combine two or more measurement plans and so create
combined assessments (see ➤“Combining Several Measurement
Plans” on page 7-4). The measurement plans you combine in this way
need not necessarily be on the CMM - they can be created and run on
CMMs at different points in the network.
Output in the form of If you have installed Excel, you will also be able to output the
an Excel report measurement results in the form of an Excel report which will first
have to be defined in Excel. The type of report required can be
selected in the Format Custom Printout window (see ➤“How to
Define the Output of the Printout” on page 9-9); the output to Excel
is set in the Start Measurement window.
How to View the Default Printout

If you have not selected the custom printout option, the default
printout window is automatically displayed on your screen after the
measurement plan has been carried out.
9-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Result Printouts
If you hide the window behind the User Desk, it stays hidden while
the measurement plan is running.
To display the measurement results:
– Click on the Show Default Printout button.
The default printout is displayed.
You can also click on this button to display the results even if you have
closed the Default Printout window.
How to View the Compact Protocol

To have the compact protocol displayed by default, you must activate
the Compact Protocol check box in the Start Measurement dialog
box (select CNC → Run → Run).
To view the compact protocol:
– Select View → Compact Protocol.
The compact protocol is displayed.
Layout of the compact The compact protocol contains all the features of the measurement
protocol plan, with lines separating the individual features.
The results of the characteristics are logged for each feature and
color-coded: green means within tolerance, red means out of
tolerance, brown means warning limits violated.
If a characteristic belongs to the feature line, the log shows the
characteristic line instead of the feature line.
References and comments are also included.
Other options You can search the compact protocol for character strings. You have a
choice of two font sizes for on-screen display.
The compact protocol is saved in the measurement plan directory as
an ASCII file (without color-coding information) called cprotocol.txt.
How to View the Custom Printout

As soon as results have been calculated after a measurement, you can
view and print the custom printout.
– Select View → Custom Printout.
Calypso opens the custom printout in a separate window.
You can customize the way in which the custom printout is laid out to
suit your needs and preferences (see ➤“Set up Custom Printouts” on
page 9-7).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-5

How to Print the Measurement Results

To send the measurement results to a printer, check the Send to
Printer radio button in the Start Measurement window. You can
select the number of copies in the Copies field beside this radio
button.
1 Click on Print Results to print the default printout.
2 To print the custom printout,
• select View → Custom Printout and
• in the dialog box of the printout, select File → Print.
The printout is output on the printer, that has been defined as the
standard printer in the Windows settings.
9-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Set up Custom Printouts

The custom printout is your way of presenting measurement results,
for example, to a customer or client. You can generate your own
custom printouts tailored to your needs and preferences or to those
of your client, and presenting the results of measurement in detail.
Custom printouts are ideal for attractive graphical presentations.
Consequently, it consists of various graphics files. You can edit these
graphics files as necessary.
For using and modifying custom printouts, the following steps are
necessary:
– ➤“How to Define the Output of the Printout” on page 9-9
– ➤“Designing Custom Printouts with the Header Editor” on
page 9-12.
The Structure of a Custom Printout

The custom printout consists of various sections that you can include
in or exclude from the printout, and arrange to suit your preferences.
The data for each section are saved in separate files in the directory
called calypso\opt\om\protform\default\.... These sections are listed in
the table below, alongside brief descriptions of their contents.
Section Content Edit Under

Printout header Automatic fields with Prerequisites → Result Presentation →
information on: Printout Header
– workpiece File name: vphead.gra
– measurement data
– etc.
Header Line Specifications for Prerequisites → Result Presentation →
presentation of the results. Header Line Editor
File name: header.gra
Printout area The printout area contains –
the characteristics and the
measurement results as well
as coordinate systems etc.
Characteristics Contains the icons, the Prerequisites → Result Presentation →
names and the results of the Characteristic Editor
characteristics. File name: cffra.gra
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-7

Section Content Edit Under

Features Contains the icons, the Prerequisites → Result Presentation →
names and the results of the Feature Editor
features. File name: me.gra
Coordinate systems Contains the icons, the Prerequisites → Result Presentation →
names and the references of Coordinate System
the coordinate system. File name: cfpcs.gra
User-definable pages any Prerequisites → Result Presentation →
User Defined Header
Automatic Fields in the Custom Printout

The printout header contains automatic fields or dummies, as they are
also known. Dummies are inserted once only. Subsequently, they are
replaced by Calypso or by you when you run a measurement plan.
This arrangement saves time and trouble, and the data on the
measurement and the workpiece are always current.
There are two kinds of dummy:
– global dummies. You must enter global dummies once for each
measurement plan (such as the part number, for instance), while
others (e.g. time, measurement plan name) are filled in
automatically by Calypso.
– local dummies. These dummies are filled by you or by Calypso
before each measurement plan start; they include the order
number and remarks, for example.
For more information, see under ➤“Preparing Header Data” on
page 9-16
Results Presentation in the Custom Printout

The custom printout presents the measurement results as follows
(shown here without the printout header):
Icon of Name of Deviation from Histogram

characteristic char. tolerance
9-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Along with the actual value and nominal value and upper and lower
tolerances, the printout contains further information, indicated by the
arrows in this illustration. This information includes:
– Icon of the characteristic: The icon of the characteristic can assume
one of several colors:
• Red: Characteristic is out of tolerance
• Yellow: Characteristic is in the defined warning range (if
defined)
• Green: Characteristic is within tolerance.
– Histogram: The vertical line in the histogram represents the middle
of the tolerance range. The dashes represent the tolerance limits.
Each dash represents 25% of the tolerance limit. The illustration
below, for example, represents 50% of the upper tolerance limit.
If the value is out of tolerance, the numerical value of the deviation

is displayed instead of the histogram.
How to Define the Output of the Printout

The Format Custom Printout dialog box allows you to define WHAT
(e.g. characteristics) is contained in the printout and HOW (e.g. the
sequence) it is presented. Additionally, you can also set the required
report type for output to Excel.
To specify printout:
1 Select Prerequisites → Define Printout.
The Format Custom Printout dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Set the parameters defining the scope and sequence of the
features in the custom printout.
NOTE If you want to output measurement plan groups, go to the Range

hss column, select the Other Objects line and set the option to All.
Make sure that Separate is not activated in the Output Order
column.
3 To allow the measurement results to be output to an Excel file:

click on the Select EXCEL Report button and select the required
report type.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-9

You can only use this function if you have installed Excel 2000 on your
NOTE
system.
hss
Requirement: You must have previously defined at least one
output format as “Report” in Excel 2000. INI files with the name
“ReportINI.xls” must be available in the same directory as the
reports.
4 Click on OK.
The settings are accepted and the dialog box is closed.
You can determine which report is to be output in the Start
Measurement window before you start your measurement plan.
For more information, see Format Custom Printout in the Calypso
Online Help.
Examples of Printouts
– Example of a custom printout.
Color highlighting is used for emphasis in the custom printout.
9-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

– Example of a VDA printout (without values).

The test report is output in a VDA printout. This printout does not
contain any features.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-11

– Example of a condensed custom printout.

The condensed form of the custom printout does not feature color
highlighting.
Designing Custom Printouts with the Header

Editor
While creating an individual custom printout, you can freely choose
the representation for the measurement results. Here, you can create
various custom printout templates which can be called up in
accordance with the measurement task which is to be executed for
the Result Presentation.
The Header Editor is a tool that you can use to create and edit
graphic elements and insert measurement plan variables into the
printout.
9-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

This illustration shows the Header Editor for features.
Menu bar
Task bar
Info bar
Graphic
Drawing area
Special toolbox
You can change the following structural aspects:

– Printout header,
– Header line,
– Characteristics,
– Features,
– Coordinate systems and
– Additional, user-defined pages.
NOTE You need some experience of drawing programs in order to use the
hss editor.
The Header Editor

The functions of the Header Editor are not described in detail in the
following as they do not differ greatly from those of conventional
drawing programs.
The drawing area is where you lay out the custom printout. The
special toolbox provides a number of variables or fields that you can
insert into the custom printout; the choice varies, depending on the
editor. These fields are filled either automatically by Calypso while
measurement is in progress, or my the operator.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-13

The graphic toolbox contains the icons representing the usual tools
of a graphics program for drawing simple graphical elements, and for
inserting entire graphical elements (such as a company logo, for
example) into the custom printout.
The info bar contains information on size of image, working
directory and current scaling.
The tool bar contains a selection of commands for controlling the
Header Editor:
The commands available in the menus accessible through the tool bar
are as follows:
Menu Menu item Function

File New Creates a new custom printout
Save Saves the current custom printout.
Save As Saves the current printout under a new name.
Open Opens an existing printout.
Format Opens the Page Layout dialog box.
This dialog box is fully described in Page Layout in the
Print Prints the current printout.
Close Closes the dialog box
Edit Copy Copies the selected element to the Clipboard.
Cut Copies the selected element to the Clipboard and removes it
from the drawing area
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard back into the printout.
Select All Selects all elements in the drawing area.
Duplicate Duplicates the selected element.
Make Polygon Not yet available
9-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)


Draw New
– Number Field Inserts a number field for numerical inputs.
– Text Field Inserts a text field for alphanumerical inputs.
– Output Field Inserts an output field.
– Data Output Field Inserts a data output field.
– Table Output Field Inserts a table output field.
– Graphic Inserts a graphic (file, OMView or Formplot).
Fill Color Defines the fill color for an object.
Border Color Defines the color for an object's border.
Line Width Defines the line width for an object's frame
Properties Opens the Properties (Header Editor) dialog box.
This dialog box is fully described in Properties (Header
Editor) in the Calypso Online Help.
Width... Defines the width of an object.
Height... Defines the height of an object.
Object Name... Defines the name for the object.
Object Visibility... Prompts whether you want to create a new view of the
object.
Bring
– To Front Brings an object into the foreground.
– Forward Brings an object one layer forward
Send
– To Back Sends an object to the background.
– Backward Sends an object one layer back.
Group
– For Symbols Creates a group for symbols.
– For Statistics Creates a group for statistics.
– For Comments Creates a group for comments.
– For References Creates a group for references.
– Group Groups the selected objects.
– Ungroup Ungroups a group.
Align... Aligns selected objects vertically and/or horizontally.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-15


View Refresh Not yet available
Zoom In Zooms in the view.
Zoom Out Zooms out the view.
Grid Off Switches the grid on and off.
Define Grid Defines the size of the grid.
Scale feature Scales an object by the defined scaling factor
Reset Page Not yet available
Select Objects Lists all objects that occur in the printout template.
Preparing Header Data

The printout header part of the custom printout can accept data
relating to the measurement environment, the operator, or the
workpiece. You decide which data to include in the printout header
when you structure your custom printout.
There are two types of printout header data:
– Local data: You have to enter these data each time you start a
measurement plan
– Global data: You enter these data once only for each measurement
plan.
Calypso also provides other information for the printout header data
(such as tester, date, etc.), which cannot be modified.
In addition to the fields provided by Calypso, you can also define your
own printout header fields (➤“Define your own Printout Header
Fields” on page 9-17).
To define which data is incorporated into the printout header, select
Prerequisites → Result Presentation → Printout Header.
9-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The available printout header data is listed in a column reserved for

this purpose.
Printout header
Within the column, the printout header data is arranged in groups, as

follows:
Data Group Type Subsequently Entered

SYS local/global automatically by Calypso
EDIT global once only per measurement plan under
Prerequisites → Printout Header
Parameters.
START local for each measurement plan start in the
Start Measurement dialog box, see ➤“How
to Enter Local Printout Header Data” on
page 8-6.
OTHER local/global automatically by Calypso
Define your own Printout Header Fields

Input fields can be freely defined for the printout header. These fields
will then be available for selection for the printout header.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-17

The additional input fields will have to be defined in the ASCII file
“userfields.txt” which can be found in the directory
/opt/om/protform/. Here, it will be necessary to add one further line
with the following features, separated by a comma, for each required
input field:
Setting (field or
button) Meaning
ID will be used in the result file, must begin with
“u_”
Label will be displayed in dialogs
Display control E = appears in the dialog when editing,
R = appears in the dialog at CNC start,
RE = appears in both dialogs
You can, for example, append the following three lines in the file
userfields.txt:
u_field1,FELD 1,RE
u_field2,FELD 2,R
u_field3,FELD 3,E
Once you have called the Report Header File Editor using
Prerequisites → Result Presentation → Printout Header you will
notice that the newly defined fields have been added to the left
selection column of the printout header fields. These fields can now
be added to the printout header in the same manner as standard
fields in Calypso.
The values for the added fields are entered in two dialogs:
– for the fields in the Input Parameter dialog that are highlighted
with R (during CNC run, after clicking on the Printout Header
Data button, or mandatory at the start),
– for the fields in the dialog under Prerequisites → Printout
Header Parameter that are highlighted with E,
– for the fields in both dialogs highlighted with RE.
The entered values will appear in the printout header of the Custom
Printout.
The identifications (e.g. u_field1) and the appropriate values will be
output in the result header file (*_hdr.txt).
How to Work with the Custom Printout Template

The template for the printout header is used here by way of example
to illustrate how to create a custom printout template and what to
bear in mind when you save your work.
9-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To work with a custom printout template:

1 Open the editor for the section you want to edit by selecting
Prerequisites → Result Presentation.
2 Open the template sketch by selecting File → Open and then
clicking on OK.
The template is displayed as a sketch.
3 You can edit the sketch in accordance with your needs and
preferences to create the template for your own custom printout:
• Highlight the object you want to use in the graphic toolbox or
the special toolbox.
• In the drawing area, click on the position where you want to
insert the object.
4 Save the template:
• Select File → Format, to define the format.
• Select File → Save As.
Calypso displays the following message:
Caution
hss
! Do not, under any circumstances, change the name of the file,
because Calypso always uses the same name.
Change the name of the directory called default, if you want to
create two or more versions of the printout.
• Overwrite the default name with the name of a directory you

have created for this purpose with Windows NT Explorer.
• Click on OK.
Your template is now saved.
Example: Programming a Custom Printout with

Input Prompt
You can program a custom printout in such a way that before the
printout is printed, the user is prompted to enter certain items of
information destined for inclusion in the printout. You do this with
the aid of the variables in the printout header (see ➤“The Printout
Header Data (Reference)” on page 9-21) and the Inquire query
function in the PCM language.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-19

In this example we want to have Calypso prompt for the pallet

number when the measurement plan is started, and include the
number entered by the user in the custom printout.
1 Select Prerequisites → Result Presentation → Printout
Header.
The file now shown under Sketch should now be vphead.gra.
2 Select File → Open.
The printout header is now displayed on the User Desk.
3 In the list of fields on the left, go to the START section, mark the
Tool field and click in the printout header at the point where you
want to position the field. Delete the word “Tool” from the label
and type “Pallet number” instead.
4 Close and save the printout header you edited.
5 Open the list of characteristics.
6 Make sure that no characteristic is highlighted, right-click to open
the shortcut menu, and select Parameter.
The Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
7 Under Presettings, enter the following:
• PALETTE=inquire(“Enter the pallet number:“)
• setRecordHead(“tooldf”,PALLET)
The effect of the first line is that a prompt box opens and the user
is prompted to enter the pallet number. The effect of the second
line is that the number entered in this way is assigned to the
“tooldf” variable and is thus subsequently printed in the printout
under “pallet number”.
Commands entered in PCM apply to the entire measurement plan,
which means they are executed when the measurement plan starts.
9-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Printout Header Data (Reference)

All the printout header data are listed in the table below:
Data Group Name of field ID

SYS CMM No. dmesn
Time time
of nrpgs
Datum date
Measurement plan name planid
Software Revision dmeswv
Department: vda_departm
Software dmeswi
Telephone/fax: vda_phone
No. vda_number
Control type Controller
Sheet actpgnr
Machine type dmeid
Operator operid
Run measRun
EDIT Clamp No. clmpsn
Comment: vda_remark
Clamp clmpid
Name of probe changer partid
Previous operation prevop
Ser. No. workpiece partsn
Measurement plan partcomment
commentary
Subject number: vda_subjno
Device no. fixtsn
Name: vda_name
Version: vda_version
Device fixtid
Rev. workpiece partrv
Audit no. vda_auditno
Drawing number drawingno
START Comment at start startcomment
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-21

Data Group Name of field ID

Comment: vda_remark
Name of probe changer procid
Test ID lotid
Lot ID partnbLong
Subject number vda_subjno
Name: vda_name
Process plan mfgdev
Order order
Part number incremental partnbinc
Version: vda_version
Audit no.: vda_auditno
Tool tooldf
Signature: vda_signature
OTHER Change operator changeoper
Creation of software rev. creationswi
Date of change changedate
Created by produceoper
Date of creation creationdate
CMM type creation creationdme
The IDs are used to identify the header data in the table result file
(...hdr.txt).
9-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Display Variations Graphically

Calypso can graphically display the deviations which are determined
by form elements on the measured geometric features as Form Plots
and can output these to your printer.
This form plot is available for the following characteristics:
– Straightness
– Flatness
– Roundness
– Cylindricity
– Best Fit of bore pattern
– Curve form (optional feature).
You can either select an existing format file or a format file which you
have created yourself (“*.gra”) to display the deviations in graphical
form.
How to Activate a Form Plot

Before you can activate a form plot, you must check that the
characteristic for the form plot you want to define has been
measured.
To activate the form plot:
1 To open the definition template, double click on the characteristics
icon in the measurement plan.
The definition template will appear.
2 Complete the Tolerance and Feature fields, if they do not already
contain the applicable data.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-23

3 Click on the Graphic button.

The selection window for the form plot is opened. The appearance
differs, depending on the characteristic from which the form plot is
called. The diagram shows an example of a window with the
feature “Roundness” for a circle:
Option for the type of plot
Format File Selection List
Picklist for characteristics
4 Select the type of plot you require for the feature from the upper
selection list.
5 From the selection list below that, select the format file which
should be used to display the form plot.
Default refers to the standard Zeiss format file.
All characteristics for which the type of form plot can be used are
listed in the Characteristics selection list. You can select two or
more in the case of some characteristics.
6 Select the characteristic.
The Form Plot window opens with the type of plot you selected.
The editing options in the Form Plot window are described in detail
in ➤“About the Form Plot Window” on page 9-26).
7 Click again on the selection window for form plots if you want to
view other form plots.
This moves the Form Plot window to the background. You can
now display the form plots of other characteristics together with
the current form plot. Repeat step 6 for this.
8 Click on OK when you are ready.
9-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

You can always bring the form plot window back to the foreground
again if you need it.
Format Files for Form Plots

Calypso provides several standard format files for displaying the form
plots. Additionally, you can also create your own format files.
The file that is required for the form plot can be selected in the
selection window for the form plot. The format files which are offered
here can be found under
..\Calypso\opt\om\pictures\formplott\calypso\ in the subdirectory for
the respective plot type.
Plot type Subdirectory File Name

Straightness Straightness cz_sn.gra
Multiroundness Multiroundness cz_mr.gra
Multiroundness with diameter Multiroundnessdia cz_mr_dia.gra
Multiple roundness transposed Multiroundnesstranspose cz_mr_t.gra
Cylinder form from Circle segments in 3D Cylinderformcircular3d cz_cf_3dc.gra
Cylinder form from Line segments Cylinderformline cz_cf_l.gra
Cylinder form using many circle segments Cumradialrunoutmulticircle cz_crro_mc.gra
Cylinder form using a single circle segment Cumradialrunoutsinglecircle cz_crro_sc.gra
Flatness from Circle Segments Circlemulti cz_fn_mc.gra
Flatness from Line Segments Linemulti cz_fn_ml.gra
Multi-flatness from circle segments Multiflatnesscircular cz_mfn_c.gra
Multi-flatness from line segments Multiflatnesscircular cz_mfn_c.gra
3D Flatness View flatness3d cz_fn3d.gra
Curve form linear curveformline cz_cu_li.gra
Curve form 2D curveform2d cz_cu_2d.gra
Multi-curve form 2D multicurveform2d cz_mcu_2d.gra
Multiple curve form linear multicurveformline cz_mcu_li.gra
Only the format files that have been provided in the respective
subdirectory and are appropriate for the plot type can be selected in
the selection window for the form plot. Format files which you have
created yourself should also be saved to the appropriate directory.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-25

Individually Structured Format Files for Form Plots

In addition to the format files provided by Calypso for displaying form
plots, you also have the option of creating your own format files. To
do so, use the Header Editor which can be called using Prerequisites
→ Result Presentation → Characteristics.
Details on how to work with the Header Editor can be found under
➤“The Header Editor” on page 9-13.
About the Form Plot Window

The illustration below shows the Form Plot window for a roundness
plot for a circle. The window consists of three areas:
– The form plot header, containing the data from the printout
header.
– The form plot area. It shows the validated specified form along
with the actual contour as derived from the measured points. The
two red lines represent the upper tolerance limit and the lower
tolerance limit. You can see at a glance where a measured point
deviates from specification, and in which direction.
– A data table with the name of the characteristic, the actual value,
the tolerance, the number of points, and the data for the filter, if
used.
9-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

In this window you can edit, save and print the form plot.
How to Print a Form Plot

To print the form plot:
– In the Form Plot window, select the appropriate command from
the File menu.
A dialog box appears on the screen.
How to Change the Form Plot Settings

The parameters in the form plot settings define the scope of the form
plot, among other things.
To change the form plot settings for the next output:
1 In the Form Plot window, select Edit → Modify Chart Settings.
This opens a notebook laid out like the notebooks containing the
system settings.
2 Set the parameters as necessary.

3 If you have changed the settings and want to use these for the
current plot, click on OK.
4 If you want to save your settings for other form plots, click on
Save.
The Form Plot window reappears on the screen.
NOTE This dialog box is fully described in Formplot Attributes in the

hss Calypso Online Help.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-27

How to Change Form Plot Settings Permanently

The parameters in the form plot settings define the scope of the form
plot, among other things.
To incorporate the form plot settings permanently into the
measurement plan:
1 Open the definition template for the characteristic.
2 Click on the Graphic button.
3 In the Form Plot window, select Edit → Modify Chart Settings.
This opens a notebook laid out like the notebooks containing the
system settings.
4 Set the parameters as necessary.

5 If you have changed the settings and want to use these for the
current plot, click on OK.
6 If you want to save your settings for other form plots, click on
Save.
The Form Plot window reappears on the screen.
7 Click on OK to close all sub-windows along with the definition
template for the characteristic.
NOTE This dialog box is fully described in Formplot Attributes in the

hss Calypso Online Help.
9-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Saving Measurement Results to Files

In addition to saving measurement results in the file “protocol” in the
standard manner, Calypso also supports additional files types in which
the measurement results can be saved as required.
You can determine the mode in which Calypso saves the data in these
additional files.
The table below describes the file types supported at this time:
File type Description

Table The measurement results are saved in a text file in table format. The
results are therefore available for use in other programs, especially
spreadsheet programs.
Files of this type are saved under
C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\results under the name of the
measurement plan which corresponds to the measurement results,
including part number indices.
Merge file When you save the measured values in a merge file, the measured
values of different CNC runs are saved sequentially in a common file.
Before you can save the measured values in a merge file you have to
initialize them.
Merge files always have table format.
They are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\results under the
name merge.
DMIS / PROVACS I The measurement results are saved in a file in DMIS format and are
suitable for the PROVACS statistics program.
Files of this type are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\dmisout
under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to the
QDAS The measurement results are saved in a file in QDAS format and are
Available as option only! suitable for QDAS statistics programs (e.g. qs-STAT, procella).
The system only saves the results of those characteristics which
correspond to the characteristic set in the measurement plan editor
(Characteristic to Statistic “on“).
Files of this type are saved in C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\qdas
under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to the
ASCII File Curve The measurement results for curves are output as an ASCII file under
C:\calypso\home\ASCII\prüfplanname\elementname.txt.
You can select which data should be written to the ASCII file:
Nominal values or actual values with or without normals and
deviation.
You can also select an export in VDA format: The stylus-corrected
curve points are written in a file as MDI (point-vector sequence).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-29

How to Save the Measurement Results as

Files
To define which file type the results will be saved under:
1 Select Prerequisites → Results to File.
The Results to File dialog box appears on the screen:
2 Use the radio buttons to set saving on or off for each file type.
Activate the appropriate radio buttons or initialize the merge file.
Caution
hss
! Initialization deletes existing entries in the merge file.
Activate the Select at CNC Start radio button if you want Calypso
to prompt for confirmation before saving to this type of file.
3 Click on OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.
The measurement results will be saved after the CNC run in
accordance with the settings that have been made.
NOTE In a QDAS file, only the results are stored for which the selection point
hss
of the characteristic Characteristic to Statistic is set to “On“ or
“Default“ in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
This dialog box is fully described in Results to File in the Calypso

Online Help.
9-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Copying the Measurement Results File

The results in the default printout and the compact protocol are
automatically saved in files on your computer's hard disk. Each time
you run a measurement plan, these files are overwritten with the new
results.
The names of the files are protocol.txt and cprotocol.txt, respectively.
They are saved in the subfolder created for the measurement plan in
the main folder C:\calypso\home\om\workarea\inspections\ (the path
on your computer might be slightly different).
You can use the Windows NT Explorer to copy these files to a floppy
disk or to another folder on the hard drive.
Custom printouts are not saved on hard disk. Consequently, they
cannot be copied to floppy disk or to other folders on your hard disk.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-31

Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT

You can evaluate measurement results, which have been saved by
Calypso in the QDAS format, in the statistics program qs-STAT.
How to Convert into QDAS

Calypso automatically produces a results file after a CNC run.
CNC run
of CAL YP S O measurement
plan with activated
QDAS output
QDASCONV.CON
CALYPSO Results file
Configuration file
CNC-E nd
QDASCONV.EXE
Conversion file for file
exchange format
QDAS Description file QDAS Value file

(*.DFD) (*.DFX)
Statistics software
qs-STAT
If conversion to QDAS has been activated, the conversion program

QDASCONV.EXE converts this results file into a QDAS description
file and a QDAS values file.
The conversion program uses the file structures defined in the
configuration file QDASCONV.CON.
NOTE In the QDAS file, only the results are stored for which the selection
hss
point of the characteristic Characteristic to Statistic is set to “On“
or “Default“ in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
QDAS Description File

The name of the description file consists of the first 8 characters of
the measurement plan and the extension *.DFD.
9-32 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The description file contains data particular to the part and

characteristics that describe the workpiece and the separate features.
The contents of these data can be taken from the printout header, the
printout or the configuration file.
Every time QDASCONV.EXE is called, a check is run to ascertain
whether or not the description file already exists. If it does not exist, it
is created and thereafter, it remains valid for all subsequent
measurements.
In the data acquisition module of the qs-STAT statistics program, you
can perform changes, such as adding features or entering information
that was not known at the time of the measurement. If you give the
Calypso computer a modified description file, the QDASCONV.EXE
conversion program recognizes the changes and takes them into
account for the next conversion.
Key structure The description data in the DFD file start with a 4-character key that
indicates the data type in the file.
0 ... 999 Description of the value formats

1000 ... 1999 Part data
2000 ... 2999 Characteristic data
3000 ... 3999 Measurement plan data
Example: K1001 Engine block

Where:
K = Key
1001 = Part number
Engine block = Information content
QDAS Values File

The name of the values file consists of the first 8 characters of the
measurement plan and the extension *.dfx.
The actual measurements, the identification for the validity of the
dimensions and the date saved are saved in the value file.
During the first run, all characteristics should be sent to qs-STAT, so
that a complete data model can be created in qs-STAT. If only certain
selected elements are sent to qs-STAT later, the data model is
updated; all elements which are not measured stay at counter status
1.
NOTE If only part of the measurement plan is sent to qs-STAT during the first
hss
run, but all characteristics are then sent as a later run, the data model
created earlier is not updated.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-33

Additional data, such as charge number, operator, and machine

number can be added as necessary.
The sequence of the characteristics in a file is determined by the
measurement sequence. If characteristics are missing due to focusing
of the CNC run, the measurement value is set to zero and the
dimension is labeled as invalid.
Configuration File QDASCONV.CON

The conversion file QDASCONV.CON controls the conversion of the
Calypso measurement results into the QDAS format.
QDASCONV.EXE needs the data from this file for the conversion.
QDASCONV.CON must be located in the directory c:\opt\home\om.
You can modify QDASCONV.CON to influence the conversion (see
➤“Controlling the Conversion with QDASCONV.CON” on page 9-34).
How to save Calypso Measurement Results

in QDAS Format
To save the Calypso measurement results in QDAS format:
1 Make sure that QDASCONV is installed.
The program QDASCONV.EXE is located in the directory
c:\opt\om\bin\winnt.
2 Save the results as described in ➤“Saving Measurement Results to
Files” on page 9-29. Set the option QDAS to On (Save without
query) or Select at CNC Start (Save with query).
NOTE In the QDAS file, only the results are stored for which the selection
hss
point of the characteristic Characteristic to Statistic is set to “On“
or “Default“ in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
After execution of a CNC run, the measurement results will be saved

as the description file (*.dfd) and the value file (*.dfx) in the directory
C:\home\om\workarea\qdas, and under the name of the
corresponding measurement plan.
Controlling the Conversion with

QDASCONV.CON
To control the conversion of the Calypso measurement results into the
QDAS format, you just need to adapt the configuration file
QDASCONV.CON.
9-34 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Line Format of the Every relevant line of the configuration file has the following line
Configuration File format:
QDASCONV.CON
KXXXX LLL T H:<Name>
The wildcards have the following meanings:
K Key XXXX: 4-character key for

indication of type of contents
LLL Length of field 1 ... 255
T Type of data A = Alphanumeric
I = Number
F = Floating point number
D = Date
H:<Name> Origin and field P = Key word from the header file,
name example: P:planid
W = directly from this file;
example: W:Prismo7
Spaces and tabs are used as separators.

Spaces at the beginning are not allowed.
Comments begin with ’#’.
Sections of the Configuration File QDASCONV.CON

The file is divided into four sections, which are labeled with the letters
B, C, D and E.
Each section is opened with a separator, for example:
$C------------------------------------
Sections B, C and D contain the keys (including definition) to be

requested from the customer which are necessary for the description
file and the value file, as well as a description of how the data fields
are to be filled. The values defined here are valid for all workpieces.
You can, however, individually adapt the QDAS information part in
the custom printout for every workpiece.
Section E defines the extra data fields to be created in the values file.
Section B: Parts data to In this section of the configuration file, all part information which is to
be created be requested from the customer is specified here with key, length and
type and, in some cases, contents.
Frequently used keys and their labels for part data:
K1001 Part number

K1002 Part label
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-35

K1003 Part short label

K1004 Part modification status
K1005 Product
K1007 Part number short label
K1040 Drawing catalog
K1041 Drawing number text
K1042 Drawing change
K1043 Drawing index
K1900 Remarks
You do not necessarily need to use the keys listed here. You can add
new keys at any time.
Section C: Constant Some of the specifications needed to describe features are not known
characteristic data to be by the user or machine, and are not contained in the measurement
created protocol.
Some of these data have the same values for all features. These data
are therefore defined as constant feature data in this section of the
configuration file.
Frequently used keys and their labels for constant feature data:
K2004 Type of feature

K2005 Feature class
K2007 Type of control
K2211 Type of distribution
K2212 Normal number text: Comparison normal
K2213 Normal label
K2214 Normal temperature
K2215 Normal number
K2220 Number of tester
K2221 Number of measurements
K2303 Section/Bookkeeping
K2305 Machine number
K2306 Area in works
K2307 PTM - number
K2342 Measurement plan name
K2343 Measurement plan creation date
K2344 Measurement plan creator
9-36 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

K2401 Test equipment number text

K2402 Test equipment label
K2404 Test equipment resolution
K2405 Text equipment number
K2406 Text equipment manufacturer
K2407 SPC device number
K2408 SPC device label
K2409 SPC device type
K2410 Test location
You do not necessarily have to insert values for these keys in the
configuration file, because you can enter them in the data module of
the statistic program qs-STAT.
Section D: Variable Some of the feature data can be taken directly from the measurement
feature data to be protocol. Values for these data do not have to be entered in this
created section of the configuration file.
NOTE Do not change data in section D

hss
Frequently used keys and their labels for variable feature data:
K2001 Feature number

K2002 Feature label (Additional text from configuration file)
K2003 Label short text (Calypso feature type)
K2100 Nominal value/Target value
K2101 Nominal dimension
K2110 Lower limit
K2111 Upper limit
K2112 Lower deviation
K2113 Upper deviation
K2120 Type of lower limit
K2121 Type of upper limit
K2142 Unit label
K2151 Tolerance as text (tolerance width)
Section E: Additional For every measurement, additional data can be saved in the value file.
data fields to be These data are valid only for the corresponding measurement run.
produced
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-37

Keys and their labels for additional data fields
K0005 Events
K0006 Charge number/Identification number
K0007 Nest number/Spindle number
K0008 Tester (number from catalog)
K0009 Text
K0010 Machine number (number from catalog)
These values can change with each measurement run. It is therefore

useful to use the columns from the printout.
The keys in this section affect only the first measurement run. They
should be evaluated only if they are valid for all measurements, for
example if all workpieces come from the same machine.
To save all corresponding data with the measurement run, these keys
can also be listed in the QDAS information section of the
measurement protocol.
9-38 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Example of a QDAS Configuration File
##############################################################################
# File: QDASCONV.CON
# Configuration file for QDASCONV.EXE
##############################################################################
$B----------------------------------------------------------------------------
##############################################################################
# Section B: Parts data to be created (K1000 - K1099)
# (see also QDAS data formats)
# All customer-required data must be specified here
# CALYPSO: The data is taken from the header file
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
K1001 30 A P:planid
K1002 80 A P:partcomment
K1004 20 A P:partrv
K1007 20 A P:partsn
K1041 30 A P:drawingno
K1053 20 A P:order
K1081 20 A P:mfgdev
K1086 20 A P:tooldf
K1101 40 A P:vda_departm
K1201 20 A P:dmesn
K1202 40 A P:dmeid
K1900 255 A P:startcomment
$C----------------------------------------------------------------------------
##############################################################################
# Section C: Feature data to be created that is the same for all features
# All customer-required data must be specified here, the format is
# the same as in section $B
# ATTENTION: Values from the characteristic file are not allowed here.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
K2004 1 I W:0
K2005 1 I W:3
K2007 1 I
K2011 4 I
K2013 22 F W:0.0001
K2022 1 I W:4
K2142 40 A W:mm
K2301 20 A P:mfgdev
K2302 40 A P:mfgdev
K2342 40 A P:planid
K2343 20 D P:creationdate
K2344 20 A P:produceoper
K2401 40 A P:dmesn
K2402 80 A P:dmeid
K2406 40 A W:Carl Zeiss Oberkochen
K8500 5 I W:3
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 9-39

$D----------------------------------------------------------------------------
##############################################################################
# Section D: Feature data to be created that is specific for all features
# No value identifications are defined, the values are taken from the
# characteristic file.
# If no source is given, the values will be calculated.
##############################################################################
K2001 20 A C:
K2002 80 A C:id
K2003 20 A C:type
K2100 22 F
K2101 22 F C:nominal
K2110 22 F C:lowertol
K2111 22 F C:uppertol
K2112 22 F C:lowertol
K2113 22 F C:uppertol
K2120 1 I
K2121 1 I
K2130 22 F
K2131 22 F
K2141 5 I
K2151 20 A
K2213 22 F C:actual
$E----------------------------------------------------------------------------
##############################################################################
# Section E: Additional data fields to be created in the values file
##############################################################################
#K0001 22 F C:actual
#K0006 14 A P:lotid
#K0007 5 I P:tooldf
#K0008 5 I P:operid
#K0009 40 A P:startcomment
9-40 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
10
10 The Duplex Mode
.................................................................................................................................
Very large workpieces can be measured using CMMs with two
measuring columns (dual-column CMMs) to obtain almost twice the
usable measuring volume offered by a CMM with only one column.
Each of the two columns measures, but computations and
evaluations take place on only one of the computers.
Calypso enables you to prepare, perform and evaluate duplex
measurements of this nature. Note that to do so, you must have
Calypso running on both computers.
The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of working
with dual-arm CMMs, and step you through the procedures involved.
Duplex Operation with Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Preparing the Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Using Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10- 1

The Duplex Mode
Duplex Operation with Calypso

Very large workpieces can be measured using CMMs with two
measuring columns to obtain almost twice the usable measuring
volume offered by a CMM with only one column.
Each of the measuring columns is connected to a computer for
correction and evaluation of the measurements; one of these
computers is the master, the other is the client.
Calypso enables you to prepare, perform and evaluate duplex

measurements of this nature. Note that to do so, you must have
Calypso running on both computers.
Run Mode There are two different modes in the duplex mode run control:
– Synchronous mode
The measurement plan runs on the master. The master controls
both measuring columns, with only one moving at any time. The
“client“ is only a conveyor of commands and results.
– Asynchronous mode
The measurement plan runs on both computers. The measuring
columns move relatively independently of each other, controlled by
the relevant computer. However, if data from the other measuring
column are required for calculating a specific feature, the
measuring column will wait until these data have been provided by
the other measuring column.
10-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Duplex Operation with Calypso
The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of working in

duplex mode, and step you through the procedures involved.
– You have to prepare duplex mode in order to take measurements
with two measuring columns. In particular, Calypso must know
how the two measuring ranges, originally independent, relate to
each other (see ➤“Preparing the Duplex Mode” on page 10-4).
– Important when measuring in any given run: log on, measure, log
off (see ➤“Measuring with a Dual Arm CMM” on page 10-15).
NOTE Analog to duplex mode, you can also control more than two
measuring columns in multiplex mode. In this way, you can increase
hss
the measuring range again and you can save additional measuring
time in asynchronous mode. The procedure is principally the same as
in duplex mode; you have a “master“ and several “clients“.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-3

The Duplex Mode
Preparing the Duplex Mode

The preconditions for duplex mode are as follows:
– The files for duplex operation are available and correct
– Both computers are connected via the network
– Both measuring ranges are coupled
Files for Duplex Operation

Some Windows NT system files have to be configured for duplex
operation. These files are preconfigured on both computers of a
system designed for duplex operation.
The files are in the directory ..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc and are
called “services“ and “hosts“. The lines required for duplex mode are
listed here just in case the system files are modified in some way.
The “services“ file Examples of entries in the “services“ file:
qmaster 10012/udp
czcol1 9996/tcp # Double Column CNC
czoemint 9999/tcp
acis 9998/tcp
counter 9888/tcp
holos 4959/tcp # CADLINK-UX
ZVICONTROL 8888/tcp # CALYPSO
col0 9800/tcp # Double Column MAN
col1 9801/tcp # Column1
oscssd 5019/tcp # VERSANT connect service
It is important to make sure that the “czcol1“ line is in the file.
10-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The “hosts“ file Entries in the “hosts“ file (example):
####################################################
#
# SubNet 192.4.1 Testroom
#
#
192.4.1.65 cnc1 CNC1 # Master
192.4.1.66 cnc2 CNC2 # Client
#
192.4.1.55 dynalog1 # computer1 -> Master
192.4.1.56 dynalog2 # computer2 -> Client
#
192.4.1.200 cmm_1 CMM_1 # controller1 -> Master
192.4.1.201 cmm_2 CMM_2 # controller2 -> Client
192.4.1.202 cmm_3 CMM_3 # controller3
192.4.1.203 cmm_4 CMM_4 # controller4
#
####################################################
In this example “cnc1 CNC1“ is the name of the master PC.

“dynalog1“ is the name of the control panel connected to the master
CMM.
“cmm_1 CMM_1“ is the name of the master CMM's controller.
Establishing the Connection and Coupling

the Measuring Ranges
The two measuring ranges have to be “coupled“ so that Calypso can
combine the results from both. Reference probings have to be taken
at one or three reference spheres in the zone that is common to both
measuring ranges, so that the two can be coupled.
The results are combined in calculation and yield the basis for
common measurements and evaluations for the two measuring
columns.
The coupling matrix is computed on the master and sent to the client,
and the client uses the matrix to convert its measured coordinates into
the coordinate system of the master CMM.
Selecting the Method of Coupling for Duplex

Operation
The sphere normals (references) must be installed in such a way that
they can be reached and probed by both measuring columns.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-5

The Duplex Mode
Coupling methods There are two possible methods:

Translational coupling
A reference sphere is positioned in the center of the common
zone.
Translational coupling involves computing the offset of the two
device zero points.
Translational and rotational coupling
Three reference spheres are arranged to form a triangle in space.
They should delimit the common zone of the measuring space
vertically and horizontally.
Translational and rotational coupling involves computing the
residual angle of the two device coordinate systems relative to
each other remaining despite alignment.
Calypso has a measurement plan for each method, so that you can
proceed with coupling.
Probes Install the appropriate reference probe in each column for coupling.
This ensures maximum precision. You have the option of using some
other, qualified probe if slightly less precision is sufficient.
Subsequent coupling Once the two measuring ranges have been coupled for the first time,
the relevant data is stored in Calypso and is evaluated for
measurements in duplex mode. The coupling has to be “readjusted“
under the following circumstances:
Reason for Coupling Method

Always after a mechanical alteration Translational + rotational
From time to time in operation Translational + rotational
(e. g. weekly if use is frequent)
Every time the system is restarted Translational
Every time a measuring column homes Translational
How to Prepare Coupling for Duplex Operation

A number of preconditions have to be satisfied before you can
proceed with coupling the measuring ranges.
The preparations are as follows:
1 On each computer, select Extras → Workroom → CMM and
open the notebook to the Dual Arm page.
This page is available only if the machine is defined as a horizontal-
arm CMM.
10-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

2 On the designated master computer, select the option Master.
3 Enter the requisite information for coupling the systems:

• Under Columns: enter the number of columns (in duplex mode
usually 2).
• The Port Number is taken from the “services“ file in the
..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.
• The measuring columns are correlated to the computers on the
basis of the computer names in the “hosts“ file, in this case,
for example, “cnc1“.
You can overwrite the defaults, listed here by way of illustration:
Master Client
Arm 1 = Column1 Arm 2 = Column2
Controller 1 = CMM_1 Controller 2 = CMM_2
Computer 1 = CMMWS_1 = local Computer 2 = CMMWS_2
PC
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-7

The Duplex Mode
4 Select Client as the option for the other computer.
5 Enter the requisite information for coupling the systems on this

computer:
• The Port Number is taken from the “services“ file in the
..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.
• Correlation is on the basis of the computer names in the
“hosts“ file, in this case, for example, “cnc2“.
It is advisable to check the connection before coupling the
measuring ranges.
10-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

6 On the client, click on the Interface button.

The Interface page appears on screen. The page shown here is
the Interface page on the master:
7 Check the settings for the connection:

• Address for controller on client: cmm_2,4712
• Address for control panel on client: cmm_2,4712
• Note the comma after the digits.
• IP address of controller on client: IP address found:
192.4.1.201
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-9

The Duplex Mode
8 If you wish to control the columns in asynchronous operation: On

the client computer, select Extras → Workroom → Environment
and open the notebook to the Dual Arm page.
9 In the first line, enter the path for the measurement plans on the
master PC and in the second line the path for the basic alignments
on the master PC.
Under Directory path, enter the locally valid designation of the
path and under Mounted as..., enter the designation valid in the
network under which the client system can access the path.
10 Click on OK.
The notebook is closed and the settings are accepted.
How to Set Up the Connection between the

Computers
Once you have completed the preparations, you can set up the
connection between the two computers.
Connection setup 1 Close Calypso, but do not close the Taskbar and the Stoplight
window.
The connection is set up in the Stoplight window only.
10-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Always proceed exactly as described below, otherwise the connection

NOTE
will not be successful.
hss
2 In the stop light window on the client computer, select View →

Multi-Arm and click on the Initialize... button.
The “Wait for Master...“ message is displayed on the client.
3 In the Stoplight window on the master computer, select View →

Multi-Arm.
4 Tick the Connected with “Clients“ check box to establish the
connection to the client computer.
The prompt shown here is displayed:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-11

The Duplex Mode
5 Do not click OK to confirm until the client reports that its status is
“Wait for Master...“:
When the connection is successfully established, the following

dialog box appears on the screen:
Important: Make sure that the Column1 entry is labeled in black

(not gray).
You can now proceed to Redefine the connection or, if this has
already been done, you can start measuring.
How to Check the Measurement Plans before

Coupling the Measuring Ranges
Once you have set up the connection, the next step is to couple the
two measuring ranges. Calypso provides two measurement plans for
the purpose:
– The “col2_trans“ plan for exclusively translational coupling,
– The “col2_rotate“ plan for rotational and translational coupling.
It is best to check the measurement plan before using it, if you are
unsure whether all the settings are correct.
The procedure is as follows:
1 Select File → Open and select the measurement plan for the
coupling you are going to use.
10-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

2 Select Prerequisites → Measurement Plan Editor - Features.

3 Make sure that the setting for Probe is MasterProbe across all
features (or the qualified probe you are going to use).
4 Make sure that the setting for Man CNC Mode is MAN across all
features.
5 Make sure that the entry under Columns that will be measured
with column 2 is column 2 for all features.
6 In the list of characteristics, open the 3-D Best Fit1 characteristic.
The Definition Template (Alternative Alignment Methods)
dialog box appears on the screen.
7 Make certain that the entry Column2 (arm ID slave) is set under
Receiver.
8 Select File → Save to save the measurement plan.
How to Define the Coupling

When you are satisfied that all settings in the measurement plan
(probe, base alignment, MAN or CNC, name of the second measuring
column, etc.) are correct, you can run the measurement plan for the
coupling.
1 Open Calypso on the master computer.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-13

The Duplex Mode
2 In the Stoplight window, click on the Define Coupling button and

select Translate or Translate and Rotate.
3 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession
on a sphere, using measuring column 1 (the master).
The number of the point to be probed appears in the dialog box
under Next Probing Point.
4 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession
on the same sphere, this time using measuring column 2 (the
client).
If you selected translational and rotational coupling, you must
repeat this procedure at two more positions on the measuring
plate.
5 In response to the prompts, probe sphere 2 and sphere 3 in
succession, first with measuring column 1 (master) and then with
measuring column 2 (client).
When measurement is completed, the master sends its computed
coupling matrix to the client.
The client uses the coupling matrix to convert its measured points into
the coordinate system of the master, before sending this information
back to the master.
As soon as this process is completed, you can start measuring in
duplex mode. Alternatively, you can clear down the connection
between the two computers and set it up again later when
measurements are to be made.
How to Reset the Coupling

A coupling corrects the coupling matrix on the client, but the matrix is
not entirely rebuilt.
If you want to delete the coupling matrix on the client in order to
rebuild it from scratch, proceed as follows:
1 In the stop light window, go to Multi-Arm and click on the
Special button.
2 Click on the Reset connection data button that now appears.
The matrix is deleted. You have to redefine the coupling before
you can use duplex mode again.
10-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Using Duplex Mode
Using Duplex Mode

It is very important to bear the following points in mind when you
measure in duplex mode:
– Each feature can be measured with only one measuring column.
This means that large holes, for example, have to be interlinked by
means of individual points. (Each feature is assigned to one and
only one measuring column).
Unless otherwise defined in the Strategy dialog box, the master
(measuring column 1) is generally used for measuring features.
– Note the geometry of the features. When you assign features,
remember to make sure that measurement must be collision-free,
and that this applies to both measuring columns.
Measurements in the common measuring range of the two arms
merits special care and attention. Make sure that there is no risk of
an arm colliding with the other arm as it performs a retract or
moves to an intermediate position without probing.
Asynchronous We recommend the following general procedure for measuring in
operation asynchronous operation:
– Set up the measurement plan for asynchronous operation.
– First test the measurement plan in synchronous mode
(measurement plan editor - features: duplex run mode set to
synchronous).
– Only then test the measurement plan in asynchronous mode
(measurement plan editor - features: duplex run mode set to
asynchronous).
Measuring with a Dual Arm CMM

The procedure for measuring in duplex mode consists of the log-on,
measure, and log-off phases.
You do not have to log on if you have just finished coupling the
measuring ranges; the two measuring columns are already coupled.
You can skip to ➤“Measuring in Duplex Mode” on page 10-16. In all
other circumstances, you have to start by setting up the connection.
The log-on phase is described in detail in ➤“How to Set Up the
Connection between the Computers” on page 10-10.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-15

The Duplex Mode
Measuring in Duplex Mode

The recommended procedure for measuring in duplex mode consists
in successively constructing the measurement plan by manual
probings and generating features, before starting the measurement
plan in CNC mode.
The measurement can also be constructed offline using empirical
values, but this requires specialist knowledge and experience.
It is, therefore, best to proceed as usual, working on the master
computer as if you were measuring with a single-arm CMM, while
bearing the following additional points in mind:
– Each feature can be measured with only one of the two measuring
columns.
– The point and the position “know“ where they come from;
probing the first point or the first position defines the measuring
column to which the feature belongs.
– You can view this information in the Measurement Plan Editor -
Features under Columns (default or column1 means “master“;
column2 means “client“).
– Clearance Planes: The measuring column flagged as “active“ by
the stoplight is the arm that executes the “go to clearance plane“
movement.
Risk of collision
hss
! Do not forget to clear the intermediate positions, as otherwise there
would be a risk of collision.
Caution
hss
! If you are preparing a measurement plan for asynchronous operation,
you must make absolutely sure that the measuring columns can not
collide under any circumstances. That is to say, the areas in which the
measuring columns move must never overlap.
Insofar as the areas of movement overlap, the possibility of a collision
can not be excluded, because in asynchronous mode the measuring
columns move independently of each other.
– Please check the following functions and settings in particular

using the Measurement Plan Editor - Features:
COLUMNS
Probe
Stylus
Clearance group
RDS angle
10-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Using Duplex Mode
If you are measuring in asynchronous mode, you have to save the

measurement plan after every alteration. Otherwise the “client“ will
not be able to read the current alterations.
How to Start the Duplex Mode

After you have completed all the preparations and you have
connected the two computers together, you can start the duplex
mode.
To start the duplex mode:
1 Select CNC → Measurement Start → Measurement Start.
2 If you want to work in asynchronous mode: Under Order of Run,
select the mode From Feature List.
If you select From Characteristic List, the CMM will proceed as in
synchronous mode.
A warning message will appear, which you must confirm.
The run begins.
How to Clear Down the Coupling for Duplex

Operation
Clear down the connection between master and client when you
have finished measuring.
The procedure for logging off and terminating the duplex mode is as
follows:
1 On the master computer, deactivate the Connected with
“Clients“ check box.
2 On the client computer, deactivate the Connected to the Master
check box.
This clears down the connection.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 10-17

The Duplex Mode
10-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
11
11 Managing Calypso
.................................................................................................................................
This chapter is intended primarily for system administrators (e.g. the
Master user) or experienced users, who are authorized to change the
Calypso system settings.
This chapter explains how to check and, if necessary, change system
settings. This includes, for example, defining users or initializing the
CMM.
Installing Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
If a Software Error Occurs – the Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11- 1

Managing Calypso
Installing Calypso
Calypso is automatically installed on your computer when you receive
the system. However, the installation instructions are included here in
case you need to reinstall the software for any reason.
The installation requires:
– the Calypso software CD
– the CMM Disk
System Requirements
To guarantee that Calypso runs error-free, your system must at least
fulfill the following requirements:
Hardware requirements Windows-compatible Siemens, Compaq, Hewlett Packard or DELL PC
with
– 2.5 GB hard drive
– CD-ROM drive
– 17” SVGA monitor
– 3.5” floppy drive
– LAN card
– Mouse
– Keyboard
Performance Minimum Requirements:
parameters
– Pentium II processor with 200 MHz clock frequency
– 128 MB RAM
– 8 MB OPEN-GL-compatible graphics card
Recommended configuration (especially for CAD options):
– Processor with 2 GHz clock frequency
– 1 GB RAM
– 32 MB OPEN-GL-capable graphics card
Software requirements The PC must run one of the following Operating Systems:
– Windows NT 4.0
– Windows 2000
System settings If your system was configured by Zeiss service personnel, you do not
have to modify the settings. If this was not the case, click on Start →
Settings → Control Panel and select Display and set “True Color”
under Colors on the Settings card.
11-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Installing Calypso
Installing Calypso
NOTE In order to install / uninstall Calypso, you must be logged on with
hss Administrator privileges.
Uninstall existing If you already have an older version of Calypso installed on your
version computer, run the uninstall program before you install a new version.
NOTE Existing data such as measurement plans, probe data, base

hss alignments or other CMM-specific data will not be deleted during the
uninstallation process. It is, however, recommended, that a backup
copy of the existing Calypso directory be made using Windows
Explorer.
Follow these steps to uninstall Calypso:

1 Turn on your computer.
Windows starts automatically.
2 Select Start → Settings → Control Panel in the Windows start
menu and click on Add / Remove Programs.
3 Select the program “Calypso” on the Install/Uninstall card, click
on Add/Remove and follow the instructions on the screen.
4 Select Remove from the Program Maintenance window and
click on Next.
5 In the next window, click on Remove.
The Calypso files on zhe PC will be removed automatically. The
current status will be displayed.
6 Confirm completion of uninstall with Finish.
7 Confirm the restart message with Yes.
Your computer will be restarted. Calypso has now been uninstalled.
Install current version Once you have removed an existing version of Calypso you will be
or new release able to install the current version.
Follow these steps to install the software:
1 If you have not already done so, switch on your computer.
Windows will start automatically.
2 Insert the CMM Disk into the floppy disk drive.
NOTE The write protect on the CMM Disk must be off.

hss
You can also copy the CMM Disk onto the hard drive for later
selection.
3 Place the Calypso software CD in the CD-ROM drive.
If the CD starts automatically, the Calypso installation window will
appear immediately. Proceed to step 7.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11-3

Managing Calypso
4 If this is not the case, select the Windows command Start → Run.
A prompt for a filename to run appears.
5 Click on Browse, select the CD-ROM drive and select the
Calypso.exe file on the CD.
6 Click on Open, and then on OK.
After a few moments, the Calypso installation window will appear.
7 Select English as the language of the installation.
8 Click on the Install button and then on Calypso.
The installation program checks if there is enough space on the
hard drive and asks you if the CMM Disk is inserted.
9 If the CMM Disk is in the floppy drive, then click on Yes.
Otherwise, click on No, enter the path with the CMM Disk in the
following prompt, and click on OK.
A Welcome screen appears.
10 Click on Next to accept the copyright agreement and continue.
The User Information window will open.
11 Enter the user information and click on Next.
The Setup Type window will appear on the screen.
12 Select Standard if you do not wish to alter any of the presettings
and click on Next.
- or -
• Select Custom and click on Next if you wish to change the
following settings in the windows that follow:
• drives and target directories for installation
• program features to be installed
NOTE The settings as you define them in this step are subsequently
hss
proposed as the defaults for the next “Standard“ installation.
After a short time, the system indicates that it is “Ready to install

the program”.
13 Click on Install.
Calypso will now be installed automatically. The current status will
be displayed. Afterwards, the message “InstallShield Wizard
completed” appears.
14 Click on Finish.
15 Confirm the restart message with Yes and remove the CMM Disk
from the drive.
Your computer will now be restarted. Calypso has now been correctly
installed.
11-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Installing a Service Pack

From time to time, you may receive program modifications and
additions as Service Packs. Service Packs can arrive by e-mail, on
floppy disk or on CD-ROM. The instructions below are based on the
assumption that you have received the Service Pack on disk. Broadly
speaking, though, the procedure is the same for all distribution
mediums.
The name of the service pack file contains information relating to the
corresponding program version. “zeiss_sp3412.exe“, for example, is
Service Pack 12 for Version 3.4 of the program.
Installation consists of two steps:
– Decompressing the Service Pack files
– Installing the Service Pack files
How to Decompress the Service Pack Files

The program files on the shipping medium are compressed to take up
as little storage capacity as possible. You have to decompress the files
before you can install them.
1 Boot your computer if you have not already done so.
2 Insert the Service Pack disk into the floppy disk drive.
3 Open Windows Explorer:
• Point to Start and click on Programs.
• Click on Windows Explorer.
• Delete the contents of C:\TEMP.
4 Click on the 3 1/2” Floppy (A:).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11-5

Managing Calypso
5 Double-click on the file calypso_spxxxx.exe.
1. Select drive
A:
2. Double-click on the file

name
This opens the WinZip Self-Extractor window.
The default folder is C:\TEMP.

6 Click on Unzip.
The files are decompressed. A message appears on the screen
when the files have been decompressed.
7 Click on OK and click on the Close button in the WinZip Self-
Extractor dialog box.
The program files are now in the directory C:\TEMP on your hard
drive. They can now be installed (see ➤“How to Install the Program
Files Contained in the Service Pack” on page 11-7).
11-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Install the Program Files Contained

in the Service Pack
Once they have been decompressed, the files of the current Service
Pack will be on your hard drive (see ➤“How to Decompress the
Service Pack Files” on page 11-5).
To install the program files:
1 Select Start → Programs → Zeiss → Calypso → Service Pack
from the Windows start menu.
You will be prompted to select a language for the installation
routine.
2 Select the installation language and then click on OK.
The installation program now asks you to confirm the path for the
decompressed files. The default folder is C:\TEMP.
3 Click on OK if the decompressed files are located in C:\TEMP.
• Should this not be the case, enter the correct path and then
click on OK.
When installation completes, the following message will appear.
4 Click on OK to close the message.

Calypso's system files will be updated the first time the program is
called after installation of the Service Pack. This may take some time.
You will then be asked to close and restart Calypso.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11-7

Managing Calypso
If a Software Error Occurs – the Error Report

Calypso is a program which undergoes continuous development. The
target of the development is to make Calypso better with every
revision. You can support this process by using the error report.
An error report can be generated automatically by Calypso, or you
can trigger the process manually (see ➤“How to Use the Error Report”
on page 11-9).
The error report contains at least the following data:
– the type of device
– the current Service Pack version
– the system's error messages
– a description of a situation (what was the lead-up to this error?),
which you will be required to enter
The error report can be saved as a file and sent to Zeiss. If you wish,
you can also add the current measurement plan to this file.
11-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

If a Software Error Occurs – the Error Report
How to Use the Error Report

The automatic error report appears anytime Calypso runs into an
internal program error.
To manually call up the error report:
1 Select Extras → Error Report.
2 In Comment please enter as precisely as possible the

circumstances which led to the error.
NOTE You must type in a comment before you can print or save the error
hss report.
3 In the Address area, select the appropriate address from the

Selection list.
4 Enter your name, address, phone and fax numbers, and your e-
mail address.
5 If you wish to forward the error report to Carl Zeiss by fax: Select
File → Print and fax the error report to the number stated under
Address.
6 If you wish to forward your error report to Carl Zeiss by e-mail and
also wish to forward the measurement plan: Select File → Save.
You will be asked if you also wish to save the measurement plan as
some errors can only be analyzed with the help of the
measurement plan.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11-9

Managing Calypso
7 Confirm with Yes if Customer Support at Zeiss has requested that

you forward the measurement plan.
The error report will be compressed and saved (if necessary, with
all the data from the current measurement plan directory and from
the actual values directory) on your hard disk as “hotl” in the
directory ..\calypso\var\opt\om\hotline.
8 Send this file by e-mail to the address stipulated under Address.
NOTE The other menu items under File are used for special service purposes
hss – Open can be used by Zeiss employees to unpack the forwarded
measurement plan; the menu item Record geometric calculation
should only be used when instructed to do so as this triggers
resource-intensive processes.
11-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Modifying System Settings

Click on Extras → Workroom to open the menu for the system set
up. Each menu item in this menu (with the exception of Status
Monitor) opens a notebook together with a matching group of
settings:
– User
Here, you can define new users and manage the existing users.
This notebook can only be processed by the Master user.
– CMM
Here you can set up the configuration of the CMM (control type,
probe head, control console, etc.) and the software drivers. You
also initialize the CMM here.
– Status Monitor
You can view all important events which occurred during the
current measurement.
– Environment
You can modify the user specific settings (User Desk and measure
units, start conditions, colors of the Calypso window).
– Measurement
Here you can set the measuring parameters of the CMM (working
speed, clearance distance, retract distance, scanning parameters,
etc.).
– Miscellaneous
You can view the Calypso copyright and version information.
When you open one of these menu items, you can check or modify
Calypso’s system settings.
Most settings are valid globally, i.e. for all users equally. Exceptions
here are the settings for language, measure units and color. Each user
that has logged in can select these specifically. The same, of course,
applies to the user settings (privileges).
You will find an overview of the settings in ➤“Settings You Can View
or Modify” on page 11-11.
Settings You Can View or Modify

The following table lists all of the system settings you can modify in
Calypso: All the menu items listed in this table can be found under
Extras → Workroom.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11-11

Managing Calypso
The instructions (column headed “For More Information“) are in the

corresponding sections in the Online Help system.
Setting Menu item Tab For More Information

Retract Distance Measurement Methods How to Change the
Measurement Parameters of
the CMM
Beeping upon probing CMM Head How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Users logged in User Administration How to View or Enter a User
Description
Decimal Precision Environment Language How to Change your
Environment
Expansion coefficients of the CMM Temperature How to Change the CMM
scales Configuration
Automatic login at start User Administration How to Activate Automatic
Log In
Automatic feature predefinition Measurement Elements How to Change the
the CMM
Automatic feature end (and Measurement Elements How to Change the
number of points needed) Measurement Parameters of
the CMM
Automatic opening of a Environment Start How to Change your
measurement plan at program Environment
start
Automatic path measurement Measurement Methods How to Change the
the CMM
Control panel type CMM Panel How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Add User User Administration How to Add New Users
Deleting users User Administration How to Delete a User
Renaming users User Administration Renaming a User
User User Administration Basics about Users
Copyright of Calypso Miscellaneous Copyright How to View General
Information about the
Program Version
Articulating probe head CMM Head How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Rotary table CMM Rotary table How to Change the CMM
Configuration
11-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)


Dynalog keys Environment Dynalog How to Change your
Environment
Single point measurement Measurement Methods How to Change the
the CMM
Window color Environment Window Color How to Change your
Environment
Device administration CMM Administration How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Speed of CMM for positioning Measurement Speed How to Change the
and scanning Measurement Parameters of
the CMM
Hardware and drivers CMM Control How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Home directory (for storing user- User Name How to Check the Home
specific settings) Directory
Initialization of the CMM CMM Control How to Initialize the CMM
Internal parameters of the Miscellaneous Internals How to View General
software installation Information about the
Program Version
Coefficients (expansion) for CMM Temperature How to Change the CMM
scales Configuration
Machine Type (CMM Type) CMM Machine How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Master in duplex operation CMM Duplex How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Measure unit of length (mm or Environment Language How to Change your
Inch) (User Interface) Environment
Measure unit of length (mm or Environment Language How to Change your
Inch) (Printouts) Environment
Maximum diameter of probe CMM Head How to Change the CMM
head Configuration
Measured points (for automatic Measurement Elements How to Change the
feature recognition) Measurement Parameters of
the CMM
Measuring range of CMM CMM Machine How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Nominal Mode Measurement Nominal How to Change the
the CMM
Reread (Internal) Miscellaneous Internals
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11-13

Managing Calypso

Home position of the CMM CMM Machine How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Path (directory) for actual values Environment Paths How to Change your
Environment
Path (directory) for Environment Paths How to Change your
measurement plans Environment
Path (directory) for Table files Environment Paths How to Change your
Environment
Computer allocation in duplex CMM Duplex How to Change the CMM
operation Configuration
Assign privileges User Privileges How to Assign General User
Privileges
Reference probe in sensor CMM Reference How to Change the CMM
system probe Configuration
Rounding measure for preset Measurement Nominal How to Change the
nominal value Measurement Parameters of
the CMM
Scanning speed Measurement Speed How to Change the
the CMM
Interface type and address CMM Interface How to Change the CMM
Configuration
CMM serial number CMM Machine How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Clearance distance Measurement Methods How to Change the
the CMM
Slave in duplex operation CMM Duplex How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Rounding to nominal value Measurement Rounding to How to Change the
(Rounding measure) nominal Measurement Parameters of
the CMM
Language (User Interface) Environment Language How to Change your
Environment
Language (Printouts) Environment Language How to Change your
Environment
Start conditions Environment Start How to Change your
Environment
Start procedure (automatic User Administration How to Activate Automatic
login) Log In
11-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)


Status log for system Status Monitor – How to View the System
Status Monitor
Control type (hardware and CMM Control How to Change the CMM
drivers) Configuration
Probe holders CMM Changer How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Probe changer CMM Changer How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Probe head configuration CMM Head How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Diameter of probe head CMM Head How to Change the CMM
Configuration
Temperature unit (Celsius or Environment Language How to Change your
Fahrenheit) (User Interface) Environment
Temperature unit (Celsius or Environment Language How to Change your
Fahrenheit) (Printouts) Environment
Positioning speed Measurement Speed How to Change the
the CMM
Angle Unit (Measure Unit) (User Environment Language How to Change your
Interface) Environment
Angle Unit (Measure Unit) Environment Language How to Change your
(Printout) Environment
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 11-15

Managing Calypso
11-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
12
12 The Auto-Run Interface
.................................................................................................................................
The Auto-Run interface segregates the performance of the
measurement plans from the other tasks and functions in Calypso.
This means that users who do not have specialist knowledge of how
to work with Calypso can run measurement plans.
In an Auto-Run interface, moreover, you can map typical
measurement configurations as encountered in your CMM measuring
range. The workpieces in the CMM measuring range correspond in
size and position to the icons in the measurement plans on the Auto-
Run interface. The size and position of the measuring-plan icons on
the interface correspond approximately to the size and position of the
workpieces in the measuring range.
You can use Auto-Run interfaces, therefore, to perform multiple
measurement plans one after the other in a defined sequence.
Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Auto-Run for System Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Auto-Run for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12- 1

The Auto-Run Interface
Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces

The Correspondence An Auto-Run interface represents the measuring table or base plate
between CMM of your CMM. This means that the position of each measuring-plan
Measuring Range and icon on the Auto-Run interface approximates to the position of the
Auto-Run Interface corresponding workpiece on the table.
In the Auto-Run interface, the icons of the measurement plans are
represented as if you were looking down on them from above, with a
bird’s-eye view of the table or base plate of the CMM.
Important Auto-Run Terms

A certain number of new terms are encountered in the context of
Auto-Run interfaces. These terms do not occur in Calypso, but they
are very important as regards your grasp of the Auto-Run concept.
– Measurement Plan Icons
A measurement plan icon is a symbol that represents a
measurement plan (see ➤“Basics about Measurement Plan Icon”
on page 12-3).
– Desk
A desk is that part of the Auto-Run interface which corresponds to
the table or base plate of the CMM (see ➤“Basics about Desks” on
page 12-4).
– Branches
A branch defines two or more connections between specific desks
(see ➤“Basics about Branches” on page 12-5).
– Pallet
You can space workpieces over a defined grid on a pallet and then
measure them all at once (see ➤“Basics about Pallets” on
page 12-5).
12-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Layout of the Interface

An Auto-Run interface is superimposed on the Calypso user interface.
The illustration below shows the major features of the Auto-Run
interface, and these features are described in more detail below.
Task bar This area corresponds to Buttons for Measurement Plan

the table or the base controlling icon here
plate of the CMM measurement
Basics about Measurement Plan Icon

Each workpiece to be measured is assigned a measurement plan.
When you want to map a workpiece on the measuring range onto an
Auto-Run interface, you do so by means of the workpiece’s
measurement plan. On the Auto-Run interface, however, you see only
an icon labeled with the name of the measurement plan, instead of
the entire measurement plan as such.
The size of the icons is a special aspect: the larger the workpiece, the
larger the icon. Calypso derives the size of the workpiece from the
size of its clearance planes.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-3

Basics about Desks

A desk is that part of the Auto-Run interface which corresponds to
the table or base plate of the CMM. A desk is characteristic of one
and only one measuring configuration, as reflected by the fact that it
bears the name of this configuration.
An Auto-Run interface can comprise more than one desk and you can
switch from desk to desk. In this way, you can map a variety of
measuring configurations in a single Auto-Run interface instead of
having to define a new interface for each configuration. This is useful
if the workpieces you have to measure recur, but are arranged in a
variety of configurations on the table.
12-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Basics about Branches

Along with measurement plan icons, you can also place branches on
the desk.
If you have defined multiple desks, a branch is a way of going from
one desk to an other, specific desk. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to finish measuring with one desk and then immediately
continue with a certain other desk. Clicking on the branch takes you
directly to this particular desk, without having to look for it in the list
of desks.
Basics about Pallets

You can map a pallet on your Auto-Run interface.
You can arrange similar workpieces at regular intervals on a pallet and
then measure them all at once. The pallet is loaded into the
measuring range of the CMM as a complete unit for this purpose.
Two preconditions have to be met so that Calypso can determine the
positions of the workpieces on the pallet:
– Calypso requires the position of the pallet itself. This means you
have to define a base coordinate system for the pallet and this, in
turn, means that each pallet requires its own measurement plan.
– Calypso must be able to locate the individual workpieces on the
pallet. This involves dividing the pallet into rows and columns,
forming a grid in other words. The intersections are the reference
points at which the workpieces are situated. The illustration below
shows the pallet from above (–Z direction) to clarify the
relationships.
columns (X-division)
lines (Y-division)
Y
X
palette alignment reference points on which
the parts are situated
You can define how the pallet is divided – so you can map each
pallet in full.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-5

Auto-Run for System Administrators

One of your functions as system administrator is to set up an Auto-
Run interface, so that inexperienced users have a convenient way of
running measurement plans. You will be familiar with some of the
tasks involved from Calypso, others will be new to you.
You must:
– configure Auto-Run, i.e. assign privileges to the future users and
check the settings of the CMM in the system configuration. (See
➤“Configuring Auto-Run” on page 12-6)
– map the possible measuring configurations of the CMM, each in
an interface (known as a desk) of its own. See ➤“Mapping the
Measuring Configuration” on page 12-8.
Configuring Auto-Run
The purpose of Auto-Run interfaces is to automate Calypso processes
so that inexperienced users will encounter no difficulty running them.
Before you start mapping desks, the first thing to do is assign
privileges for the future users. You also have to check the parameters
set in the system settings for measuring and for the CMM and make
any changes that might prove necessary.
How to Load the Auto-Run Interface

In order to open the Auto-Run Interface dialog box:
1 Close all measurement plans.
2 Select CNC → Auto-Run.
The Auto-Run Interface dialog box is opened.
How to Assign User Privileges for Auto-Run

As system administrator, you determine which tasks individual users
can perform on the basis of their experience, by assigning certain
privileges. Only the Master user has the right to edit Auto-Run.
12-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To assign privileges:
1 Select Configuration → Users → Privileges.
The User Privileges dialog box appears on the screen.
The names of all defined Calypso users are listed on the left.
2 Highlight the name of the user to whom you want to assign
privileges.
All privileges available for the Auto-Run interface are now listed on
the right.
3 To assign a privilege, activate its check box in the Status column.

A tick means that the user in question can execute the action
specified under Privileges.
4 Once you have defined the privileges for this user, click on OK.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-7

The settings are saved and are active for this user with immediate
effect.
How to Specify the CMM

The parameters for the CMM, measurement and the work
environment are usually defined already in the system settings. For
safety’s sake, however, you should at least check the settings and
adjust them as necessary.
Check the parameters for the following areas:
– The CMM configuration (under Configuration → CMM).
There is an Explanation in Online Help under „How to Change the
CMM Configuration“.
NOTE On the Machine page of the CMM configuration, make sure that the
hss Measuring Range is defined completely and correctly.
– The measuring parameters for speed and probe routes (under

Configuration → Measurement).
There is an Explanation in Online Help under „How to Change the
– The user’s work environment (under Configuration →
Environment).
There is an Explanation in Online Help under„How to Change the
Mapping the Measuring Configuration

You can streamline the process of measuring different workpieces by
grouping them on the table or on the base plate of the CMM. You
can map the arrangement of these workpieces accurately in the Auto-
Run interface – you do this by defining what are known as desks.
The tasks involved in mapping the measuring configuration are as
follows:
– Define desks
– Add measurement plan
– Position measurement plan icon
– Place graphic on measurement plan icon
– Set size of an icon
12-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Define Desks

A desk is an accurate map of the workpieces as arranged in the
CMM’s measuring range. You define a separate desk for each
arrangement of workpieces.
To define a desk:
1 If no desks have been defined as yet in this Auto-Run interface:
• Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link → Rename.
(When a new Auto-Run interface is defined, Calypso always
creates a desk named No Name and you should first rename
before using it).
• Enter the new name for the desk.

• Click on OK.
The default desk now has a new name.
2 If you have already created a desk:
• Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link → New.
• Enter a name for the desk.

• Click on OK.
The name of the new desk appears in a picklist in the task bar.
You have now defined a desk, in other words a two-dimensional map
of the empty CMM measuring range.
How to Add a Measurement Plan to a Desk

To map a workpiece in the measuring range, add the measurement
plan that was defined for the workpiece to the desk.
NOTE Make sure that no measurement plan is open in Calypso, because it

hss would be overwritten in an Auto-Run process.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-9

To add a measurement plan to the desk:

1 Click on the Measurement Plan button.
The Select Measurement Plan dialog box is opened.
This dialog box contains a list of all measurement plans in the

selected measurement plan folder.
2 Highlight the measurement plan of your choice or look for it, if it is
some other folder.
3 Click on OK to load the measurement plan and close the dialog
box.
Calypso creates an icon for the measurement plan and places it in the
top left corner of the desk. All you have to do is position the icons in
accordance with the positions of the workpieces in the measuring
range.
How to Position Measurement Plan Icons on the

Desk
The position of each measuring plan icon on the Auto-Run interface
must correspond to the position of the corresponding workpiece on
the table or base plate.
To position a measurement plan icon:
1 Click the left mouse button on the icon and hold down the button.
You can now drag the icon with the mouse.
2 Drag the icon to the approximate position on the desk.
12-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Place a Bitmap Image on a Measurement

Plan Icon
For the sake of clarity, you can superimpose images (e.g. of the
relevant workpieces) on the icons on the desk. You need a bitmap of
the workpiece, imaged with a digital camera, for example.
You can load various images for each individual run of a measurement
plan, so that you can easily distinguish between the individual runs.
To place a bitmap on a measurement plan or run icon:
1 Highlight the icon.
2 Open the shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button (two-
button mouse, or the middle button of a three-button mouse) on
the icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3 Select the Load Bitmap... command.
4 Select the desired image file in the file selection dialog.
The image is then placed on the measurement plan icon or on the run
icon.
With the menu item Remove picture in the shortcut menu, you can
display the icon again without the bitmap.
How to Define the Size of an Icon

You can define the size of an icon in the popup menu:
1 Highlight the icon.
the icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3 Select the Define Icon Size... command.
The Defining Icon Size dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-11

4 Enter the height and width you want the icon to have on the desk.
5 Click OK to confirm and save your entries.
The dialog box closes and the icon is resized to your specifications.
How to Create Branches between Desks

You can use the picklist in the task bar to move from one desk to
another. A branch, however, is a quick way of changing directly to a
specific desk.
To create a branch:
1 Make sure that the desk displayed on the screen is the one from
which you want to link to another desk by means of a branch.
2 Click on the Branch button or in the menu bar on the arrow
beside the picklist for desks.
The selection box illustrated below opens and you are prompted to
define the destination for the branch.
3 Select the destination desk:

• If you want to go to an existing desk, highlight the desk’s name.
• If you want to go to a desk that has not been defined at this
time, highlight <new>.
4 Click on OK.
Calypso creates the icon for the branch (together with the name of
the destination desk) and adds it to the source desk.
Mapping a Pallet
Multiple workpieces of similar type are mounted on a pallet. Calypso
determines the position of the pallet on the table by computing the
pallet’s base alignment. Calypso can deduce the positions of the
workpieces from the grid of rows and columns which it superimposes
on the pallet.
12-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Prepare a Pallet

Preparing a pallet entails creating a new measurement plan. This step
does not involve dividing the pallet into rows and columns.
To prepare a pallet:
– In Calypso, create a measurement plan specially for the pallet.
It is important that the pallet should have a unique base alignment
so that the program can unequivocally determine the location of
the pallet.
How to Add a Pallet to a Desk

You can add a pallet to a desk. Workpieces of similar type mounted
on a pallet, arranged in a uniform grid of rows and columns.
To add a pallet:
1 Click on the Pallet button.
The Pallet Parameters dialog box appears on the screen:
Picklist for pallet base

alignment
Input field for pallet
name
Input fields for pitch

and number of grid
lines in X and Y
directions
2 Select the base alignment for the pallet from the Pallet System
picklist.
3 In the Pallet Name input field, enter a name for the pallet.
4 Define the grid for the pallet:
• In the Group Columns column, enter the Distance and the
Number of columns.
• In the Group Rows column, enter the Distance and the
Number of rows.
5 Click on OK.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-13

The icon is created and appears in the top left corner of the desk. You
still have the option of defining the size of the icon (➤“How to Define
the Size of an Icon” on page 12-11).
How to Add a Measurement Plan to a Pallet|

The workpieces on a pallet are all similar. You must now select a
measurement plan that suits this type of workpiece and add it to the
pallet, so that Calypso can subsequently perform the CNC run.
To add a measurement plan to the pallet:
1 Highlight the icon of the pallet.
the icon.
3 Select the Add Measurement Plan... command.
The Select Measurement Plan dialog box is opened.
This dialog box contains a list of all measurement plans in the

selected measurement plan folder.
4 Highlight the measurement plan of your choice or look for it, if it is
some other folder.
5 Click on OK to load the measurement plan and close the dialog
box.
The name of the measurement plan is displayed below the pallet.
12-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Measuring Runs for a Pallet

There are two ways of defining the workpieces on the pallet to be
measured in the CNC run:
– Define a loop. In this way, for example, you can measure every
third workpiece on the pallet - take samples, in other words.
– Select individual positions on the pallet with the mouse. This is a
straightforward means of selection and enables you to exclude
specific positions on the pallet before measurement commences,
for example there are positions on the pallet that do not contain
workpieces.
How to Define Measurement Runs for a Pallet with a

Loop
To define the measuring run as a loop:
1 Highlight the icon of the pallet.
the icon.
3 Select the Define Loop... command.
The dialog box for entering loop parameters is opened.
4 Enter the loop parameters:

• Select the Add command from the shortcut menu if there are
no input lines in the dialog box.
• Click in the From: input field and enter the start value for the
loop.
• Click in the To: input field and enter the end value for the loop.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-15

• Click in the Step: input field and enter the step width of the
loop.
5 If you want to define another section for the loop:
• Select the Add command from the shortcut menu.
• A new line is inserted.
• Repeat the definition of the loop in step 4 for the new line.
7 Activate the Loops radio button to prepare the pallet for the CNC
run.
At this point, you should define the CNC parameters (see

➤“Preparing for Measurement” on page 12-17), so that the pallet
can be measured.
How to Define Measurement Runs for a Pallet

Individually
To select individual positions on the pallet:
1 On the pallet, click on each position you want to have measured in
the run.
The color of each position you click changes to green.
2 Activate the User defined radio button to prepare the pallet for
the run.
At this point, you should define the CNC parameters (see

➤“Preparing for Measurement” on page 12-17), so that the pallet
can be measured.
12-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Preparing for Measurement

Once you have defined desks with measurement plans or pallets, you
can prepare for measurement. You can perform all preparations for
measurement or only some – that depends on the privileges you have
assigned to the user who is going to perform measurement as such.
How to View the Position of the Probe Head

In some situations it can be helpful to know the current position of
the probe head. You can view the position expressed in machine
coordinates.
To view the position of the probe head:
1 Click on the Position button or go to the menu bar and select
Tools → Display Position.
The current machine coordinates for the position of the probe
head are displayed in the XXX Position dialog box.
2 Click on Close.
How to Define CNC Parameters

You must define the CNC start parameter before a measurement plan
can be run.
This is the job of the system administrator or of a user to whom the
Define CNC start parameters privilege has been assigned.
To define the CNC start parameter for a measurement plan (or pallet
measurement):
1 Highlight the icon of the measurement plan or the pallet that you
want to run.
2 Open the Measurement Plan Definition dialog box:
• If you want to set parameters for a measurement plan icon,
click on the CNC button.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-17

• If you want to set parameters for a pallet, open the relevant

shortcut menu and select the Define CNC Start Parameters
command.
The Measurement Plan Definition dialog box appears on the
screen.
You will find more information on CNC runs and on this dialog box
in ➤“How to Start a CNC Run” on page 8-8 and in Start
Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Calypso
Online Help.
3 Open the Base alignment picklist and select the base alignment
in which the measurement plan will run.
4 Define the scope (see ➤“Defining the Scope of Measurement” on
page 8-2).
5 Define the other parameters in the Result and CMM groups.
6 Click on OK when you have finished setting the parameters.
The dialog box closes. The parameters are saved along with the
measurement plan and the desk.
How to Define Probe Settings in the Auto-Run

Interface
The dialog boxes for changing and qualifying probes are conveniently
available under the Auto-Run interface. This is the job of the system
administrator or of a user, depending on how the corresponding
privileges have been assigned.
12-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To start an automatic probe change:

– Select Probe → Probe Change → Automatic Probe Changer.
The dialog box for automatic probe changes is opened. For more
information, see ➤“How to Perform an Automatic Probe Change”
on page 7-49.
To change a probe manually:
– Select Probe → Probe Change → Manual.
The dialog box for manual probe changes is opened. For more
information, see ➤“How to Install a Probe” on page 4-11.
To start stylus qualification:
– Select Probe → Stylus Qualification → Manual.
For information on how to qualify a stylus, see ➤“How to Qualify a
Stylus” on page 4-22.
How to Change the Sequence of Measurement Plan

Runs in Desks
The desks of an Auto-Run interface will generally contain several
measurement plans, all of which have to be run. By default, the
measurement plans of a desk are run in the order in which they were
defined. You can, however, change this sequence in accordance with
your needs and preferences.
To define the sequence:
1 Highlight the measurement plans to be performed in a CNC run.
If you want to highlight multiple measurement plans, press and
hold down the Ctrl key and click on the appropriate icons.
2 Click on the Sequence button.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-19

3 The Define Sequence dialog box is opened. All the measurement

plans you highlighted are listed in this box.
The measurement plans are listed in the sequence in which they

are run.
4 To change the sequence:
• Highlight the name of a measurement plan in the list.
• Click on the ArrowUp/ArrowDown buttons to move the
measurement plan to the correct position in the sequence.
• Repeat the process for the other measurement plans, until the
sequence is correct.
5 Click on Reset if you decide you want to restore the original
sequence.
6 Click on OK to accept the sequence as it is.
As soon as you start measuring, the measurement plans are run in
your custom sequence. Calypso retains this sequence until such time
as you define another.
Administrating Auto-Run
One of your functions as system administrator is to set up the Auto-
Run interface and make sure it remains up-to-date.
The tasks involved are summarized in this section.
12-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Save Auto-Run Interfaces

Each Auto-Run interface is saved in a separate file.
To save an Auto-Run interface:
The Select File dialog box is opened.
2 Select the path for saving the file.
3 Enter a file name, complete with an .arn extension.
4 Click on OK.
The Auto-Run interface is saved, but remains open.
How to Rename a Desk

You can rename a desk if the name originally selected is no longer
practical or if you misspelled the name:
1 Make sure that the desk you want to rename is displayed on the
screen.
2 Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link → Rename.
3 Enter the new name for the desk.

4 Click on OK.
The desk is renamed.
How to Delete a Desk

You can delete a desk that you no longer need from the Auto-Run
interface.
To delete a desk:
1 Make sure that you are in the desk you want to delete.
2 Go to the menu bar and select Desk Link → Delete.
3 Click on Yes to delete the desk.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-21

4 Click on OK.
The desk is deleted from the Auto-Run interface.
How to Copy Icons

To copy an icon:
1 Highlight the icon you want to copy.
2 Go to the menu bar and select Edit → Copy.
The icon is copied to the Clipboard.
3 Select the desk into which you want to paste the icon.
4 Go to the menu bar and select Edit → Paste.
The icon is pasted into the desk.
How to Delete an Icon

You can remove icons you no longer need from a desk.
To delete icons:
1 Highlight the icon you want to delete.
2 Go to the menu bar and select Plan Icon → Edit → Delete Icon.
3 Click on Yes to delete the icon.

4 Click on OK.
The icon is removed from the current desk.
12-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Auto-Run for Users
Auto-Run for Users

Your system administrator has already configured the Auto-Run
interface for you. This interface makes it easier for you to run
measurement plans because a lot of the work has been done in
advance – generally, you can start performing measurements right
away.
You will find basic information about the “Automatic Run” interfaces
under ➤“Basics About Auto-Run Interfaces” on page 12-2.
Your User Privileges

The system administrator who configured the Auto-Run interface for
you will be able to tell you what tasks you have to do before or during
measurement.
The scope of tasks you have to perform depends on the privileges
(and obligations) your system administrator has assigned you.
At some point in a session with the Auto-Run interface, you will
probably encounter the message shown below:
It appears when you have attempted to execute a command for

which you do not possess access privileges. Consult your system
administrator if the command in question is one you urgently require.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-23

Preparing a Measurement Start for Auto-Run

The illustration below shows what could be a typical Auto-Run
interface.
Prerequisites The prerequisites that have to be satisfied before you can start a
measurement are as follows:
– Your Auto-Run interface must be loaded (see ➤“How to Load an
Auto-Run Interface” on page 12-24).
– The correct desk must be selected (see ➤“How to Select a
Measuring Configuration” on page 12-25).
– The scope of measurement must be defined (see ➤“How to Define
List of Characteristics in Auto-Run” on page 12-26).
These prerequisites must be satisfied before measurement can be
started.
How to Load an Auto-Run Interface

Each Auto-Run interface is stored in a separate file. You have to load
your Auto-Run interface before you can start measuring. Your system
administrator will tell you which interface is yours.
12-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Auto-Run for Users
To load an interface:
1 Check the name of the current interface.
The name is on the left, below the status bar.
2 Click on the Open button.
Auto-Run always loads a default interface directly after starting, so
Calypso issues the following prompt:
3 If the name of the currently open interface is noname.arn, click

on Open.
4 If a name other than noname.arn appears in the status bar:
• Click on Save and Open.
• Save the original interface. Consult your system administrator if
you encounter difficulties with saving.
The original interface is saved and the Select File to Open dialog
box appears on the screen.
5 Highlight the name of your interface and click on Open.
Your Auto-Run interface is loaded.
How to Select a Measuring Configuration

Your Auto-Run interface might consist of more than one desk. Each
desk displays a configuration of workpieces to be measured. The
arrangement of the icons on the interface must correspond to the
arrangement of the workpieces on the CMM, so you usually have to
select the correct desk at this point.
To select a desk:
1 Make sure that your interface is loaded.
2 Check whether the arrangement of the icons corresponds to that
of the workpieces in the measuring range of the CMM.
3 If you want to select a different configuration, click on the arrow
buttons in the task bar until the configuration you want is
displayed.
The name of the desk is displayed in the picklist box beside the
arrow buttons.
Once you have selected the appropriate desk, the next step is to select
the workpieces to be measured.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-25

How to Define List of Characteristics in Auto-Run

One of the purposes of Auto-Run interfaces is to facilitate consecutive
measurement of multiple workpieces, which are generally already in
position on the CMM table. You have to define which workpieces of a
desk will be measured in a CNC run.
To select workpieces for measurement:
1 Make sure that you have selected the correct desk.
2 If you want to select measurement plans in a desk:
• Click on the icon of each measurement plan to be run on the
workpiece.
• Press and hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one
measurement plan.
A thin black border appears around each icon you select. The
Start button is activated.
NOTE A pallet can only be started on its own. Make sure that only one pallet
hss is selected for measurement.
3 If you want to select a pallet for measurement, highlight the icon

of the pallet in question.
The measurement plans of all the icons you highlight are executed
when you start the CNC run. See ➤“How to Start a Measurement in
the Auto-Run Interface” on page 12-26 for instructions on starting a
CNC run.
How to Start a Measurement in the Auto-Run

Interface
To start a measurement:
1 Click on the Start button.
A green border appears round the selected icons of the
measurement plans. Calypso begins by checking the CNC
parameters.
Calypso issues the following prompt:
2 Make sure that the CMM is ready and click on Yes.

Calypso starts measuring. Two windows are opened: the stop light
window and the default printout.
12-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Auto-Run for Users
If Measurement Fails to Start in the Auto-Run

Interface
An error message is issued if a measurement does not start in the
Auto-Run interface.
– If you have privileges to enter CNC parameters, correct the CNC
parameter settings (see ➤“How to Define CNC Parameters” on
page 12-17). Then restart the measurement.
– If you do not have privileges to enter CNC parameters, notify your
system administrator.
Monitoring Measuring Runs in Auto-Run

A measurement started by means of an Auto-Run interface can take
some time to complete.
While Calypso is measuring the selected workpieces, you can
intervene at any time. Intervention on your part could be necessary if
a collision threatens or if you have to interrupt measurement for some
reason.
You use the stop light window to control the measuring run. If, for
example, this window is hidden behind the Auto-Run interface, you
can use Tools → Stop Light to bring it back to the foreground.
– If you wish to interrupt a measurement run,click on yellow.
– When you wish to resume an interrupted measurement,click on
green.
– If you wish to cancel a measurement,click on red or on the Cancel
button.
You will find more information on the Stop light window in
➤“Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs” on page 8-11.
When a Measurement in Auto-Run is Complete

When all the workpieces have been measured, the default printout
appears on the screen. It lists all the measuring results in the sequence
in which they were computed.
Depending on how the CNC parameters were set, the measuring
results are saved in a custom printout and/or in special files. The
custom printout is displayed on screen – the result files are for
evaluation by other means and are not directly viewable.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 12-27

12-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
13
13 DMIS Import (Option)
.................................................................................................................................
Calypso can import DMIS files and convert them into measurement
plans. To achieve this, a DMIS post processor runs and processes the
DMIS commands.
The DMIS import is an option on Calypso. You can license this
functionality and have it enabled in your system if it would be of use
to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more information.
The sections included in this chapter explain the basics of importing
DMIS measurement plans, and guide you through the procedures
involved.
Basics about DMIS Measurement Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Configuring DMIS Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Importing Measurement Plan from DMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 13- 1

DMIS Import (Option)
Basics about DMIS Measurement Plans

Calypso is able to import a DMIS program and to have it run as a
Calypso measurement plan.
What is DMIS?
DMIS stands for Dimensional Measuring Interface Standard. DMIS is a
programming language used for programming mechanical, laser,
optical and video measuring systems. DMIS is designed to be a
programming language for all or at least most measuring machines.
The vocabulary of DMIS is very large and resembles that of a genuine
programming language: there are language elements for declarations
and definitions of variables, loops, conditional jumps, mathematical
functions, coordinate transformations and of course commands for
the measuring machine control such as positional movements,
probing, geometrical elements, measurements, probe changes,
temperature compensation, etc.
DMIS-compatible measuring machines read the DMIS commands
from an ASCII file and then perform the measurement run.
DMIS and Calypso

DMIS files must be translated to ensure that they can also be used by
measuring machines which are not DMIS-compatible. The translator
tailored to the relevant measuring software is referred to as the post
processor, because it becomes active after the production of the DMIS
file.
The option described here, “Calypso DMIS“ is just such a DMIS post
processor for Calypso.
Which DMIS Commands are Supported?

Not every DMIS command is understood by every measuring machine.
DMIS itself was developed in stages and is available in various
versions. Therefore a characterization file is included in every post
processor, in which the commands supported by the post processor
are listed, and there is optionally also a specification of the supported
version of DMIS.
Requirements for the The DMIS post processor integrated into Calypso can translate DMIS
DMIS program commands of Version 3.0, with certain restrictions.
If the DMIS measuring program has been created taking this
requirement into account, there should not be any implementation
problems.
13-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Characterization file The “characterization file“ for Calypso is located on your system at
the path ..\Calypso\home\om and has the file name
CHARACTERISATIONFILE.
Displaying the Characterization File

You can either display the characterization file directly with a text
editor or by selecting File → Import DMIS and clicking on the Info
card.
In particular, all features are listed here which can be converted by the
post processor into Calypso features.
Special Features of Measurement Plans

Imported from DMIS
DMIS programs and Calypso measurement plans are actually quite
similar. As a result, Calypso measurement plans generated from DMIS
measurement runs have certain special features compared to
“conventional“ Calypso measurement plans.
Run control via input parameters

DMIS is designed sequentially and Calypso is more object-oriented. In
order to allow the sequential structure of the DMIS measurement run
to be represented in Calypso, some parts of the DMIS program are
written into the input parameters of the new Calypso measurement
plan.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 13-3

This mainly involves the commands needed for run control. The input
parameters therefore control the sequence of the run as specified by
the DMIS file. You can also find any variables, jumps or possible loops
here.
The run control which you know from Calypso is, therefore, only
available to a certain extent.
You can display the input parameters by opening the list of
characteristics without highlighting any of the characteristics and then
clicking on the list with the right mouse button. Then select
Parameters in the shortcut menu.
No Clearance Planes
DMIS does not recognize any clearance planes used to define
implicitly the clearance moves in Calypso. In DMIS, all movements are
specified explicitly.
Therefore, when carrying out a CNC start of a measurement plan
generated from DMIS under Navigate-Feature To Feature, you
must never run the start with the setting Automatic. In this case,
select the setting Use Position Points Only.
13-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Saving, Loading and Deleting the Coordinate

System
DMIS always defines only the current coordinate system. The other
coordinate systems are based on the relevant current coordinate
system.
Therefore the iterative alignment in DMIS works in a different way
from that in Calypso. To avoid placing the current coordinate system
into a loop in an unexpected way, it is necessary to save the current
coordinate system in the intermediate memory.
There are DMIS commands to save, load and delete a coordinate
system. These commands are converted into corresponding Calypso
features, which you can find in Calypso in the Utilities section.
NOTE These measurement plan features are intended for the translation of
hss
DMIS programs. They can also be used in other Calypso measurement
plans.
Caution - Risk of collision
hss
! Extreme care is also needed for the subsequent addition of these
features into measurement plans imported from DMIS, because the
coordinate systems are defined in the features at the time of import
and should only be changed there.
Other Special Features

These and other differences not listed here (for example in the
definition of features) are implemented by the post processor so that
a valid Calypso measurement plan is produced.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 13-5

Configuring DMIS Import

You have the option of making various presettings for the DMIS
import. To do so, select File → Import DMIS and click on the card
Config.
NOTE This register card is only intended for special circumstances. For
hss
standard installations, you do not need to do anything here; the
settings are correct.
On this register card, the paths for the language library and the
Calypso messages are displayed on the left-hand side, while the
settings for the import are displayed on the right-hand side.
You can make the following settings:
– Language Library (DLL)
After clicking on Search, you can assign a directory if necessary.
– Calypso Hostname or IP-Address
This is the name or the Internet protocol address of the computer
on which Calypso is running and for which the import function is
waiting.
– Port
Displays the port of the DMIS post processor.
– Directory of Calypso messages
If necessary, you can overwrite the directory in this box directly.
13-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Configuring DMIS Import
– Take GOTOs which are outside MEAS-ENDMES blocks.

This check box is activated by default.
If you deactivate it, no clearance commands will be accepted
during the translation into the Calypso measurement plan (the
movement commands within the features will be retained). The
clearance paths must then be generated by Calypso during the
CNC run itself. The advantage is: if a DMIS measurement run is
designed from the outset to be used only for Calypso, you can
omit the clearance paths when setting up the run.
At the CNC start of a measurement plan generated from DMIS,
you must select the setting Automatic under Navigate-Feature
To Feature.
– Don't ask for error confirmation. Just go on.
Activate this check box if you do not want the DMIS post processor
to ask you whether to continue the process if it discovers errors or
inaccuracies in the DMIS program during the translation process.
You can also check up on the errors in the reports after the import
process.
– Update Calypso grafics view with each feature.
This check box is activated by default.
Deactivate the check box if the CAD window of Calypso is not to
be updated constantly during the translation process. This will save
up to 20% of the reading time.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 13-7

Importing Measurement Plan from DMIS

In order to import a measurement plan from DMIS, you must simply
choose the menu item DMIS Import and select the relevant file.
The procedure for certain parameters depends on your settings for
the DMIS import configuration.
Save measurement plan After the import, you should save the measurement plan immediately,
because at first it is only stored in the main memory of the computer.
During the import, the post processor creates reports, which you can
read and save, if required.
You can start the measurement plan immediately after the import, or
edit the measurement plan and run it later.
How to Import and Start a DMIS Program

With DMIS Import, you can import a DMIS program and convert it
immediately into a measurement plan. If you want to run the
measurement plan immediately after that, you should make certain
preparations first:
– Click on Extras → Workroom → CMM and set up the connection
to the CMM by clicking on Connect.
If you import the DMIS program without connecting Calypso to
the CMM, the probe data can not be taken over.
– Make sure that the probes defined in the DMIS program are
located on the CMM.
If no probe with the same name as the measurement plan exists, a
probe is created during the import. All used styli with the names
used in the DMIS file are allocated to this probe.
You can define and use this probe later in Calypso.
13-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

In order to import a DMIS program:

1 Select File → Import DMIS.
The Import of DMIS Inspection Files to Calypso dialog box
appears.
2 Click on the Select the DMIS File... button.

The standard Windows dialog box for opening files appears on the
screen.
3 Select the desired DMIS file (file name extension “.dmi“) and click
on Open.
The import starts running; you can follow its progress and the
creation of the Calypso measurement plan. A message confirming
the end of the import appears.
NOTE If Calypso is not connected to the CMM, you will be given a message
hss
and can decide whether you want to continue with the import or not.
4 If reports have been created during the import, you can view them
and save them.
5 After a successful import, click on Close.
Calypso is displayed on the screen; the measurement plan that has
just been imported is opened.
6 Select File → Save to save the measurement plan.
7 In the prerequisites phase, click on the symbol Switch to Probe
Qualification Menu and calibrate the probes.
8 Select Prerequisites → Select Probe for this Measurement
Plan..., click in the Measurement Plan Editor Features on the
option For Measurement Plan and choose from the list the probe
that has just been imported.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 13-9

9 Start the CNC run by clicking CNC → CNC Start → CNC Start.
10 Under Navigate-Feature To Feature, select the relevant entry:

• Use Position Points Only: in this way, the automatic
consideration of the clearance planes by Calypso is switched
off. The reason for this is that there are no clearance planes in a
DMIS program: all clearance paths are programmed and
entered directly.
• Automatic: the movement paths are generated by Calypso.
Only select this entry if you have configured the DMIS import so
that no GOTOs are adopted in the measurement plan by the
post processor.
Caution
hss
! If you do not switch off the automatic movement path generation in
spite of the translated movement commands, the movement
commands will be incorrect and there will be a risk of collision.
The imported measurement plan is processed.
13-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Evaluating Reports about the DMIS Import

If a DMIS command can not be processed by the post processor or by
Calypso during the translation, a message is displayed. You must then
decide whether you can ignore the misunderstood instruction in the
Calypso measurement plan or not.
The translation is resumed by clicking OK. You can end the process
with Cancel. A message is displayed as soon as the end of the DMIS
file has been reached.
Displaying reports All problems that occur during the translation are logged. Two
different reports are generated:
– Syntax report
The printout “DMIS file syntax check report“ is produced before
the actual translation. Any possible syntax errors in the DMIS file
are logged here.
If the syntax errors are too serious, the DMIS import will abort. This
printout can be useful for the creator of the DMIS measurement
program for evaluation purposes.
– Import report
The “Calypso Import report“ contains all messages about special
features relating to the measurement plan which have been noted
during the import by the post processor, for example the
impossibility to assign a stylus because of no connection to the
CMM.
The printouts are displayed on the register card Report.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 13-11

Saving reports If you would like to evaluate the printouts at a later stage, you can
save them as a text file (“.txt“). To do so, click on the Save reports
button and select a directory. The file name is preset, but can be
overwritten.
13-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
14
14 Parameter-coded
Measurements (Option)
.................................................................................................................................
In Calypso you can define parameter-coded measurement runs using
PCM, the programming language developed expressly for this
purpose.
This chapter explains how to define variables, set parameters and use
parameterized measurement runs.
On account of the complexity involved, programming in PCM is
suitable for experienced users with basic knowledge of programming
structures (e. g. Pascal or C).
PCM is one of Calypso’s optional features. You can license this option
and have it enabled in your system if the PCM functionality would be
of use to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss sales partner for more
information.
Introduction to PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Variables, Parameters and Formulas in Calypso. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Entering Parameters and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Examples for PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
PCM Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-63
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-1

Parameter-coded Measurements (Option)
Introduction to PCM
Calypso uses the PCM programming language for variable control of
measurement runs. Of course you can use Calypso without PCM, but
PCM offers you a powerful toolset for simplification and automation,
along with part-variant programming and parameter-supported and
interactive control of measurement runs.
What is PCM? PCM is a development system for parameterizing measurement runs.
PCM is short for “parameter-coded measurement”.
PCM enables you to simplify and rationalize measurement runs in
Calypso: You can program measurement plans in such a way that you
can measure various workpiece variants, and you can set parameters
to influence the automatic run of a measurement plan.
PCM has functions for calculating values, for controlling the CMM,
and for interactive input/output dialogs. You can vary the way in
which a measurement plan runs by programming loops and
conditions. In certain situations you can have Calypso generate special
messages.
NOTE A yellow input box in Calypso always contains a parameter or

hss formula.
In Calypso, you are using PCM when you enter a Formula in an input
box for a feature. By so doing, you automatically define a variable and
assign it parameters. The color of the input fields changes, in this case
to yellow. By the same token, when you set a condition in Calypso or
define a loop, you automatically create PCM code.
Once you have familiarized yourself with the syntax, you can employ
the PCM code to enter conditions and loops or other commands
directly, or generate files for import into Calypso.
14-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Using PCM in Calypso – First Steps

You will use PCM primarily to parameterize measurement plans in
Calypso. You are, in fact, using PCM indirectly when you define a
condition or a loop. You also have the option of defining variables of
your own and assigning them parameters or formulas.
The easiest and most reliable way of generating variable
measurement plans is to begin by creating an ordinary measurement
plan with fixed coordinates and values in Calypso in the usual way.
You can then substitute variables for the specific coordinates that vary
from workpiece to workpiece.
The various measurement plans you need derive from the formulas
and parameters you enter for the variables.
Programming with PCM

Over and above parameterization of measurement plans, PCM
provides an extensive programming functionality:
– You can program dialogs that Calypso uses in the course of a CNC
run to query the operator for quantities, so that the figures
supplied in this way can subsequently be used in different ways as
the run progresses.
– You can determine and reuse measured values and system
parameters.
– In the case of conditions or loops, you are not bound to the forms
specified in the dialogs – you can enter them directly in PCM.
– You can issue direct control and motion commands to the CMM.
You can use these functions in many different ways, individually and
in combinations, so these instructions cannot cover all possible
circumstances in detail – remember that PCM is a programming
language, designed for you to use to the best possible effect.
This chapter, therefore, describes the basics of the run structures of
Calypso and the syntax of PCM, tells you how to enter parameters
and formulas in Calypso, and contains a reference library of functions
and commands.
The examples (see ➤“Examples for PCM” on page 14-33)
demonstrate the versatility of PCM and show you how to utilize the
performance of this programming language.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-3

Variable Measurement Plans in PCM

Calypso employs the principle of parameterization so that you can use
a single measurement plan to measure workpieces that are similar but
not identical. This principle is based on the premise that the quantities
that are the same for both workpieces are defined in the
measurement plan in Calypso as fixed quantities; the quantities that
vary from workpiece to workpiece, on the other hand, are defined as
variables.
In this way one and the same measurement plan can be used to
measure and test different workpieces: for example a plate with either
one or two holes – even if the radii or the holes are different. Different
geometries, differences in the number of certain features, the
presence or absence of features – all these can be parameterized.
Parameters for Variables in PCM

Note, however, that a measurement plan with variables cannot be run
unless the variables are assigned specific values. These specific values,
the parameters in other words, have to be known to Calypso: you
define them in the measurement plan before it is run. Instead of the
variables, Calypso then uses the coordinates or values you entered.
14-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Example The two workpieces in the illustration above are different, but similar:
they have some identifying characteristics in common, while others
are unique to each. The first workpiece in the illustration has a central
hole with a radius of 20, while the hole in the second workpiece,
while of the same depth, has a radius of 10 and is off-center. This
workpiece, moreover, has a second hole.
The variables that could be used here are as follows: positions of the
holes (hole1_center, hole2_center), their radii (hole1_radius,
hole2_radius) and the number of holes (number_holes). These
variables have to be assigned values for each workpiece, so that a
measurement plan can be run:
Variables Parameters for Parameters for

workpiece No. 1 workpiece No. 2
Number_holes 1 2
hole1_center point(-40,30,40,0,0,1) point(-20,30,40,0,0,1)
hole2_center any point(-60,30,40,0,0,1)
hole1_radius 20 10
hole2_radius any 10
Set up in this way with only five different parameters, the

measurement plan is able to measure two different workpieces.
Parameters in Parameter Files

The process is even more straightforward when you provide Calypso
with the parameters of the current workpiece or the measurement
plan variant you intend using in the form of a prepared, reusable
ASCII file. All you have to do when a new version of a workpiece is
due for measurement is load a new ASCII file containing the requisite
information.
Another advantage is that ASCII files can be edited independently of
Calypso.
Parameterizing Characteristics with PCM

Characteristics can sometimes be the same despite differences in
features, as is the case, for example, with the diameter of a circle of
given size that only has to be measured at different positions on a
workpiece. Other characteristics can vary as a function of the
parameterized measurement plan.
This, in turn, means that if the value of the characteristic, and not just
the measured values of a given feature, varies from workpiece to
workpiece, you have to parameterize the characteristic as well.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-5

You do this by defining a variable for the characteristic in question

and assigning it the corresponding value.
Parameter Files for Measurement Plans

The advanced way of setting up variable measurement plans is to use
parameter files. A parameter file contains the set of value
assignments for the variables in a measurement plan.
When you parameterize fixed defining aspects of a workpiece you are
in a position to measure different workpieces with a single
measurement plan: all you have to do is enter different parameters,
either directly in Calypso or by specifying and loading a parameter
file.
You can create different parameter files for a particular measurement
plan and load whichever file you need for a given workpiece and the
aspects you want to measure. You need a dedicated parameter file
per workpiece.
*.para
Workpiece1.para
Measurement
*.para
Plan
Workpiece2.para
*.para
Workpiece3.para
14-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

There are two ways of creating a parameter file – you can save the
parameters set in a measurement plan, or you can use an ASCII editor
to enter the parameters directly. If you want to use this second
method, you need experience with measurement plans and a
thorough knowledge of the PCM syntax. Like the programming
languages Basic, C, Fortran and so on, PCM uses a functional syntax
(see ➤“PCM Syntax” on page 14-47).
When you create a parameter file it is important to remember that the
filename extension has to be “.para”, so that Calypso can recognize it
as a parameter file.
Conditions and Parameters for the Run

Structure of Calypso
After the CNC start, Calypso runs the measurement plan. PCM
commands and parameter assignments come into effect at a very
wide variety of points.
– You can define “input and output parameters” for each feature
and each characteristic, and for the measurement plan as a whole.
This means that you can enter PCM commands when these
elements are defined.
The “input parameters” are processed before the element is run,
the “output parameters” are processed after the run.
– You also have the opportunity of setting “start parameters” once
or loading a file before the measurement plan is run.
– You can set a condition and a loop for each characteristic.
– You can enter “input and output parameters” for each condition
and each loop.
Utilizing these Calypso functions in this way, therefore, you can
construct complex, nested structures.
Wherever you set input parameters, output parameters or start
parameters, moreover, you can program conditions and queries
directly with PCM.
Sequence of measurement plan Processing in PCM

The sequence adopted by Calypso to process the data is as follows:
1 Calypso begins by processing the commands in the start
parameters.
2 The input parameters are evaluated before the measurement plan
is run; the output parameters are evaluated when the run
completes.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-7

3 Calypso checks each characteristic in succession, in the order in

which they appear in the list of characteristics. The condition and
the loop are processed first (depending on the order in which they
were entered) followed by the input parameters of the
characteristic. Once the characteristic has been determined, its
output parameters are evaluated.
4 Before a feature defined for a characteristic is measured, its input
parameters are evaluated. The feature’s output parameters are
evaluated when measurement completes.
5 If input or output parameters are set for a condition or loop, the
input parameters are evaluated before the condition is checked or
the loop run. The output parameters are evaluated after the
element referenced by the condition or loop.
If the condition results in a stop, the output parameters are not
evaluated.
You might find it useful to visualize the input and output parameters
as “parentheses” bracketing the objects in question.
14-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Variables, Parameters and Formulas in Calypso
Variables, Parameters and Formulas in

Calypso
When you want to run variable measurement plans for different
workpieces in Calypso, you have to use variables instead of absolute
values to describe the workpiece.
What are Variables?

Variables, by definition, are quantities that can vary. In Calypso and in
PCM all defining aspects required in descriptions of workpieces or
runs in measurement plans can be characterized as variables.
The variables are stored “locally” together with the element (feature,
characteristic, condition, loop) for which they were defined.
The assigned values, the parameters in other words, are stored
centrally for the entire measurement plan.
Types of variables PCM recognizes four types of variable: number, point, vector and
string. Each variable has a name consisting of alphanumeric
characters (without blanks; first character is no number), and different
variables have different names.
Examples: radius_1, set-down point, message_354
You are not allowed to use reserved names, in other words strings
that are required in the PCM syntax: “X”, “Y”, “Z”, the names of
functions and commands, and so on.
Arrays Groups of variables are called arrays. The only difference in the names
of variables in an array is the array index. Example:
hugo[1], hugo[2], hugo[3], hugo[4]
In this case, “hugo“ is an array with four variables.
What are Parameters?

Parameters are specific values for variables. When variables are used
in a measurement plan instead of fixed numbers or texts, you can vary
the measurement plan by assigning certain fixed values (parameters)
to the individual variables.
You assign values either by entering them directly or by means of
statements in a file. Use the following syntax:
Variable_name=value
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-9

You can enter the value using one of the following formats:
Variable type Format for values (example)

number -3.141529
vector vector(10,12,0)
point point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
string “circle”
NOTE The last three components of a variable of the “point” type represent
hss the coordinates of a normalized vector. This means that the root of
the sum of the three squares (= the length of the vector) must always
be “1”.
Value Assignments and Variable Definitions

It follows that the PCM commands listed below are value
assignments:
– P1=10
– hugo=vector(10,20,30)
– hugo_1=point(10.1,20.5,30.02,0,0,1)
– text_1=“This is a text in the text_1 variable”
A value assignment also defines the variable and makes it known to
Calypso. There are no explicit variable definitions (constructors) in
PCM.
Variables in the arrays can be defined either individually “one by one“
or in a loop instruction. Example:
– hugo[1] = point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
hugo[2] = point(-12,12.5,0,0,0,1)
hugo[3] = point(-14,12.5,0,0,0,1)
hugo[4] = point(-16,12.5,0,0,0,1)
Here, “hugo“ has been defined as an array consisting of four
variables of type point.
Formulas and Functions in PCM

As well as using individual variables in measurement plans, you also
have the options of using functions of variables and formulas with
variables.
14-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Return Values
The return value is an important function of a variable: the individual
parts of a parameter have to be “addressed” so that you can work
with them.
The return values of variables of the “point” type are defined as
follows:
Function Return value

variable_name.x x value of the “point” variable
variable_name.y y value of the “point” variable
variable_name.z z value of the “point” variable
variable_name.nx x value of the normal vector of the “point”
variable
variable_name.ny y value of the normal vector of the “point”
variable
variable_name.nz z value of the normal vector of the “point”
variable
You can access variables of the “vector” type as follows:

variable_name.x x value of the “vector” variable
variable_name.y y value of the “vector” variable
variable_name.z z value of the “vector” variable
Arithmetic Operators and Functions

The most important operators and functions with variables are:
– Arithmetic operators:
+,–,*,/
– Comparative operators (used in conditions and loops):
<,>,==, <>, <=, >=
– Mathematical and angle functions:
sqrt, squared, abs, exp, int, ln, log, mod, round, sign,
sin, cos, tan, arcsin, arccos, arctan, arctan2
– Functions for determining values (query):
getNominal, getActual
– Character string functions:
asc, chr, format, inStr, len, mid, strElement, val
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-11

There are also a number of functions for input and output, for run
control and for CMM movement commands (see ➤“PCM Quick
Reference” on page 14-47).
Programming with PCM

You can vary the way in which the measurement plan runs by setting
conditions and loops.
– A characteristic or feature with a condition is not executed unless
the condition is satisfied. The characteristic is either calculated or
not calculated depending on the truth value returned for the
condition, which means that the measurement plan run either
proceeds or is interrupted.
– A loop around a characteristic or a feature results in the
characteristic or feature being run repeatedly, possibly with
changed variables for each run.
You trigger these functions by selecting Condition or Loop in the
shortcut menu and entering the settings for the condition or loop, as
applicable (see ➤“Setting Conditions” on page 14-19 and
➤“Inserting Loops in PCM” on page 14-22).
Programming Conditions and Loops

Over and above the options at your disposal in Calypso, you can use
PCM to insert conditions and loops explicitly in parameter files or in
the input and output parameters of features or characteristics.
In this way you can utilize conditions and loops much more
comprehensively – you are in control of the measurement run. During
the CNC run, the truth values of the conditions are determined, the
loop index is incremented automatically and the definitions, the value
allocations and the commands are processed accordingly.
The following control elements are available for both the input and
output parameters:
– The Simple Operation (if - endif)
– The Condition with Alternative (if - else)
– The Defined Loop (for - next)
– The Conditional Loop (repeat - until)
The Simple Condition

The syntax of the simple condition is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION
endif
14-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Meaning:
– If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION is processed.
– If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is not processed.
The DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions or
other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as
separators.
The Condition with Alternative

The syntax of the condition with alternative is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION1
else
DEFINITION2
endif
Meaning:
– If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed.
– If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed.
DEFINITION1 and DEFINITION2 can be formulas, value assignments,
functions or other conditions or loops of your choice, always with line
breaks as separators.
Example In the example below the variable “result” is assigned the diameter of
circle circle_1. A message corresponding to this quantity is then
output on the screen:
Result=getActual(“Circle_1”).diameter
if result>10 then
message(“Diameter circle_1 is greater than 10”)
else
if result<10 then
message(“Diameter circle_1 is less than 10”)
endif
endif
The Defined Loop

In the case of the defined loop, the number of loops is defined
unequivocally. The syntax of the defined loop is as follows:
for index=start to end [step]
DEFINITION
next index
The following must be inserted:
– for index – the name of the loop variables (random),
– for start, end and step – full figures,
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-13

– for DEFINITION – random formulas, value assignments, functions or

separators.
Meaning: the functions or commands under DEFINITION are
processed (end - start + 1)/step times, whereby “step“ is set to 1 if no
other specification is made. At the same time, the specific value for
index is always entered in DEFINITION: at first start, then start+step,
start+2*step etc. up to end. With next i, the loop index is
incremented by step each time.
Example for i=1 to 4
message(i,". step: ",step[i])
next i
The Conditional Loop

In the case of the conditional loop, the number of runs depends on
the fulfillment of a condition, whereby the condition is only tested
after the first run. Therefore a conditional loop must run at least once.
The syntax of the conditional loop is as follows:
repeat DEFINITION until CONDITION
Meaning:
– DEFINITION IS PROCESSED. Then CONDITION is tested.
– If CONDITION is fulfilled, the loop is ended.
– If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is processed again and
CONDITION is tested again.
The CONDITION can be set up as a logical combination of several
subconditions.
separators.
Caution
hss
! Please note that infinite repetitions are possible with the conditional
loop, if the condition is never fulfilled.
14-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Entering Parameters and Formulas

In Calypso you can use parameter-coded measurement runs as
follows:
– You can enter parameters for the variables of a measurement plan
– You can enter formulas directly
– You can test the value of a PCM expression
– You can set a condition for the entire measurement plan and for
each individual characteristic
– You can place a loop around the entire measurement plan and
around each individual characteristic to force repeated runs
– You can enter input and output functions for features,
characteristics, conditions and loops
– You can use the Point Generator to read in the points of a curve or
define them with a mathematical expression.
You enter parameters for a measurement plan in the Settings
window. In so doing you assign formulas or values to existing or
newly defined variables.
You can enter the parameters directly in the window or you can load
them from a parameter file.
You can create a parameter file by saving the parameters of a
measurement plan or explicitly by generating the file with an ASCII
editor of your choice.
NOTE In PCM and in the formula, the decimal separator is always a period
hss (“.”; example: “3.5 + 4.8”, and not: “3,5 + 4,8”).
The comma is used as the separator within value assignments
(example: Location = point(3.5, 4.5, 1.5, 0, 0, 1)).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-15

How to Enter Parameters for a Measurement

Plan Directly
To enter parameters for a measurement plan directly:
1 Select CNC → Measurement Plan Functions → Parameter.
The Parameter Input dialog box opens.
2 Click in the (white) input box and start defining the parameter:
• Start with the variable name, followed by “=”.
• Proceed with the definition. Please observe the syntax described
in ➤“Arithmetic Operators and Functions” on page 14-11 and
the parameter syntax (see ➤“Example for PCM: ASCII
Parameter File” on page 14-46).
3 Click on OK.
The dialog box closes. The parameter is now included in the list of all
available parameters. (this dialog box is fully described in Formula in
the Calypso Online Help).
How to Save the Measurement Plan Parameters in a

File
Once parameters have been defined in a measurement plan, you can
save them in a file. In this way they are readily available for
subsequent use in other measurement plans.
To save the measurement plan parameters in a file:
1 Select CNC → Measurement Plan Functions → Parameter.
The Parameter Input dialog box opens.
2 Use Shift + click to select the parameters you want to save in the
file.
14-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Click on the diskette icon.

The Save: Select Parameter File dialog box opens.
4 Enter the name of the file (do not omit the “.para” extension),
select a directory and click Save.
The variables and parameters you selected are saved in the file.
How to Load Measurement Plan Parameters Saved

Beforehand
You can integrate parameters saved in a parameter file (file name
“*.para”) into your current measurement plan.
To open a *.para file:
1 Check that the Parameter Input dialog box is open (CNC →
Measurement Plan Functions → Parameter).
2 Click on the icon for opening a file.
The Open: Select Parameter File dialog box opens.
3 Select the appropriate file and click Open.
The parameters in the file are listed in the input window and are
available for your current measurement plan.
How to Enter Formulas

By entering formulas you can
– calculate function values of measurement results (sin, cos...)
– use operators to link measurement results with constants
– use operators to interlink multiple measurement results.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from
which you called formula input.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-17

To define a formula:
1 Open the definition template for the feature in which you want to
assign the formula to an input box.
2 Right-click in the input box whose value you want to calculate with
the formula, hold down the mouse button and select the Formula
command from the shortcut menu.
The dialog box shown below is opened:
3 In the box labeled Formula, enter the formula, making sure your
entry complies with the PCM syntax rules (see ➤“Arithmetic
Operators and Functions” on page 14-11).
4 Click on the Function button to open a list of all operators,
functions and commands.
Select the element of your choice from this list and double-click it
to copy it to the formula input box.
5 To insert a parameter into the formula: click on the Settings
button.
Double-click on the parameter of your choice in the Parameters
List to insert it into the formula.
6 To insert a loop variable into the formula, click on the Loop
button.
LOOP1 appears in the input box.
7 Click on Compute if you want to test your settings by computing
the formula's return value.
8 Click OK to confirm your settings and terminate formula input.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from
which you called formula input. Note that the color of this field has
changed to yellow.
14-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Setting Conditions
You can link computation of characteristics to conditions that enable
Calypso to execute jumps in the CNC run in accordance with the
NOTE A basic knowledge of programming structures will help you

hss understand the following.
– You can choose whether to have the condition queries before or

after the characteristic is computed. Calypso ascertains whether
the condition is true or false.
– You also have the option of linking the entire measurement plan to
a condition.
NOTE In addition to the conditions for characteristics or the measurement

hss plan, PCM also enables you to enter simple conditions or conditions
with alternative directly in the input/output parameters (see
➤“Programming Conditions and Loops” on page 14-12).
If the condition is queried before calculation, Calypso either computes

the characteristic and continues or executes the instruction linked to
compliance with the condition. This instruction can be either of the
two stated below:
– cancel the automatic measurement run
– do not compute the characteristic and continue.
If the condition is queried after calculation, the only alternatives are:
– cancel the automatic measurement run
– continue.
If a loop has been defined around the characteristic, processing
depends on what was defined first.
How to Link a Condition to a Characteristic

To set a condition for a characteristic:
1 Open the list of characteristics in the measurement plan area.
2 Highlight the characteristic for which you want to set a condition.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-19

3 Right-click and select Condition from the shortcut menu.

The Dialog Box for Conditions dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Set the condition first:

• Right-click in the yellow input box to open the shortcut menu.
• Select Formula.
The Formula dialog box appears on the screen.
• Enter the condition in the Formula dialog box and click OK to
confirm your entry (see ➤“How to Enter Formulas” on
page 14-17).
NOTE The only possible return values for the condition are “true” and
hss “false”. Use the comparison operators (see ➤“Arithmetic and
Comparative Operators in PCM” on page 14-49) for this purpose.
You can test the return values of comparison operators by clicking on
Compute in the Formula dialog box.
The condition is displayed in the input box.

5 If you wish to set the presettings or postsettings, click on the
Settings button and enter the settings.
14-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

6 If you do not want the condition to be queried until after the

characteristic has been computed, click on the box labeled Post
condition. The characteristic box is now right at the top of the
window.
7 If you want the automatic run canceled or measurement of the

feature to be omitted if the condition is true (satisfied): make sure
that the Yes button is beside the End program box. If it is not,
you can move it there by clicking the Yes button.
8 If you want the automatic run canceled or measurement of the
feature to be omitted if the condition is false (not satisfied): make
sure that the No button is beside the End program box. If it is
not, you can move it there by clicking the No button.
9 Click OK to confirm and terminate definition of the condition.
The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic
measurement run.
How to Link the Entire Measurement Plan to a

Condition
You can also link the entire measurement plan to a condition. In this
case the measurement plan is executed or not, depending on the
truth value of the condition.
To set a condition for the measurement plan:
1 Open the list of characteristics and make sure that no
characteristics are highlighted.
2 Right-click and select and select Condition in the popup menu.
The Condition window will appear on the screen (this dialog box is
fully described in Formula in the Calypso Online Help).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-21

3 Set the condition first: use the yellow input box to open the
Formula window (see ➤“How to Enter Formulas” on page 14-17)
and enter the condition. Click OK to confirm this entry and close
the window.
NOTE The only possible return values for the condition are “true” and
hss “false”. Use the comparison operators (see ➤“Arithmetic and
Comparative Operators in PCM” on page 14-49) for this purpose.
The condition is displayed in the input box.

4 If you want to set input or output parameters, click on the
Settings button and enter the parameters.
5 If you do not want the condition to be queried until after the
characteristic has been computed, click on the box labeled Post
condition. The characteristic box is now right at the top of the
window.
6 If you want the measurement plan run canceled if the condition is
true (satisfied): make sure that the Yes button is beside the End
program box. If it is not, click on the Yes button.
If you want the measurement plan run canceled if the condition is
false (not satisfied): make sure that the No button is beside the
End program box. If it is not, you can move it there by clicking the
No button.
7 Click OK to confirm and terminate definition of the condition.
The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic
measurement run.
Inserting Loops in PCM

If you place a loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement
plan, the characteristic or measurement plan is processed several
times in succession.
NOTE This section is intended for advanced users familiar with the basics of
hss programming structures.
Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or

similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for
example, with a perforated plate). You can also use loops when you
configure the base alignment.
A loop is defined by a Start Index, an End Index, and an Increment.
Each time the loop repeats the increment is increased by the defined
value and compared with the end value. The loop is repeated until the
end value is greater than or equal to the increment.
14-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

You can define multiple cycle levels in a loop (nested loop), so you can
process two-dimensional or three-dimensional repetitions. In each of
these levels a dedicated loop counter variable, the loop index, is
incremented in steps.
The loop variables have fixed names and in each loop they are called
“LOOP1” to “LOOP4”. In the characteristic and the associated
features you can use these loop variables in formulas to vary the way
in which the characteristic is processed.
NOTE Note that you cannot enter loops directly in the input/output
hss parameters with PCM.
If a condition is also linked to the characteristic, the sequence of

processing depends on what was defined first.
How to Place Loops around Features

To place a loop around a characteristic or the measurement plan:
1 Open the list of characteristics in the measurement plan area.
2 Highlight the characteristic you want to loop.
If you are going to place a loop around the entire measurement
plan, make sure that none of its characteristics are highlighted.
3 Right-click and hold down the mouse button. Select Loop from
the shortcut menu and release the mouse button.
The Loop Interface dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Click Insert to insert a new loop level in the dialog box.
5 Set the values for Start, End and Step by clicking the
corresponding input boxes and typing in the values.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-23

6 If necessary, repeat steps 4 and 5 to insert another loop level.

Under Nest Level select a different type of bracket for each level
to nest the loops.
There are four types of bracket available.
7 Click on the Settings button to set input and output parameters
for the loop.
8 Perform the steps described in ➤“Entering Parameters and
Formulas” on page 14-15 and click on OK to confirm and
terminate your entry.
This returns you to the Loop Interface window.
NOTE You can define only one break condition per loop.
hss
9 If necessary, enter a break condition in the box provided for the
purpose.
10 Click OK to save the loop and close the window.
You have now defined the loop. It will be executed in the next CNC
run.
To ensure that “something happens” each time the loop is run, you
have to use the loop variables LOOPi (i = 1,...,4) in the characteristic
and / or in the features to vary the measurement run.
For example, you could multiply the loop variable with a constant
offset in order to increase an X value step by step.
How to Include Features in Loops

Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or
similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for
example, with a perforated plate).
If you defined a loop by a characteristic, the data of the associated
feature have to be varied in each loop run in order to ensure that the
loop can be executed correctly.
You accomplish this by using the loop variables in the definition of the
feature, or incorporating a pattern into the feature.
To incorporate a pattern into a feature:
1 Open the list of features.
2 Double-click on the name of the feature in question.
The feature template is opened.
14-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 In the Nominal Definition picklist, select the Pattern command.

The Selection (Pattern) dialog box opens.
4 Activate the New radio button and check the Edit check box.
5 Select the way in which you want to specify the pattern (Polar
Pattern Offset, 1-D Linear Pattern, 2-D Linear Pattern,
Rotational Pattern (use for scallop)).
6 Click OK to confirm your choice.
The dialog box for defining the pattern of your choice appears on
the screen.
7 Enter the values for the pattern. Make sure that the value of
Actual Number corresponds to the number of loop runs resulting
from the loop placed around the characteristic.
8 Click OK to confirm and close the window.
9 Click OK to close the feature template.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-25

The loop is executed as soon as you start an automatic measurement

run (see ➤“Running a Measurement Plan” on page 8-1).
Use of Loops in Alignment according to RPS

You can place a loop around a base alignment. If you do this, the
alignment is repeated for the defined number of loop repetitions –
unless the abortion condition is satisfied beforehand.
RPS alignment, for example, works only with the aid of a loop. The
effect of this loop is to repeat alignment until it achieves your user-
defined fit.
The illustration below shows the definition of the loop.
The abortion condition “baseSystem().valueA<0.1“ (for syntax, see

➤“baseSystem (Base Alignment)” on page 14-57) means that once
measuring has commenced, the measuring process will continue until
the Best Fit Value valueA is less than 0.1.
Points to Note about Nest Level

The form of brackets in the Nest Level box defines the nesting of
loops: you set these brackets when you define the loop in the Loop
window. Nested loops required different brackets for each level.
You can use round brackets “(” and “)” for loop1, and angle brackets
“<” and “>” for loop 2. Calypso has four types of bracket for four
loop levels.
14-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The type of bracket can also be important for non-nested loops,

however. You have to use brackets of different types in independently
defined loops if:
– you align two or more coordinate systems iteratively and
– features with the same name are used in this context.
The example below is based on the assumption that a part alignment
was created after RPS alignment (see ➤“How to Use an Alternative
Alignment Method” on page 4-55).
Example If, for example, coordinate system A uses the feature called “3-d
straight _1” and coordinate system B also uses a feature of this name,
“3-d straight_1” is not measured again when coordinate system B is
measured if you used the same type of brackets whey you defined the
two iterations in the Loop window. Calypso assumes that the straight
has already been measured and that it does not have to be measured
again.
You have to use brackets of a different type to ensure that the “3-d
straight_1” is measured again when coordinate system B is aligned.
You could do this, for example, by selecting round brackets “(” and
“)” in loop 1 and angle brackets “<” and “>” in loop 2.
Points to Note about Multiple Measurements

If you want to use a loop to measure one and the same feature more
than once or repeat probings, you must use the LOOP1 loop variable
in the definition template of the feature.
Calypso remembers that it has already measured a feature and simply
recalls the measured value instead of probing for a second time.
Under these circumstances, however, this does not produce the
desired effect.
You can use a workaround to avoid this difficulty. In the nominal
definition insert a formula in which you add the product 0*LOOP1 (to
the X value, for example). This means that the X value remains the
same every time the loop is run, but Calypso perceives each iteration
as a new calculation and a new probing.
Basics about Input and Output Parameters in

PCM
Input and output parameters can be set for each characteristic and
feature, and for each condition and loop. The settings in the input
and output parameters can be used to set temporary variables, print
values in the default printout, and trigger functions.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-27

Input and output parameters are defined in the Settings window.
You can define input and output parameters for the following objects
in Calypso:
– entire measurement plan,
– a characteristic,
– a feature,
– a condition,
– a loop.
The entire PCM syntax is at your disposal for defining input and
output parameters.
You will find more information on the Settings dialog box in in the
Notes on Evaluating Input and Output Parameters

The commands and value assignments you enter as input parameters
are evaluated before the object in question is executed or evaluated.
The commands and value assignments you enter as output
parameters are evaluated after the object in question has been
executed or evaluated.
14-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

An object, in turn, can consist of two or more other objects or be

superior to these lower-order objects, so this means that under certain
circumstances the input parameters and then the output parameters
of the lower-order objects might be evaluated first.
If the object in question is a condition and the condition leads to
omission of the characteristic or cancellation of the CNC run, the
output parameters of the condition are not evaluated.
How to Enter Input and Output Parameters

In Calypso you can set input and output parameters for each feature
and each characteristic, and for each condition or loop and for the
entire measurement plan. To do so, use the Settings window.
To enter input and output parameters:
1 To open the window for the entire measurement plan:
• Open the list of characteristics and make sure that no
characteristics are highlighted.
• Right-click and select Parameter from the shortcut menu.
2 To open the settings for a specific characteristic:
• Highlight the characteristic in the list of characteristics.
3 To open the settings for a specific feature:
• Highlight the feature in the list of features.
4 To open the window for a condition:
• In the Condition window, click on Settings.
5 To open the window for a loop:
• In the Loop window, click on Settings.
6 Enter the input parameters in the box at the top and the output
parameters in the box at the bottom.
7 Click on OK.
The dialog box closes and your settings are accepted.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-29

Basics about the Point Generator

The point generator has the same characteristics as a loop. You can
enter a variable in each input box by right-clicking, opening the
Formula window and selecting the variable:
You will find more information on this dialog box in Points

Generator in the Calypso Online Help.
– You can use the point generator to define a curve if the
mathematical description of the curve is known.
– You can use the point generator to load parameter values into a
curve.
In this process, another point on the curve is defined in each
successive step.
How to Work with the Point Generator

You can define a curve with the aid of a point generator. The point
generator acts like a loop in which another point on the curve is
defined in each successive step. The loop variable used by the point
generator is “index”.
14-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

1 In the definition template of the curve, select Nominal Definition

and then select the Parameter Data function.
2 The Points Generator dialog box will appear.
3 Enter the Start Index, the End Index and the Increment.
Each input box also accepts a formula. If you want to enter a
formula, right-click in the box, select Formula from the shortcut
menu and use the Formula Interface window to enter the formula.
4 Enter the point to be defined in the step in the Point box.
• If the mathematical description of the curve is known, you can
enter it here in the form of a formula.
• If the points are stored in a file, you can enter the name of the
file here and import the points.
Right-click in the box, select Formula from the shortcut menu
and use the Formula Interface window to enter the formula or
the statement.
5 You can also enter an optional comment indicating the nature of
the curve.
This comment appears only in Calypso’s table file. You can activate
output to the table file by selecting Prerequisites → Results to
File in the Results to File dialog box.
6 Click OK to close the Point Generator window.
You have now defined the nominals of the curve.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-31

How to Test a PCM Printout

You can test a PCM printout in order to ascertain whether the results
are in line with your expectations or whether the PCM printout
requires improvement.
To test a PCM printout:
1 Make sure that the Settings window is open with the PCM
printout.
Caution
hss
! Note that movement commands are executed by the CMM and that
collisions could result. Move the CMM slowly and stop in good time if
necessary.
2 Highlight the PCM printout in question and right-click.

3 Select Compute from the shortcut menu.
The highlighted printout is computed or executed on the basis of
the currently valid values of the variables.
If an error is encountered or parameters for variables have not been
defined, messages to this effect are issued.
14-32 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM
Examples for PCM

The examples below illustrate the versatility at your disposal using
PCM with Calypso.
– Using Variables
– Condition with alternative
– Principle of parameterization
– Loading parameter values into a curve
– Defining curve using cosine function
– Rechecking characteristic after tolerance excursion
– Parameterizing coordinate system
– Loading a PCM file via dialog
– Defining loop with linear offset
– Nested loop for field (array)
– Parts family and variant control
– ASCII parameter file
Example for PCM: Using Variables

This example shows how to define variables, how to access them, and
how to use them in computations or other operations.
– The measurement plan contains the following variables:
• P1=10
• hugo=vector(10,20,30)
• hugo_1=point(10.1,20.5,30.02,0,0,1)
• text_1=“This is a text in the text_1 variable”
– Parameter accesses to the vector hugo:
• hugo.x => return value is 10
• hugo.y => return value is 20
• hugo.z => return value is 30
– Parameter accesses to the point hugo_1:
• hugo_1.x => return value is 10.1
• hugo_1.y => return value is 20.5
• hugo_1.z => return value is 30.02
• hugo_1.nx => return value is 0
• hugo_1.ny => return value is 0
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-33

• hugo_1.nz => return value is 1

– Examples for calculations with variables:
• Pnew = P1 *2. The return value is 20
• Pnew = (hugo.x–hugo_1.z)/2. The return value is –10.01
• r=type051_n0.x/2
• zdelta=(r1-r)/tanphi
• norm=(nx4*nx4)+(ny4*ny4)
– Examples for output in the default printout:
NOTE The Print command is not executed unless you have activated the Test
hss printout check box in CNC → Measurement Plan Functions →
PCM Test settings.
• print(“Radius_1 has the value: ”,Radius_1)

Calypso outputs the following string (example):
Radius_1 has the value: 26.2655
• print(“r1 = ”,r1,“, r = ”,r,“,tanphi = ”,tanphi)
Calypso outputs the following string (example):
r1= 23.5, r = 46, tanphi = 0.7874
Example for PCM: Condition with

Alternative
You can enter conditions with alternatives (IF - ELSE) in the input and
output parameters.
The syntax is:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION1
else
DEFINITION2
endif
Meaning: If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed; if not
satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed.
functions or other conditions of your choice, always with line breaks
as separators.
The example below shows how this syntax is used:
message(“Test if with PCM”)
P1 = 1
message(“Value is:” ,P1)
//----------------------------------------------------------
14-34 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM
if P1 == 1 then
message(“is equal. Value was:” ,P1)
endif
if P1 < 1 then
message(“is less than 1: value was:” ,P1)
else
if P1 > 1 then
if P1 > 5 then
message(“is greater than 5: value was:” ,P1)
endif
message(“is greater than 1: value was:” ,P1)
endif
endif
//---------------------------------------------------------
test = point(1,2,3,0,0,1)
message(“X” ,test.x, “Y”,test.y, “Z”,test.z, “nx”,test.nx, “ny”
,test.ny, “nz” ,test.nz)
if test.x == 1 then message(“X value is:” ,test.x)
endif
Example for PCM: Principle of

Parameterization
The example below illustrates the principle of parameterization:
1 You begin by compiling an ordinary measurement plan:
• Take a perforated plate, define the base alignment at the top
left front and take two probings in -Z.
• For the two probing points “point_A” and “point_B”, define
the two corresponding features “Z-value_A” and “Z-value_B”.
2 Define the variables so that the positions of the probing points can
be parameterized:
• Select CNC → Measurement Plan Functions → Parameter,
and enter the following:
X_value_point_A = 10
Y_value_point_A = 25
Z_value_point_A = 0
X_value_point_B = 30
Y_value_point_B = 40
Z_value_point_B = 0
• Click on OK to terminate input.

The positions of probing points “point_A” and “point_B” can now
be parameterized.
3 You do this by substituting variables for the fixed X, Y and Z
coordinates:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-35

• Open probing point “point_A”, click in the input field for the X
value and select Formula from the shortcut menu.
• Click on Settings.
The variables you defined beforehand are listed.
• Click on X_value_point_A.
Instead of X the measurement plan now contains a variable
with 10 as its parameter value.
• Repeat the entire procedure for the Y and Z values of A.
Parameters have now been substituted for the fixed X, Y and Z
values of probing point “point_A”.
• Proceed in precisely the same way to substitute parameters for
the fixed X, Y and Z values of probing point “point_B”.
4 Run the measurement plan.
The CMM moves to the coordinates.
If you now assign other parameters to the variables
X_value_point_A = 18
Y_value_point_A = 37
Z_value_point_A = 0
X_value_point_B = 44
Y_value_point_B = 23
Z_value_point_B = 5
and restart the measurement plan, the CMM will move to the new
coordinates.
14-36 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM
Example for PCM: Loading Parameter Values

into a Curve
This example illustrates how to generate a curve from 12 individual
points, using the point generator.
1 Create the following parameter file:
type103[1]=point(-65.386, -46.674, 139.666, -0.019, -0.022, 1.0)
type103[2]=point(-81.733, -58.343, 139.007, -0.026, -0.028, 0.999)
type103[3]=point(-98.08, -70.011, 138.154, -0.034, -0.033, 0.999)
type103[4]=point(-114.426, -81.68, 137.101, -0.043, -0.039, 0.998)
type103[5]=point(-130.773, -93.348, 135.821, -0.053, -0.046, 0.998)
type103[6]=point(-147.12, -105.017, 134.29, -0.063, -0.054, 0.997)
type103[7]=point(-163.466, -116.685, 132.499, -0.073, -0.061, 0.995)
type103[8]=point(-179.813, -128.354, 130.44, -0.084, -0.069, 0.994)
type103[9]=point(-196.159, -140.023, 128.113, -0.094, -0.077, 0.993)
type103[10]=point(-216.593, -154.608, 124.829, -0.107, -0.087, 0.99)
type103[11]=point(-220.679, -157.525, 124.122, -0.109, -0.089, 0.99)
type103[12]=point(-224.766, -160.442, 123.4, -0.112, -0.092, 0.99)
These lines define the 12 points from which the curve will be
generated.
• If you want to include a comment for each curve point, add the
following lines to the parameter file:
name103[1] = “type103_n1_p1”
name103[2] = “type103_n2_p2”
name103[3] = “type103_n3_p3”
name103[4] = “type103_n4_p4”
name103[5] = “type103_n5_p5”
name103[6] = “type103_n6_p6”
name103[7] = “type103_n7_p7”
name103[8] = “type103_n8_p8”
name103[9] = “type103_n9_p9”
name103[10] = “type103_n10_p10”
name103[11] = “type103_n11_p11”
name103[12] = “type103_n12_p12”
• You must also open the Point Generator dialog box (see
below) and define the variable name103[index] in the
Comment box.
2 Open the “Curve” feature definition template.
3 Go to Nominal Definition and select Parameter Data.
The Point Generator dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Enter the following values in the Point Generator dialog box:
• Start Index = 1
• End Index = 12
• Increment = 1
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-37

5 Click on the Point input field and use the shortcut menu to open
the Formula dialog box.
6 Enter the following variable name:
type103[index]
You have now entered a changeable variable name. The point
generator replaces “[index]” with the current value of the loop
counter in each step, starting with the start index.
7 Close the window.
Example for PCM: Defining Curve Using

Cosine Function
You can use the point generator to define a curve by its mathematical
description. This example, by way of illustration, shows how to define
a curve with the aid of the cosine function. When you do this you are
using implicit variable definition and value assignment by means of a
formula.
To define a curve, for example:
1 In the point generator, enter 1 as the Start Index, 50 as the End
Index, and 1 as the Increment.
2 Right-click in the Point input box to open the Formula Interface
window.
3 Enter the following:
point(index*10,50*cos(index*10),0,0,0,1)
This formula defines a series of 50 points with changing X and Y
values, all situated on the plane Z=0 and having the same vector
(0,0,1).
“point(x,y,z,nx,ny,nz)” defines a “point” variable. Use the “index”
loop counter of the point generator as the argument in the cosine
function. In each of the points the x value is index*10, the y value
is 50*cos(index*10), and the z value is 0.
4 Close the window.
Example for PCM: Rechecking Characteristic

after Tolerance Excursion
You can use PCM to recheck a characteristic in the event of an
excursion past a tolerance limit. This is useful, for example, if the
excursion is due to the presence of foreign matter. Once the foreign
matter has been removed by cleaning, a repetition of the
measurement will furnish the actual values.
14-38 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM
The characteristic in this example is the roundness of a hole. If the

characteristic goes out of tolerance, you want to remove foreign
matter from the hole and repeat the measurement.
To accomplish this using PCM functions:
1 Place a loop with 6 repetitions around the characteristic.
2 Point to the Break Condition field, open the shortcut menu and
select Formula... .
The Formula dialog box appears on the screen.
3 In the Boolean Expression (Yes / No Test) field, define
“status_5==1” as the abortion condition and click on OK.
4 Write the following program code into the field for the output
parameters of the characteristic:
//************************************************************************************************
// Measure Circle hole_5 , check roundness; if out of tolerance, interrupt CNC and request next
// task: repeat feature or measure next feature or terminate CNC run.
//************************************************************************************************
// Defining starting conditions
status_5 = 2
hole_5 = getActual("DIN Round_hole_5").actual
// If out of tolerance, open a window and inquire CNC End, Continue or Repeat
if hole_5 > 0.01 then
message("DIN Roundness of hole_5 is:" ,hole_5)
status_5 = inquire("1=CNC End, 2=Continue, 3=Repeat. Enter a number")
message(status_5,"Is your entry correct?", "DIN Roundness of hole_5 is", hole_5)
if status_5 == 2 then
message("CNC run will be continued")
status_5 = 2
endif
endif
message("The CNC run will be terminated due to excess tolerance in Circle hole_5.")
cncBreak()
endif
message("The measurement of the circle will be repeated.")
if LOOP1 == 5 then
message("CNC run will be terminated due to too many loop runs in feature hole_5.")
cncBreak()
endif
endif
print("Status ist",status_5, "DIN Roundness of hole_5 is", hole_5)
5 You can now run the measurement plan.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-39

Example for PCM: Parameterizing a

Coordinate System
You can parameterize the angle of rotation of a system of
coordinates. This entails creating the angle as a value of a variable in
radian measure. You can also parameterize the offset of a system of
coordinates.
In this example, the system of coordinates has to be rotated 180 or 0
degrees, depending on the value of a variable. You accomplish this by
assigning a variable, for example “PartRotationActive” a value of 0 or
1 in the input parameters at the applicable points in the measurement
plan.
1 Open the base alignment.
2 Select Change active Base Alignment and click on Special.
3 In the Special Functions window, click Rotate by an angle.
4 Right-click in the input field for the angle to the shortcut menu,
open the Formula dialog box and enter the following:
3.14159265359 * PartRotationActive
In radian measure 180° corresponds to the number π =
3.14159265359. The result of the formula depends on the variable
PartRotationActive:
– When “PartRotationActive=0” is set, the formula’s return value is
3.14159265359 * 0 = 0°.
The base alignment is not rotated.
– When “PartRotationActive=1” is set, the formula’s return value is
3.14159265359 * 1 = 180°.
The base alignment is rotated 180°.
Example for PCM: Loading PCM File Using

Dialog
You can manually load a PCM file for the current measurement plan
by clicking CNC → Measurement Plan Functions → Parameter.
With the command readPCMFile, you can have the same function run
automatically.
If you are using character chain functions and polls, you can ask for
the required file name in the dialog.
14-40 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM
With the following lines, you can implement a poll for the desired
parameter file and the loading of the relevant file:
// Select file
PCM_PARA=inquireText("Which file do you want?",cr(),"File1=1",cr(),"File2=2",cr(),"File3=3")
// Compose file name
PCM_Filename="Parameterset_"+PCM_PARA
// Specify path for files
path=C:/home/om/PCMFILES
// Load PCM file
readPCMFile (PCM_filename)
Example for PCM: Defining Loop with Linear

Offset
Let us assume that you want to parameterize a hole pattern with
linear offset in X. You can use the Pattern function or PCM to
accomplish this task. The PCM is illustrated here. You must
parameterize the X, Y and Z coordinates, along with the diameter and
the offset in X.
1 Select CNC → Measurement Plan Functions → Parameter and
enter the following values:
Circle_position = point(20.5,15.5,-5,0,0,1)
OffsetX = 10
Circle_diameter = 50
2 Parameterize the circle:
• Define the base alignment.
• Define the circle with measurement strategy.
• Open the feature definition template for a circle and enter
parameters in the Formula Interface window.
• Input box X: circle_position.x
• Input box Y: circle_position.y
• Input box Z: circle_position.z
• Input box D: circle diameter
3 Define the “Diameter” characteristic and place a loop over it.
If more than one characteristic is needed, e.g. X value, Y value and
diameter, you have to parameterize the nominals for all
characteristics. Then combine the characteristics in a group and
place the loop around the group.
4 Parameterize the nominal.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-41

5 Place a loop over the characteristic:

• Start = 1.
• End = 5
• Increment = 1.
The next step is to update the feature with loop counter and offset
parameter.
6 In the “Curve” definition template, select “Formula” from the
shortcut menu opened by right-clicking in the X Nominal field.
The field for the X value contains the variable “circle_position.x”.
You want to increment this value by the “offsetX” value each time
the loop is run.
Enter the following in the formula:
circle_position.x + ((LOOP1 – 1) * offsetX)
LOOP1 is the loop variable of the 1st loop; you can transfer it into
the formula by clicking on Loop. The start index for LOOP1 is the
value from the Start input box for the loop.
The loop is run. The expression for the X value assumes the following
values one after the other: 20.5, 30.5, 40.5, 50.5, 60.5.
Example for PCM: Nested Loop for Field

(Array)
In this example a perforated plate is to be parameterized. The number
of holes and the positions of the holes are both randoms. Build up the
circles as an “array“ (field) and use a loop in the measurement plan
which you use to pass through the array index.
An array can be obtained by indexing a variable with square brackets.
The array will, of course, have to be set as a parameter for the actual
processing process. In this case, use the Loop index LOOP1.
14-42 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM
1 Create the following ASCII file for PCM:

// Circle coordinates as points with values for x,y,z
//
CirclePos[1] = point(10,20,-5,0,0,1)
CirclePos[2] = point(15,30,-5,0,0,1)
CirclePos[3] = point(22,28.3,-5,0,0,1)
CirclePos[4] = point(40.5,30.8,-5,0,0,1)
Circle_diameter[1] = 70
Number_circles = 4
// Comment strings for each circle
textCircle[1] = “This is circle A”
textCircle[2] = “This is circle B”
textCircle[3] = “This is circle C”
textCircle[4] = “This is circle D”
The ASCII parameter file can be generated using the Notepad in

Windows NT.
2 Save this file as “perplate_A.para”.
3 Create a measurement plan with base alignment and a circle.
The elements of the base alignment can also be parameterized.
They are omitted here for the sake of clarity.
4 Define a circle with measurement strategy.
5 Define each of the variables contained in the parameter file
described above as an array (with square brackets and the loop
variable LOOP1) and read in the parameter file “perplate_A.para”.
The parameters from the file are assigned to the variables.
6 Open the feature definition template for the circle.
• In the X nominal input box, enter “CirclePos[LOOP1].x”.
• In the Y nominal input box, enter “CirclePos[LOOP1].y”.
• In the Z nominal input box, enter “CirclePos[LOOP1].z”.
• In the D nominal input box, enter “Circlediameter[LOOP1]”.
• Open the commentary field with Formula in the
Name/Comment window and enter the text parameter
“textCircle[LOOP1]”.
7 Define the characteristics X Value, Y Value and Diameter. The
nominal values are parameterized using Formula.
8 Combine the characteristics in a group.
9 Place a loop over the group:
• Start = 1.
• End = NumberCircles
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-43

You can import the “NumberCircles” variable into the End field
using the Formula Interface window.
• Increment = 1.
10 Start the measurement plan.
Depending on the content of the parameter file, you can use this
measurement plan to measure different numbers of circles with
different positions and diameters.
Example for PCM: Parts Family and Variant

Control
PCM enables you to measure different variants of a workpiece using a
single measurement plan.
Let us assume, for example, that a workpiece has two variants, A and
B. Variant B has three extra holes with a diameter of 10 mm.
1 Generate a complete measurement plan, complete with the three
holes.
2 Combine all characteristics of the three holes in the group called
“Additional hole pattern variant B”.
Selection of the variant is controlled by means of a PCM parameter
as a switch.
enter the following:
// Measure additional hole pattern variant B when parameter is 1
MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive = 1
4 Highlight the “Additional hole pattern variant B” group and set a
condition:
• Select Condition from the shortcut menu.
• Click in the input box for the condition to open the shortcut
menu and open the Formula Interface window.
• In the Formula Interface window, click on Settings.
• Confirm the MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive variable.
• Insert “== 1” as an additional entry.
The condition is now defined: the “Additional hole pattern variant
B” group is measured only when the variable
“MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive” is equal to 1.
The “Additional hole pattern variant B” group is measured.
enter the following:
14-44 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Examples for PCM
// Measure additional hole pattern variant B when parameter is 1

MeasureAdditionalHolePatternActive = 0
7 Run the measurement plan again.
The “Additional hole pattern variant B” group is not measured in this
run.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-45

Example for PCM: ASCII Parameter File

Example of an ASCII parameter file (*.PARA file):
// Text-Parameters -------------------------------------------
who = “File generated by ZEISS-IMT Training Center”
nameOfCircle_1 = “Circle_1”
text1 = “type034_n2_p2”
nextText = “This is in Front”
// Text-Parameters as an array ---------------------
name101[1] = “type101_n1_p1”
name101[2] = “type101_n2_p2”
name101[3] = “type101_n3_p3”
name101[4] = “type101_n4_p4”
name101[5] = “type101_n5_p5”
name101[6] = “type101_n6_p6”
name101[7] = “type101_n7_p7”
name101[8] = “type101_n8_p8”
name101[9] = “type101_n9_p9”
name101[10] = “type101_n10_p10”
// Numeric-Parameters ------------------------------
Partnumber = 10
PartRotationAktiv = 1
CREATION_DATE = 950516
CREATION_TIME = 0000
DESIGN_DATE = 950516
NUMBER = 772209709750
PART_HEIGHT = 316.000
PLACE = 2
X_Circle_1 = 10
Y_Circle_1 = 20
Z_Circle_1 = 15
D_Circle_1 = 40
X_Circle_2 = 250
Y_Circle_2 = 40
Z_Circle_2 = -15
D_Circle_2 = 25
X_Circle_3 = -12
Y_Circle_3 = -20
Z_Circle_3 = 50
D_Circle_3 = 12
// Numeric-Parameters as an array type vector -------------------
type086[1] = vector( 10.0, 0.0, 0.0 )
type086[2] = vector( 0.0, -20.0, 0.0 )
type086[3] = vector( 30.0, 20.0, 10.0 )
type086[4] = vector( 17.5, 13.8, 50.0 )
// Numeric-Parameters as an array type point --------------------
CurveFront[1] = point( 216.023, 0.0, 69.698, 0.984, -0.0, 0.176 )
14-46 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
PCM Quick Reference

You need the following information in order to program with PCM:
– ➤“PCM Syntax” on page 14-47
– ➤“Variables in PCM” on page 14-48
– ➤“Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in PCM” on page 14-49
– Overview of PCM functions:
• Mathematical functions
Contains the syntax for mathematical functions such as sine,
cosine, etc.
• Character chain functions
Contains the syntax for functions using character chains such as
asc, chr, len, etc.
• Input and output
Contains the functions that control screen input and output.
• File commands
Contains the functions that are required to work with files and
directories.
• Measurement-specific functions
Contains the functions that process measured values generated
by a measurement plan run and that read probe properties.
• CMM movement commands
Contains the functions that control the CMM.
• Use custom printout
Contains the functions for activating and deactivating the
custom printout.
– Overview of the various types of condition (IF-instructions)
PCM Syntax
Like the programming languages Basic, C, Fortran and so on, PCM
uses a functional syntax with the following rules:
– Definitions and value assignments as follows:
variable_name=value
– Blanks are not permitted in names and formulas; the syntax is
case-sensitive, so it distinguishes between uppercase and
lowercase letters.
– Multiplication and division precede addition and subtraction when
formulas are resolved.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-47

– The decimal separator is the period (example 3.85).

– In functions, the function parameters (the arguments) are in
parentheses and separated by commas.
– In commands (procedure calls) the function parameters (the
arguments) can be omitted. Example: getActual().
– Comments can be entered in each line: everything following the
“//” string is ignored.
Variables in PCM
There are four types of variable in PCM. The type of variable is defined
implicitly by the value assignment:
Variable type Examples of value assignments

number pi=-3.141529
hugo=2.0
P1=80
vector Axis=vector(10,12,0)
point CylinderB=point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
string Text_1=“Circle”
Text_2=“Enter the number:”
Arrays Arrays can also be defined with variables using special value
assignments with square brackets. Example:
hugo[1] = point(-10,12.5,0,0,0,1)
hugo[2] = point(-12,12.5,0,0,0,1)
hugo[3] = point(-14,12.5,0,0,0,1)
hugo[4] = point(-16,12.5,0,0,0,1)
In this case, “hugo“ is an array consisting of 4 variables of the type

point.
The array index in square brackets can also be specified by a variable
(of type number, as an integer). You can therefore define an array of
any length in a single loop instruction. Example:
for I = 1 to numberTeeth
type[I] = inquireNumber("Which tooth type is in position number ",I)
next I
14-48 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
You can gain direct access to a specific element in an array by

specifying the array index. Example:
Length = output values[4]
Arithmetic and Comparative Operators in

PCM
You can use the following arithmetic operators in PCM:
Operator Result
+ Sum
– Difference
* Product
/ Quotient
You can use the following comparative operators for conditions in

PCM:
Operator Result
< Truth value of “a<b”
> Truth value of “a>b”
<> Truth value of “a not equal to b”
== Truth value of “a=b”
>= Truth value of “a greater than or equal to b”
<= Truth value of “a less than or equal to b”
Mathematical functions in PCM

Angle Conversions
You can use the following functions to convert angle values in PCM:
Function Result
rad (angular degree) Radian value of angle degrees
deg (radian angle) Gon angle value of radian angle
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-49

Angle Functions
PCM supports the following angle functions:
Function Result
sin (angular degree) Sine value
cos (angular degree) Cosine value
tan (angular degree) Tan value
arcsin (value) Arcsine in degrees
arccos (value) Arccosine in degrees
arctan (value) Arctangent in degrees
arctan2 Arc tangent from the quotient
(dividend,divisor)
Other Functions
Other mathematical functions are available:
Operator Result
squared(value) Value squared
sqrt(value) Square root of value
exp(value) evalue
ln(value) Natural logarithm of value
log(value) Common logarithm of value
mod(value1,value2) Value1 modulo value2
int() Integral proportion of value
abs(value) |Value| (=absolute value of the value)
round(value[,figures]) Value, rounded to the given number of
places; if specification of number of places
omitted: 0 places
sign([value1,]value2) Sign of value2 times value1:
– Value1, if value2<0
0, if value2=0
+ value1, if value2>0
Examples:
squared(3) = 9
sqrt(225) = 15
exp(0) = 1
ln(1) = 0
14-50 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
log(10000) = 4
mod(22,8) = 6
int(34.5674) = 34
abs(-35.335value) = 35.335
round(35.335,2) = 35.34
sign(-12,-34) = 12
sign(-12) = -1
Character Chain Functions in PCM

You can use the following character chain functions in PCM:
Function Result
asc(character) ASCII code (number) of specified character
chr(number) Character with the specified ASCII code
format(number) Character chain consisting of the figures and characters
of the number
val(character chain) Number represented by the character chain
len(character chain) Length of the character chain
inStr([startIndex,] character chain1, Position of the first occurrence of character chain2 within
character chain2) character chain1 after the startIndex-th character or the
first character
mid(character chain,startIndex[,length]) Character chain, consisting of the characters from the
startIndex-th character to the end of the character chain
or to the (startIndex+length-1)-th character
strElement(n,char,character chain) The n-th element of the character chain, when char is
regarded as a separator between the elements
Examples:
asc("8") = 56
chr(111) = "o"
format(3278,45) = "3278,45"
val("3278,45") = 3278,45
len("This is a character chain") = 25
inStr(3,"Manna","a") = 5
inStr("Manna","a") = 2
mid("PCM Functions",1,3) = "PCM"
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-51

strElement(4,",","hello,here,we,are,again") = "are"
strElement(4,"e","here,we,are,again") = "ar"
PCM Functions: Input and Output

inquireNumber
The inquireNumber command can be used to create a dialog for
querying a numeric value. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireNumber("poll text for workpiece number")
or
variablename =
inquireNumber("line1"[,cr()],"line2"[,cr()],...,"lines")
Here the optional elements “cr()“ each cause a line break on the
screen.
Example 1:
P1 = inquireNumber(“Enter 1 to continue measuring”)
if P1 == 1 then
message(“You entered 1 so I will continue measuring”)
endif
else
if P1 <> 1 then
message(“You do not want to continue measuring.”)
endif
endif
Example 2:
hugo = 10
P1 = inquireNumber("Last word was: ",hugo,cr(), "Enter new number:")
message("You have entered the number:",P1)
Example 3:
type = inquireNumber("Cone tooth = 1", cr(),
"Cylinder form tooth = 2", cr(),
"Long cylinder tooth = 3", cr(),
"Spherical form tooth = 4", cr(),
"Please enter number")
inquireText
The inquireText command can be used to create a dialog for
querying a character string. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireText("text line")
or
variablename = inquireText("text line1"[,cr()],"text
line2"[,cr()],...,"text lines")
14-52 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
Here the optional elements “cr()“ each cause a line break on the
screen.
Examples:
string1 = inquireText(“Enter the name”)
inquireList
The inquireList command can be used to create a menu for querying
a character chain. The syntax is:
variablename = inquireList("menu title","menu item1","menu
item2",...,"menu itemn")
The command causes the appearance of a menu with the given title
line on the screen. As a value, the variable is assigned the character
chain of the menu item which has been selected with a mouse click or
the arrow keys and confirmed with OK.
Examples:
NameForPrintoutheader = inquireList("Name for printout header","Test printout","Default
printout",)
inquire
Corresponds to the inquireNumber command, but is supported by
PCM only for the sake of upwards compatibility. The syntax is:
variablename = inquire("Dialog text for poll")
message
Outputs the current values of one or more variables. The syntax is:
message(variable,variable,variable,...)
Inserting “cr()“ instead of a variable causes a line break on the screen.
Example:
message("The value of variable P1 is: ", P1, cr(), "The value of variable P2 is: ", P2)
print
Prints the current values of one or more variables in the printout. The
syntax is:
print(variable;variable;variable;...)
NOTE The print command will not be active unless you have activated the
hss Activate print command check box after selecting CNC →
Measurement Plan Functions → PCM Test Settings in the PCM
Test Functions window. This means you can use the command for
test purposes.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-53

Examples:
print(“Print this dialog text in the printout”)
print(“Print the value of variable P1 in the printout”; P1)
PCM Functions: File Commands

addToFile
Adds a line to a file. If the file does not exist, it will be specially
created. The syntax is:
addToFile(file name,value1,...)
Whenever the file name or path name is used, this function will access
the directory of the current measurement plan. If the name of the
drive is missing, the current directory will be used.
Example: addToFile(wd+"\info.txt","line",1)
Here wd is a variable, which contains a path specification.
deleteFile
Deletes the specified file. The syntax is:
deleteFile(file name)
getActualInspectionDir
Returns the directory of the current measurement plan. The syntax is:
getActualInspectionDir()
getWD
Returns the current directory. The syntax is:
getWD()
Example: wd = getWD()
readPCMFile
reads in a PCM file. The syntax is:
readPCMFile (file name)
14-54 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
The new parameters which are read in will, in each case, overwrite
the current parameters of the same name.
NOTE The parameters which were available before the CNC run will only be
hss temporarily overwritten. The original start setting will be used for the
next CNC run.
The file name can also be entered in the form of several parameters.
The parameters will, depending on the type, be put together to form
a string.
Example1:
readPCMFile("testparameter.para ")
Example2:
P1 = "c:"
P2= "\calypso\home\om\ "+"test.para "
readPCMFile(P1,P2)
Example3:
readPCMFile("c: ", "\calypso\home\om ", "test.para ")
PCM Functions: Measurement-specific

Functions
getActual
In conjunction with an argument returns a certain current value of a
feature. The syntax is:
NOTE Coordinate values returned by getActual and getNominal always refer

hss to the base alignment of the current feature.
getActual(“feature_name”).characteristic
The "feature_name" can be indexed directly or with a variable (for
example, a loop variable):
getActual("cone",3).x
“characteristic” is a dummy for the following:

x X value of the reference point
y Y value of the reference point
z Z value of the reference point
a1 Angle 1
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-55


a2 Angle 2
inclinationAngle Angle of inclination
rotationAngle Angle of rotation
diameter Diameter
radiusD2 Radius 2
radius Radius
angle Angle
len Length
sigma Scatter
form Form error
coordPolRadius Polar coordinate, radius
coordPolAngle Polar coordinate, angle
coordPolHeight Polar coordinate, height
apexAngle Cone angle
apexAngleHalf Half cone angle
Used without an argument, it returns the current value of the

characteristic. The syntax is:
getActual()
getNominal
Returns a certain nominal of a feature. The syntax is:
getNominal(“feature_name”).characteristic
See the table above for the possible values of “characteristic”.
getProbe
Returns characteristics of the probe. The syntax is:
getProbe(“probe_name”,“plate_name”).characteristic
Probe name and plate name must be strings enclosed in straight
quotes ("). The possible values of “characteristic” are: “radius” or
“probeName”. The current probe name can be omitted.
Examples:
Command / assignment Return value / effect

getProbe().radius The current probe radius is returned.
getProbe(“probe_+Y”).radius The probe radius of “probe_+Y” is returned.
14-56 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
Command / assignment Return value / effect

getProbe(“probe_+Y”,“plate_A”).radius The radius of “probe_+Y” is returned from “plate_A”.
ProbeDiameter= The variable “ProbeDiameter” receives the radius of
getProbe(“probe_+Y”,“plate_A”).radius “probe_+Y” from “plate_A”.
getRecordHead
Returns the current value of a printout-header variable. The syntax is:
getRecordHead(“printout header variable”)
You will find a complete list of all printout header variables in ➤“The
Printout Header Data (Reference)” on page 9-21.
setRecordHead
Sets the value of a printout header variable. The syntax is:
setRecordHead(“printout header variable”,“value”)
You will find a complete list of all printout header variables in ➤“The
Printout Header Data (Reference)” on page 9-21.
baseSystem (Base Alignment)

Returns characteristics of the base alignment. The syntax is:
baseSystem().characteristic
Possible values of “characteristic” are: “x”, “y”, “z”, “valueA”,
“euler1”, “euler2” and “euler3”:

baseSystem().x X value of base alignment
baseSystem().y Y value of base alignment
baseSystem().z Z value of base alignment
baseSystem().valueA valueA value of base alignment
baseSystem().euler1 euler1 of base alignment in rads (angle of
inclination)
inclination)
inclination )
The formula for calculating the plane angle of the base alignment is:
plane angle = (euler1 – euler3) * 180° / π
Example: result=baseSystem().x
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-57

The X value of the base alignment is written into the “result” variable.
date
Returns the current date and the respective country language. The
syntax is:
date()
dateAndTime
Returns system date and time. The syntax is:
dateAndTime()
Example: date=dateAndTime(). Date and time are written into the
“date” variable (of type “string”) in the format defined by the system.
PCM Functions: CMM Movement Commands

positionCMM
Moves the probe head to the specified position (in machine
coordinates). The CMM moves in Z first, then X, and finally Y. The
syntax is:
Caution
hss
! This is a direct movement command addressing the CMM. Risk of
collision. The head moves directly to the position, the clearance planes
are ignored.
positionCMM(X,Y,Z)
Use: For example, you can define movements to pickup positions in
the output parameters of the measurement plan.
Example: positionCMM(500,-100,-200)
The CMM moves first in Z to -100 mm, then in Y to -200 mm and
then in X to +500 mm in the machine’s system of coordinates.
searchDistance
Sets the search distance. The syntax is:
searchDistance(distance)
In this case “distance” is the distance traveled by the probe head
before nominal probing. This value must be entered in 0.1 mm. It
applies until it is overwritten or canceled by a reset (stop light goes
from green to red and then back to green).
Examples:
14-58 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
searchDistance(10.000) => Search distance before nominal probing is

1 mm
searchDistance(60.000) => Search distance before nominal probing is
6 mm
cncBreak
Breaks off the CNC run. The syntax is:
cncBreak()
The CNC run is broken off, the stop light changes to red.
systemCall
Calls system commands. The syntax is:
systemCall(“filename”)
The file “filename” is called and executed immediately. “filename”
must be an executable file, e.g. a batch file or a program. You can use
this function to copy results to another computer, for example.
Example: systemCall(“D:\home\om\philips\main\help.bat”)
The statements in the “help.bat” file are executed.
systemCallWithWait
Calls system commands and waits for them to be processed. The
syntax is:
systemCallWithWait("filename")
The file “filename” is called and executed. Calypso will wait until the
file “filename“ has been processed.
“filename” must be an executable file, e.g. a batch file or a program.
Example: systemCallWithWait("D:\home\om\philips\main\help.bat")
The statements in the “help.bat” file are executed. Calypso will wait
until the batch file has been processed.
PCM Functions: Custom Printout

presentationOn
Switches on a custom printout. The syntax is:
presentationOn()
presentationOff
Switches off a custom printout. The syntax is:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-59

presentationOff()
Example: You want a graphic to appear only when certain
characteristics are measured. To accomplish this you define a custom
printout with a graphic. You switch off the custom printout by default
in the start parameters of the measurement plan. You then request
the custom printout for the characteristics in question by opening the
Settings window and specifying “presentationOn()” in the input
parameters.
Overview: Conditions in PCM

The Simple Condition
The syntax of the simple condition is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION
endif
Meaning:
– If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION is processed.
– If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is not processed.
DEFINITION can be formulas, value assignments, functions, conditions
or loops of your choice, always with line breaks as separators.
The Condition with Alternative

The syntax of the condition with alternative is as follows:
if CONDITION then
DEFINITION1
else
DEFINITION2
endif
Meaning:
– If CONDITION is satisfied, DEFINITION1 is processed.
– If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION2 is processed.
functions, conditions or loops of your choice, always with line breaks
as separators.
14-60 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

PCM Quick Reference
Example of a Condition with Alternative
message(“Test if with PCM”)

P1 = 1
message(“Value is :”,P1)
//----------------------------------------------------------
if P1 == 1 then
message(“is equal. Value was:” ,P1)
endif
if P1 < 1 then
message(“is less than 1: Value was:” ,P1)
else
if P1 > 1 then
if P1 > 5 then
message(“is greater than 5: Value was:” ,P1)
endif
message(“is greater than 1: Value was:” ,P1)
endif
endif
//----------------------------------------------------------
test = point(1,2,3,0,0,1)
message(“X” ,test.x, “Y”,test.y, “Z” ,test.z, “nx” ,test.nx, “ny”
,test.ny, “nz” ,test.nz)
Overview: Loops in PCM

The Defined Loop
The defined loop has the following syntax:
for index=start to end [step]
DEFINITION
next index
The following must be inserted:
– for index – the name of the loop variables (random),
– for start, end and step – full figures (integers),
– for DEFINITION – random formulas, value assignments, functions or
separators.
Meaning: the functions or commands under DEFINITION are
processed (end - start + 1)/step times, whereby “step“ is set to 1 if no
other specification is made. At the same time, the specific value for
index is always entered in DEFINITION: at first start, then start+step,
start+2*step etc. up to end. With next i, the loop index is
incremented by the step each time.
Example for i=1 to 4
message(i,". step: ",step[i])
next i
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-61

The Conditional Loop

The conditional loop has the following syntax:
repeat DEFINITION until CONDITION
Meaning:
– 1.) DEFINITION is processed. Then CONDITION is tested.
– 2.) If CONDITION is fulfilled, the loop is ended.
– 3.) If CONDITION is not satisfied, DEFINITION is processed again
and CONDITION is tested again. Continues with 2.).
The CONDITION can be set up as a logical combination of several
subconditions.
separators.
As the condition is only tested after the first run, a conditional loop
must run at least once.
Caution
hss
! Please note that infinite repetitions are possible with the conditional
loop, if the condition is never fulfilled.
14-62 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM
Tips and Tricks for Working with PCM

The PCM programming language provides you with a wide choice of
functions and commands that you can use to automate many of the
routine procedures in Calypso.
There is also a possibility of Calypso becoming slower when you
program with PCM. Debug functions are useful for locating bugs in
programs (see ➤“How to Test PCM Commands” on page 14-63).
Enhancing the Speed of Calypso

You will be able to use Calypso's speed to best effect if you bear the
following in mind:
– When you perform local calculations required only for a particular
feature or characteristic, you should always try to define new
variables. If you re-use existing variables, there is a possibility of
Calypso becoming slower because the “old” variables always have
to be overwritten. Defining new variables is more efficient.
– Use the PCM command getActual sparingly in theoretical
elements.
– Activate the print command only for test purposes.
How to Test PCM Commands

The procedure for testing PCM commands is as follows:
1 Select CNC → Measurement Plan Functions → PCM Test
settings.
The PCM Test Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 14-63

2 Select PCM Test Printout to log the execution of each formula.

Each time a value is assigned or a variable calculated, the new
value is output in the default printout.
Bear in mind that PCM Test Printout makes the program run
more slowly.
3 Select Activate print command to activate the print commands
in your PCM inputs.
The print command is not executed unless this check box is
activated. In this way you can print the current values of the
variables at any point in your measurement plan.
4 Click on OK.
The dialog box closes. The settings are used the next time the
measurement plan is run.
Two-button vs. Three-button Mouse

The descriptions in this documentation are based on a two-button
mouse. If you have a three-button mouse: click the middle button to
open shortcut menus.
Two-button mouse Three-button mouse

Left button Left button
Right button Middle button
Ctrl + right button Right button
Alt + right button Alt + right button
14-64 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
15
15 Curve Measurement (Option)
.................................................................................................................................
Geometric features such as circle, line, plane etc. can easily be
measured with the basic version of Calypso. To measure freely formed
part surfaces, special measuring techniques are required. The “2D
curve“ and “3D curve“ measuring options and the “Curve form“
feature are for measuring and evaluating known and unknown open
and closed 2D and 3D curves.
Curve measuring is one of Calypso’s optional features. You can license
this functionality and have it enabled in your system if it would be of
use to you. Contact your Carl Zeiss Service for more information.
This chapter assumes that you are familiar with the procedures for
defining features (see and characteristics).➤“Defining Features” on
page 5-2 ➤“Defining Characteristics” on page 6-7
Basics about Curve Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Defining the Curve Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Defining Tolerances for a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Using Curves in the CAD Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
The Measuring Strategy for the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
Scanning a Known Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Defining Curve Form Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43
Working with the Results of Curve Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15- 1

Curve Measurement (Option)
Basics about Curve Measurement

Because curves are geometric elements, there are some important
things you should know about how Calypso evaluates their form and
location.
Definition and Display of Curves

In Calypso a curve is defined by a finite set of points. Calypso uses
spline functions to interpolate between the curve points in order to
display the curve as a continuity in the CAD window.
Both the specifications and the actual values of the curve points are
each defined by 6 values:
– 3 point coordinates (X, Y, Z)
– 1 normal vector (U, V, W) or its 3 direction cosines (NX, NY, NZ).
The three curve types which can be measured and calculated by
Calypso are presented in the following examples. These examples will
help you to understand the principles.
– Flat curve (2D curve)
Flat curves are produced when a plane (imaginary) intersects with a
body. Flat curves occur, for example, on workpieces such as
camshafts, which exhibit two-dimensional curves.
All the points which constitute a flat curve are on a single plane
that can (also) have any orientation in space. The normal vectors of
the curve points, too, consequently, are all in the measuring plane.
Z
Y
15-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Basics about Curve Measurement
– Spatial curve (3D curve)

Spatial curves (3D curves) have three degrees of freedom:
theoretically, they are not constrained in any direction. You can
measure and test 3D curves with Calypso.
– Lift curve (face curve)

Lift curves, also known as face curves, are special three-
dimensional curves, which run across cylinder sections. A lift curve
maintains a constant distance from the axis of the cylinder, so only
two values are variable: namely the deviation of the curve in a
given direction (the X axis in our example) and the angle of
rotation on the surface of the cylinder.
Like the 2D curve, therefore, the lift curve has only two degrees of
freedom. Lift curves in Calypso are special forms of the 3D curves.
Y
X
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-3

Performing Curve Measurement

The procedure for curve measurement is no different from that for
other measurements. The procedure for performing measurements is
described in ➤“Running a Measurement Plan” on page 8-1 You can
measure a complete measurement plan, a mini-plan, or a single
characteristic or feature.
15-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining the Curve Feature

The definition of a curve feature differs from the definition of other
features. Within the curve feature definition template, Calypso offers
four ways of defining nominal data.
You can
– import a file (in VDA, ASCII, PAB or DXF format),
– define the curve with the point generator,
– digitize a curve from measurements,
– use the keyboard to enter the nominal data of the curve,
– adopt the nominal data of the curve from the CAD model.
As with other features, you use a definition template to define two-
dimensional and three-dimensional curves. You will already be familiar
with most of the buttons and input fields from the other definition
templates, but this template includes some elements that are new.
You will find more information on this definition template under

Definition Template (Curve) in the interactive Calypso reference in
Online Help.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-5

2D Curves, 3D Curves and Lift Curves – The

Differences
The definition templates for both types of curve are, broadly
speaking, the same: they differ only in a small few points:
– The definition template for the 3D curve (lift curve) contains the
menu Projection.
– The definition template for 3D curves (not lift curve) has no
Projection menu, because the curve does not have to be
embedded in a plane.
– For all practical purposes, the deviation for 3D curves can be
calculated only in the actual vector direction and the normal vector
direction.
– The Move Parallelcurve option in the Evaluation menu is not
available for 3D curves.
How curves are In the CAD window curves are displayed as continuous lines; they are
displayed calculated as approximations with the aid of splines.
You have the option of mapping a tape coupled to the curve, in order
to highlight the spatial component of a 3D curve.
You can set the width of this tape using Evaluation → Tape width.
0 means: no tape.
Marking and demarking lift curve

Lift curves are 3D curves which are projected onto a cylinder section.
You can see here that the menu Projection Lift Curve is contained in
the definition template of the lift curve in addition to the features of
the 3D curve.
You can mark 3D curves as lift curves (while generating the lift curve)
or cancel the marking again.
– To mark a 3D curve as a lift curve, you have two options:
In the window Change nominal values, select the option In
vector direction, activate the check box Lift curve and specify
the radius and axial direction of the cylinder.
In the menu Evaluation→ Lift curve in the window Parameter
Data, activate the check box Lift curve.
– To cancel the marking of a 3D curve as a lift curve, you have two
options:
In the window Change Nominal Values, select the option In
vector direction, deactivate the check box Lift curve and enter
“0“ explicitly for the Length and Cylinder radius.
In the menu Evaluation→ Lift curve in the window Parameter
Data, deactivate the check box Lift curve.
15-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Nominal Data for a Curve

When defining a curve feature, you first need to define the nominal
data of the curve you want to measure.
NOTE You can use neither automatic feature recognition nor the technology
hss macros for this purpose.
To define the nominal data, you can:

– Import an existing file.
The file format must be one of the following: VDA (Cons, Curve,
MDI, PSET, POINT, CIRCLE), ASCII, PAB or DXF.
For ASCII files, the values are read in the following sequence:
x-nominal, y-nominal, z-nominal, u-nominal, v-nominal, w-
nominal, x, y, z, u, v, w.
– Use the point generator to define the curve points: either to define
the curve points mathematically or to import external files with a
different format.
– Digitize a curve. You generate the nominal values of an unknown
outline by probing.
– Enter the curve’s nominal data by means of the keyboard, for
example taken from a technical drawing.
– Extract the nominal data from the CAD model: using the popup
menu CAD modification and clicking with the mouse.
Once the nominal points have been defined by one of these methods,
you can proceed with processing them and thus changing the
position and the shape of the curve.
Risk of collision!
hss
! Always check the normal vectors after defining the curve points, and
make sure that the vectors do not point into the material (risk of
collision).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-7

How to Import the Files for Nominal

Definition of a Curve
Calypso supports import of the following file formats:
– VDA (the points in a VDA file must be described as Cons, Curve,
MDI, PSET, POINT or CIRCLE),
– ASCII (for more information on ASCII files, see ➤“Defining
Nominal Data for a Curve” on page 15-7),
– PAB (a format used by SOM), and
– DXF (created by ScanWare DXF converters, creates only 2D curves).
To import a file in one of these formats:
1 Make sure you have the curve feature template open and
displayed on your screen, and that the chosen coordinate system
fits to the curve to be imported.
2 Select Nominal Value Definition Read Nominal Values.
A file selection window is opened.
3 Select the desired format.

The Scanware converter must be installed on your system if you
want to import a DXF file created by a ScanWare DXF converter.
This option is not available for 3D curves.
15-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

4 Select the desired file:

• Enter the complete path in the input field.
• If you do not know the path, click on the small arrow.
You can select the file in the Explorer window that now opens.
5 If you want to load a VDA file selectively, click on the button
Properties.
The VDA import settings dialog box appears on the screen.
6 Enter the criteria for selecting the points for import in the curve
and click on OK to confirm.
7 Click on OK.
The data will now be read from the file.
If you specified selection criteria before importing from a VDA file,
the data in the file is imported selectively into the curve feature in
accordance with these criteria. The sequence of the curve points
derives from the sequence of the points in the VDA file.
The type and name of the converted features are written into the
Comment for the curve.
You have now defined the curve with its nominal data. Always
remember to check the direction of the normal vectors (see
➤“Checking the Normal Vectors of a Curve” on page 15-24).
How to Generate a Curve with the Points

Generator
Calypso supports the VDA, PAB and DXF file formats. If the data you
need is in some other file format, you can program formulas to import
the information and convert the data to Calypso curve data.
You can also use the points generator to compute the points of the
curve freely from mathematical formulas.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-9

To generate a curve using the points generator:

1 Open the curve feature definition template.
2 Select the Parameters Data command from the Nominal
Definition picklist.
The Points Generator dialog box appears on the screen.
3 You can enter formulas and parameters to suit the necessary

conversion in the Start Index, End Index and Increment input
fields. See ➤“Entering Parameters and Formulas” on page 14-15.
4 Click on OK, when you are finished programming.
Calypso evaluates the points according to your entries and loads them
into the definition template.
Creating Nominal Values of a Curve by

Digitizing
You use digitalization when you do not have nominal data for a curve.
Digitalization means obtaining the nominal data of a curve by a series
of probings (i.e. probing an unknown contour).
Caution
hss
! Automatic stylus radius correction does not take place when you
digitize. See ➤“Defining Tolerances for a Curve” on page 15-26 and
➤“How to Change the Nominal Points of a Curve” on page 15-22,
Step 3, for instructions on how to implement radius correction.
15-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Take the probings on a workpiece that can be used as a pattern

(master workpiece), in other words a precision-manufactured part.
The actual values obtained by probing are subsequently converted
into nominal data. In this way, you use a master workpiece to obtain
the nominal data for other, identical curves.
You have two options: either take individual manual probings to
define the curve, or scan the curve.
To scan 2D curves, select the procedure “2D section“ (see ➤“How to
Scan an Unknown Contour using the “Unknown Cut” Method” on
page 15-12)
To scan a 3D curve, you have two options:
– the “3D curve“ method – you have to run three scans so that
Calypso can compute the transverse curvature of the three-
dimensional curve (see ➤“Digitizing a 3D Curve” on page 15-14)
– the “Lift curve“ method (see ➤“How to Scan an Unknown
Contour using the “Unknown Circle” Method” on page 15-16)
How to Generate the Nominal Values of a Curve by

Manual Probings
To digitize a curve by means of individual probings:
1 Open the definition template of the curve.
2 Click on the Nominal Definition picklist.
3 Select the command Digitizing on.
The place of the Nominal Definition picklist is now taken by a red
button labeled Digitizing off.
4 Click on the Open/Closed Curve button to select an open curve.
5 If you want to project the nominal points, select a projection plane
from the Projection picklist.
6 Now start with taking the measuring points into the workpiece.
Every probe point is shown directly in the definition template and
in the CAD-window. As soon as you have probed three points,
Calypso will calculate the curve. The entire curve is recalculated for
every new point you probe.
7 As soon as you have defined the curve by probing, click on the
Digitizing off button.
8 Click on OK to save the values and close the definition template.
You have now determined the nominal values for an unknown curve.
Note that these values refer to the stylus center. In order to correct the
stylus radius, please read .➤“Working with Curve Nominal Data” on
page 15-22
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-11

How to Scan an Unknown Contour using the

“Unknown Cut” Method
To scan an unknown contour as an unknown cut:
1 Open the 2D curve feature definition template.
2 In the Nominal Definition picklist, select the Digitizing on
command.
4 Select the “Free planar section” method to measure the curve as a

free planar section.
The entry Unknown contour 1 appears in the dialog box.
15-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

5 Double-click on the entry.

The Segment dialog box appears on the screen.
6 Enter the parameters:

• Enter the coordinates of the start point in the Start Point field,
or else probe the workpiece to define the start point.
• Enter the coordinates of the end point in the End Point field, or
else probe the workpiece to define the end point
• Probe a Direction Point so that Calypso knows the reference
direction of the plane, or use the Reference Axis picklist to
select an axis normal to the scanning plane.
• If necessary, click on the button to change the Direction.
7 Enter a speed for the CMM in the Speed field or select the
requisite accuracy.
8 Enter a pitch between points in the Step Distance field or define
the number of points.
Once all the parameters have been defined in full, the red Execute
button appears and you can click it to start scanning.
9 Check that the CMM is ready to move and that there is no risk of
collision.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-13

10 Click on the red Execute button to start scanning the unknown

contour.
The CMM starts scanning the contour.
Digitizing a 3D Curve
When you digitize a 2D curve using the unknown cut method, the
normal vectors are calculated by Calypso – by definition, they are in
the plane of the cut.
A single digitization is not enough to probe a 3D curve with
transverse curvatures on the workpiece, because in this case the
orientation of the normal vectors is unknown.
When you digitize a 3D curve, therefore, you have to scan an
unknown contour in such a way as to obtain three cuts – each a
certain distance “above“ and “below“ the 3D curve as such.
Calypso then uses this information to compute the normal vectors
and thus the transverse curvature of the 3D curve.
Start the process by clicking on the Digitize 3D Curve button in the
Strategy window for 3D curves.
NOTE If the feature does not have any nominal values, you will have to
hss
select the item Digitizing On under Nominal Definition before you
open the Strategy window.
15-14 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

In the Segment dialog box, go to Travel Path Definition and define

the three tracks, then click on Execute to start digitization.
Track specification by To specify the start and end points of the three tracks by probing with
probing the CMM, first probe the three start points of the tracks (points 1
to 3), then probe the three end points of the tracks (points 4 to 6).
Directions during travel When traveling along the three tracks, the CMM moves in a
meandering style: the direction of movement alternates from one
track to the next.
Digitizing 3D Curve in Area

Using the 3D Curve feature you can also digitize a three-dimensional
curve over an entire area. Calypso employs the technique of probing
surfaces along intersection lines to effect a meander-formed probing
of an entire surface area and in this way creates a 3D curve.
It will be necessary here to enter the four edges of surface that is to
be digitized. These four points must more or less form a rectangle.
Start the process by clicking on the Digitize 3D Grid button in the
Strategy window for 3D curves.
NOTE If the feature does not have any nominal values, you will have to
hss
select the item Digitizing On under Nominal Definition before you
open the Strategy window.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-15

In the Segment window, go to Travel Path Definition and define

the number of tracks, then click on Execute to start digitization.
Directions during travel When traveling along the three tracks, the CMM moves in a
meandering style: the direction of movement alternates from one
track to the next.
How to Scan an Unknown Contour using the

“Unknown Circle” Method
To scan an unknown contour as an unknown circle:
1 Open the 3D curve feature definition template.
2 In the Nominal Definition picklist, select the Digitizing on
command.
15-16 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)


4 Select the “Unknown Circle” method in order to measure the

curve as an unknown circle along an annular surface (cylinder
circumference).
The Unknown Circle entry appears in the window.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-17

5 Double-click Unknown Circle.

6 In the Travel Path Definition list, select Point or Angle as the

means of defining the travel path.
7 If you select Point:
• Enter the coordinates of the start points in the Start Point field,
or else probe the workpiece to define the start points.
• Enter the coordinates of the end points in the End Point field,
or else probe the workpiece to define the end points.
• If necessary, click on the button to change the Direction.
To specify the start and end points of the three tracks by probing
with the CMM, first probe the three start points of the tracks
(points 1 to 3), then probe the three end points of the tracks
(points 4 to 6).
8 If you select Angle:
• Enter the start angle in the Start Angle field.
• Enter the range for scanning in the Angle Range field.
• If you do not select a reference feature, enter the center in the
Center field and the radius of the unknown circle in the Radius
field.
15-18 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

• If there is a suitable reference feature, select it from the

Reference Feature list.
The Center and Radius fields are filled automatically.
NOTE Check the entered values and make sure that the unknown circle is
hss
probed on an area along the cylinder section, so that the specified
radius is accordingly always greater than the radius of the reference
feature.
The center must also be at the central point of the unknown circle.
Usually, the automatically entered center is in the center of a base
area of the reference feature.
9 Enter a speed for the CMM in the Speed field or select the
requisite accuracy.
10 Enter a pitch between points in the Step Distance field or define
the number of points.
Once all the parameters have been defined in full, the Execute
button appears and you can click it to start scanning.
11 Check that the CMM is ready to move and that there is no risk of
collision.
12 Click on the red Execute button to start scanning the unknown
contour.
The CMM starts scanning the contour.
How to Enter Nominal Data of the Curve

Point by Point
You also have the option of defining a curve by entering the nominal
data directly into the definition template. Bear in mind, however, that
the volume of data produced in this way can rapidly become very
large.
displayed on your screen.
The nominal fields for entering the X, Y and Z coordinates and the
direction cosines NX, NY and NZ are on the left.
2 In the Nominal Data picklist, select Nominal Input.
You have two options for input: point by point or with the aid of
the nominals editor. You can use the buttons to toggle back and
forth between the two display modes in the curve definition
template.
• If you use point by point input you begin by entering the first
point number and continue by entering the coordinates.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-19

Then enter the next point number or click on the arrow to

increment the number by one, and enter the coordinates of this
point.
• Click on the button if you want to use the Nominal Editor. The
tabular list is an overview in which you can use edit, copy, paste
and delete functions.
Click on the button to toggle back to the normal display mode.
3 Click OK to confirm your entries.
Note that each point on the curve must have a normal vector. See
➤“How to Change the Nominal Vectors of the Curve” on page 15-21.
How to Adopt Nominal Data of the Curve

from the CAD Model.
You can also adopt nominal data for a curve from the CAD model.
How to adopt nominal data of the curve from the CAD model:
1 Select CAD → Modification → Modify CAD Entities.
The Modify CAD Model dialog box appears.
2 To generate a 2D curve: select a line in the CAD model.
3 Under Points, enter the desired number of points and click on the
symbol for the curve.
The 2D curve is generated and entered into the measurement plan.
This can take a few seconds to complete.
The vector normal to the plane of intersection is automatically
calculated for each point on a 2D curve
4 To generate a 3D curve: Switch the CAD model to rendering mode
and select an area on which the curve should be positioned.
All “edges“ you select subsequently will refer to this “face“, until
you select a different “face“.
5 Then change to normal mode and select one or more “edges“
(with the CTRL key).
6 Under “Points“, enter the desired number of points and click on
the symbol for the curve.
The 3D curve is generated and entered into the measurement plan.
This can take a few seconds to complete. The curve's vectors will
be taken from the CAD surface that you clicked on:
• For a “cylindrical face“, the vectors are calculated perpendicular
to the cylinder axis.
• For a “conical face“, the vectors are calculated perpendicular to
the cone axis rotated around the opening angle (from the
plane).
15-20 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

• For a “planar edge“, the vectors are positioned parallel to the

plane vector.
7 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking on Close.
You have now transferred the features curve defined in the CAD
model to your measurement plan. You can edit the curve in the usual
way.
How to Change the Nominal Vectors of the

Curve
Each curve point is determined by three point coordinates and a
normal vector. For each curve you can work in Calypso the normal
vectors of the nominal points are in the same direction. (See ➤“Basics
about Curve Measurement” on page 15-2).
The direction of the normal vectors can be changed as follows:
– Vertical to the axis of a reference element
– Parallel to the axis of a reference element
– Rotated through a given angle about the tangent of the curve or
– Manual entry
The procedure is similar for all these paths:
2 Select Nominal Definition → Edit Vectors.
You define the direction in the Curve Nominal Vector Input
window.
3 Select the option to edit the normal vector Perpendicular To or

Parallel To a reference feature.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-21

4 Select the feature to be used as reference for the movement from

the list.
The normal vector of this feature will be shown as Reference
Vector.
5 If you want to define a reference vector, go to Reference Vector
and enter the directional components NX, NY and NZ.
6 If you want to rotate the vectors about the tangent of the curve:
• Mark the Rotation about tangent radio button.
• Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field.
The new direction for the normal vector will be taken over from these
values.
Working with Curve Nominal Data

If the nominal values for a curve have already been determined, you
have the following possibilities for editing the nominal values:
– Change nominal points: Here you can move the curve in various
ways, including rotating and shifting.
– Checking normal vectors.
How to Change the Nominal Points of a Curve

You can transform the nominal values of a curve in order to move the
curve to a position of your choice. For example, this could be
necessary for curves whose value you have read from a file and whose
position you would like to modify on your workpiece.
Or perhaps you have received a 3D curve by digitizing and you want
to convert it into a lift curve.
NOTE You must transform the nominal values if you want to perform stylus
hss radius correction after digitizing a curve.
The nominal values can be transformed in several ways:

– Move in direction of the normal vectors (offset curve, especially for
correcting stylus radius)
– Project in the direction of the cylinder axis on to the cylinder
section, in order to get a lift curve
– Move and/or turn in axis direction
– Modify the number of points (for instance, with a very large
number of points, which would lead to very slow probing).
15-22 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Caution
hss
! If you modify the number of points and confirm with OK, you will
create new nominal values for the curve. The original curve can not be
recreated again. For this reason, it is important that you use the
Simulation function to check the result beforehand.
Only use this function with great care and after careful thought.
To edit the nominal points:

2 Select Nominal Definition → Change Nominal Points.
The Change Nominal Points dialog box appears on the screen.
The entry boxes of the dialog box change depending on the set
option.
3 If you want to move the curve points in the direction of the normal
vectors, activate the in Vector Direction radio button.
• Enter the value by which you wish to move the curve under
“Length“.
• When you have the measurement values of the curve from the
digitalization, click on the Stylus Radius button.
The radius of the used stylus is entered in the input field.
• If you want to project the points of a curve on to a cylinder
section, activate the check box Unknown circle and enter the
radius and axis of the cylinder.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-23

Please note that the reference axis or the axis of the reference
feature must always pass through the center of the unknown
circle. The origin of the base alignment must also lie on this
axis.
4 To move or rotate the curve in the direction of the coordinate axis,
select the option Coordinate axes direction.
• Enter the value for the move and/or rotation.
5 To modify the number of nominal points, select the option
Number.
• Enter the desired value for the Step Distance, the Chord
Height or the Number.
Please note that the nominal points of the curve are then
recalculated internally. Applying this function again may
accidentally change the form of the curve.
The nominal points are modified immediately.
Checking the Normal Vectors of a Curve

In Calypso, the curve is only defined by points and directions.
Therefore, after defining the curve’s nominal data, you should check
two important things concerning the normal vectors:
– Is there a normal vector defined for each curve point?
If there are no normal vectors for some (or all) points, you can
enter them manually (see ➤“How to Change the Nominal Vectors
of the Curve” on page 15-21).
– Is the direction of the normal vectors OK?
The normal vectors must always “look away” from the part. A
normal vector must never point into the material of the part.
Caution
hss
! If a normal vector has the wrong direction, this result in collision
because the approach direction of the CMM will be wrong.
To check the normal vectors, you can:

– Check out the vectors in the CAD window – this is the quickest
way, and the most reliable. You can display each curve point with
its normal vector (refer to ➤“Show/Hide Vectors” on page 15-31).
– You choose this way especially for checking the vector’s direction.
If you just need to change the directions of all normal vectors at once,
you can also use the Change Direction button.
15-24 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Checking the Clearance Planes of a Curve

When you define a feature, Calypso assigns clearance planes to the
feature. In the case of curve measuring, you should check this
automatic assignment to make sure that the clearance planes really
guarantee a safe approach for the CMM. If the approach is not safe,
make the requisite changes as described in ➤“Editing the Probe
Routes” on page 7-22.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-25

Defining Tolerances for a Curve

There are two ways of entering tolerances for the Curve feature:
– For the whole curve
– For individual curve segments
You can also define the curve jump tolerance for the entire curve
here.
NOTE These entries in the definition template do not automatically define

hss
any measurement characteristics, which are added to the list of
characteristics.
How to Define Tolerance for the Whole Curve

The entry of the measuring tolerance refers to the nominal-actual
comparison of the curve points. You can enter an upper and/or lower
tolerance.
upper tolerance
nominal curve
lower tolerance
15-26 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To enter tolerances for the whole curve:

2 Click on the button for tolerances.
The definition template of the curve is extended.
3 Activate the Curve check box.

This cuts out the chart for the tolerances of individual segments.
4 Enter a value for the Upper Tolerance and/or Lower Tolerance.
5 Click on OK to close the definition template.
The tolerance you entered will be checked the next time the curve is
measured. The curve jump tolerance is out put in the default printout.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-27

How to Define Tolerances for Individual

Segments
The entry of the measuring tolerance refers to the nominal-actual
comparison of the curve points. You can enter an upper and/or lower
tolerance for each segment you have defined.
upper tolerance
nominal curve
lower tolerance
To set tolerances for individual segments:

The dialog box shown below is opened. In the right half of the
window you see a chart for the tolerances of the segments.
3 Select the segment for which you want to enter the tolerances by
clicking on the column to the left of the segment name.
15-28 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

4 Now click on the input field of the tolerance you want to enter and
enter a value for the Upper Tolerance and/or Lower Tolerance.
5 If you want to determine tolerances for further segments, repeat
the last two steps.
The tolerances you entered will be checked the next time the curve is
measured.
How to Define Jump Tolerance for the Whole

Curve
The curve jump tolerance refers to the differences between the
nominal-actual deviations of the curve points. So this is, so to speak, a
“second derivative“ – the difference of the differences. The curve
jump tolerance indicates the amount by which the curve form may
deviate within a reference distance. It is generally independent of the
curve form tolerance.
In Calypso, the curve jump tolerance is always measured between two
neighboring points. The curve is out of tolerance if the difference
between the deviations of the two actual points from the respective
nominal point is greater than the specified value.
Nominal curve
Actual curve
Jump tolerance
In the illustration, the differences between the nominal-actual

deviations from one point to the next are shown as shaded columns.
As you can see, the curve jump may be greater than the actual
deviation.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-29

To enter the jump tolerance for the whole curve:

The definition template of the curve is extended.
3 Activate the Curve jump tolerance check box.

The entry box then appears.
4 Enter the value for the Curve jump tolerance.
The tolerance you entered will be checked the next time the curve is
measured.
15-30 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Using Curves in the CAD Model
Using Curves in the CAD Model

The principles for using the CAD model in measuring curves are the
same as those described in ➤“Working with the CAD Window” on
page 3-1. There are, however, a number of other, useful commands
for working with curves. You access these commands by means of a
shortcut menu.
NOTE These additional commands are available only when you have the
hss curve definition template open.
The Commands in the Shortcut Menu for

Curves
Show/Hide Nominal Points
Choose this command to view the individual nominal points. Each
point is represented by a cross.
Choose Hide if the nominal points are visible but you want to hide
them.
Show/Hide Vectors
Choose this command to view the individual nominal vectors. This is
an easy way of checking the directions of the vectors.
Choose Hide if the tolerances are visible but you want to hide them.
Act-Points Show/Mask Out

Choose this command to view the individual measured points. Each
point is represented by a cross. This command is not available until
after the curve has been measured.
Choose Hide if the nominal points are visible but you want to hide
them.
Show/Hide Act Curve

Choose this command to view the measured curve. The curve is
displayed as a continuous line. This command is not available until
after the curve has been measured.
Choose Hide if the curve is visible but you want to hide it.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-31

Show/Hide Deviations
Choose this command to view the calculated deviations between
nominal and actual points. This command is not available until after
the curve has been measured.
Choose Hide if the deviations are visible but you want to hide them.
Show/Hide Tolerance Lines

Choose this command to view the tolerance lines of the curve. These
lines are displayed along with the curve.
Choose Hide if the deviations are visible but you want to hide them.
Show Point Numbers

Choose this commend to view the point numbers.
Choose Hide if the point numbers are visible but you want to hide
them.
2D View
Choose this command if you want to view the curve’s plane (2D
curves only).
Scaling
Choose this option when you want to see the curve heightened.
When you highlight the Curve Magnification command and keep
the mouse button pressed, you can select the factor of magnification.
15-32 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

The Measuring Strategy for the Curve

There is no difference in layout between the Strategy window for the
curve and the Strategy window for the other features (see
➤“Defining a Measurement Strategy” on page 5-62).
The only difference is in the point list, which has an extended function
in itself and in connection with creating segments. Consequently it is
described separately for the curve option.
Options for Displaying Points

As this illustration shows, the point list of a curve contains more
functions in the Group section.
Each nominal point of the curve is listed with its point number and its
X,Y and Z coordinates. You can use the Normal Vector, Actual Point
and Deviation buttons to decide which additional information will be
listed.
– Normal Vector: Each nominal point is listed with the direction
components of its normal vector.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-33

– Actual Points: Each nominal point is compared with the

calculated actual point. If no actual points have been measured,
the actual points are represented by zero.
– Deviation: Each nominal point is listed together with the
deviation of the actual points in the direction of the normal vector
and its direction component.
– New segment: See ➤“How to Divide a Curve into Segments” on
page 15-39.
The other elements of the point list correspond to the description in
➤“The Points List” on page 5-64.
How to Work with the Point List

You can view the points of a curve in the points list and process them.
The tasks you can undertake in the points list are as follows:
– Divide the curve into segments (see ➤“How to Divide a Curve into
Segments” on page 15-39).
– Select display options for points (see ➤“Options for Displaying
Points” on page 15-33).
– Save and print the point list (see ➤“How to Save and Print the
Point List” on page 15-36).
The point list has to be open if you want to use any of these
functions.
15-34 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to open the point list:

3 Click on the Points List button.

The list will show all points defined in the measuring element
curve.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-35

How to Save and Print the Point List

To save or print the point list:
How to open the point list:
3 Click on the Point List button.
The Point List dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Click on the button with the printer icon to print the point list.
The list is sent to your printer.
5 Click on the button with the diskette icon to save the point list.
A dialog box opens and you can define the parameters and format
for saving the list.
• Activate the check boxes to define the data to be saved in the

point list.
15-36 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

• Activate the VDA File check box if you want to save the point
list as a VDA file. The list is saved as an ASCII file if this check
box is not activated.
• Click on OK to save.
6 Click on OK.
The point list closes.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-37

Scanning a Known Contour

Curves are scanned along the segments of a curve whose points were
defined beforehand in the feature.
The procedure for defining the scanning method for curves differs
slightly from that of the other scans. You must begin by defining the
parts (segments) of the curve you want to scan.
Defining a scanning method is a three-step procedure:
– Check the parameters for the scanning method (see ➤“Scanning
Methods for Curves” on page 15-38).
The parameters for scanning were defined beforehand when the
segments were defined.
– Define a segment (see ➤“How to Divide a Curve into Segments”
on page 15-39).
– Define the general settings (see ➤“General Settings for the Path
Generation Method” on page 5-70).
– These settings are the same in all scanning methods.
Scanning Methods for Curves

The scanning method for curves employs nominal values and
segments, but points can also be interpolated between the nominal
points. You can also define and represent the entire curve as a single
segment.
Segments of a curve You can measure a segment automatically with a CMM that has CNC
capability. You can divide any curve into any number of segments and
assign tolerances to each segment.
A segment contains any number of points on an existing curve: These
points can be selected as sequential points, adjacent points, or freely
selected points from the list of points. A segment always has a
defined start point and a defined end point.
A given point can be used in the definition of different segments.
Pre-/Post-scanning The following problems can arise at the beginning and at the end of
the measuring path in the case of curve measurement and curve
evaluation:
– The controller must adjust accordingly.
– The calculation of the spline functions and the corresponding
vectors is difficult at the open ends of a curve.
15-38 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To reduce the effects of these problems, you can define a pre-/post-

scan in the file curveparameter.txt. This file can be found in the
directory Calypso\home\om\. The relevant parameter is called
distExtraPolScan; it is set to “0“ as standard.
Entry box for scanning The dialog box for scanning of curves is shown below.
curves
How to Divide a Curve into Segments

The Strategy window offers you two ways of defining a segment of
an existing curve:
– Specify start point and end point (consecutive points)
– Specify individual points (free choice)
Consecutive points To define a segment from consecutive points:
1 Click on the button of the curve-segment scanning method.
A new (as yet undefined) segment is added to the technology list.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-39

2 Mark the new segment, right-click and select Edit from the
shortcut menu.
3 Enter start point, end point and segment name, and click OK to
confirm.
The segment appears in the technology list.
Freely selectable points To define a segment from freely selectable points:
1 Click on the Point List button.
You will see the point list in which you define segments.
2 To select adjacent points for a segment:
• Click on the point with which the segment should start.
• Push down and hold the shift-key and click on the ending
point.
15-40 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

All points between the first and the last point you have clicked
on are marked with an arrow.
3 To freely select distributed points for a segment:

• Click on the point in the first column with which the segment
should start.
• Press and hold the Ctrl key and click on all other points that the
segment should include.
All points you have clicked on are marked with an arrow.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-41

4 Click on the Create Segment button.

This opens the Segment Definition window.
5 Change the name of the segment if the suggested name is not

suitable.
6 If you want to define a tolerance for the segment, enter the values
in the fields Upper and/or Lower Tolerance.
7 Click on OK to close the definition of the segment.
The segment is automatically added to the strategy list.
15-42 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Defining Curve Form Characteristics

For curves, too, you can define the features for tolerance in the
definition template of the curve (see ➤“Defining Tolerances for a
Curve” on page 15-26).
Curve Form is another feature you can use for measuring the curve.
This feature enables you to measure the shape of the entire curve or
individual curve segments.
The basics of defining Curve Form characteristics are common to the
other characteristics recognized by Calypso. If you are not familiar
with defining characteristics, refer to ➤“Defining Characteristics” on
page 6-7.
About the Curve Form Template

Whenever you define a Curve Form characteristic, the following
template is displayed.
To open the definition template:
– Select Form and Location → Curve Form.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-43

The following table describes the buttons and fields that are not
common to other characteristics:
Element Function
Curve jump tolerance The curve jump tolerance is checked when this check box is
activated. The curve jump tolerance indicates the amount by which
the curve form may deviate within a reference distance. It is
generally independent of the curve form tolerance.
In Calypso, the curve jump tolerance is always measured between
two neighboring points. The curve is out of tolerance if the
difference between the deviations of the two actual points from the
respective nominal point is greater than the specified value.
Deviation upper Shows the maximum deviation in the positive direction of the normal
vector (“too much material”).
Deviation lower Shows the maximum deviation in the negative direction of the
normal vector (“too little material”).
Range Shows the difference range between upper and lower deviation.
15-44 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Define Tolerance for Segments

Separately
After defining individual curve segments you can also assign them
separate tolerances with the curve form characteristic.
Proceed as follows:
1 Define a feature for the characteristic as you have done with other
characteristics.
When you have correctly defined the feature, the following chart
for the segments appears in the definition template of the
characteristic.
The chart contains all defined segments.

2 Select the desired segment by clicking into the left column of the
relevant line.
An arrow appears in this column.
3 In the same line, enter the tolerances in the Upper Tol. and/or
Lower Tol. fields.
4 Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the definition template is closed.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-45

Working with the Results of Curve

Measurement
After measurement, the actual values are displayed in the actuals
fields of the curve definition template. In contrast to most other
definition templates, the curve template enables you to perform
additional operations with the results.
You have the following options for evaluating measuring results:
– Calculation and display of deviations
– Optimization of coordinate system with best-fit alignment.
– Fit actual values to nominal values.
– Define or restrict the alignment.
– Determining a reference curve.
– Specifying search distances.
– Smoothing the curve display.
– Sorting the measured points.
– Excluding measured points from the evaluation.
– Eliminating outliers.
Basics about Curve Deviations

Deviation in Nominal Vector Direction
Deviation in nominal vector direction is measured in the direction of
the normal vector at each nominal point.
Deviation in Actual Vector Direction

Deviation in the actual vector direction is calculated from each actual
point along the normal of the corresponding nominal point on the
nominal curve.
Space Point Evaluation (2D Curves Only)

Calculating deviation with space point evaluation employs the curve
functionality to determine the point on the measured spline (before
radius adjustment) in the nominal vector direction.
The point obtained in this way is radius-adjusted in the same way as
the Space Point feature.
15-46 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Working with the Results of Curve Measurement
Deviation in Grid Coordinates (2D Curves only)

This deviation is the distance between the actual points and the
nominal points in grid direction, where the direction of the normal
vectors is defined.
Radial Deviation (2D Curves only)

The deviation is calculated in the radial direction towards a point of
reference of a reference element as the distance from the nominal
points.
Fn Fn
nominal curve Fn
actual curve
reference
measured point
curve
How to Calculate the Deviations of a Curve

The deviation between the measured and specified values for a curve
can be calculated in a number of ways (see ➤“Basics about Curve
Deviations” on page 15-46).
To calculate deviation:
2 Select the mode of calculation you want from the Nominal to
Actuals picklist.
Calculation will be carried out immediately if there already are actual
values. If not, calculation will commence as soon as actual values are
available.
How to Display Deviations

The actual values refer to the workpiece coordinate system. When
dealing with a curve, however, the deviation in the coordinates X,Y
and Z between the nominal and the actual values can be of greater
interest.
To obtain this deviation:
2 Activate the Deviation check box.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-47

The actual values on the right side of the definition template now
refer to the nominal data of the curve.
How to Optimize the Coordinate System

with Best-Fit Alignment
Inaccurate coordinate systems produce inaccurate measured values.
This, in turn, means incorrect form errors following a nominal/as-is
comparison. To eliminate this positional offset, Calypso automatically
performs best-fit for standard geometric features when it measures
form characteristics.
You have the option of defining automatic best-fit following every
measuring run. Calypso can also correct the current coordinate
system by applying the rotational and translational components of the
best-fit result.
To optimize measurement of form characteristics:
2 Click on the Evaluation picklist.
15-48 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Select Best Fit → Coordinate System from the picklist.

Calypso will create a coordinate system. You can see the Best Fit
window in which Calypso shows the translation and rotation of
the element coordinate system with reference to the part
alignment.
4 If you want to change the shown values, click in the relevant field
and enter the values of your choice.
5 Click on Accept to accept the local element coordinate system.
The Enter Name dialog box appears on the screen.
6 Enter a name for the local element coordinate system.
7 Click on OK to close the dialog box.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-49

How to Calculate the Curve's Center of Mass

With the center of mass the location of the curve is evaluated. The
coordinates of this point can be displayed.
To show the center of mass:
2 Click on the box in front of Center of mass to place a checkmark.
The coordinates of the center of mass are displayed in the nominals
and actuals fields in the middle of the template.
The center of mass is also displayed in the CAD window.
How to Obtain a Best Fit

What is understood as ”best fit” is the mathematical separation of
form and location. You may use best fit to make a mathematical
correction of the positive deviation referring to the applicable nominal
curve.
The actual values of the curve are shifted and/or rotated until the sum
of the deviation squares reaches a minimum (Gaussian best fit). This
operation leaves only the curve's form deviation.
To obtain a best fit:
2 Activate the Best Fit check box.
Calypso performs the fit, without changing the form.
All coordinate transformations are usually employed to fit the
measured curve to the nominal curve. You can restrict or specify the
fit if you want to exclude certain transformations (see ➤“How to
Define a Best-Fit Alignment of a Curve” on page 15-50).
How to Define a Best-Fit Alignment of a Curve

When you activate the Best Fit check box to have the curve aligned,
Calypso separates form deviations from positional deviations for the
purposes of computation. For this purpose, only the LSQ Best Fit (3D
alignment) is used.
15-50 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

You have several options to influence this alignment:

– You have the option of restricting the alignment for certain
movements: you can prevent translation toward or rotation about
axes of your choice.
This restriction applies to best fit of the measured curve to the
nominal curve and to best fit of a coordinate system.
– You can determine that certain points are not taken into account
during the alignment by masking them.
The masked points are also not shown in the representation in the
CAD window.
– For the alignment, the medium deviation between actual and
nominal is minimized. Here, every curve point is compared with a
calculated curve section (a section connects two neighboring
points). This can take a long time if the curve has a lot of sections.
Usually, it is quite sufficient to compare some sections near the
point. You can enter the size of the area that is to be considered.
To define the alignment:
2 Click on the Evaluation picklist and select the command Best Fit.
The Best Fit dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Under Translation and Rotation, deactivate the check boxes

where you do not want to permit the respective movement during
the alignment.
All the check boxes are activated by default.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-51

4 Under Masking points and under the list of points, click on the
button Use nominal data or Use actual data, to load the
required data into the list.
5 Under Masking points, click on the points which you wish to
mask and so which will not be taken into account during the
alignment. Another click will cancel the selection.
You can also click on the list of points with the right mouse button
and select a rule for the use of points:
NOTE If you have used the SHIFT or CTRL key for multiple selections, you can
hss
refresh the display in the CAD window by clicking on Update
graphic.
6 Under Max. Search Distance, enter the area to be considered in

the field For Best Fit in millimeters or click on Default, if you wish
to use the standard Calypso value.
This default is derived from the doubled sum of tolerance and
probe radius.
7 Click on OK to apply the definition.
The alignment of the coordinate system or of the curve feature into
the nominal feature is then only possible in the authorized directions,
with the specified points and in the entered search distance.
How to Define a Reference Curve

With Calypso you can add the deviation of a measured curve C1 (the
reference curve) to a curve C2. In this way you can determine the
second curve if the same curves reoccur in different places on the
workpiece.
To determine a reference curve:
1 Open the definition template of the curve to which the deviation
of a reference curve should be added.
15-52 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

2 Click on the Evaluation picklist and select the command Move

Parallelcurve.
You can see the window Reference Feature in which all defined
curves are listed.
3 Highlight the name of the curve you want to use as a reference

curve.
4 Click on the OK button.
Calypso will convert the deviation of the reference curve to the
current curve immediately.
How to Limit Search Distances during Curve

Evaluation
Distance evaluation Depending on the form of the curve, there may be several
intersection points between the splines and normals in the case of
distance evaluation. This may affect the computing time.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-53

To prevent this, you can define the maximum permissible length of

the distance from the actual pint to the curve.
1 In the definition template of the curve, click on the Evaluation
picklist and select the item Max. Search Distance.
A window opens in which you can see the maximum search
distance.
2 Under For Distance Evaluation, enter the maximum distance

which will presumably suffice in millimeters or click on Default, if
you wish to use the standard Calypso value.
3 Click OK to save your entry and close the dialog box.
The search distances are taken into account the next time the curve is
calculated.
Smoothing a Curve
In order to display a curve in a CAD window, Calypso lays spline
functions through the nominal points of the curve. As a result, all
nominal points will lie on the curve that is calculated in this manner.
In the case of some default values (e. g. when measured actual values
are used as nominal values) the presentation of the curve may well be
relatively “rough”. This can, if necessary, be smoothened.
While doing so, the spline functions are only set in the close proximity
of the points and do not actually pass through the individual points.
The degree of approximation or smoothing can be defined with a
number between 0 and 1: If 0 is selected, the splines nestle up to all
points so that no distinction can be made to other methods. 1, on the
other hand, will produce the maximum smoothening of the curve.
15-54 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)


picklist.
2 Select the item Approximation from the selection list.
The Approximation window for entering the approximation
parameter will be displayed.
3 Select whether you wish to smoothen the presentation of the

calculated curve or the nominal curve.
4 Activate the check box cnc if you wish all the curves in the
measurement plan that have been measured to date to be
smoothened in accordance with the entries below.
5 Enter a Smooth Factor between 0 and 1 by dragging the slider
with the mouse.
To check the result, click on the Simulation button – the result will
immediately be displayed in the CAD window.
6 If necessary, select a method for redefining the curve points under
Grid.
If you select Keep number of points, the number of points of the
default curve will also apply for the newly calculated curves.
The curve will be recalculated in accordance with your entries. The
new nominal curve will be determined on the basis of the calculated
values and displayed in the CAD window.
Caution
hss
! As soon as you confirm with OK, you will regenerate the nominal
points of the curve. The original curve can not be recreated again. For
this reason, it is important that you use the Simulation function to
check the result beforehand.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-55

Sorting the Points in a Curve

When scanning with a high point density or in positions which display
a high degree of curvature, it may well be that measured points are
not transferred in the right sequence. Normally, this is of no great
significance.
This is, however, significant when you are measuring curves as the
sequence of the points influence the form of the curve. Calypso
therefore, sorts the points in a meaningful manner.
On the other hand, there may also be curves that actually contain a
sharp “bend” and, consequently, should not be sorted: Sorting curves
such as these would alter the form of the curve in a manner not
required (see example).
For this reason, you can control sorting using an Angle limit. Here, an
angle is determined on the basis of the last three points that were
calculated (Points 1 to 3 in the example). The points will only be
sorted if the calculated angle is smaller than the angle limit.
Example: The run of a curve contains a bend.
2
Bend
in curve
1 3
Curv
The angle of this bend is less than 50°. If you set the limit to “50”,
point 2 will automatically be interchanged with point 3 although this
is not required here. The curve would then look as follows:
In this case, you will have to enter a limit that is less than the angle of
the bend, i.e. approx. 45°.
picklist.
15-56 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

2 Select the item Sort measured points from the selection list.
The Approximation window for entering the angle limit will be
displayed.
3 Enter the maximum angle that should be accepted or click on the

Default button to enter the Calypso default value.
If greater angles occur in the curve, the appropriate points will be
sorted.
4 Activate the check box cnc if you wish all the curves in the
measurement plan that have been measured to date to be
smoothened in accordance with the entries.
To check the result, click on the Simulation button – the result will
immediately be displayed in the CAD window.
The curve will be sorted in accordance with your entries. The new
nominal curve will be determined on the basis of the new sequence
and displayed in the CAD window.
Limiting the Evaluation of the Curve Values

The following problems can arise at the beginning and at the end of
the measuring path in the case of curve measurement and curve
evaluation:
– The controller will have to readjust to the correct nominal path.
– The calculation of the spline functions and the corresponding
vectors is difficult at the open ends of a curve: A slight deviation
here has a much greater effect here that in other positions.
To reduce the effects of these problems, you can limit the number of
points that should be used for the evaluation. A distinction must be
made here between basing the calculation on the nominal points on
the measuring spline or the measured points on the nominal spline:
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-57

– When evaluating in the nominal vector direction all measured

points will be considered. The limitation only applies to the
nominal points.
– When evaluating in the actual vector direction, all nominal points
will always be used. Here, the limitation only applies to the actual
points.
The number of considered points can be limited in the following
manner:
picklist.
2 Select the item Limit evaluation from the selection list.
The Limit evaluation window will appear.
3 Enter the number of points which should not be considered at the

start and at the end of the curve in the case of the nominal points
and the actual points.
During the evaluation, a correspondingly fewer number of points will
be considered at the start and at the end of the curve.
How to Eliminate Outliers from a Curve

Outliers are geometric points that differ significantly from the
geometric form yielded by the other measured points and as such,
they can produce a large error when the computed feature is
calculated. An error of this nature easily propagates through the
actual-value determination of the corresponding characteristic.
There are several different points at which you can parameterize and
activate outlier elimination for curves:
15-58 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

– As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and

alignment elements of the coordinate systems
– For an individual characteristic
– For an individual curve feature.
This is how to activate outlier elimination in a feature:
picklist.
2 Select the item Outlier from the selection list.
The Evaluation window will appear.
3 Activate the check box Outlier Elimination and click on the
Settings button.
4 In the Outlier Mode dialog box, enter the Factor for Outlier and
the Range of Data Reduction and confirm with OK.
5 Click OK to save your entry and close the Evaluation dialog box.
During the calculation, the outlier measuring values which fall under
the specified criteria are not taken into account.
How to Format the Printout for the Curve

Calypso enables you to map the curve exactly into your printout.
The procedure is as follows:
2 Adjust the curve in the CAD window until it is displayed exactly as
you want it in the printout.
Use the CAD buttons (see ➤“The Buttons in the CAD Window” on
page 3-4) and/or the commands in the CAD shortcut menu (see
➤“The Commands in the Shortcut Menu for Curves” on
page 15-31) to display the curve exactly as you want it in the
printout. When you are ready, click OK in the curve definition
template.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 15-59

Graphical Evaluation of Form Deviations for

Curves
The formplots available for the curve characteristic are as follows:
– Curve form linear
– Curve form 2D
– Multiple curve form linear
– Multi-Curve form 2D
You call up formplots and display them as described in the section
entitled ➤“How to Display Variations Graphically” on page 9-23.
The illustration below shows the Curve form 2D formplot by way of
example.
15-60 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Chapter
16
16 Qualifying the RDS with CAA
(Option)
.................................................................................................................................
If you have the RDS-CAA option (Computer Aided Accuracy), you can
determine the probe data for all angular positions of an RDS in a
single operation, using no more than a small number of probings.
Only a few angular settings are actually qualified physically. The data
for the other positions is derived using a mathematical model
(calculated qualification).
As a consequence, the qualification procedure is completed much
more quickly and all physically possible angular positions of the RDS
are subsequently available for probing the workpiece. Subsequent
requalification, too, is faster.
The RDS-CAA option is available for both Calypso and CMM-OS. The
procedure for both programs is described in this documentation.
Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Qualification of the RDS on the CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Qualifying Probes with RDS-CAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 16-1

Qualifying the RDS with CAA (Option)
Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification

Given the stepping adjustment of 2.5 degrees, a stylus on the RDS
can, in theory adopt 20,736 positions, but, depending on the device
geometry, not all of these are physically possible. Without RDS-CAA
each position is considered as an individual stylus, which must also be
qualified.
Conventional qualification has generally been restricted to qualifying
a subset of the RDS positions. Calypso/CMM-OS supports this
procedure for the RDS with a qualification table in which each of the
required positions is entered as a stylus with its own name.
If you use the RDS-CAA option, however, you can determine the
probe data for all possible angular positions of an RDS with just a
small number of probings. Only a few angular settings are actually
qualified physically: the values for the other positions are computed
using a mathematical model.
As a consequence, the qualification procedure is completed much
more quickly and all angular positions of the RDS are subsequently
available for probing the workpiece. Subsequent requalification, too,
is faster.
Three- or four-step Qualification is a three- or four-step procedure:
procedure
– Qualification of the RDS by Zeiss (factory qualification)
Factory qualification involves generating correction files for each
individual RDS: these files are a prerequisite for subsequent,
computed qualification. The correction files are installed on your
system together with the RDS-CAA option.
– Fitting qualification on the CMM
After the RDS is mounted on the CMM, this qualification
determines and saves the position of the RDS within the device's
coordinate system.
– Stylus qualification in twelve positions per main stylus (this is the
stylus in the direction of the quill).
Finally, the required probe and its stylus are inserted into the RDS
and qualified in a few positions. Calypso/CMM-OS then calculates
the correction values for all of the remaining positions.
If the probe has only one stylus, this completes qualification of the
RDS.
16-2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Basics of RDS-CAA Qualification
– Qualification of remaining styli on the probe (star probes)

If a probe carries multiple styli (star probe), each of the remaining
styli is then qualified in four positions.
Calypso/CMM-OS calculates the correction values for all the
positions of the remaining styli, and this completes qualification of
the RDS.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 16-3

Qualification of the RDS on the CMM

After the RDS is mounted on the CMM, this qualification must be
performed to determine its position in reference to the device's
coordinate system. This is a prerequisite for qualifying the scanning
probes and styli on the RDS.
This qualification need only be done once for the RDS. The probes
and styli used with the RDS can then each be qualified without
requalifying the installed RDS every time.
Establishing the Preconditions for

Your RDS has been qualified at the factory. In this case, the requisite
correction files for the RDS are available.
Reference sphere A further prerequisite is that the reference sphere is defined. Make
is defined sure that Calypso/CMM-OS knows the position of the reference
sphere and that the shaft of the sphere points in the direction of
45/45 angular position of the RDS.
– For a bridge CMM, this is the position with a 135° angle of
inclination and a 315° angle of rotation.
– For a horizontal-arm CMM it is the position with a 135° angle of
inclination and a 45° angle of rotation for column 1 and the
position with a 135° angle of inclination and a 315° angle of
rotation for column 2.
If one of the conditions is not met (if the reference sphere's shaft
points in a different direction or its position is not known), you must
requalify the reference sphere (see ➤“Determining the Reference
Sphere Position” on page 4-24).
The reference probe is Fitting qualification (RDS on CMM) must be performed with the
inserted reference probe. This must be an RST, without extension, with a 40
mm long stylus. (If your reference probe does not meet this
requirement, you must first make a reference probe of an RST,
without extension, with a 40 mm long stylus.)
Select Extras → Workroom → CMM, go to the Reference Probe
tab and make sure that all the requisite parameters have been set.
The procedure for installing the CMM's reference probe in the RDS is
described in ➤“How to Install a Probe” on page 4-11.
16-4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Perform Fitting Qualification

You must open a measurement plan before you start fitting
qualification in Calypso.
To perform fitting qualification:
1 In Calypso click on the Probe button in the prerequisites list.
- or -
In CMM-OS select Probe → Stylus Qualification.
screen. You will find detailed information on this dialog box in
Probe Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help.
2 If it is not already displayed, select the name of the reference probe
from the Probe name selection list.
The stylus name and No. (the reference probe possesses only one
stylus) are shown in the Stylus name / Number picklist. Under
Sphere coverage, 180° is selected.
3 From the Qualification Mode picklist, select Six Points.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 16-5

4 Click on the RDS Fitting Position button.

The label on this button changes, depending on the situation: the
default label is Probe definition.
5 After you are prompted, move the stylus in towards the reference
sphere and probe the sphere with the stylus perpendicular to the
contact point on the sphere. (If your stylus is vertical, therefore,
position it over the north pole of the sphere and probe once
vertically downwards.)
In accordance with the selected mode, Calypso/CMM-OS
automatically proceeds with qualification, performing probing
operations in 12 positions to determine to a high degree of
precision the fitted position of the RDS, which it then saves.
The results are displayed in the R, S, X, Y and Z fields.
6 Click on OK to return to the User Desk.
The position of the RDS has now been successfully determined and
you can begin with qualification of the individual styli.
16-6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Qualifying Probes with RDS-CAA

Even with the RDS-CAA option, the basic procedure for using probes
remains the same: When you create a measurement plan, you must
always make certain that you have installed the correct probe and
that it is qualified.
In qualifying a probe, you indicate which probe you are using and
then initiate a routine in which the probe measures the reference
sphere. (In Calypso the Probe button turns green, if this has already
been performed for the displayed probe.)
Only a few angular settings are actually qualified physically with RDS-
CAA, however: the values for all other positions are then computed
and are available for measurement.
General Information about Qualification

The probe must be qualified if:
– If you have installed a new probe that has not been qualified.
– If you want to requalify a probe that is already installed, for
example after a collision or due to thermal changes.
To qualify a stylus, instruct Calypso/CMM-OS to use this stylus to
probe the reference sphere, mounted on the measurement table, in a
special manner (which will be explained in greater detail later). With
RDS-CAA, the probe data will be determined automatically for all
angular positions of the RDS.
Defining Probes and Styli

In Calypso/CMM-OS, each probe and stylus is given its own name.
Styli are also assigned numbers. Calypso/CMM-OS uses the names
and numbers to identify the probe and stylus and when saving their
data.
Consequently, each stylus has to be defined. You cannot qualify the
angular positions of a stylus with RDS-CAA until the stylus has been
defined.
In most cases, a probe has only one stylus. Star probes, as the name
suggests, have more than one stylus.
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 16-7

How to Define a New Probe for RDS-CAA

To define a new probe:
- or -
The Qualification dialog box appears on the screen. You will find
detailed information on this dialog box in Probe Qualification
Window in the Calypso Online Help.
2 Click on the Define New Probe Name button.
The Create new Stylus dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Enter the names for the new probe and the first stylus.
Calypso does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase
characters.
4 Tick the RDSCAA check box.
The name of the probe and the first stylus are displayed in the Probe
name and Stylus name / Number picklists.
If the probe has other styli, you now have to add them in Calypso (see
➤“How to Add Styli to a Probe” on page 16-8).
How to Add Styli to a Probe

If a probe has more than one stylus, Calypso/CMM-OS must be
informed of the other styli. After defining a new probe or modifying
an existing probe, therefore, you must add the additional styli, if any,
and qualify them.
16-8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

To add a stylus:
- or -
The Qualification dialog box appears on the screen. You will find
detailed information on this dialog box in Probe Qualification
Window in the Calypso Online Help.
2 Click on the Define New Probe Name button.
The Create new Stylus window will open.
Under Stylus Number, the next higher number will be displayed

automatically.
3 Enter a name for the new stylus in the Stylus field.
Calypso does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase
characters.
4 In the Stylus Number field select the number of the stylus.
The name of the stylus will now appear in the selection list Stylus
name / Number.
6 If you wish to add another stylus, repeat steps 2 through 5.
The next step is to qualify each stylus in turn (see ➤“Qualifying Probes
and Styli with RDS-CAA” on page 16-10), and bear in mind that you
must proceed in a certain sequence: beginning with the first stylus
(the main stylus), and then continuing with the other (star styli).
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 16-9

Qualifying Probes and Styli with RDS-CAA

Qualification of a probe's first stylus is not the same as qualification of
the probe's other styli, if any.
– The first (and possibly the only) stylus is qualified in 12 physical
angular positions.
NOTE The direction of this stylus must match the direction of the quill.
hss
– Each additional stylus for this probe is qualified in four physical
angular positions.
How to Qualify the First Stylus with RDS-CAA

We assume that the probe to be qualified is mounted and that all of
its styli are known to Calypso/CMM-OS.
To qualify the first stylus (the main stylus, parallel to the quill) of a
probe with RDS-CAA:
– or –
screen. You will find detailed information on this dialog box in
Probe Qualification Window in the Calypso Online Help.
2 Select the name of the probe from the Probe name picklist if it is
not already shown.
16-10 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

3 Select the name of the stylus to be qualified first from the Stylus
In the Qualification mode picklist, select the Standard mode.
4 If the styli you use are very short, reduce the value for Taper
accordingly.
The smaller the taper, the smaller is the section of the surface of
the sphere which is probed for qualification.
5 Click on the Probe definition button.
Stylus qualification now begins using the 12 angular positions set
by RDS-CAA. To start the process you must perform the first
probing manually.
6 When prompted, move the stylus in the RDS 0/0 position over the
north pole of the reference sphere and then probe the sphere with
the stylus perpendicular to the contact point on the sphere.
Calypso checks the position of the reference sphere and the length
of the stylus (roughly). Afterwards the 12 positions are
automatically selected and qualified.
The value entered in “Sphere coverage” is taken into account as a
maximum value in the selection of the positions and probing
operations.
The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y and Z fields (see ➤“About
the Results of Stylus Qualification” on page 4-24).
Under the heading Qualification results, you will now see the
symbol for a successful stylus qualification and below that the
identifier “RDS-CAA”.
How to Qualify Additional Styli with RDS-CAA

If you want to qualify other styli for this probe (as is the case with star
probes), you can do so immediately after qualifying the main stylus.
Each additional stylus is measured in four RDS positions in order to
achieve the best possible precision. Each of these measurements can
either be performed manually or semiautomatically.
Requirement: The Probe Qualification dialog box is open and the first
stylus of the probe has already been qualified.
To qualify the other styli of a probe with RDS-CAA:
1 Select the name of the stylus to be qualified next from the Stylus
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) 16-11

2 Click on the Probe definition button.

This is not the main stylus, so the dialog box shown here is
displayed:
3 Select one of two RDS positions under RDS Position (1 to 4).

4 If you wish to estimate which position is more suitable: Click on
the Show button.
The RDS rotates to the corresponding position.
5 Select the probing mode under Mode:
• Standard – semiautomatic qualification: first probing is
manual, all others automatic,
• Manual – manual qualification.
6 Click on OK to start qualification.
Calypso/CMM-OS steps you through the rest of the procedure.
7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each additional stylus.
8 Click on OK to confirm your entries and close the Probe
Qualification dialog.
NOTE If you do not confirm by clicking on the OK button, all unsaved data
hss from the stylus qualification is lost. It is advisable to close the Probe
Qualification dialog box from time to time during the process by
clicking on OK, so as to save intermediate states.
Calypso/CMM-OS returns to the User Desk. The styli have been

successfully qualified.
In Calypso the Probe button is now green.
Qualification log Calypso/CMM-OS generates a log, which you can either print out or
save as an ASCII file.
The probe and its styli that were qualified together with the RDS can
now be used by every user in every RDS position.
16-12 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Index
0-9 selecting a measuring configuration
12-25
3D best fit 4-53
user privileges 12-6
3D curve 5-29
average 6-38
average value construction 5-56
A axial runout 6-40
add
styli 4-15 B
addToFile 14-54
base alignment
administrate
adapting in an iterative process with
Auto-Run 12-20
abortion condition (example) 4-
alignment
39
3D best fit 4-53
basics 4-31
delete 6-14
create new 4-34
load 6-13
editing 4-41
save 6-13
loading 4-33
angle 6-40
moving 4-43
angle of tilt 6-37
offsetting 4-43
angle point 5-35
rotating by distances 4-45
angularity 6-40
setting 4-30
area specification, recall points 5-41
updating 4-37
arithmetic operators (reference) 14-49
baseSystem 14-57
arrays 14-48
basic concept 1-7
ASCII files (curve) 9-29
basics
ASCII parameter file (example) 14-46
Auto-Run 12-2
asynchronous mode 10-2
characteristics 6-2
audiovisual information 7-51
clearance planes/clearance groups 7-
automatic measurement 5-68
23
automatic probe change 7-49
computed alignment 4-31
Auto-Run
curve measurement 15-2
administrating 12-20
probe routes 7-22
basics 12-2
probing 5-15
branches 12-5
retract planes 7-25
CNC parameters 12-17
Best Fit
configuring 12-6
3D best fit (alignment) 4-53
creating branches 12-12
best fit
define list of characteristics 12-26
as circumscribed/inscribed feature 6-
defining desks 12-9
5
defining sequence 12-19
as tangential feature 6-5
desks 12-4
Gaussian 6-5
end of measurement 12-27
Tschebyscheff 6-5
for users 12-23
best fit of bore pattern 6-43
loading interface 12-24
bore pattern best fit 6-43
mapping pallet 12-12
measurement plan icon 12-3
monitoring measuring runs 12-27 C
pallets 12-5 CAD file, importing 5-6
placing bitmaps on icons 12-11 CAD window 3-1
positioning measurement plan 12-10 Calypso
preparing for measurement 12-17 starting 1-3
61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Index 1

Calypso User Desk 1-5 polar 2D 6-40
canceling polarposition angle 6-36
measurement plan run 8-13 polarposition height 6-36
Cartesian 6-40 polarposition radius 6-36
change position 6-39
probe assignment 7-50 profile 6-39
changing projection angle one 6-36
point list 5-64 projection angle two 6-37
changing the point list 5-64 radial runout 6-40
characteristic radius 6-36
copying properties 6-33 radius 2 6-38
characteristic data radius measurement 6-36
constant 9-36 rotation angle 6-37
characteristic, details roundness 6-38
angle of tilt 6-37 space point distance 6-37
characteristics squareness 6-39
assigning to multiple features 6-18 straightness 6-38
basics 6-2 symmetry 6-39
best fit methods 6-3 width 6-38
calculation 6-3 X value 6-35
color-coding 6-33 Y value 6-35
copying 7-8 Z value 6-35
defining 6-7 characteristics, tasks, details on 6-35
definition templates 6-8 characterization file 13-3
deleting 7-11 checking wall thickness 6-42
grouping 7-13 circle 5-17
moving 7-8 clearance distance 7-31
nominals 6-19 copying to other features 5-12
rechecking (example) 14-38 clearance groups
renaming 7-13 assigning 7-28
searching 7-14 defining 7-26
tolerances 6-19 retract plane in 7-30
ungrouping 7-13 clearance plane
characteristics, details copying to other features 5-12
angle 6-40 clearance planes 1-8
angularity 6-40 assigning 7-28
average 6-38 closer to workpiece 7-31
axial runout 6-40 clearing after collision 8-13
cartesian 6-40 clearing the CMM 8-13
coaxiality 6-39 CMM movement commands (PCM) 14-58
concentricity 6-39 CNC
cone angle 6-37 run structure 14-7
curve form 6-39 starting run 8-8
cylinder form 6-38 CNC parameters
diameter 6-35 Auto-Run 12-17
diameter2 6-38 cncBreak 14-59
distance 6-37 coaxiality 6-39
distance_symmetry point 6-37 collision
feature angle 6-37 reaction following ~ 8-13
flatness 6-38 special aspects with RDS 8-13
form 6-39 color coding
half cone angle 6-37 Prerequisites 4-6
length 6-38 color-coding
length of axis 6-36 characteristics 6-33
parallelism 6-39 features 5-13
Index 2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

compact printout 9-3 spatial curves 15-3
compact protocol 9-5 curve measuring
comparative operators (reference) 14-49 changing normal vectors 15-21
computed alignment checking clearance planes 15-25
basics 4-31 defining nominal data 15-7
concentricity 6-39 defining the curve feature 15-5
conditions deviation in actual vector direction
reference 14-60, 14-61 15-46
setting 14-19 deviation in grid coordinates 15-47
cone 5-27 deviation in nominal vector direction
cone addition (construction) 5-57 15-46
cone addition construction 5-57 deviation lower 15-44
cone angle 6-37 deviation upper 15-44
cone angle, half 6-37 digitizing 15-10
configure digitizing 3D curve in area 15-15
Auto-Run 12-6 digitizing 3D curves 15-14
constant characteristic data 9-36 editing nominals 15-22
construction entering nominal data manually 15-
edge point 5-56 19
maximum coordinate 5-59 face curve, definition 15-3
maximum result 5-59 formatting printout 15-59
minimum coordinate 5-59 import ASCII file 15-7
minimum result 5-60 importing nominal data from file 15-
plane with offset 5-60 8
constructions 5-39 lift curve,definition 15-3
intersection 5-42 load VDA file selectively 15-9
coordinate system measuring strategy 15-33
copying to other features 5-12 normal vectors, changing 15-21
parameterizing (example) 14-40 outliers 15-58
setting 4-30 point list 15-34
copy radial deviation 15-47
characteristics 6-18, 7-8 range 15-44
feature 7-8 scanning 15-38
icon 12-22 segments 15-39
measurement plans 7-3 shortcut menu 15-31
result file 9-31 using CAD model 15-31
copying ISO286 6-32 curve measuring, results 15-46
copying lower tolerance 6-32 best fit 15-50
copying tolerance class 6-32 calculating deviation 15-47
copying upper tolerance 6-32 center of mass 15-50
coupling measuring ranges (duplex deviation 15-47
mode) 10-5 custom header
current selection 8-2 PCM commands 14-59
curve 5-29 custom printout 9-4
~ characteristic, defining 15-43 automatic fields 9-8
defining using function (example) 14- customizing 9-7
38 defining printout output 9-9
loading parameters (example) 14-37 global dummies 9-8
curve (3D) 5-29 local dummies 9-8
curve form 6-39 result presentation 9-8
curve jump tolerance 15-44 structure 9-7
curve measurement 15-1 cylinder 5-25
3D curve 15-3 cylinder form 6-38
basics 15-2
flat curves 15-2

D function keys 2-2
keyboard 2-2
date 14-58
operating 2-5
dateAndTime 14-58
touchpad 2-2
default printout 9-2, 9-4
define
clearance groups 7-26 E
desks 12-9 edit
nominal data for curve 15-7 probe routes 7-22
printout output 9-9 ellipse 5-30
defining enter
characteristics 6-1 nominals 6-19
features 5-1 tolerances 6-19
probes 4-14 erosion module 6-11
defining inside 5-15 error report 11-8
defining outside 5-15 evaluation settings
defining printout output 9-9 copying to other features 5-12
defining the master probe length 7-39
delete
desk 12-21
F
icons 12-22 feature angle 6-37
toolboxes 7-17 feature data
deleteFile 14-54 variable 9-37
deleting features 1-7
characteristics 7-11 3D curve 5-29
features 7-11 adding 7-7
measurement plans 7-4 angle point 5-35
part alignment 4-52 circle 5-17
desk color-coding 5-13
deleting 12-21 cone 5-27
renaming 12-21 copying 7-8
desks curve 5-29
adding measurement plans 12-9 cylinder 5-25
diameter 6-35 deleting 7-11
diameter2 6-38 details 5-15
digitizing ellipse 5-30
3D curve in area 15-15 general curve 5-37
distance 6-37 general surface 5-36
distance_symmetry point 6-37 in loops 14-24
DMIS commands line, 2d 5-22
supported 13-2 line, 3D 5-24
DMIS files 9-29 measuring individually 8-4
DMIS import moving 7-8
configuring 13-6 offset plane 5-32
reports 13-11 plane 5-20
run 13-8 point 5-16
DMIS measurement plans radius point 5-34
basics 13-2 recall of 5-40
dummies rectangle 5-32
global 9-8 renaming 7-13
local 9-8 searching 7-14
duplex mode, basics 10-1 slot 5-31
dynalog sphere 5-28
configuring 2-3 sphere point 5-34
control panel 2-2 symmetry point 5-33
display 2-2

features, defining 5-2 horizontal arm CMMs
features,defining combining measurement plans 7-4
from CAD file 5-6
using feature recognition 5-5 I
using templates 5-4
icon
field (array)
copying 12-22
using loops (example) 14-42
deleting 12-22
file commands (reference) 14-54
icons
filter
labeling with bitmaps 12-11
activating 6-29
icons list 1-5
fit methods 6-3
import
flatness 6-38
files for curve 15-8
form 6-39
measurement plan from DMIS 13-1
form plot 9-23
import DXF files 15-8
formula
import PAB files 15-8
definition 14-10
import VDA files 15-8
formulas
importing
entering 14-17
CAD data 5-6
functions and operators 14-11
importing ASCII file for curve 15-7
functions (PCM)
input/output commands (reference) 14-
character chains~ (reference) 14-51
52
introduction 14-10
input/output parameters 14-29
mathematical (reference) 14-49
inquire 14-53
measurement-specific 14-55
inquireList 14-53
inquireNumber 14-52
G inquireText 14-52
gage correction qualification 5-18 installation
GDT profile Calypso, program version 11-3
basics 6-40 service pack 11-5
Gear 5-60 installing probes 4-11
general curve 5-37 interrupting
general surface 5-36 measurement plan run 8-13
getActual 14-55 intersection 5-42
getActualInspectionDir 14-54 introduction 1-1
getNominal 14-56
getProbe 14-56 L
getRecordHead 14-57
least-material condition 6-22
getWD 14-54
length 6-38
group
length of axis 6-36
creating 7-13
lift curve
grouping
demarking 15-6
ungrouping 7-13
marking 15-6
groups
line, 2d 5-22
forming 8-3
line, 3D 5-24
renaming 7-13
list of characteristics
defining for Auto-Run 12-26
H LMC 6-22
Holos 5-60 load interface
homing the CMM 4-8 Auto-Run 12-24
horizontal arm CMM loading PCM file
in duplex mode 10-1 using dialog (example) 14-40
loading VDA file selectively 15-9

loops managing 7-2
alignment according to RPS 14-26 mirroring 7-9
features in ~ 14-24 multimedia information 7-51
for multiple measurements 14-27 opening 4-4
inserting 14-22 renaming 7-2
linear offset (example) 14-41 running 8-2
nest level 14-26 saving 7-2
nested 14-26 variable 14-4
nested for field (example) 14-42 with variant control (example) 14-44
measurement results
M copying result file 9-31
printing 9-6
main menu options 1-5
save as ASCII file 9-29
manual probe change 4-11
save as DMIS 9-29
manual run
save as PROVACS I 9-29
starting 8-9
save as PROVACS II 9-29
master measurement plan, horizontal arm
save as QDAS 9-29
CMMs 7-4
save in merge file 9-29
MCR20
save in table file 9-29
defining holder positions 7-44
saving 9-29
particularities 7-33
measurement strategy 5-62
measure
copying to other features 5-12
automatically 5-68
measurement, preparing
measurement
Auto-Run 12-17
ending, Auto-Run 12-27
measuring configuration, selecting
running 8-2
Auto-Run 12-25
starting 8-7
measuring curves
measurement plan
jump tolerance 15-29
basics 4-2
measuring tolerance 15-26
editing 7-19
measuring linear offset via loop (example)
import from DMIS 13-1
14-41
monitoring run 8-11
measuring runs, monitoring
starting CNC run 8-8
Auto-Run 12-27
starting manual run 8-9
merge file 9-29
viewing 7-52
message 14-53
measurement plan area 1-5
MMC 6-22
measurement plan editor
monitoring
features 4-80
measurement plan run 8-11
measurement plan features
most-material condition 6-22
search 7-14
mouse with 2 or 3 buttons 14-64
measurement plan group
movement commands (PCM) 14-58
forming 8-3
multimedia in measurement plans 7-51
measurement plan run
multiple measurements with loops 14-27
canceling 8-13
interrupting 8-13
restarting 8-14 N
measurement plan settings 4-78 nest level in loops 14-26
Measurement plans net point 5-17
open 4-4 nominal 6-32
measurement plans 1-7 nominals
combining (HAM) 7-4 defining 6-19
copying 7-3 normal vectors, checking 15-24
creating 4-3 notational conventions 5
deleting 7-4
editing 7-6
integrating user information 7-51

O polar 2D 6-40
polar 3D 6-40
offset plane 5-32
polarposition angle 6-36
open
polarposition height 6-36
measurement plan 4-4
polarposition radius 6-36
opening
position 6-39
Measurement Plan 4-4
positionCMM 14-58
output commands (reference) 14-52
prerequisites
output parameters 14-29
color coding 4-6
rotary table 4-58
P prerequisites, list of 4-5
P6 alignment 4-54 presentationOff 14-59
pallet presentationOn 14-59
mapping 12-12 print 14-53
parallelism 6-39 results of measurement 9-6
parameters printout header data
ASCII file (example) 14-46 entering 8-5
definition 14-9 global 8-5
functions and operators 14-11 local 8-6
input and output parameters 14-29 printout header fields
loading 14-17 defining your own 9-17
loading values into curve (example) printout/protocol
14-37 text output 6-12
saving 14-16 probe
part alignment 1-8 adding styli 4-15
basics 4-31 copying to other features 5-12
create new 4-34 probe changer
deleting 4-52 adding holders 7-40
loading 4-33 assigning probes 7-48
rotate distance 4-49 automatic probe change 7-49
rotating 4-44 changing probe assignments 7-50
rotating by distances 4-45 defining holder positions 7-43
setting 4-30 for RDS 7-36
part alignment systems, basics 4-31 particularities, MCR20 7-33
parts data 9-35 particularities, SCR200 7-34
parts family, measuring (example) 14-44 setting approach parameters 7-41
path generation setting up 7-38
circle 5-71 probe routes
cone 5-71 basics 7-22
cylinder 5-71 editing 7-22
lines 5-76 probes
measuring range 5-73 defining 4-14
planes 5-73, 5-75 preparing 4-13
PCM qualifying for RDS with RDS-CAA 16-
debugging and testing 14-63 1
programming 14-12 profile 6-39
syntax (reference) 14-47 projection angle one 6-36
testing printout 14-32 projection angle two 6-37
variables (reference) 14-48 projection plane
plane 5-20 copying to other features 5-12
plane point 5-16 PROVACS 9-32
point 5-16 PROVACS I files 9-29
point generator 14-30 PROVACS II files 9-29

Q measurement 8-2
measurement plan 8-2
QDAS description file 9-32
running a measurement plan 8-2
QDAS files 9-29
header data for printout 8-5
QDAS format 9-32
QDAS values file 9-33
QDASCONV.CON 9-34 S
QDASCONV.EXE 9-32 save
qs-STAT 9-32 measurement plans 7-2
measurement results 9-29
R parameters 14-16
scanning 5-68
radial runout 6-40
curve 15-38
radius 6-36
general settings 5-70
radius 2 6-38
scope of measurement
radius measurement 6-36
forming group 8-3
radius point 5-34
individual features 8-4
RDS
SCR200
after collision 8-13
defining holder positions 7-46
creating stylus list 4-16
particularities 7-34
defining geometry 7-36
searchDistance 14-58
loading a stylus list 4-20
searching
qualifying with CAA 16-1
characteristics 7-14
recall 5-40
features 7-14
recall points with area specification 5-41
selecting coupling method (duplex
rectangle 5-32
operation) 10-5
reference sphere
self-centering probing 5-66
determining 4-24
service pack
rename
decompress 11-5
characteristics 7-13
installing 11-5
desk 12-21
set up
features 7-13
probe changer 7-38
groups 7-13
setRecordHead 14-57
renaming
settings editor 7-19
measurement plans 7-2
shape of zone 6-41
stylus 4-16
shortcut menus 7-6
restart
slot 5-31
space point 5-17
result presentation 9-8
space point distance 6-37
results
special feature
printing 9-6
GEAR 5-60
retract distance
HOLOS 5-60
sphere 5-28
retract plane 7-30
sphere point 5-34
rotary table definition 4-58
squareness 6-39
rotate distance 4-49
start
rotation angle 6-37
manual run 8-9
rotation in plane 4-31
start alignment
rotation in space 4-31
basics 4-32
roundness 6-38
create new 4-34
routes
loading 4-33
checking 7-25
start measurement
RPS alignment 4-53
manual run 8-9
with loop 14-26
starting
run
Calypso 1-3
individual features 8-4
CNC run 8-8

starting a measurement plan 8-7 two-button mouse 14-64
statistics program 9-32 types of bracket in loops 14-26
stop light window
canceling a measurement plan run 8- U
13
user desk
interrupting a measurement plan run
CAD symbols 1-6
8-13
CAD window 1-6
stopping
icons list 1-5
measurement plan area 1-5
straightness 6-38
menu bar 1-5
styli
user information
preparing 4-13
integrating 7-51
stylus
user privileges
adding 4-15
Auto-Run 12-6
using distance check 6-42
creating list for RDS 4-16
utilities
renaming 4-16
erosion module 6-11
symbols 6
stylus qualification 6-10
symmetry 6-39
textelement 6-12
symmetry point 5-33
synchronous mode 10-2
system requirements 11-2 V
systemCall 14-59 variable feature data 9-37
systemCallWithWait 14-59 variables
definition 14-9
T reference 14-48
variant control (example) 14-44
temperature compensation
configuring 4-88
general 4-81 W
textelement 6-12 width 6-38
three-button mouse 14-64 window
TOL/PROFS 6-40 CAD window 3-1
tolerances with alternative (example) 14-34
defining custom 6-24
entering 6-19
file with custom 6-25
X
LMC 6-22 X value 6-35
MMC 6-22
toolboxes 7-15 Y
creating 7-16 Y value 6-35
deleting 7-17
moving 7-17
sizing 7-17 Z
true position Z value 6-35
best fit of bore pattern 6-43


Calypso C M M Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Calypso C M M Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CALYPSO

Carl Zeiss CALYPSO User’s Guide

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Preface

Preface 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Preface

Preface 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

How to Start Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

The Calypso User Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Important terms in Calypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Measurement plan-oriented Measuring with Calypso . . . 1-9

Chapter 2 The Dynalog Control Panel

How to Configure Calypso for Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Operating Calypso via Dynalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Chapter 3 Working with the CAD Window

The Buttons in the CAD Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Chapter 4 Preparing the Measurement Plan

The List of Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Contents 1

Installing and Qualifying Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Setting the Base / Start Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Prerequisites for the Rotary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Defining the Clearance Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Contents 2 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Edit Measurement Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Editing the Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Chapter 5 Defining Features

Details on Specific Part Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Contents 3

Linking Features in Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Defining a Measurement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Path Generation – Automatically Measuring Features . . 5-68

Contents 4 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Calculation of Geometric Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defining Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Details on Specific Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

Chapter 7 Editing the Measurement Plan

The Toolboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Contents 5

Editing a Measurement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Editing the Probe Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Using the Probe Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Multimedia User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Contents 6 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Entering Printout Header Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Starting a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Monitoring Measurement Plan Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Chapter 9 Viewing, Presenting and Editing

Set up Custom Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

How to Display Variations Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Saving Measurement Results to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Converting Measurement results for qs-STAT . . . . . . . . 9-32

61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5) Contents 7

Preparing the Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Using Duplex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Chapter 11 Managing Calypso

Installing a Service Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

If a Software Error Occurs – the Error Report . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Chapter 12 The Auto-Run Interface

Auto-Run for System Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Contents 8 61212-2010102 Calypso (Rev. 3.5)

Auto-Run for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23